Partners of the worldwide T.E.A. Group
We are pleased to present this 4th edition of our T.E.A. Product Range of engineering components catalogue 2015. New products have been added to our range, and specifications have been updated. Although this catalogue contains comprehensive specifications on most of our product range, further data is available via our web site www.tea.net.au and on our current CD, and of course, you can always contact our friendly T.E.A. team for additional faxed or emailed pages. T.E.A. takes pride in offering our customers an efficient and reliable service, from prompt attention to enquiries, quick quotations and same day despatch when possible. We look forward to being of good service to you.
The purchaser acknowledges that it is selecting the product and/or system choices for its particular application, and is relying on its own expertise and not the expertise of T.E.A. Transmissions in making such selections. Technical advice or review provided by T.E.A. Transmissions with respect to the use of T.E.A. Transmissions products is given in good faith and without charge, and T.E.A. Transmissions assumes no obligation of liability for the advice given. Advice provided is to be accepted at the customer's risk. All care has been taken in the compilation of these pages, however, errors may occur. Please do not use the information contained herein for critical applications without first re-checking the information with your own engineering department. No responsibility will be accepted by T.E.A. Transmissions or the directors of the said company for any loss of any kind that may be incurred in anyway whatsoever from the use of the information provided in these pages. ABN - 51003173920
0
1
5
6
228 Timing Belts & Pulleys 229
.230-231
Permanent Magnetic, Double Loop, Trasco, Bellows, Helix, Oldham, Unilat, Multibeam, Slip Clutches.......232-254
Titanium Grade 2, round bar, metric and imperial diameters...................................................................................277
304
Metric Spur Gears Module 1 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel
AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045
15
tu
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 d p
q
q
q
25
Module 1
t
t
Pitch 3.1416 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
TEA 1012 TEA 1013 TEA 1014 TEA 1015
12 13 14 15
5 5 5 6
9 10 10 12
14 15 16 17
12 13 14 15
TEA 1044 TEA 1045 TEA 1046 TEA 1047
44 45 46 47
10 10 10 10
30 30 30 30
46 47 48 49
44 45 46 47
TEA 1016 TEA 1017 TEA 1018 TEA 1019
16 17 18 19
6 8 8 8
13 14 15 15
18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19
TEA 1048 TEA 1049 TEA 1050 TEA 1051
48 49 50 51
10 10 12 12
30 30 30 40
50 51 52 53
48 49 50 51
TEA 1020 TEA 1021 TEA 1022 TEA 1023
20 21 22 23
8 8 8 8
16 16 18 18
22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23
TEA 1052 TEA 1053 TEA 1054 TEA 1055
52 53 54 55
12 12 12 12
40 40 40 40
54 55 56 57
52 53 54 55
TEA 1024 TEA 1025 TEA 1026 TEA 1027
24 25 26 27
8 8 8 8
20 20 20 20
26 27 28 29
24 25 26 27
TEA 1056 TEA 1057 TEA 1058 TEA 1059
56 57 58 59
12 12 12 12
40 40 40 40
58 59 60 61
56 57 58 59
TEA 1028 TEA 1029 TEA 1030 TEA 1031
28 29 30 31
8 8 8 10
20 20 20 25
30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31
TEA 1060 TEA 1061 TEA 1062 TEA 1063
60 61 62 63
12 12 12 12
40 50 50 50
62 63 64 65
60 61 62 63
TEA 1032 TEA 1033 TEA 1034 TEA 1035
32 33 34 35
10 10 10 10
25 25 25 25
34 35 36 37
32 33 34 35
TEA 1064 TEA 1065 TEA 1066 TEA 1067
64 65 66 67
12 12 12 12
50 50 50 50
66 67 68 69
64 65 66 67
TEA 1036 TEA 1037 TEA 1038 TEA 1039
36 37 38 39
10 10 10 10
25 25 25 25
38 39 40 41
36 37 38 39
TEA 1068 TEA 1069 TEA 1070
68 69 70
12 12 12
50 50 50
70 71 72
68 69 70
TEA 1040 TEA 1041 TEA 1042 TEA 1043
40 41 42 43
10 10 10 10
25 30 30 30
42 43 44 45
40 41 42 43
Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available on request. - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Metric Spur Gears Module 1.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel
AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045
17
tu
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 d p
q
q
q
30
Module 1.5
t
t
Pitch 4.7124 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
TEA 1512 TEA 1513 TEA 1514 TEA 1515
12 13 14 15
8 8 8 8
14 14 18 18
21.0 22.5 24.0 25.5
18.0 19.5 21.0 22.5
TEA 1544 TEA 1545 TEA 1546 TEA 1547
44 45 46 47
14 14 14 14
50 50 50 50
69.0 70.5 72.0 73.5
66.0 67.5 69.0 70.5
TEA 1516 TEA 1517 TEA 1518 TEA 1519
16 17 18 19
8 8 8 8
20 20 20 20
27.0 28.5 30.0 31.5
24.0 25.5 27.0 28.5
TEA 1548 TEA 1549 TEA 1550 TEA 1551
48 49 50 51
14 14 14 15
50 50 50 60
75.0 76.5 78.0 79.5
72.0 73.5 75.0 76.5
TEA 1520 TEA 1521 TEA 1522 TEA 1523
20 21 22 23
8 10 10 10
25 25 25 25
33.0 34.5 36.0 37.5
30.0 31.5 33.0 34.5
TEA 1552 TEA 1553 TEA 1554 TEA 1555
52 53 54 55
15 15 15 15
60 60 60 60
81.0 82.5 84.0 85.5
78.0 79.5 81.0 82.5
TEA 1524 TEA 1525 TEA 1526 TEA 1527
24 25 26 27
10 10 12 12
25 25 30 30
39.0 40.5 42.0 43.5
36.0 37.5 39.0 40.5
TEA 1556 TEA 1557 TEA 1558 TEA 1559
56 57 58 59
15 15 15 15
60 60 60 60
87.0 88.5 90.0 91.5
84.0 85.5 87.0 88.5
TEA 1528 TEA 1529 TEA 1530 TEA 1531
28 29 30 31
12 12 12 12
30 30 30 35
45.0 46.5 48.0 49.5
42.0 43.5 45.0 46.5
TEA 1560 TEA 1561 TEA 1562 TEA 1563
60 61 62 63
15 20 20 20
60 70 70 70
93.0 94.5 96.0 97.5
90.0 91.5 93.0 94.5
TEA 1532 TEA 1533 TEA 1534 TEA 1535
32 33 34 35
12 12 12 12
35 35 35 35
51.0 52.5 54.0 55.5
48.0 49.5 51.0 52.5
TEA 1564 TEA 1565 TEA 1566 TEA 1567
64 65 66 67
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 70
99.0 100.5 102.0 103.5
96.0 97.5 99.0 100.5
TEA 1536 TEA 1537 TEA 1538 TEA 1539
36 37 38 39
12 12 12 12
35 40 40 40
57.0 58.5 60.0 61.5
54.0 55.5 57.0 58.5
TEA 1568 TEA 1569 TEA 1570
68 69 70
20 20 20
70 70 70
105.0 106.5 108.0
102.0 103.5 105.0
TEA 1540 TEA 1541 TEA 1542 TEA 1543
40 41 42 43
12 14 14 14
40 40 50 50
63.0 64.5 66.0 67.5
60.0 61.5 63.0 64.5
Larger gears are available as hubless version, please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
2
Metric Spur Gears Module 2 Pressure Angle 20째
Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045
20
tu
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 d p
q
q
q
35
Module 2
t
t
Pitch 6.2832 Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
24 26 28 30
TEA 2044 TEA 2045 TEA 2046 TEA 2047
44 45 46 47
16 16 16 16
60 60 60 60
92 94 96 98
88 90 92 94
36 38 40 42
32 34 36 38
TEA 2048 TEA 2049 TEA 2050 TEA 2051
48 49 50 51
16 16 16 20
70 70 70 70
100 102 104 106
96 98 100 102
30 30 30 30
44 46 48 50
40 42 44 46
TEA 2052 TEA 2053 TEA 2054 TEA 2055
52 53 54 55
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 70
108 110 112 114
104 106 108 110
12 12 12 12
35 35 40 40
52 54 56 58
48 50 52 54
TEA 2056 TEA 2057 TEA 2058 TEA 2059
56 57 58 59
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 70
116 118 120 122
112 114 116 118
28 29 30 31
12 14 14 14
40 40 40 45
60 62 64 66
56 58 60 62
TEA 2060 TEA 2061 TEA 2062 TEA 2063
60 61 62 63
20 20 20 20
70 80 80 80
124 126 128 130
120 122 124 126
TEA 2032 TEA 2033 TEA 2034 TEA 2035
32 33 34 35
14 14 14 14
45 45 45 45
68 70 72 74
64 66 68 70
TEA 2064 TEA 2065 TEA 2066 TEA 2067
64 65 66 67
20 20 20 20
80 80 80 80
132 134 136 138
128 130 132 134
TEA 2036 TEA 2037 TEA 2038 TEA 2039
36 37 38 39
14 14 14 14
45 50 50 50
76 78 80 82
72 74 76 78
TEA 2068 TEA 2069 TEA 2070
68 69 70
20 20 20
80 80 80
140 142 144
136 138 140
TEA 2040 TEA 2041 TEA 2042 TEA 2043
40 41 42 43
14 16 16 16
50 60 60 60
84 86 88 90
80 82 84 86
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
TEA 2012 TEA 2013 TEA 2014 TEA 2015
12 13 14 15
10 10 10 10
18 19 20 22
28 30 32 34
TEA 2016 TEA 2017 TEA 2018 TEA 2019
16 17 18 19
10 10 10 10
24 25 25 25
TEA 2020 TEA 2021 TEA 2022 TEA 2023
20 21 22 23
10 12 12 12
TEA 2024 TEA 2025 TEA 2026 TEA 2027
24 25 26 27
TEA 2028 TEA 2029 TEA 2030 TEA 2031
Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do
Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available in our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
3
Metric Spur Gears Module 2.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel
AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045
25
tu
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8d p
q
q
q
40
Module 2.5
t
t
Pitch 7.8540 Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5
TEA 2544 TEA 2545 TEA 2546 TEA 2547
44 45 46 47
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 80
115.0 117.5 120.0 122.5
110.0 112.5 115.0 117.5
45.0 47.5 50.0 52.5
40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5
TEA 2548 TEA 2549 TEA 2550 TEA 2551
48 49 50 51
20 20 20 20
80 80 80 90
125.0 127.5 130.0 132.5
120.0 122.5 125.0 127.5
40 40 45 45
55.0 57.5 60.0 62.5
50.0 52.5 55.0 57.5
TEA 2552 TEA 2553 TEA 2554 TEA 2555
52 53 54 55
20 20 20 20
90 90 90 90
135.0 137.5 140.0 142.5
130.0 132.5 135.0 137.5
14 14 14 14
45 50 50 50
65.0 67.5 70.0 72.5
60.0 62.5 65.0 67.5
TEA 2556 TEA 2557 TEA 2558 TEA 2559
56 57 58 59
20 20 20 20
100 100 100 100
145.0 147.5 150.0 152.5
140.0 142.5 145.0 147.5
28 29 30 31
14 14 16 16
50 50 55 55
75.0 77.5 80.0 82.5
70.0 72.5 75.0 77.5
TEA 2560
60
20
100
155.0
150.0
TEA 2532 TEA 2533 TEA 2534 TEA 2535
32 33 34 35
16 16 16 16
55 55 55 60
85.0 87.5 90.0 92.5
80.0 82.5 85.0 87.5
TEA 2536 TEA 2537 TEA 2538 TEA 2539
36 37 38 39
16 16 16 16
60 60 60 60
95.0 97.5 100.0 102.5
90.0 92.5 95.0 97.5
TEA 2540 TEA 2541 TEA 2542 TEA 2543
40 41 42 43
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 70
105.0 107.5 110.0 112.5
100.0 102.5 105.0 107.5
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH 8
TEA 2512 TEA 2513 TEA 2514 TEA 2515
12 13 14 15
10 10 10 10
22 25 28 30
35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5
TEA 2516 TEA 2517 TEA 2518 TEA 2519
16 17 18 19
12 12 12 12
32 35 35 35
TEA 2520 TEA 2521 TEA 2522 TEA 2523
20 21 22 23
14 14 14 14
TEA 2524 TEA 2525 TEA 2526 TEA 2527
24 25 26 27
TEA 2528 TEA 2529 TEA 2530 TEA 2531
Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do
Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
4
Metric Spur Gears Module 3 & Module 4 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 30
40
tu
tu
p p
p p
p
p
q
dk do
q
BH8 d
dk do
BH8 d
p
p
q
q
q
q
q
q
50
t
Module 3
60
t
Module 4
Pitch 9.4248 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do
t
t
Pitch 12.5664
Part No.
No. of Teeth
36 39 42 45
TEA 4012 TEA 4013 TEA 4014 TEA 4015
12 13 14 15
14 14 14 14
35 40 45 45
56 60 64 68
48 52 56 60
54 57 60 63
48 51 54 57
TEA 4016 TEA 4017 TEA 4018 TEA 4019
16 17 18 19
15 15 15 15
50 50 50 60
72 76 80 84
64 68 72 76
45 45 50 50
66 69 72 75
60 63 66 69
TEA 4020 TEA 4021 TEA 4022 TEA 4023
20 21 22 23
15 20 20 20
60 70 70 75
88 92 96 100
80 84 88 92
16 16 16 16
50 60 60 60
78 81 84 87
72 75 78 81
TEA 4024 TEA 4025 TEA 4026 TEA 4027
24 25 26 27
20 20 20 20
75 75 75 75
104 108 112 116
96 100 104 108
28 29 30 31
16 16 16 20
60 60 60 70
90 93 96 99
84 87 90 93
TEA 4028 TEA 4029 TEA 4030 TEA 4031
28 29 30 31
20 20 20 20
75 75 75 80
120 124 128 132
112 116 120 124
TEA 3032 TEA 3033 TEA 3034 TEA 3035
32 33 34 35
20 20 20 20
70 70 70 70
102 105 108 111
96 99 102 105
TEA 4032 TEA 4033 TEA 4034 TEA 4035
32 33 34 35
20 20 20 20
80 80 80 80
136 140 144 148
128 132 136 140
TEA 3036 TEA 3037 TEA 3038 TEA 3039
36 37 38 39
20 20 20 20
70 80 80 80
114 117 120 123
108 111 114 117
TEA 4036
36
20
80
152
144
TEA 3040 TEA 3041 TEA 3042 TEA 3043
40 41 42 43
20 20 20 20
80 90 90 90
126 129 132 135
120 123 126 129
TEA 3044 TEA 3045 TEA 3046 TEA 3047
44 45 46 47
20 20 20 20
90 90 90 90
138 141 144 147
132 135 138 141
TEA 3048
48
20
100
150
144
Part No.
No. of Teeth
TEA 3012 TEA 3013 TEA 3014 TEA 3015
12 13 14 15
12 12 12 12
25 25 30 35
42 45 48 51
TEA 3016 TEA 3017 TEA 3018 TEA 3019
16 17 18 19
15 15 15 15
38 42 45 45
TEA 3020 TEA 3021 TEA 3022 TEA 3023
20 21 22 23
15 15 15 15
TEA 3024 TEA 3025 TEA 3026 TEA 3027
24 25 26 27
TEA 3028 TEA 3029 TEA 3030 TEA 3031
Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do
Larger gears without hubs are available, please see page 8. Larger gears with hubs are available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB steel spur gears is still available, please visit our website for specifications. www.tea.net.au All specificationss are subject to change without notice.
5
Metric Spur Gears Modules 5, 6 & 8 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 Module 5
50
tu
p p
p
q
BH8 d
dk do
p
q
q
q
75
t
t
Pitch 15.7080
Part No.
No. of Teeth
TEA5012 TEA5013 TEA5014 TEA5015
12 13 14 15
16 16 20 20
45 50 55 60
70 75 80 85
60 65 70 75
TEA5016 TEA5017 TEA5018 TEA5019
16 17 18 19
20 20 20 20
65 70 70 70
90 95 100 105
80 85 90 95
TEA5020 TEA5021 TEA5022 TEA5023 TEA5024 TEA5025 TEA5026 TEA5027
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25
80 80 80 90 90 90 100 100
110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145
100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135
TEA5028 TEA5029 TEA5030
28 29 30
25 25 25
100 100 100
150 155 160
140 145 150
Module 6 60
tu
Drilled Hub Hole Diam. BH8 d
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
Pitch 18.8496
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
Hub Diam. d
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
TEA6012 TEA6013 TEA6015 TEA6016
12 13 15 16
20 20 20 20
54 60 70 75
84 90 102 108
72 78 90 96
TEA6018 TEA6020 TEA6024 TEA6025
18 20 24 25
20 20 25 25
80 90 110 110
120 132 156 162
108 120 144 150
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 d p
2t q
q
q
80
t
t
Module 8 60
tu
Pitch 25.133
Part No.
No. of Teeth
Drilled Hole BH8
Hub Diam. d
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
SN8015 SN8018 SN8020 SN8024
15 18 20 24
30 30 40 40
100 110 120 120
136 160 176 208
120 144 160 192
SN8030 SN8036 SN8040
30 36 40
40 50 50
160 160 180
256 304 336
240 288 320
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 d p
q
q
q
85
t
t
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance.
Larger gears for Modules 5 & 6 are available as hubless gears please see page 8. Larger gears for Modules 5, 6 & 8 are available with hubs from our SNB range. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
6
Metric Spur Gears - hubless Modules 1-2.5
Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 17
15
tu
tu
p p
p p
q
q
dk do
dk do
BH8
BH8 p
p
q
q
Module 1 Part No.
q
q
Module 1.5
Pitch 3.1416 No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk
Pitch Diam. do
TEA1072NH TEA1075NH TEA1076NH TEA1080NH
72 75 76 80
12 12 12 12
74 77 78 82
72 75 76 80
TEA1085NH TEA1090NH TEA1095NH TEA10100NH
85 90 95 100
12 12 12 12
87 92 97 102
85 90 95 100
TEA10110NH TEA10114NH TEA10120NH TEA10127NH
110 114 120 127
12 12 12 12
112 116 122 129
110 114 120 127
Part No. TEA1572NH TEA1575NH TEA1576NH TEA1580NH
Pitch 4.7124
No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk
Pitch Diam. do
72 75 76 80
20 20 20 20
110.0 115.5 117.0 123.0
108.0 112.5 114.0 120.0
85 90 95 100
20 20 20 20
130.5 138.0 145.5 153.0
127.5 135.0 142.5 150.0
110 114 120 127
20 20 20 20
168.0 174.0 183.0 193.5
165.0 171.0 180.0 190.5
a
TEA1585NH TEA1590NH TEA1595NH TEA15100NH a
TEA15110NH TEA15114NH TEA15120NH TEA15127NH
25
20
tu
tu
p p
p p
q
q
dk do
dk do
BH8
BH8 p
p
q
q
q
q
Module 2 Part No. TEA2072NH TEA2075NH TEA2076NH TEA2080NH
Module 2.5
Pitch 6.2832 No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth B8 dk H
Pitch Diam. do
72 75 76 80
20 20 20 20
148 154 156 164
144 150 152 160
85 90 95 100
20 20 20 20
174 184 194 204
170 180 190 200
110 114 120 127
20 20 20 20
224 232 244 258
220 228 240 254
Part No. TEA2565NH TEA2570NH TEA2572NH TEA2575NH TEA2576NH TEA2580NH TEA2585NH TEA2590NH
H
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
65 70 72 75
20 20 20 20
167.5 180.0 185.0 192.5
162.5 175.0 180.0 187.5
76 80 85 90
20 25 25 25
195.0 205.0 217.5 230.0
190.0 200.0 212.5 225.0
95 100 110 114
25 25 25 25
242.5 255.0 280.0 290.0
237.5 250.0 275.0 285.0
120 127
25 25
305.0 322.5
300.0 317.5
a
a
TEA20110NH TEA20114NH TEA20120NH TEA20127NH
No. Drilled of Hole Teeth B8
a
a
TEA2085NH TEA2090NH TEA2095NH TEA20100NH
Pitch 7.8540
TEA2595NH TEA25100NH TEA25110NH TEA25114NH a
TEA25120NH TEA25127NH
Notes:
All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
7
Metric Spur Gears - hubless
Part No.
Pitch Diam. do
No. of Teeth
Part No.
TEA3050NH TEA3052NH TEA3055NH TEA3057NH
50 52 55 57
25 25 25 25
156 162 171 177
150 156 165 171
TEA4038NH TEA4040NH TEA4045NH TEA4048NH
TEA3060NH TEA3065NH TEA3070NH TEA3072NH
60 65 70 72
25 25 25 25
186 201 216 222
180 195 210 216
TEA3075NH TEA3076NH TEA3080NH TEA3085NH
75 76 80 85
25 25 25 25
231 234 246 261
225 228 240 255
TEA3090NH TEA3095NH TEA30100NH TEA30110NH
90 95 100 110
25 25 25 25
276 291 306 336
270 285 300 330
q
H8
q
Module 4 Pitch 12.5664
B
p
q
tu
p p
do dk
No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk
40
q
H8
p
q
Module 3 Pitch 9.4248
B
Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045
q
30
p p
tu
Modules 3-6
do dk
Drilled Outside Hole Diam. BH8 dk
Pitch Diam. do
38 40 45 48
25 25 25 25
160 168 188 200
152 160 180 192
TEA4050NH TEA4052NH TEA4055NH TEA4057NH
50 52 55 57
25 25 25 25
208 216 228 236
200 208 220 228
TEA4060NH TEA4065NH TEA4070NH TEA4075NH
60 65 70 75
25 25 25 25
248 268 288 308
240 260 280 300
76 80 85 90
25 25 25 25
312 328 348 368
304 320 340 360
95 100 110 114
25 25 25 25
388 408 448 464
380 400 440 456
a
a
342 360 381
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
a
TEA5032NH TEA5035NH TEA5038NH TEA5040NH
50
H8
60
tu
p p
q
Part No.
No. Drilled of Hole Teeth BH8
B
q
Module 5 Pitch 15.7080
p
348 366 387
q
30 30 30
tu
114 120 127
a
TEA4095NH TEA40100NH TEA40110NH TEA40114NH
p p
TEA30114NH TEA30120NH TEA30127NH
TEA4076NH TEA4080NH TEA4085NH TEA4090NH
do dk
32 35 38 40
25 25 30 30
170 185 200 210
160 175 190 200
45 48 50 52
30 30 30 30
235 250 260 270
225 240 250 260
55 57 60 65
30 30 30 30
285 295 310 335
275 285 300 325
a
70 75 76 80
30 30 30 30
360 385 390 410
350 375 380 400
a
85 90 95 100
30 30 30 30
435 460 485 510
425 450 475 500
110 114
30 30
560 580
550 570
q
dk do
B
H8
p
a
TEA5045NH TEA5048NH TEA5050NH TEA5052NH
Module 6 Pitch 18.8496
a
TEA5055NH TEA5057NH TEA5060NH TEA5065NH
Part No. TEA6028NH TEA6030NH TEA6032NH TEA6035NH
a
TEA5070NH TEA5075NH TEA5076NH TEA5080NH
TEA6038NH TEA6040NH
a
TEA5085NH TEA5090NH TEA5095NH TEA50100NH a
TEA50110NH TEA50114NH
No. Drilled of Hole Teeth BH8
q
q
Outside Diam. dk
Pitch Diam. do
28 30 32 35
25 25 25 25
180 192 204 222
168 180 192 210
38 40
25 25
240 252
220 240
Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
8
Metric Spur Gears Modules 1-4
Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Stainless Steel 1.4305 AS2837-1986-303 AISI 303
b
tu
p p
p
q
dk do
BH8 N p
q
q
q
H
tu
F
Module
Part No.
No. of Teeth
1
SNE1012 SNE1015 SNE1020 SNE1025 SNE1030 SNE1040
12 15 20 25 30 40
5 6 8 8 8 10
9 12 17 22 25 30
14 17 22 27 32 42
12 15 20 25 30 40
16 16 16 16 16 16
8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8
0.15 0.23 0.48 0.7 1.0 1.7
SNE1512 SNE1515 SNE1520 SNE1525 SNE1530 SNE1540
12 15 20 25 30 40
6 8 8 10 10 12
13 18 25 30 35 45
21 25.5 33 40.5 48 63
18 22.5 30 37.5 45 60
24 24 24 24 24 24
12 12 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12 12 12
0.5 0.9 1.7 2.6 3.5 5.8
SNE2012 SNE2015 SNE2020 SNE2025 SNE2030 SNE2040
12 15 20 25 30 40
10 12 15 15 15 20
18 24 33 43 50 60
28 34 44 54 64 84
24 30 40 50 60 80
30 30 27 30 30 30
14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16
1.3 2.1 4.0 6.3 8.6 14.6
SNE2512 SNE2515 SNE2520 SNE2525 SNE2530 SNE2540
12 15 20 25 30 40
10 15 15 15 15 20
23 30 40 55 65 80
35 42.5 55 67.5 80 105
30 37.5 50 62.5 75 100
37 37 37 37 37 37
17 17 17 17 17 17
20 20 20 20 20 20
2.2 4.0 7.6 11.7 16.5 28.7
SNE3012 SNE3015 SNE3020 SNE3025 SNE3030 SNE3040
12 15 20 25 30 40
15 15 15 15 20 20
25 35 45 60 75 100
42 51 66 81 96 126
36 45 60 75 90 120
43 43 43 43 43 43
19 19 19 19 19 19
24 24 24 24 24 24
4.9 7.3 13.3 20.4 30.1 52.4
SNE4012 SNE4015 SNE4020 Pitch 12.5664 SNE4025 SNE4030 SNE4040
12 15 20 25 30 40
20 20 20 20 20 20
35 45 65 75 80 100
56 68 88 108 128 168
48 60 80 100 120 160
55 55 52 55 55 55
25 23 23 23 23 23
32 32 32 32 32 32
12.2 16.8 30.2 46.2 65.8 115.4
Pitch 3.1416
1.5 Pitch 4.7124
2 Pitch 6.2832
2.5 Pitch 7.8540
3 Pitch 9.4248
4
Drilled Hole BH8
t
t
Hub Outside Diam. Diam. N Dk
Pitch Diam. Do
Length Overall F
H
Face Width b
Torque Md (Nm)
Notes: All measurements are in mm unless otherwise stated. The listed torques: Md (Nm) are based on a rotation speed of 200rpm and refer to a combination of two pinions of the corresponding type. SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for Hertzian stress) for continuous operation. 1 Nm = 0.737561 lbs.f.ft. All specifications are subject to change without notice. TEA type gear dimensions according to drawings.
9
Metric Spur Gears Module 0.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 0.5 No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Pitch 1.57
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
E
Length Overall F
c
Face Width b
Part No.
12 13 14 15
2 2 2 3
6 6.5 7 7.5
7 7.5 8 8.5
4 4 5 6
7 7 7 10
3 3 3 3
SH 0512 SH 0513 SH 0514 SH 0515
16 17 18 19
3 3 4 4
8 8.5 9 9.5
9 9.5 10 10.5
6 6 8 8
10 10 10 10
3 3 3 3
SH 0516 SH 0517 SH 0518 SH 0519
20 21 22 23
4 4 4 4
10 10.5 11 11.5
11 11.5 12 12.5
8 8 10 10
10 10 10 10
3 3 3 3
SH 0520 SH 0521 SH 0522 SH 0523
24 25 26 27
4 4 4 4
12 12.5 13 13.5
13 13.5 14 14.5
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
3 3 3 3
SH 0524 SH 0525 SH 0526 SH 0527
28 30 32 35
4 4 4 4
14 15 16 17.5
15 16 17 18.5
10 12 12 12
10 10 10 10
3 3 3 3
SH 0528 SH 0530 SH 0532 SH 0535
36 38 40 42
4 4 4 4
18 19 20 21
19 20 21 22
12 12 12 12
14.5 16
10 10 10 10
2 2
3 3 3 3
SH 0536 SH 0538 SH 0540 SH 0542
45 48 50 52
4 6 6 6
22.5 24 25 26
23.5 25 26 27
12 15 15 15
18.5 19 20 21
10 10 10 10
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
SH 0545 SH 0548 SH 0550 SH 0552
54 55 56 60
6 6 6 6
27 27.5 28 30
28 28.5 29 31
15 15 15 15
22 23 23 24
10 10 10 10
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
SH 0554 SH 0555 SH 0556 SH 0560
64 65 70 72
6 6 6 6
32 32.5 35 36
33 33.5 36 37
15 15 15 15
25 27 29 30
10 10 10 10
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
SH 0564 SH 0565 SH 0570 SH 0572
75 80 90 96
6 6 6 6
37.5 40 45 48
38.5 41 46 49
15 15 15 15
33 36 39 42
10 10 10 10
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
SH 0575 SH 0580 SH 0590 SH 0596
100 120
6 6
50 60
51 61
15 15
44 54
10 10
2 2
3 3
SH05100 SH05120
All specificatsions are subject to change without notice.
Module 0.7
Dimensions in mm
Pitch = 2.199mm - also available - Please contact T.E.A.
10
Metric Spur Gears Module 1 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 1 Pitch 3.1416 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
c
Face Width b
Part No.
12 13 14 15
4 4 4 4
12 13 14 15
14 15 16 17
9 9 9 9
17 17 17 17
9 9 9 9
SH 1012 SH 1013 SH 1014 SH 1015
16 17 18 19
4 4 4 4
16 17 18 19
18 19 20 21
9 9 9 9
13.5 13.5
17 17 17 17
6 6
9 9 9 9
SH 1016 SH 1017 SH 1018 SH 1019
20 21 22 23
4 5 5 5
20 21 22 23
22 23 24 25
9 12 12 12
13.5 16 16 16
17 17 17 17
6 6 6 6
9 9 9 9
SH 1020 SH 1021 SH 1022 SH 1023
24 25 26 27
6 6 6 6
24 25 26 27
26 27 28 29
15 15 15 15
19 19 19 19
18 18 18 18
6 6 6 6
9 9 9 9
SH 1024 SH 1025 SH 1026 SH 1027
28 30 32 35
6 6 6 8
28 30 32 35
30 32 34 37
15 15 18 18
22 22 24.5 24.5
18 18 18 18
6 6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1028 SH 1030 SH 1032 SH 1035
36 38 40 42
8 8 8 8
36 38 40 42
38 40 42 44
18 18 18 18
28 28 28 28
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1036 SH 1038 SH 1040 SH 1042
45 48 50 52
8 8 8 8
45 48 50 52
47 50 52 54
18 18 18 21
37 37 37 47
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1045 SH 1048 SH 1050 SH 1052
54 55 56 58
8 8 8 8
54 55 56 58
56 57 58 60
21 21 21 21
47 47 47 58
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1054 SH 1055 SH 1056 SH 1058
60 64 65 70
8 10 10 10
60 64 65 70
62 66 67 72
21 21 21 21
47 57 57 57
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1060 SH 1064 SH 1065 SH 1070
72 75 80 85
10 10 10 10
72 75 80 85
74 77 82 87
21 21 21 21
67 67 67 77.9
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1072 SH 1075 SH 1080 SH 1085
90 100 110 120
10 12 12 12
90 100 110 120
92 102 112 122
21 24 24 24
77 87 97 107
18 18 18 18
4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
9 9 9 9
SH 1090 SH10100 SH10110 SH10120
130 140
12 12
130 140
132 142
24 24
115 125
18 18
4.6 4.6
9 9
SH10130 SH10140
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Module 1.25
E
Length Overall F
Pitch = 3.927mm - also available - Please contact T.E.A.
11
Metric Spur Gears Module 1.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 1.5 Pitch 4.7124 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
12 13 14 15
6 6 6 6
18 19.5 21 22.5
21 22.5 24 25.5
14 14 14 14
16 17 18 19
6 6 8 8
24 25.5 27 28.5
27 28.5 30 31.5
14 14 17 17
20 21 22 23
8 8 8 8
30 31.5 33 34.5
33 34.5 36 37.5
17 17 17 17
23 23 23
23 23 23 23
24 25 26 27
8 8 8 8
36 37.5 39 40.5
39 40.5 42 43.5
19 19 19 19
27 27 27 27
28 30 32 35
8 10 10 10
42 45 48 52.5
45 48 51 55.5
19 24 24 24
36 38 40 42
10 10 10 10
54 57 60 63
57 60 63 66
45 48 50 52
10 10 12 12
67.5 72 75 78
54 55 60 70
12 12 12 14
80 90
14 14
Module 2
Face Width b
Part No.
23 23 23 23
12 12 12 12
SH 1512 SH 1513 SH 1514 SH 1515
23 23 23 23
12 12 12 12
SH 1516 SH 1517 SH 1518 SH 1519
5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1520 SH 1521 SH 1522 SH 1523
23 23 23 23
5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1524 SH 1525 SH 1526 SH 1527
27 35 35 43
23 23 23 23
5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1528 SH 1530 SH 1532 SH 1535
24 24 24 24
43 43 50 50
23 23 23 23
5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1536 SH 1538 SH 1540 SH 1542
70.5 75 78 81
24 24 27 27
50 50 65 65
23 23 23 23
5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1545 SH 1548 SH 1550 SH 1552
81 82.5 90 105
84 85.5 93 108
27 27 27 30
65 65 65 90
23 23 23 23
5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
SH 1554 SH 1555 SH 1560 SH 1570
120 135
123 138
30 30
106 118
23 23
5 5
12 12
SH 1580 SH 1590
c
Face Width b
Part No.
15 15 15 15
SH 2012 SH 2013 SH 2014 SH 2015
15 15 15 15
SH 2016 SH 2017 SH 2018 SH 2019
E
Length Overall F
c
Module 2 Pitch 6.2832 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
12 13 14 15
8 8 8 8
24 26 28 30
28 30 32 34
18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5
16 17 18 19
8 8 8 8
32 34 36 38
36 38 40 42
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
Note: Module 2 to 70 teeth continued on page 13. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
12
E
Length Overall F 27 27 27 27
23 25 26 26
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
Metric Spur Gears Module 2 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 2 Pitch 6.2832 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
E
Length Overall F
c
Face Width b
Part No.
20 21 22 23
10 10 10 10
40 42 44 46
44 46 48 50
20.5 20.5 20.5 20.5
29 29 29 36
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
15 15 15 15
SH 2020 SH 2021 SH 2022 SH 2023
24 25 26 27
10 10 10 10
48 50 52 54
52 54 56 58
24 24 24 24
36 36 40 40
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
15 15 15 15
SH 2024 SH 2025 SH 2026 SH 2027
28 30 32 35
10 10 10 12
56 60 64 70
60 64 68 74
24 24 26 26
40 46 46 56
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
15 15 15 15
SH 2028 SH 2030 SH 2032 SH 2035
36 38 40 42
12 12 12 12
72 76 80 84
76 80 84 88
26 26 26 26
56 64 64 64
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
15 15 15 15
SH 2036 SH 2038 SH 2040 SH 2042
45 48 50 55
14 14 14 14
90 96 100 110
94 100 104 114
30 30 30 30
70 76 80 90
27 27 27 27
6 6 6 6
15 15 15 15
SH 2045 SH 2048 SH 2050 SH 2055
60 70
14 14
120 140
124 144
30 30
100 110
27 27
6 6
15 15
SH 2060 SH 2070
Note: see page 12 for Module 2 12-19 teeth
Module 3
Module 3 Pitch 9.4248 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth
Hole B
Pitch Diam. Do
Outside Diam. Dk
Hub Diam. N
E
Length Overall F
c
Face Width b
12 13 14 15
12 12 12 12
36 39 42 45
42 45 48 51
24 24 24 24
30
34 34 34 34
Part No.
8
19 19 19 19
SH 3012 SH 3013 SH 3014 SH 3015
16 17 18 19
12 12 12 12
48 51 54 57
54 57 60 63
24 24 24 24
30 30 38 38
34 34 34 34
8 8 8 8
19 19 19 19
SH 3016 SH 3017 SH 3018 SH 3019
20 21 22 23
12 12 12 12
60 63 66 69
66 69 72 75
24 24 24 24
38 45 45 52
34 34 34 34
8 8 8 8
19 19 19 19
SH 3020 SH 3021 SH 3022 SH 3023
24 25 26 27
12 14 14 14
72 75 78 81
78 81 84 87
24 28 28 28
52 58 58 58
34 34 34 34
8 8 8 8
19 19 19 19
SH 3024 SH 3025 SH 3026 SH 3027
28 30 32 33
14 14 16 16
84 90 96 99
90 96 102 105
28 28 32 32
68 68 71 71
34 34 34 34
8 8 8 8
19 19 19 19
SH 3028 SH 3030 SH 3032 SH 3033
35 38 40 45
16 16 16 16
105 114 120 135
111 120 126 141
32 32 32 32
80 89 95 110
34 34 34 34
8 8 8 8
19 19 19 19
SH 3035 SH 3038 SH 3040 SH 3045
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
13
Metric Racks Actual Tooth Sizes Pictured
Module 0.5 Pitch 1.57 Module 1.0 Pitch 3.1416 Module 1.5 Pitch 4.7124
Module 2.0 Pitch 6.2832
Module 2.5 Pitch 7.8540
Module 3.0 Pitch 9.4248 Module 4.0 Pitch 12.5664
Module 5.0 Pitch 15.7080
Module 6.0 Pitch 18.8496
14
Metric Racks Pitch & Diagrams of actual size see page 14 Modules 1-8
Pressure Angle 20° Material: Steel - unhardened CK45 - AS1443-1994-1045 C40 - AS1443-AISI1040
Dimensions in mm
hh11
15 15 15
15 15 15
14 (0-0.2) 14 14
500 1000 2000
1.6 (3.6)
BZ 10/500 BZ 10/1000 BZ 10/2000
17 17 17
17 17 17
15.5(0-0.25) 15.5 15.5
500 1000 2000
2.1 (4.6)
BZ 15/500 BZ 15/1000 BZ 15/2000
20 20 20
20 20 20
18 (0-0.25) 18 18
500 1000 2000
2.8 (6.2)
BZ 20/500 BZ 20/1000 BZ 20/2000
25 25 25
25 25 25
22.5 22.5 22.5
500 1000 2000
4.4 (9.7)
BZ 25/500 BZ 25/1000 BZ 25/2000
30 30 30
30 30 30
27 (0-0.3) 27 27
500 1000 2000
6.3 (13.9)
BZ 30/500 BZ 30/1000 BZ 30/2000
40 40 40
40 40 40
36 (0-0.3) 36 36
500 1000 2000
11.2 (24.7)
BZ 40/500 BZ 40/1000 BZ 40/2000
50 50 50
50 50 50
45 (0-0.35) 45 45
500 1000 2000
15.9 (35.1)
BZ 50/500 BZ 50/1000 BZ 50/2000
6
60 60
60 60
54 (0-0.4) 54
1000 2000
24.3 (53.6)
BZ 60/1000 BZ 60/2000
8
80 80
80 80
72 (0-0.5) 72
1000 2000
42.7 (94.2)
BZ 80/1000 BZ 80/2000
Module 1
1.5
L
2
2.5
3
b h
4
5
do
Approx. Weight per mtr. kg (lbs)
Face Width bh11
Height +10
do
(tolerance)
Length 0 L (mm)
Part No.
Notes: 3 mtr. lengths available on request. Machined ends for continuous mounting available. Pitch error ±0.1mm/mtr 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Modules 1-3 Pressure Angle 20° Material: Stainless Steel Milled AS2837-1986-303 AISI 303
L
Dimensions in mm
Module
b h
do
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5
Face Width bh11
Height hh11
8 12 16 20 24 30 40
8 12 16 20 24 30 40
do
Old P/N Length L (mm)
Old Part No.
New P/N 500mm
New P/N 1000mm
7 10.5 14 17.5 21 26 35
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
ZE 10/1000 ZE 15/1000 ZE 20/1000 ZE 25/1000 ZE 30/1000 ZE 40/1000 ZE 50/1000
130506 130516 130526 130536 130546 130556 130566
130507 130517 130527 130537 130547 130557 130567
Notes: Dimensions the same as above Steel Rack available on request. Longer lengths available on request. Cumulative pitch error 0.15 / 1000mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.
15
Metric Racks - Round Profile Modules 1-6
Pressure Angle 20° Material: Steel C40h7 AS1443-1040 Dimensions in mm Module
Dh7
do
1
10 10 10
9 9 9
500 1000 2000
0.55 (1.21)
RZ 10/500 RZ 10/1000 RZ 10/2000
15 15 15
13.5 13.5 13.5
500 1000 2000
1.33 (2.94)
RZ 15/500 RZ 15/1000 RZ 15/2000
20 20 20
18 18 18
500 1000 2000
2.3 (5.07)
RZ 20/500 RZ 20/1000 RZ 20/2000
25 25 25
22.5 22.5 22.5
500 1000 2000
3.38 (7.46)
RZ 25/500 RZ 25/1000 RZ 25/2000
30 30 30
27 27 27
500 1000 2000
5.12 (11.29)
RZ 30/500 RZ 30/1000 RZ 30/2000
40 40 40
36 36 36
500 1000 2000
9.09 (20.04)
RZ 40/500 RZ 40/1000 RZ 40/2000
50 50 50
45 45 45
500 1000 2000
13.54 (29.85)
RZ 50/500 RZ 50/1000 RZ 50/2000
50 50
44 44
1000 2000
1.5
2
L
2.5
3
4 Dh7
do
Length L (mm)+100
Approx. Weight per mtr. kg (lbs).
5
6
Pitch error < ± 0.005mm. Added up errors < ± 0.1mm on 1000mm 5mm cutting wastage, please state exact length required. Round rack is also available in 3 mtr lengths on request. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
Modules 1-3
Pressure Angle 20° Material: Stainless Steel AS2837-1986-303-4305 AISI 303
L
Dh7
do
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Also available in Module 4 & 5.
16
Part No.
RZ 60/1000 RZ 60/2000
Metric Racks Modules 0.5 - 3
Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Acetal copolymer (POM) Dimensions in mm Module
bh11
hh11
0.5 1 1.5 2 3
4 9 12 15.4 19.4
4.5 9 12 11 15
do
L (mm)
Part No.
4 8 10.5 9 12
250 250 250 250 250
ZH 0525 ZH 1025 ZH 1525 ZH 2025 ZH 3025
Material: Plastic Machined Polyamide L
Dimensions in mm Module
bh11
hh11
do
L (mm)
Part No.
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5
15 17 20 25 30 40 50
15 17 20 25 30 40 50
14 15.5 18 22.5 27 36 45
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
ZP 10/15 ZP 15/17 ZP 20/20 ZP 25/25 ZP 30/30 ZP 40/40 ZP 50/50
b h
Adjacent pitch error (mm) 0.008. Cumulative pitch error (1000mm) 0.15. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
do
Metric Helical Racks & Gears Modules 0.3 & 0.5
Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Brass 20o b
L
h
Helical Rack Dimensions in mm Module
b
h
L
Part No.
0.3 0.5
5 10
3 4
250 250
SN 03/250 MS SN 05/250 MS
Helical Gear Dimensions in mm 20
o
b
No. of Teeth
0.3
0.5
tu
p p
Module p
q
dk do
BH8 N p
q
t
L
t
Hole. BH7
Hub Diam. N
Outside Diam. Dk
Pitch Diam do
12 15 18 20 24 30
2 2 3 3 3 3
3 4 5 6 7 9
4.4 5.3 6.3 6.9 8.2 10.1
18 22 25 30 34
5 6 6 8 8
8 10 12 14 16
10.5 12.7 14.2 16.9 19.0
All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
17
L
Face Width b
Part No.
3.8 4.7 5.7 6.3 7.6 9.5
9 9 9 9 9 10
5 5 5 5 5 5
SN0312MS SN0315MS SN0318MS SN0320MS SN0324MS SN0330MS
9.5 11.7 13.2 15.9 18.0
16 16 16 16 16
10 10 10 10 10
SN0518MS SN0522MS SN0525MS SN0530MS SN0534MS
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1
Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4 On request: 303 Stainless Steel Brass - Modules 0.5, 0.75, 1 Zinc die-cast
Ratio 1:1 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
16 16 16 16
8 10 13 16
19 22 30 35
26.1 34.8 43.5 52.2
9.5 9.5 10.0 12.5
15.4 16.4 18.3 22.6
16.9 18.9 21.3 26.1
24 28 33 40
5.9 8.6 10.1 12.5
K1100 K1101 K1102 K1103
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
16 16 16 16
19 22 25 27
40 45 50 54
60.1 69.7 78.4 87.1
15.0 17.5 19.5 21.0
26.6 30.3 34.7 37.6
30.1 35.5 40.2 43.6
47 54 61 67
13.2 16.4 18.7 19.3
K1104 K1105 K1106 K1107
5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
19 22 26 30
30 33 36 40
60 66 72 80
102.1 117.1 137.1 157.1
23.5 24.0 25.0 28.0
43.0 46.0 50.0 57.0
49.0 52.0 56.0 63.0
77 85 96 109
24.4 27.9 32.2 37.8
K1108 K1109 K1110 K1111
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1100 K1101 K1102 K1103
0.014 0.036 0.073 0.110
0.073 0.147 0.220 0.368
0.110 0.220 0.368 0.662
0.257 0.368 0.662 0.846
0.300 0.478 0.772 1.177
0.368 0.700 1.030 1.472
0.404 0.736 1.777 1.803
0.441 0.795 1.324 2.060
K1104 K1105 K1106 K1107
0.147 0.294 0.368 0.441
0.515 0.809 1.104 1.508
0.846 1.435 1.766 2.502
1.324 1.840 2.355 3.385
1.766 2.384 3.238 4.636
2.281 3.312 4.416 5.704
2.760 3.750
K1108 K1109 K1110 K1111
0.809 1.777 1.435 1.913
2.134 2.907 3.753 5.004
3.312 4.452 5.888 7.654
4.452 5.888 7.654 9.862
5.851 7.360 9.494 12.430
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: 2.5 x value indicated nitrided: 1.5 x value indicated
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
18
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1.25 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:1.25 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
1.5
16 20
10 12
20 24
26.4 31.9
9.5 10.4
15 16
16.8 19.0
26 26
6.7 6.7
K1120
2.0
16 20
12 14
26 28
35.1 42.5
10.7 13.0
18 20
20.9 23.6
33 33
8.9 8.9
K1121
2.5
16 20
14 16
32 34
43.9 53.1
9.9 14.0
20 23
22.8 26.3
38 38
11.2 11.2
K1122
3.0
16 20
16 18
36 40
52.7 63.8
9.3 16.0
22 26
25.7 29.9
44 44
13.4 13.4
K1123
3.5
16 20
20 22
44 48
61.5 74.4
12.2 19.0
27 31
30.7 35.5
52 52
15.7 15.7
K1124
4.0
16 20
22 24
50 52
70.3 85.0
12.5 21.0
30 34
33.6 39.2
58 58
17.9 17.9
K1125
4.5
16 20
25 27
54 58
79.0 95.6
17.0 24.0
35 40
39.6 45.9
67 67
20.1 20.1
K1126
5.0
16 20
28 30
56 60
87.8 106.2
19.0 28.0
39 45
44.5 51.5
75 75
22.4 22.4
K1127
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1120 K1121 K1122 K1123
0.014 0.095 0.121 0.146
0.042 0.169 0.191 0.294
0.069 0.184 0.331 0.552
0.094 0.242 0.441 0.735
0.131 0.294 0.566 0.920
0.185 0.404 0.846 1.288
0.232 0.515 1.030 1.619
0.368 0.653 1.236 1.840
K1124 K1125 K1126 K1127
0.192 0.294 0.331 0.552
0.515 0.736 1.104 1.619
0.883 1.288 1.803 2.392
1.104 1.692 2.355 3.128
1.582 2.208 3.164 4.048
2.024 2.944 4.416 5.520
2.796 3.569
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
19
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1.5
Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:1.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
1.5
16 24
8 10
18 22
26.5 37.7
10.0 11.5
17.8 18.5
18.8 20.0
30 27
7.6 7.6
K1150
2.0
16 24
11 13
22 26
35.3 50.2
10.0 12.0
19.1 18.7
21.1 21.7
36 31
10.1 10.1
K1151
2.5
16 24
14 16
28 32
44.1 62.8
10.5 14.0
21.9 22.6
24.4 26.4
43 38
12.6 12.6
K1152
3.0
16 24
17 19
34 38
53.0 75.3
11.0 16.5
24.7 26.5
27.7 31.0
50 45
15.1 15.1
K1153
3.5
16 24
20 23
40 46
61.8 87.9
12.5 20.5
28.5 32.4
32.0 37.7
58 54
17.7 17.7
K1154
4.0
16 24
23 26
46 52
70.6 100.4
14.0 23.0
32.2 36.3
36.2 42.3
66 61
20.2 20.2
K1155
4.5
16 24
25 29
50 58
79.4 113.0
16.5 25.0
37.0 40.2
41.5 47.0
75 68
22.7 22.7
K1156
16 24
28 32
56 64
88.3 125.5
17.5 28.0
39.8 44.3
44.8 51.8
82 75
25.5 25.5
K1157
5.0
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1150 K1151 K1152 K1153
0.036 0.143 0.179 0.210
0.081 0.184 0.294 0.552
0.147 0.294 0.404 0.846
0.165 0.331 0.588 1.067
0.184 0.404 0.772 1.361
0.257 0.588 1.104 1.803
0.353 0.736 1.361 2.208
0.772 0.883 1.700 2.723
K1154 K1155 K1156 K1157
0.294 0.368 0.441 0.662
0.883 1.067 1.472 2.097
1.214 1.692 2.355 3.201
1.545 2.208 3.128 4.195
2.100 2.980 4.268 5.483
2.796 4.084 5.556 7.360
3.459 5.115
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
20
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:2
Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:2 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
1.5
15 30
8 11
18 24
25.5 46.3
10.4 12.0
18.8 17.6
19.8 19.6
34 26
8.8 8.8
K1200
2.0
15 30
11 14
22 28
33.6 61.8
10.0 12.4
21.6 19.6
23.1 22.4
42 31
11.7 11.7
K1201
2.5
15 30
14 18
28 36
41.9 77.2
11.2 15.8
25.5 24.8
27.3 28.3
51 39
14.7 14.7
K1202
3.0
15 30
17 22
34 44
50.4 92.7
13.2 20.1
30.5 30.9
32.6 35.1
61 48
17.6 17.6
K1203
3.5
15 30
20 25
40 50
58.8 108.1
14.4 22.5
34.4 35.1
36.9 40.0
70 55
20.5 20.5
K1204
4.0
15 30
23 30
46 60
67.1 123.6
15.5 27.8
38.4 42.2
41.2 47.8
79 65
23.5 23.5
K1205
4.5
15 30
26 34
52 68
75.5 139.0
16.7 31.1
42.2 47.4
45.4 53.7
88 73
26.4 26.4
K1206
5.0
15 30
29 37
58 74
83.9 154.5
17.8 33.5
46.2 51.5
49.7 58.5
97 80
29.3 29.3
K1207
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1200 K1201 K1202 K1203
0.073 0.145 0.181 0.215
0.084 0.169 0.309 0.588
0.149 0.220 0.478 0.956
0.184 0.331 0.588 1.251
0.220 0.478 0.883 1.620
0.331 0.625 1.214 2.134
0.404 0.883 1.619 2.539
0.478 1.030 1.913 2.800
K1204 K1205 K1206 K1207
0.331 0.515 0.588 0.662
0.846 1.214 1.656 2.208
1.324 1.840 2.576 3.460
1.729 2.465 3.385 4.490
2.281 3.275 4.500 5.961
3.128 4.416 6.108 7.875
3.841 5.372
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
21
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:2.5
Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:2.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
16 40
10 15
20 30
26.8 61.1
10.4 16.0
22.0 21.1
22.9 23.1
42 30
11.3 11.3
K1250
16 40
12 18
26 36
35.7 81.5
10.0 18.0
27.3 25.2
28.4 27.9
54 37
15.1 15.1
K1251
16 40
16 22
32 44
44.6 101.9
11.2 21.0
32.7 30.2
34.1 33.5
66 45
18.9 18.9
K1252
16 40
20 27
40 54
53.6 122.2
13.2 26.0
38.1 38.2
39.7 42.2
78 56
22.6 22.6
K1253
16 40
22 32
46 64
62.5 142.6
14.4 33.0
42.2 46.3
44.3 50.9
89 67
26.4 26.4
K1254
16 40
26 35
52 70
71.4 163.0
15.5 34.0
47.9 49.3
50.0 54.6
101 73
30.2 30.2
K1255
16 40
30 40
60 80
80.4 183.3
16.7 37.0
53.2 54.3
55.6 60.3
113 81
33.9 33.9
K1256
16 40
32 45
66 89
89.3 203.7
17.8 40.0
57.6 60.3
60.3 67.0
124 90
37.7 37.7
K1257
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1250 K1251 K1252 K1253
0.088 0.147 0.183 0.218
0.103 0.220 0.404 0.700
0.184 0.368 0.625 1.140
0.220 0.515 0.883 1.545
0.331 0.625 1.140 2.060
0.404 0.809 1.619 2.760
0.552 1.067 2.060 3.238
0.625 1.251 2.502
K1254 K1255 K1256 K1257
0.404 0.588 0.736 0.920
1.104 1.656 2.208 2.944
1.803 2.539 3.460 4.563
2.281 3.312 4.563 5.924
3.017 4.268 6.035 7.801
4.048 5.704 7.948
4.970
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
22
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:3 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z Part No.
15 45
10 15
19 30
25.3 68.4
11.7 15.0
21.1 20.8
22.3 23.0
46 30
10.3 10.3
K1300
15 45
12 17
24 34
33.8 91.3
13.0 20.0
26.5 26.9
27.4 29.7
59 39
13.8 13.8
K1301
15 45
16 24
32 48
42.2 114.1
14.8 26.0
31.4 34.8
32.6 38.3
72 50
17.2 17.2
K1302
15 45
19 28
38 56
50.7 136.9
17.3 30.0
37.3 40.7
38.7 45.0
86 59
20.6 20.6
K1303
15 45
22 32
44 65
59.1 159.7
18.9 35.0
42.3 47.8
43.9 52.7
99 69
24.1 24.1
K1304
15 45
25 36
50 72
67.6 182.5
20.3 39.0
47.3 52.9
49.0 58.4
112 77
27.5 27.5
K1305
15 45
28 40
56 80
76.0 205.3
20.9 43.0
51.0 58.7
53.1 65.0
124 86
31.0 31.0
K1306
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1300 K1301 K1302 K1303
0.090 0.148 0.185 0.220
0.125 0.162 0.300 0.588
0.147 0.220 0.441 1.030
0.220 0.368 0.588 1.324
0.257 0.515 0.883 1.803
0.282 0.736 1.361 2.400
0.478 1.067 1.825 2.907
0.588 1.325 2.208
K1304 K1305 K1306
0.368 0.588 0.883
1.030 1.619 2.800
1.620 2.400 4.342
2.100 3.164 5.704
2.800 4.048 7.433
3.680 5.446 9.998
4.416
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: 2.5 x value indicated nitrided: 1.5 x value indicated SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
23
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3.5
Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:3.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Bh7
N
D
16 56
10 16
20 32
26.9 84.8
16 56
14 21
28 42
16 56
17 26
16 56 16 56
H
L
F
A
Z
11.4 18.0
23.1 23.0
23.6 25.3
54 33
11.8 11.8
K1350
35.1 113.1
14.4 23.0
29.6 29.6
30.5 32.7
71 43
15.7 15.7
K1351
34 52
44.8 141.4
16.2 29.0
35.3 36.2
36.4 40.2
87 53
19.7 19.7
K1352
21 32
42 64
53.8 169.6
18.1 36.0
41.0 45.0
42.3 49.6
103 65
23.6 23.6
K1353
24 36
48 72
62.7 197.9
19.9 39.0
46.9 49.5
48.2 55.1
119 73
27.5 27.5
K1354
Part No.
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1350 K1351 K1352 K1353
0.092 0.117 0.176 0.300
0.128 0.184 0.368 0.588
0.165 0.309 0.566 1.037
0.182 0.419 0.846 1.324
0.291 0.552 1.067 1.840
0.355 0.846 1.472 2.576
0.448 1.030 1.840 3.164
0.552 1.251 2.281
K1354
1.008
1.582
2.060
2.760
3.900
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
24
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:4 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4
Ratio 1:4 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Bh7
N
D
15 60
10 16
20 32
25.4 90.7
15 60
12 21
24 42
15 60
15 25
15 60 15 60
H
L
F
A
Z
11.7 18.0
21.5 23.0
22.2 25.4
57 33
10.2 10.2
K1400
33.9 121.0
12.3 23.0
25.6 29.0
26.6 32.8
73 43
13.6 13.6
K1401
30 50
42.4 151.2
14.1 27.5
30.9 35.0
32.0 39.3
90 52
17.0 17.0
K1402
18 30
36 60
50.8 181.5
15.9 32.5
36.0 41.5
37.3 46.7
107 62
20.4 20.4
K1403
22 35
44 70
59.3 211.7
18.9 38.5
42.2 49.4
43.7 55.1
125 73
23.8 23.8
K1404
Part No.
Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.
100
300
500
700
1000
1500
2000
2500
K1400 K1401 K1402 K1403
0.095 0.150 0.220 0.300
0.147 0.184 0.404 0.625
0.170 0.331 0.662 1.000
0.184 0.412 0.920 1.361
0.294 0.588 1.251 1.876
0.404 0.846 1.730 2.576
0.515 1.067 2.060 3.091
0.588 1.288 2.245
K1404
0.404
1.067
1.700
2.248
2.980
4.011
P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n
Performance: hardened: nitrided:
SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
25
2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1, 1:2 Material: Plastic Hostaform C - Acetal copolymer (POM)
Ratio 1:1 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z
Weight g
Part No.
0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0
16 16 30 16 16
3 5 6 8 10
7.0 12.0 15.0 18.5 21.9
8.7 17.6 31.4 26.4 34.9
6.0 8.0 7.4 10.0 9.6
8.0 13.6 12.9 16.2 18.3
8.0 13.6 15.3 18.4 21.2
10.5 18.4 24.8 25.8 30.4
2.0 4.7 7.4 7.0 10.0
0.3 1.9 5.9 5.9 10.4
KH 0516-1:1 KH 1016-1:1 KH 1030-1:1 KH 1516-1:1 KH 2016-1:1
2.5 3.0 3.5
16 16 16
12 14 18
25.2 28.8 33.3
43.5 52.3 61.4
11.5 13.2 14.4
22.9 25.8 28.1
25.5 29.2 33.1
37.0 43.0 49.5
12.3 13.8 15.8
20.0 32.0 50.0
KH 2516-1:1 KH 3016-1:1 KH 3516-1:1
1g = 0.0352736oz.
Ratio 1:2 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z
Weight g
Part No.
1.0
15 30
5 8
12.2 18.0
16.8 31.1
10.6 9.1
17.0 14.8
17.0 16.2
26.4 20.9
6.6 6.6
2.4 6.3
KH 1015-1:2 KH 1030-1:2
1.5
15 30
8 10
17.0 23.4
25.4 46.4
11.5 9.6
22.8 17.5
22.8 19.5
35.8 26.2
10.5 10.5
7.5 17.0
KH 1515-1:2 KH 1530-1:2
2.0
15 30
10 12
22.5 30.2
33.6 62.2
11.8 11.8
26.0 22.6
27.0 24.2
44.2 32.6
14.6 14.6
13.3 41.0
KH 2015-1:2 KH 2030-1:2
2.5
15 30
12 16
26.5 36.1
42 77.3
13.0 15.0
29.6 27.5
31.2 29.5
53.3 40.5
17.3 17.3
23.6 69.0
KH 2515-1:2 KH 2530-1:2
3.0
15 30
14 18
31.2 45.0
50.3 93
14.8 19.0
35 34.2
36.3 37.0
63.3 49.5
20.5 20.5
38.0 129.0
KH 3015-1:2 KH 3030-1:2
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
1g = 0.0352736oz.
26
Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3, 1:4, 1:5
Material: Plastic Hostaform C Acetal copolymer (POM)
Ratio 1:3 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z
Weight g
Part No.
1.0
15 45
5 10
12.3 23.4
16.6 46.1
11.0 9.6
20.4 16.5
20.4 18.2
34.3 22.7
9.2 9.2
2.7 16.0
KH 1015-1:3 KH 1045-1:3
1.5
15 45
8 12
17.2 30.4
25.1 68.8
12.5 11.5
26.8 21.5
26.8 23.0
47.9 29.4
14.0 14.0
8.5 49.0
KH 1515-1:3 KH 1545-1:3
2.0
10 30
6 12
16.6 30.3
24.0 61.7
12.0 11.5
25.0 20.2
25.0 22.5
43.7 28.0
12.5 12.5
6.1 38.0
KH 2010-1:3 KH 2030-1:3
2.5
10 30
8 18
18.8 36.1
29.7 77.2
13.0 15.5
28.8 25.2
28.8 29.0
52.4 35.7
15.7 15.7
10.2 68.0
KH 2510-1:3 KH 2530-1:3
1g = 0.0352736oz.
Ratio 1:4 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth
Bh7
N
D
H
L
F
A
Z
Weight g
Part No.
1.0
10 40
4 10
7.8 23.4
12.0 40.8
9.3 10.8
17.7 15.7
17.7 17.0
30.1 20.1
8.2 8.2
0.9 12.6
KH 1010-1:4 KH 1040-1:4
1.5
10 40
5 12
11.3 30.4
18.0 61.2
10.9 12.8
23.5 20.0
23.5 21.7
41.7 26.2
12.3 12.3
3.0 32.0
KH 1510-1:4 KH 1540-1:4
2.0
10 40
6 18
14.3 36.0
23.8 81.5
12.8 16.6
28.9 24.7
28.9 27.0
54.0 32.5
16.3 16.3
6.4 65.0
KH 2010-1:4 KH 2040-1:4
1g = 0.0352736oz.
Ratio 1:5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.0
12 60
Bh7 4 10
N 9.5 20.5
D 13.7 60.4
H 10 11
L 20.3 15.5
F 20.3 17.4
A 40.5 21.0
Z 9.5 9.5
Weight g
Part No.
2.0 17.0
KH 1012-1:5 KH 1060-1:5
1g = 0.0352736oz. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
27
Selection of Metric Worm and Worm Gears The range of standard worms and worm gears is available in 7 module sizes and 8 standard ratios. The size is identical to the centerline distance.
Size Module Ratio and No. of starts
030 1.0 4.63:1 8
045 1.5 5.57:1 7
060 2.0 6.83:1 6
075 2.5 8.6:1 5
090 3.0 11.25:1 4
105 3.5 15.33:1 3
120 4.0 23.5:1 2
47:1 1
Every ratio option available for each module/size. The ratio 47:1 is just self locking. All other ratios are not. We suggest a tolerance of +/- 0.02mm on the centerline of the bores of the housing. Selection of worm and worm gear The nominal torque T2N (Nm) is valid for servo applications that run under normal shock free operations and at an ambient
Service coefficient Shocks at output shaft fB
none 1.0
moderate 1.2
Starting factor Starting frequency fA
<10/h 1.0
<60/h 1.1
<360/h 1.2
<1000/h 1.3
Temperature factor Ambient Temperature ft
<20째C 1.0
<30째C 1.3
<40째C 1.5
<50째C 1.9
Duty factor Duty cycle fED
<40% 1.0
<70% 1.2
heavy 1.5
<100% 1.4
T2 (Nm): required torque for driven machine All specifications subject to change without notice.
28
Metric Worm and Worm Gear Efficiency Tables -1
nI(min ) Input speed 6000 rpm Size Ratio
T2max.
PI
T2N
4500 rpm PI
T2N
3000 rpm PI
T2N
1500 rpm PI
T2N
1000 rpm PI
T2N
500rpm PI
T2N
030
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
20
1.16 0.95 0.82 0.73 0.61 0.50 0.42 0.27
6.57 6.37 6.54 6.86 7.23 7.33 7.46 7.51
0.77 0.76 0.73 0.69 0.66 0.60 0.48 0.37
0.99 0.81 0.70 0.62 0.52 0.41 0.33 0.20
7.64 7.37 7.53 7.88 8.28 8.39 8.52 8.57
0.78 0.77 0.74 0.70 0.67 0.63 0.52 0.42
0.76 0.63 0.54 0.47 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.15
9.12 8.74 8.88 9.25 9.69 9.80 9.94 9.99
0.81 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.54 0.44
0.46 0.37 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.18 0.14 0.09
11.33 10.74 10.82 11.21 11.68 11.77 11.91 11.96
0.83 0.81 0.79 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.55 0.45
0.34 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.06
12.33 11.63 11.68 12.06 12.55 12.62 12.76 12.80
0.83 0.81 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.66 0.56 0.46
0.19 0.15 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.03
13.51 12.67 12.67 13.05 13.54 13.60 13.74 13.77
0.82 0.80 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.64 0.55 0.45
045
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.5 47.00
80
3.64 3.02 2.61 2.27 1.91 1.57 1.19 0.77
22.5 22.0 22.7 23.9 25.3 25.7 26.2 26.4
0.84 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.74 0.67 0.59 0.46
3.20 2.64 2.26 1.95 1.65 1.31 0.98 0.62
26.9 26.2 26.9 28.0 29.8 30.3 30.8 31.0
0.86 0.84 0.82 0.79 0.76 0.71 0.63 0.50
2.61 2.13 1.81 1.55 1.30 1.03 0.77 0.48
33.5 32.3 33.0 34.6 36.3 36.8 37.4 37.6
0.87 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.78 0.73 0.65 0.52
1.71 1.37 1.15 0.98 0.81 0.64 0.48 0.30
44.3 42.3 42.8 44.5 46.5 46.9 47.5 47.7
0.88 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.80 0.75 0.66 0.53
1.28 1.02 0.85 0.72 0.60 0.47 0.35 0.22
49.7 47.1 47.5 49.2 51.2 51.6 52.3 52.5
0.88 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.66 0.53
0.74 0.59 0.49 0.41 0.34 0.27 0.20 0.13
56.6 53.2 53.3 55.0 57.1 57.4 58.0 58.2
0.86 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.77 0.72 0.64 0.50
060
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
200
7.88 6.52 5.62 4.85 4.10 3.28 2.49 1.68
50 50 51 54 57 59 60 60
0.87 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.78 0.73 0.64 0.48
7.11 5.84 5.00 4.30 3.61 2.86 2.14 1.39
62 60 62 65 69 70 72 72
0.88 0.87 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.75 0.67 0.52
6.00 4.89 4.15 3.54 2.96 2.33 1.72 1.09
79 76 78 82 87 88 89 90
0.89 0.88 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.77 0.70 0.55
4.15 3.33 2.80 2.36 1.96 1.53 1.12 0.71
109 105 107 111 116 118 119 120
0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86 0.83 0.79 0.71 0.56
3.19 2.54 2.12 1.79 1.48 1.16 0.85 0.53
126 120 121 126 131 132 134 135
0.89 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.56
1.90 1.50 1.25 1.05 0.87 0.68 0.50 0.32
148 139 140 145 150 151 152 153
0.88 0.87 0.86 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.68 0.54
075
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
400
12.74 10.55 9.08 7.83 6.59 5.23 3.89 2.53
83 82 85 90 96 97 99 100
0.89 0.88 0.86 0.84 0.81 0.76 0.68 0.53
11.68 9.61 8.23 7.06 5.91 4.66 3.43 2.18
103 101 104 110 117 119 121 122
0.90 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.78 0.71 0.56
10.08 8.23 6.99 5.96 4.96 3.88 2.83 1.79
134 131 135 142 149 152 155 156
0.90 0.90 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.80 0.73 0.58
7.25 5.83 4.90 4.14 3.42 2.66 1.93 1.20
194 186 190 198 208 211 214 215
0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.74 0.60
5.68 4.53 3.79 3.19 2.63 2.04 1.48 0.92
227 217 220 22.9 240 242 245 246
0.91 0.90 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.81 0.74 0.59
3.48 2.75 2.29 1.92 1.58 1.23 0.90 0.56
275 260 262 271 282 284 287 288
0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86 0.83 0.79 0.71 0.58
090
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
800
20.3 16.7 14.3 12.2 10.2 8.0 5.8 3.6
182 179 185 196 208 212 216 218
0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.82 0.75 0.60
17.9 14.6 12.4 10.6 8.8 6.8 4.9 3.0
241 236 243 256 271 276 281 283
0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.76 0.62
13.3 10.7 9.0 7.6 6.3 4.8 3.5 2.1
359 347 354 371 389 395 401 403
0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.77 0.64
10.6 8.5 7.1 6.0 4.9 3.8 2.7 1.7
429 411 418 435 456 461 467 470
0.92 0.91 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.63
6.6 5.2 4.4 3.7 3.0 2.3 1.6 1.0
533 505 509 527 549 550 549 551
0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.82 0.75 0.61
105
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
1300
31.4 25.9 22.3 19.2 16.1 12.6 9.1 5.6
285 281 293 314 336 344 353 356
0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.84 0.78 0.64
28.0 23.0 19.6 16.9 14.1 10.9 7.8 4.8
383 376 391 416 444 454 465 469
0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66
21.4 17.3 14.6 12.4 10.3 8.0 5.7 3.4
585 567 584 617 656 667 681 686
0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.80 0.67
17.3 13.9 11.7 9.9 8.2 6.3 4.5 2.7
710 683 699 736 779 791 806 812
0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.67
11.1 8.8 7.3 6.2 5.1 4.0 2.8 1.7
903 858 871 911 960 971 987 993
0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.78 0.64
120
4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00
1900
44.6 36.8 31.5 26.9 22.4 17.4 12.4 7.5
406 402 418 443 470 480 491 495
0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66
40.2 33.0 28.1 23.9 19.8 15.3 10.9 6.5
553 543 562 594 629 641 654 659
0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.80 0.68
31.3 25.4 21.4 18.1 14.8 11.4 8.1 4.8
863 837 859 901 949 963 980 987
0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.69
25.7 20.7 17.3 14.6 11.9 9.2 6.5 3.9
1061 1022 1042 1089 1143 1157 1175 1182
0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.68
16.8 13.3 11.1 9.3 7.6 5.8 4.1 2.4
1378 1311 1326 1376 1437 1443 1438 1445
0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66
nI T2max. T2N PI
(min -1) (Nm) (Nm) (kW)
: Input speed Max. output torque : Nominal output torque : Input power : Efficiency :
All specifications subject to change without notice.
29
Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut
worm wheel
worm on shaft
Dimensions in mm
Center Distance = 30mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S1001 S1002 S1003 S1004 S1005 S1006 S1007 S1008
R1001 R1002 R1003 R1004 R1005 R1006 R1007 R1008
worm wheel
Worm on shaft Dimensions in mm
Center Distance = 45mm
Ratio 47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
Module
No. of Starts
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S1501 S1502 S1503 S1504 S1505 S1506 S1507 S1508
R1501 R1502 R1503 R1504 R1505 R1506 R1507 R1508
All specifications subject to change without notice.
30
Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut worm shaft
Dimensions in mm
worm wheel
worm wheel ring
hollow shaft
Center Distance = 60mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
Hollow Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Ring Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S2001 S2002 S2003 S2004 S2005 S2006 S2007 S2008
R2001 R2002 R2003 R2004 R2005 R2006 R2007 R2008
B2001 B2002 B2003 B2004 B2005 B2006 B2007 B2008
K2001 K2002 K2003 K2004 K2005 K2006 K2007 K2008
worm shaft
Dimensions in mm
worm wheel
worm wheel ring
hollow shaft
Center Distance = 75mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
Hollow Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Ring Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S2501 S2502 S2503 S2504 S2505 S2506 S2507 S2508
R2501 R2502 R2503 R2504 R2505 R2506 R2507 R2508
B2501 B2502 B2503 B2504 B2505 B2506 B2507 B2508
K2501 K2502 K2503 K2504 K2505 K2506 K2507 K2508
All specifications subject to change without notice.
31
Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut worm shaft
Dimensions in mm
worm wheel
hollow shaft
worm wheel ring
Center Distance = 90mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
Hollow Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Ring Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S3001 S3002 S3003 S3004 S3005 S3006 S3007 S3008
R3001 R3002 R3003 R3004 R3005 R3006 R3007 R3008
B3001 B3002 B3003 B3004 B3005 B3006 B3007 B3008
K3001 K3002 K3003 K3004 K3005 K3006 K3007 K3008
worm shaft
Dimensions in mm
worm wheel ring
worm wheel
hollow shaft
Center Distance = 105mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
Hollow Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Ring Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S3501 S3502 S3503 S3504 S3505 S3506 S3507 S3508
R3501 R3502 R3503 R3504 R3505 R3506 R3507 R3508
B3501 B3502 B3503 B3504 B3505 B3506 B3507 B3508
K3501 K3502 K3503 K3504 K3505 K3506 K3507 K3508
All specifications subject to change without notice.
32
Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut
worm shaft
Dimensions in mm
hollow shaft
worm wheel ring
worm wheel
Center Distance = 120mm
Ratio
Module
No. of Starts
47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1
4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Teeth
Worm Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Part No.
Hollow Shaft Part No.
Worm Wheel Ring Part No.
47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37
S4001 S4002 S4003 S4004 S4005 S4006 S4007 S4008
R4001 R4002 R4003 R4004 R4005 R4006 R4007 R4008
B4001 B4002 B4003 B4004 B4005 B4006 B4007 B4008
K4001 K4002 K4003 K4004 K4005 K4006 K4007 K4008
All specifications subject to change without notice.
33
Metric Trapezoidal Thread Spindle & Nuts Spindle Material: Steel C15+C (1.0401) lower carbon steel DIN En10277) Stainless Steel (1.4301- AS2837-1986-304, 1.4305- AS2837-1986-303)
Quality: 7e Lead accuracy 0.10mm per 300mm thread lengths (accumulating) Straightness tolerance 0.10mm per 300mm (accumulating) Right hand thread 10-40mm OD available from stock Left hand thread 16-30mm OD available from stock Larger and smaller thread dimensions available on request Standard stock length: 2mtr, cut in 500mm increments. Max. length 3mtrs. 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required Dimensions in mm
500mm
1000mm
2000mm
Ă&#x2DC; D
p
D3min.
Approx. Weight per mtr. Kg.
TR10x2x500 TR10x3x500 TR12x3x500 TR16x4x500 TR20x4x500 TR24x5x500 TR30x6x500 TR36x6x500 TR40x7x500
TR10x2x1000 TR10x3x1000 TR12x3x1000 TR16x4x1000 TR20x4x1000 TR24x5x1000 TR30x6x1000 TR36x6x1000 TR40x7x1000
TR10x2x2000 TR10x3x2000 TR12x3x2000 TR16x4x2000 TR20x4x2000 TR24x5x2000 TR30x6x2000 TR36x6x2000 TR40x7x2000
10 10 12 16 20 24 30 36 40
2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
05.84 07.84 10.80 14.80 17.50 21.90 27.90 30.50
0.45 0.45 0.75 1.21 2.00 2.72 4.50 6.71 8.00
Part No.
p D d3 L Pitch tolerance > 0.3mm/300mm
Round Nuts
Material: Steel 9SMnPb28 (DIN 1.0718) (standard) Bronze RG7 GC-CuSn7ZnPb (DIN 2.1090) - manufactured to DIN 103 Stainless Steel 1.4305- AS2837-1986-303 Left hand and hexagonal nuts available on request Larger and smaller dimensions available on request
Steel Load* Part No. KN
d p
D
L
Approx. Weight kg.
Load** Max. Part No. KN r.p.m.
Approx. Weight kg.
dxp
Ă&#x2DC; D
L
SR10x2 0.04 BR10x2 0.06 10x2 22 15 SR10x3 0.4 0.04 BR10x3 1.2 1000 0.06 10x3 22 15 SR12x3 0.6 0.04 BR12x3 1.7 1000 0.06 12x3 22s18 SR16x4 1.05 0.16 BR16x4 2.6 1000 0.18 16x4 36 24 SR20x4 1.66 0.18 BR20x4 3.8 1000 0.20 20x4 36 30 SR24x5 2.50 0.44 BR24x5 5.5 1000 0.50 24x5 50 36 SR30x6 3.83 0.76 BR30x6 8.0 600 0.88 30x6 60 45 SR36x6 5.66 1.43 BR36x6 11.0 600 1.70 36x6 75 54 SR40x7 6.83 1.54 BR40x7 16.0 500 1.76 40x7 75 60 * Tensile strength load guideline only for steel nut using safety factor 6 in normal operation ** Maximum load guideline for bronze nuts for rotating spindle in normal operation s For bronze nut BR12x3 D=25mm 1kN =101.9716 kilogram force = 224.8089 pounds force (lbf)
Flanged Round Nuts Material: D2
Dimensions in mm
Bronze
Bronze RG7 GC-CuSn7ZnPb (DIN 2.1090)
D1
. L2
L1
Bronze Flanged Nuts with mounting holes
Note: Bronze flanged nuts with mounting holes are also available in the following sizes: 10x2, 16x4, 14x4, 18x4, 22x5, 26x5, 28x5, 32x6, 44x7, 50x8, 60x9.
All specifications are subject to change without
34
Metric Bushings & Spline Shafts Bushings manufactured to DIN ISO 14-A (DIN 5463-A) Material: Steel ST 52.3 - non alloy structured steel (standard) Bronze RG 7 (GC-Cu Sn 5/7 Zn Pb) Stainless Steel 1.4305
B
Flanged & Clamp style bushings in steel, bronze & stainless steel also available. Please request additional data sheets.
Standard
Part No. Steel
Bronze
Profile
Keys
00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 00007
00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00014 00015
A6x11x14 A6x13x16 A6x16x20 A6x21x25 A6x26x32 A8x32x38 A8x42x48
6 6 6 6 6 8 8
Dimensions in mm D1 D2 H7 H11 D3 11 13 16 21 26 32 42
14 16 20 25 32 38 48
20 28 32 40 52 60 65
B d9
Length
Approx. Weight kg.
3 3.5 4 5 6 6 8
40 45 45 55 60 60 70
0.07 0.17 0.20 0.27 0.70 0.88 0.93
Spline Shafts DIN ISO 14-B (DIN 5463) Material: Steel C45 AS 1443-1994-1045 - Cold drawn, unhardened (standard) Stainless Steel 1.4305 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required Other available lengths: 1500/2000/3000mm Other available profiles: 6 x 18 x 22 6 x 23 x 28 6 x 28 x 34 8 x 36 x 42
Dimensions in mm
Part No./Length 250mm
500mm
1000mm
2000mm
D1 Profile
30001/250 30002/250 30003/250 30004/250 30005/250 30006/250 30007/250
30001/500 30002/500 30003/500 30004/500 30005/500 30006/500 30007/500
30001/1000 30002/1000 30003/1000 30004/1000 30005/1000 30006/1000 30007/1000
30001/2000 30002/2000 30003/2000 30004/2000 30005/2000 30006/2000 30007/2000
B6x11x14 B6x13x16 B6x16x20 B6x21x25 B6x26x32 B8x32x38 B8x42x48
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
35
D2 Keys 6 6 6 6 6 8 8
Weight
B per mtr. 0-0.08-0.07-0.27 0-0.08 11 13 16 21 26 32 42
14 16 20 25 32 38 48
3.00 3.50 4.00 5.00 6.00 6.00 8.00
kg. 00.95 01.29 01.92 03.14 05.01 07.44 12.38
Low Cost Universal Joints with Friction Bearings - DIN 808 - Series "G" • Low cost economy range
• Round bore standard
• Unhardened, unpolished
• Max. angle
Single: 45º Double: 90º
• Greater backlash • Suitable for medium-low speed
• Most sizes in stock
with limited torsional requirements
• Plastic/Brass Universal Joints
• Max. speed 1000rpm
also available - www.tea.net.au
Single
Double
Part No.
Bore
O/D
Single Double
D1
D2
L1
L2
L3
L4
Length
Weight kg. Single Double
101L
121L
8
13
13
42
60
21
.024
.035
102L
122L
10
16
17
52
74
26
.047
.068
103L
123L
12
20
20
62
88
31
.089
.130
104L
124L
16
25
23
74
104
37
.160
.237
105L
125L
20
32
25
86
124
43
.310
.463
Leather Bellows to suit for Single Universal Joints (Fig. 1) Part No. 20246 20262 20247 20248 20249 20250
Size D1/D2 D3 13 16 16 20 25 32
30 32 32 35 40 55
Length L1 L2 12 15 15 20 20 20
42 40 52 62 74 86
for Double Universal Joints (Fig. 1)
No. of Folds
Part No.
Size D1/D2 D3
2 2 2 2 3 3
Length L1 L2
No. of Folds
60 12 20254 30 13 62 15 32 16 20267 74 15 32 16 20255 88 20 35 20 20256 20 104 40 25 20257 20 124 55 32 20258 Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC see page 47 for full details & more sizes
D1/D2
D1/D2
D3
3 3 3 3 5 5
All dimensions in mm. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
36
Precision Single Universal Joints -
DIN 808 - Series "G"
• Wear resistant sliding bushes from
• Max. speed 1000 rpm
cemented & hardened steel
• Keyway optional
• Max. working angle 45º
• Most sizes ex stock • Temperature range: Approx -20o to +150o C (-4oF to + 302oF)
Single
keyway OPTIONAL
Part No.
Bore dh7
OD D
L2
Length L1
C
01G
6
16
34
17
8
keyway a 2
b
Weight kg.
7.0
0.05
(optional)
02G
8
16
40
20
11
2
9.0
0.05
03G
10
22
48
24
12
3
11.4
0.10
04G
12
25
56
28
13
4
13.8
0.16
05G
14
28
60
30
14
5
16.3
0.20
1G
16
32
68
34
16
5
18.3
0.30
2G
18
36
74
37
17
6
20.8
0.45
3G
20
42
82
41
18
6
22.8
0.60
47.5
22
6
24.8
0.95
54
26
8
28.3
1.20
4G
22
45
95
5G
25
50
108
Bellows to suit To fit Part No. OD “D” 01M 02M 03M 04M 05M 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6M
16 18 22 25/26 28/29 32 36/37 42 45/47 50/52 58
A
B
C
28 32 40 48 52 56 66 75 84 92 100
34 40 45 50 56 65 72 82 95 108 122
15 16.5 20.5 24.5 27.5 30.5 35.5 40 45 50 56
Special Neoprene rubber. Resistant to acids, oils, greases, dust & moisture. Filled with grease, they ensure constant lubrication.
D1/D2
D1/D2
D3
For Leather Bellows to suit please see page 47.
All dimensions in mm. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 44 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
37
Precision Double Universal Joints -
DIN 808 - Series "GD" • Max. working angle 90º
• Wear resistant sliding bushes from
• Max. speed 1000 rpm
cemented & hardened steel
• Keyway optional
• Strong precise & versatile; wide application field
• Temperature range: Approx -20o to +150o C (-4oF to + 302oF)
Double
OPTIONAL keyway
Bore dh7
OD D
L1
Length C L3
L4
Keyway a
(optional)
Part No.
b
Weight kg.
01GD
6
16
17
8
22
2
7.0
0.08
56
02GD
8
16
20
11
62
22
2
9.0
0.08
03GD
10
22
24
12
74
26
3
11.4
0.15
04GD
12
25
28
13
86
30
4
13.8
0.25
05GD
14
28
30
14
96
36
5
16.3
0.40
1GD
16
32
34
16
104
36
5
18.3
0.45
2GD
18
36
37
17
114
40
6
20.8
0.70
3GD
20
42
41
18
128
46
6
22.8
1.00
4GD
22
45
47.5
22
145
50
6
24.8
1.55
5GD
25
50
54
26
163
55
8
28.3
1.60
6GD
30
58
61
29
190
68
8
33.3
2.90
7GD
35
70
70
35
212
72
10
38.3
4.75
8GD
40
80
80
40
245
85
12
43.3
7.20
9GD
50
95
95
50
290
100
14
53.8
12.00
All dimensions in mm. Please see page 47 for folding bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 44 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
38
High Speed Precision Universal Joints with Needle Roller Bearings - Series "H" & "HD" • Roller bearings lubricated for life
• Max. angle - Single - 45º, Double - 90º
• No maintenance required
• Round bore standard
• Precise & versatile, silent & smooth running
• Keyway optional
• Suitable for a wide application field
• Telescopic type available on request
• Max. speed - 4000rpm
• Temperature range: Approx. -20oC to +125oC (-4oF to 257oF)
• Zinc Treatment or Nickel Plating available on request
• Many sizes from stock
Single
Double
keyway OPTIONAL
Bore
OD
Single
Double
dh7
D
L1
L2
03H
03HD
10
22
24
48
74
26
12
04H
04HD
12
25
28
56
86
30
13
05H
05HD
14
28
30
60
96
36
1H
1HD
16
32
34
68
104
36
2H
2HD
18
36
37
74
114
3H
3HD
20
42
41
82
4H
4HD
22
45
47.5
95
5H
5HD
25
50
54
6H
6HD
30
58
61
7H
7HD
35
70
8H
8HD
40
80
9H
9HD
50
95
Part No.
Length
Keyway a
Optional
Weight Kg.
b
Single
Double
3
11.4
0.10
0.15
4
13.8
0.16
0.25
13
5
16.3
0.20
0.40
16
5
18.3
0.30
0.45
40
17
6
20.8
0.45
0.70
128
46
18
6
22.8
0.60
1.00
145
50
22
6
24.8
0.95
1.55
108
163
55
26
8
28.3
1.20
1.60
122
190
68
29
8
33.3
1.85
2.90
70
140
212
72
35
10
38.3
3.15
4.75
80
160
245
85
40
12
43.3
4.60
7.20
95
190
290
100
50
14
53.8
7.60
12.00
L3
L4
C
All dimensions are in mm. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 45 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
39
Precision Telescopic Universal Joints
- DIN 808 - Series "G"
• Made of high grade steel
• Max. angle 90º • Max. speed 1000rpm
• Hardened and friction polished
• Round bore standard • Keyway and square hole optional
• Assembled almost back-lash free
• Up to 32mm OD generally ex stock
• Intermediate lengths also available
• Needle Roller Bearing - Series “W”- see data below
square
keyway OPTIONAL
Bore
L4 ±0.5
L min L5 -A
Tele scope
Length
H7
L max L5 ±1
Splined shaft profile
D1
D2
D3
L1 -1
411
8
13
13.0
13
21
130
40
170
412
10
16
19.5
10
20
150
50
413
12
20
19.5
13
24
190
60
414
16
25
26.5
23
37
230
415
20
32
31.5
25
43
416
25
40
39.5
32
54
417
32
50
51.5
41
418
40
63
59.5
47
419
40
75
59.5
4110
50
90
79.5
Part No.
Keyway
Square
Optional
Optional
B P9
T +0.2
square
2
9.0
200
6 x 11 x 14
3
250
6 x 11 x 14
4
70
300
6 x 13 x 16
270
80
350
400
100
500
66
500
150
83
550
200
43
80
570
52
95
700
A
DIN ISO 14
S
Weight Kg.
6
0.100
11.4
8
0.234
13.8
10
0.341
5
18.3
14
0.657
6 x 16 x 20
6
22.8
19
1.214
6 x 21 x 25
8
28.3
24
2.500
650
6 x 26 x 32
10
35.3
30
5.350
750
8 x 32 x 38
12
43.3
36
8.780
200
770
8 x 32 x 38
12
43.3
36
11.230
200
900
8 x 42 x 48
14
53.8
-
21.600
Precision Telescopic Universal Joints with Needle Bearings - DIN 808 - Series "W” Bore
Max. Speed 3000rpm Length
H7
L4 ±0.5
L min L5 -A
Tele scope
L max L5 ±1
Splined shaft profile
Part No.
D1
D2
D3
L1 -1
413W
10
20
19.5
13
24
190
60
250
414W
12
25
26.5
15
28
212
70
415W
16
32
31.5
19
34
252
80
416W
20
40
39.5
23
41
374
417W
25
50
51.5
29
52.5
418W
32
63
59.5
36
65
419W
40
75
59.5
44
4110W
50
90
79.5
54
Keyway
Square
Optional
Optional
Weight
B P9
T +0.2
6 x 11 x 14
3
11.4
8
0.341
282
6 x 13 x 16
4
13.8
10
0.630
332
6 x 16 x 20
5
18.3
14
1.110
100
474
6 x 21 x 25
6
22.8
19
2.300
473
150
623
6 x 26 x 32
8
28.3
24
5.150
514
200
714
8 x 32 x 38
10
35.3
30
8.650
80
570
200
770
8 x 32 x 38
12
43.3
36
11.230
95
700
200
900
8 x 42 x 48
14
53.8
-
21.600
A
DIN ISO 14
S
Kg.
These precision shaft joints are marked during assembly. When putting the shaft joint together again, make sure that the markings on both halves of the joint are opposite each other. It is suggested to use folding bellows filled with lubrication grease for use in difficult to access machinery. All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
40
Stainless Steel Universal Joints - Series "X" •Transmissible torque 30% less than steel series “G”
Single
Double
keyway OPTIONAL
Single & Double Universal Joints - Series "X"
Stainless steel AISI 304 -not heat treated - max. angle 45° type X, 90° type XD - Max Speed 300rpm o o o Approximate temperature range: -180oC to +200 C (-292 F to +39 2F) Single
Double
Part No. Part No.
dH7
D
L2
L1
C
L4
L3
a
Max. Breaking Torque Nm.
Max. Dynamic Torque Nm.
Bore b
Weight Kg. X
XD
01X
01XD
6
16
34
17
8
22
56
2
7
8
30
0.05
0.08
02X
02XD
8
16
40
20
11
22
62
2
9
8
30
0.05
0.08
03X
03XD
10
22
48
24
12
26
74
3
11.4
25
150
0.10
0.15
04X
04XD
12
25
56
28
13
30
86
4
13.8
32
230
0.16
0.25
1X
1XD
16
32
68
34
16
36
104
5
18.3
65
390
0.30
0.45
3X
3XD
20
42
82
41
18
46
128
6
22.8
180
830
0.60
1.00
5X
5XD
25
50
108
54
26
55
163
8
28.3
300
1600
1.20
2.00
6X
6XD
30
58
122
61
29
68
190
8
33.3
400
2300
1.85
2.90
Q
square
keyway OPTIONAL
Precision Telescopic Universal Joints - Series "G" Stainless steel - 1.4305 DIN 808 - hardened & friction polished Size Part No.
Length
L min
Telescope
L max
D1 H7
D2
D3
L1 -1
L4 ±0.5
L5 -A
A
L5 ±1
411S
8
13
13.0
13
21
130
40
170
412S
10
16
19.5
10
20
150
50
413S
12
20
19.5
13
24
190
60
414S
16
25
26.5
23
37
230
415S
20
32
31.5
25
43
270
416S
25
40
39.5
32
54
417S
32
50
51.5
41
418S
40
63
59.5
47
419S
40
75
59.5
4110S
50
90
79.5
Splined shaft Profile DIN ISO 14
Keyway
DIN 6885
Optional
Square Optional
Weight
B P9
T +0.2
SQ
With square
2
9.0
6
0.100
200
6 x 11 x 14
3
11.4
8
0.234
250
6 x 11 x 14
4
13.8
10
0.341
70
300
6 x 13 x 16
5
18.3
14
0.657
80
350
6 x 16 x 20
6
22.8
19
1.214
400
100
500
6 x 21 x 25
8
28.3
24
2.500
66
500
150
650
6 x 26 x 32
10
35.3
30
5.350
83
550
200
750
8 x 32 x 38
12
43.3
36
8.780
43
80
570
200
770
8 x 32 x 38
12
43.3
36
11.230
52
95
700
200
900
8 x 42 x 48
14
53.8
-
21.600
Kg.
All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
41
Technical Appendix Installation Instructions These universal joints and telescopic shafts are now, and will be in the future, indispensable and versatile components for transmitting rotary motion. If two shafts, which are inclined towards each other at a given angle, are connected to each other via a universal joint, and if one of the shafts rotates with a constant regular speed, then the other shaft rotates with a variable angular velocity. This irregularity of motion - which is also called gimbal error - causes the rotating angle to advance and lag alternately, thus effecting the second shaft to rotate with sinusoidal fluctuations. The greater the deflection angle , the greater the non uniformity of the rotating motion. For this reason, single universal joints are only used when variable rotary motion is permissible. The non uniformity of motion can be compensated by using two single universal joints in sequence or by using a double universal joint. When properly installed, the second universal joint can compensate the irregular motion of the first one under the following conditions as enumerated by DIN 808. 1. Correct fork position: when using two single universal joints make sure that the two inside forks are in flat formation, as in the case of double universal joints.
right: forks in flat formation
wrong: fork plane turned by 90째
turned by 90째
2. The deflection angles at both ends must be equal.
right: the angle is equal everywhere
wrong: the angles not equal
and
are
3. The driving and driven shafts may only be shifted in directions parallel to the shafts. axis 1
axis 1
axis 2 axis 2 right: axis 1 is parallel to axis 2
wrong: axis 1 is not parallel to axis 2
4. The bearings of the shaft joint - or of the double universal joint - should be positioned as close as possible to the universal joints.
right: the bearings are as close as possible The shaft joints are delivered without pinholes and clamping studs. The length of the dowel pins is determined by the outer diameter of the universal joint; it must be flush when set.
wrong: the bearings are not close enough We recommend dowel pins DIN 1481. diam. of bore o diam.of o dowel pin
42
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
Technical Appendix Calculating the Dimensions of the Universal Joints - Type 808 - Series "G" Pages 36 & 40 The selection of a universal joint is not determined exclusively by the max. torque to be transmitted. There are also other operative conditions which must be taken into account, such as impact load, angular ratios, angular velocities, etc. The diagrams presented below give approximate preliminary values for calculating the dimensions of the universal joints and contain the corresponding standard values. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
shows the power and torque values transmitted by single precision universal joints during permanent operation with a deflection angle of = 10°. shows the adjustment value to be taken into consideration for greater deflection angles. For deflection angles less than 10°, e.g. between 0° to 5° you may increase the standard power value shown in fig. 1 by 25%.
Notes: There are no general standard values for precision universal joints with friction bearings, for which it is possible to specify the service life, the stress and strain to which the friction surfaces are exposed is determined by the regularity of the lubrication intervals. The loads to which double universal joints are exposed may only be about 90% of the corresponding values for single universal joints. This also applies to telescopic joints.
Figure 1: Adjustment value in relation to the deflection angle Example Given values: the power to be transmitted P = 1.5 kW speed n = 250 r.p.m. defection angle =22° 30' Calculation: adjustment value from figure 2 = 0.45 standard power P' =
Figure 1: Power diagram for precision universal joints with friction bearings in accordance with DIN 808-G
Figure 1 yields for n = 250 r.p.m. and 3.3 kW: shaft joint E 32 x 63 (or E 40 x 63) with the admissible torque value of M = 125 Nm.
43
P
=
1.5 =3.3 kW 0.45
Diagram for Joints - Series "G" & "GD" on pages 37 & 38
0.25
40º
0.30
35º
0.38
30º
0.45
25º
0.55
20º
0.65
15º
0.80
10º
1.00
5º
1.25
CORRECTION FACTOR "F"
45º
WORKING ANGLE " "
Torque in Nm
Joint Size - Outside diameter "D"
kW
Speed (r.p.m.) Example • Power: 0.65 kW • R.P.M.: 230 • With working angle 10° Factor F=1 we get point P. Torque = 27 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 25/26 mm. = Type 04G • With working angle 30° Factor F = 0.45 (kW 0.65 : 0.45 = kW 1.44) we get point P1 Torque = 60 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 32 mm. = Type 1G
Consider that:
Torque in Nm. = 9550 x
Power (kW) Speed (r/min)
Power (hp) Torque in Nm. = 7020 x Speed (r/min) N° 1 kW = 1.35 hp - N° 1 hp = 0.736 kW N° 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm - N° 1 Nm = 0.102 Kgm
44
Diagram for Joints - Series "H" & "HD" High Speed page 39
0.25
40º
0.30
35º
0.40
30º
0.50
25º
0.70
20º
0.80
15º
0.90
10º
1.00
5º
1.25
CORRECTION FACTOR "F"
45º
WORKING ANGLE " "
Torque in Nm
Joint Size - Outside diameter "D"
kW
Speed (r.p.m.) Example • Power: 5.5 kW • R.P.M.: 2300 • With working angle 10° Factor F=1 we get point P. Torque = 23 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 28/29 mm. = Type 05H • With working angle 25° Factor F = 0.70 (kW 5.5 : 0.70 = 7.85 kW) we get point P1 Torque = 33 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 32 mm. = Type 1H
Consider that:
Torque in Nm. = 9550 x
Power (kW) Speed (r/min)
Power (hp) Torque in Nm. = 7020 x Speed (r/min) N° 1 kW = 1.35 hp - N° 1 hp = 0.736 kW N° 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm - N° 1 Nm = 0.102 Kgm
45
Technical Appendix Maintenance & Lubrication for Universal Joints with Friction Bearings and Telescopic Universal Joints. Needle roller bearing universal joints are maintenance free due to their permanent lubrication, and are ideal for use in machine components that are difficult to access. Friction bearing universal joints, single, double and telescopic should be lubricated at regular intervals. Telescopic universal joints are ready for immediate use. They are lubricated with a lithium saponified extreme pressure lubricant on a mineral oil base. Temperature range: -30ยบC +125ยบC Peak temperature: Maximum 140ยบC Please use lubricants with the same specification when re-lubricating.
Lubricating Points: Lubrication is required at least once daily for permanent operation at the lubricating points marked with arrows. For friction bearings this means all the sliding parts on the cube, the fork piece and bearing pins (1) and (2) as well as, for telescopic joints, the sliding parts of the extendable splined profile (3). In harsh environments, the sliding parts should be protected against fibrous particles and steam by means of a folding bellow (See page 47). Permanent self-lubrication for an indefinite time is achieved by filling the folding bellow with the lubricating grease and clamping the ends tight. Note: Maintenance work should be carried out at regular intervals, preferably while carrying out maintenance work on other machine parts. At such times, we also recommend that noise and backlash tests be conducted, or if the working noise and/or backlash of the joint and profile parts deviate from the standard values.
46
Folding Bellows for Universal Joints and Shaft Joints
These folding bellows are made of high quality chrome tanned, black impregnated leather. They are resistant to oil, water and weather and serve as a protection for the joints against dust, humidity and acidic vapours. By filling the folding bellows with lubrication grease and then securing them with band clamp fittings, you achieve life-long lubrication. All dimensions in mm. For non-standard sizes & materials, see pages 48-51. for Single Universal Joints (Fig. 1) Size D1/D2 D3
Part No.
20246 30 13 32 16 20262 32 16 20247 35 20 20248 40 25 20249 55 32 20250 65 40 20251 75 50 20263 75 50 20252 95 63 20264 95 63 20253 75 105 20265 90 120 20266 Temp.: -196ºC to +90ºC
D2
D1
L2
D3
20491 20270 20271 20272 20273 20274 20275 20276 20277 20278 20279
30 32 32 35 40 55 65 75
12 15 15 20 20 20 25 25
60 62 74 88 104 124 156 188
3 3 3 3 5 5 6 6
20261
63
95
30
238
9
75 105 40 245 11 20268 90 120 40 290 11 20269 Higher temperatures & other designs upon request
L2
D3
D2
D1/D2 D3
L1/2
L3
32 35 40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90
12 12 12 12 12 15 15 20 20 20 25
34 40 48 56 60 68 74 82 95 105 122
2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC (-320ºF to +194ºF)
Size
L
Fig. 2
D3
D1/D2
D3
L1/L2
20254 20280 20281 20282 20283 20259 20284 20285 20286 20269
13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90
30 32 35 40 55 65 75 95 105 120
12 15 20 20 20 25 25 30 40 40
L min L max 40 52 62 67 70 73 95 117 137 122
for Universal Joints Simrit (Fig. 3) No. of Folds
80 102 122 137 150 175 245 317 337 360
Higher temperatures & other designs upon request
47
Fig. 3
Simrit synthetic rubber
Length
Part No.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
D1
L11 L min contracted L max extended
for Telescopic Universal Joints (Fig. 2) No. of Folds
16 18 22 26 29 32 37 42 47 52 58
13 16 16 20 25 32 40 50
D1
Fig. 1
Length
No. of Folds
Length L1/2 L3
20254 20267 20255 20256 20257 20258 20259 20260
D2
for Universal Joints Single (Fig. 1) Size
Size D1/D2 D3
Part No.
2 42 12 2 40 15 2 52 15 2 62 20 3 74 20 3 86 20 3 25 108 3 25 105 4 25 132 4 30 130 5 30 166 5 40 160 6 40 190 (-320ºF to +194ºF)
L1 L3
Part No.
for Double Universal Joints (Fig. 1)
No. of Folds
Length L1/2 L3
3 4 6 7 6 6 9 11 11 11
Size
Length
Part No.
D1/D2
D3
L
20287 20288 20289 20290 20291 20292 20293 20294 20295 20296 20297
16 18 22 26 29 32 37 42 47 52 58
36 38 44 50 53 58 65 71 76 88 98
32 38 40 45 50 60 65 75 90 95 95
Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC (-320ºF to +194ºF)
FB range of Protective Bellows
Material: Polyurethane coated polyester fabric type OZ-23, Temperature stability -15oC to +70oC, Includes 2 pieces galvanized hose clips.
Material: Molerit TH59 black Service temperature stability +70oC to max. + 85oC, cold-crack temperature -32oC Includes 2 pieces galvanized hose clips.
Part No.
A
Z-5-FB-500 Z-5-FB-800
10 10
D 29 29
ZD 100 120
AZ 600 920
500 800
38 38
68 68
0.19 0.30
Z-10-FB-700 Z-10-FB-1000
10 10
39 39
100 150
800 1150
700 1000
38 38
75 75
0.23 0.32
Z-25-FB-700 Z-25-FB-1000
15 15
46 46
100 120
800 1120
700 1000
37 63
75 105
0.32 0.43
Z-35/50-FB-600 Z-35/50-FB-1000 Z-35/50-FB-1200 Z-35/50-FB-1500
15 15 15 15
60 60 60 60
72 130 125 180
672 1130 1325 1680
600 1000 1200 1500
63 63 63 63
105 105 105 105
0.23 0.42 0.42 0.51
Z-100-FB-600 Z-100-FB-1000 Z-100-FB-1500
15 15 15
85 85 85
72 130 180
672 1130 1680
600 1000 1500
63 63 63
105 105 105
0.29 0.40 0.44
Z-150-FB-600 Z-150-FB-1000 Z-150-FB-1500
15 15 15
90 90 90
72 130 180
672 1130 1680
600 1000 1500
110 110 110
150 150 150
0.40 0.60 0.82
Z-250-FB-600 Z-250-FB-1000 Z-250-FB-1500
15 15 15
120 120 120
72 130 180
672 1130 1680
600 1000 1500
110 110 110
150 150 150
0.40 0.60 0.82
Z-350-FB-900 Z-350-FB-1500
15 15
145 145
108 1480
1008 1680
900 1500
150 150
200 200
0.70 1.10
Part No.
A
D
ZD
Z-5-FB-265 Z-10-FB-340 Z-25-FB-300 Z-35/50-FB-390
10 10 15 15
29 39 46 60
35 80 70 85
300 420 370 475
265 340 300 390
Z-100-FB-285 Z-150-FB-350 Z-250-FB-390 Z-350-FB-600
15 15 15 15
85 90 120 145
75 50 90 100
60 400 480 700
285 350 390 600
AZ
Stroke
Stroke
D1
D1
D2
Kg.
D2
Kg.
40 40 50 66
76 80 83 102
0.15 0.21 0.25 0.43
85 92 125 172
118 141 166 236
0.29 0.44 1.10 2.40
Notes: The bellows should not be compressed below the ZD dimension or extended beyond the AZ dimension.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications subject to change without notice.
48
Other types of Protective Bellows PVC Round Bellows Many possible dimensions. No tool costs for dipped bellows. Installation of steel flanges possible. Insertion of wire rings possible. Zippers can be sewn in. Standard or made to order options. For shaft sizes 15mm to 250mm.
Round Textile Bellows Reliable protection from contaminants. Suitable for external applications. Individual elements sewn together larger extension and greater compression. Optional external guides and expansion locks.
Special Fabric Round Bellows Abrasion proof. Stable up to 800째C radiating heat. Resistant to: acid, oil and weather. Pressure resistant through re-enforcement with wire rings or spirals. Many different material options are available, please contact us for more information.
Rubber Disk Bellows Absolutely leakproof - individual rubber disks are bonded together. High resistance to mechanical stress. Weather proof & resistant to UV radiation.
Leather Round/Conical/Square/ Pyramid Shaped Bellows Made to order sizes. Fulfills even extremely difficult requirements. Treated industrial grade leather. Protection against water, oil, welding sparks, cutting swarfs etc. Highly flexible and resistant to aging.
Steel Telescopic Sheet Bellows Hinged telescopic sheets. Reliable protection against large quantities of swarf. No glued connections. High linear speeds possible. Rust and acid resistant telescopic sheets. Individual telescopic sheets easy to replace. Also available with complete sealing against cooling emulsions if required.
Homogen Bellows Standard widths: 200-400mm. Lengths 33mm (min) to 200mm (max). Single layered material offering: easy mobility; holds it's shape; high linear speed; effective protection for guide ways.
Rigid Steel Telescopic Sheet Bellows Permanent pressure from the steel sheets. No glued connections - welded under tension. High linear speeds possible. Impervious to liquids. Rust and acid resistant telescopic sheets. Various shapes available. Also available with complete sealing against cooling emulsions if required.
Box Bellows Ideal for increased work safety as moving parts are covered and for greater dimensional stability.
Telescopic Steel Covers Tightly sealed against oil, coolant and swarf. Choice of shapes and dimensions. Minimum maintenance required. Individual guide variation. High linear speed. Walk-on versions available. Specifically developed wiper systems. Construction and development with CAD. Highest precision through laser and numerically controlled manufacturing. Guaranteed precision for repeat orders. Special damping and buffer systems for medium to high speeds.
Polygonal Bellows The standard polygonal are dimensioned hexagonally. Plastic coated material provides protection against oil, cooling emulsions, water and dust, as well as being fluid tight and providing resistance to welding sparks & radiant heat.
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets and further information 49
Enquiry Form for Protective Bellows
Please photocopy this page, complete with as much information as possible, then fax or email to T.E.A. for a quotation. Fax: 07-4129 2437 Email: sales@tea.net.au Company:
Date: Contact Name: Ph:
Fax:
Email:
Type of protective bellow required: c Indoor use
Qty:
c Outdoor use
Material:
c Humidity
Inside diam. D1:
c Dryness
Inside diam. D2: c Heat
Minimum compressed length: (Excluding cuff lengths)
c Dust/sand c Welding splashes
Maximum extended length: (Excluding cuff lengths)
c Saltwater
Maximum diam. of convolutions D3:
Special Features available on request: Internal support c rings for horizontal application External tie straps c for vertical application c Binder on convolution joins, inside & outside c Longitudinal zipper, straight or spiral
c Rust action
Cuff length L1:
c Abrasive action
Cuff length L2:
c Magnetic
Shaft diam. passing through convolutions:
c Vacuum
Working environment:
c Chips large
Other details:
c Chips small
c Double stitch on cuff connections c Flange connections, one end / both ends c Single cuff c No cuff
c Coolant type c Oil type
Working Temperature: Min. =
L1 D1
L2
Max. = Average =
D2 D3
50
Angle Joints - Threaded Stem & Rivet Stud Style Ball socket - Steel with a minimum tensile strenth of Rm 500 N/mm2 Ball stud - Steel with a minimum tensile strength of Rm 600 N/mm2, ball hardened Also available (on request): Stainless steel 1.4305 and 1.4571, Ball socket hardened, Galvanised D4 Ball
A
D3
D2
1
H1
L2
D
Ba
ll
L3
Threaded Stem - Shape C
E
D6
L1
B1
D5
D7 18째
A
Rivet Stud - Shape B
D4 Ball
D3
D2
1
L2
L4
B2
H2
D
Ba
L3
ll
E
D5 18째
* Data available for other sizes, security clips and sealing rings. Please go to www.tea.net.au
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
51
D6
Rod End Male Type - Forged
B C1
d2
d1
d
L L1 L2
• • • •
Insertion type With grease nipple Male thread Material: Body: Zinc plated steel Ball: Bearing steel Insert: Outer race lined with bronze liner
d3
Ordering example: POS = metric size ARE = imperial size L = left hand thread add to P/N eg. POS-5-L Dimensions in mm Load Rating kN
Part No.
d
d3
d2
C1
B
d1
L
L1
L2 Min.
POS 5
5
M 5x0.8
16
6
8
7.70
41
33
20
13
3.25
5.70
.013
POS 6
6
M 6x1.0
18
6.75
9
8.96
45
36
22
13
4.30
7.20
.020
POS 8
8
M 8x1.25
22
9
12
10.4
53
42
25
14
7.20
11.6
.030
POS 10
10
M10x1.5
26
10.5
14
12.9
61
48
29
13
10.0
14.5
.055
POS 12
12
M12x1.75
30
12
16
15.4
69
54
33
13
13.4
17.0
.085
POS 14
14
M14x2.0
34
13.5
19
16.9
77
60
36
16
17.0
24.0
.14
POS 16
16
M16x2.0
40
15
21
19.4
86
66
40
15
21.6
28.5
.21
POS 18
18
M18x1.5
44
16.5
23
21.9
94
72
44
15
26.0
42.5
.28
POS 20
20
M20x1.5
50
18
25
24.4
103
78
47
14
31.5
52.5
.38
POS 22
22
M22x1.5
54
20
28
25.8
111
84
51
15
38.0
57.0
.48
POS 25
25
M24x2.0
60
22
31
29.6
124
94
57
15
47.5
68.0
.64
POS 30
30
M30x2.0
70
25
37
34.8
145
110
66
17
64.0
88.0
1.10
ARE 4
1/4"
UNF-28
19.05
7.14
9.525
8.4
49.2
39.67
25.4
12.7
2.6
4.5
.022
ARE 5
5/16"
UNF-24
22.23
8.74
11.1
11.4
58.72
47.63
31.75
15.88
4.2
8.3
.037
ARE 6
3/8"
UNF-24
25.4
10.31
12.7
13.1
61.93
49.23
31.75
19.05
6.2
13.1
.055
ARE 8
1/2"
UNF-20
33.32
12.7
15.875
17.7
78.59
61.93
38.1
22.23
7.8
16.2
.078
ARE 10
5/8"
UNF-18
38.1
14.27
19.05
21.3
85.73
66.68
41.28
28.58
12.7
24.2
.18
ARE 12
3/4"
UNF-16
44.45
17.45
22.225
24.8
95.25
73.03
44.45
34.93
18.5
33.9
.29
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
52
° »
Dynamic Static
Wt. (Kg.)
Rod End Female Type - Forged
B C1
d2
d1
d
L L1
d3
d4
L2
• • • •
Insertion type With grease nipple Female thread Material: Body: Zinc plated steel Ball: Bearing steel Insert: Outer race lined with bronze liner Ordering example: PHS = metric size AR = imperial size L = left hand thread add to P/N eg. PHS-5-L
L3 S
d5
(mm) Dimensions Load Rating kN
Part No.
d
PHS 5
5
PHS 6
Wt.
d2
C1
B
d1
L
L3
L1
L2 min.
S
d4
d5
M 5x0.8
16
6
8
7.7
35
4
27
10
9
8.5
11
13
3.25
5.70 .016
6
M 6x1.0
18
6.75
9
8.96
39
5
30
12
11
10.0
13
13
4.30
7.20 .022
PHS 8
8
M 8x1.25
22
9
12
10.4
47
5
36
16
14
12.5
16
14
7.20
11.6 .047
PHS 10
10
M10x1.5
26
10.5
14
12.9
56
6.5
43
20
17
15.0
19
13
10.0
14.5 .077
PHS 12
12
M12x1.75
30
12
16
15.4
65
6.5
50
22
19
17.5
22
13
13.4
17.0
.10
PHS 14
14
M14x2.0
34
13.5
19
16.9
74
8
57
25
22
20.0
25
16
17.0
24.0
.16
PHS 16
16
M16x2.0
40
15
21
19.4
84
8
64
28
24
22.0
27
15
21.6
28.5
.22
PHS 18
18
M18x1.5
44
16.5
23
21.9
93
10
71
32
27
25.0
31
15
26.0
42.5
.32
PHS 20
20
M20x1.5
50
18
25
24.4
102
10
77
33
30
27.5
34
14
31.5
42.5
.42
PHS 22
22
M22x1.5
54
20
28
25.8
111
12
84
37
32
30.0
38
15
38.0
57.0
.54
PHS 25
25
M24x2.0
60
22
31
29.6
124
12
94
42
36
33.5
42
15
47.5
68.0
.73
PHS 30
30
M30x2.0
70
25
37
34.8
145
15
110
51
41
40.0
50
17
64.0
88.0 1.10
AR 4
1/4"
UNF-28
19.05 7.14
9.53
8.4
42.85 4.75 33.32 19.05 9.53 9.15 11.91
12.7
2.65
4.5
.025
AR 5
5/16" UNF-24
22.23 8.74
11.1
11.4 46.04 4.75 34.93 19.05 11.1 10.3 12.7
15.88
4.2
8.3
.036
AR 6
3/8"
UNF-24
25.4 10.31 12.7
13.1 53.98 6.35 41.28 23.8
14.3 13.9 17.45 19.05
6.2
13.1 .061
AR 8
1/2"
UNF-20
33.32 12.7 15.88
17.7 70.64 6.35 53.98 30.15 19.1 18.7 22.23 22.23
7.8
16.2 .081
AR 10
5/8"
UNF-18
38.1 14.27 19.05
21.3 82.55 7.92
28.58
12.7
24.2 .190
AR 12
3/4"
UNF-16
44.45 17.45 2.23
24.8 95.25 7.92 73.03 44.45 25.4
28.58 34.93
18.5
33.9 .285
d3
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
53
63.5
38.1
22.2 21.8 25.4 25
° Dynamic Static (Kg) »
Stainless Steel Rod Ends - Forged Metric - Maintenance Free B C1
d2
B C1
d2
d
d
d2 L 1
L2
L1
L12
d3
d4
L22
L2 L3 d3
d5
Male - POS … SS
S
Female - PHS … SS
Part No.
Dimensions in mm Male
Load Ratings (kN)
Female
B
L
L1
L2 min.
L
L1
L2 min.
d4
d5
L3
S
° » Dynamic Static
6.75
9
46
36
21
40
30
12
10
13
5
11
13
7.20
7.65
24
9
12
54
42
25
48
36
16 12.5 16
5
14
14
11.6
12.9
28
10.5
14
62
48
28
57
43
20
19
6.5
17
13
14.5
18
POS 12 SS PHS 12 SS 12 M12x1.75 32
12
16
70
54
32
66
50
22 17.5 22
6.5
19
13
17
24
POS 16 SS PHS 16 SS 16 M16x2.0
42
15
21
87
66
37
85
64
28
27
8
22
15
28.5
39
POS 20 SS PHS 20 SS 20 M20x1.5
50
18
25
103
78
45
102
77
33 27.5 34
10
30
14
42.5
57
Male
Female
d
d3
POS 6 SS
PHS 6 SS
6
M6x1.0
20
POS 8 SS
PHS 8 SS
8
M8x1.25
POS 10 SS PHS 10 SS 10 M10x1.5
d2 C1 max. max.
Weight g. Size Male Female 6 20 22 8 38 47 10 55 77 12 85 100 16 210 200 20 380 420
15
22
Specifications: Body: Stainless steel SS304 Race: Stainless steel SS304C, PTFE Liners bonded to I.D. Ball: AISI 440C stainless steel, heat treated PTFE = poly tetra fluoro ethylene - self lubricating Left Hand Thread: Add “L” to prefix to indicate left hand thread eg. POS 6 L SS
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
54
1
Stainless Steel Rod Ends - Forged Inch sizes Male & Female - Right & Left Material: Housing: SS304 Ball: SS440C heat treated - bonded to housing by PTFE liner PTFE = poly tetra fluoro ethylene - self lubricating
2 2 2
Male Rod End - Right Hand Thread
Male Part No.
W
H
O
D
F2
G2
A2
E
PIM 3/16 SS .1900
.312
.250
.306
.625
1.250
1.563
.750
.4375
PIM 1/4 SS
.2500
.375
.281
.355
.750
1.562
1.937
1.000
.5156
PIM 5/16 SS .3125
.437
.344
.447
.875
1.875
2.312
1.250
.6250
PIM 3/8 SS
.3750
.500
.406
.517
1.000
1.938
2.438
1.250
.7187
PIM 7/16 SS .4375
.562
.437
.586
1.125
2.125
2.688
1.375
.8125
PIM 1/2 SS
.5000
.625
.500
.698
1.312
2.438
3.094
1.500
.937
PIM 5/8 SS
.6250
.750
.562
.839
1.500
2.625
3.375
1.625
1.125
PIM 3/4 SS
.7500
.875
.687
.978
1.750
2.875
3.750
1.750
1.312
B
Thread M .1900 UNF-32 .2500 UNF-28 3125 UNF-24 .3750 UNF-24 .4375 UNF-20 .5000 UNF-20 .6250 UNF-18 .7500 UNF-16
Maximum static Approx. load kN Wt g Radial Axial 3.0
2.11
14
4.44
2.67
23
7.56
4.0
37
12.45
5.78
55
15.79
7.34
78
20.02
10.44
123
24.02
12.45
186
33.91
17.79
295
1 1
1
Female Rod End - Right Hand Thread
Female Part No.
B
W
H
O
D
F1
G1
A1
K
X
J
L
E
PIF 3/16 SS .1900
.312 .250 .306
.625
1.062
1.375
.562
.406
.312
.312
.187
.4375
PIF 1/4 SS
.2500
.375 .281 .355
.750
1.312
1.687
.750
.468
.375
.375
.187
.5156
PIF 5/16 SS .3125
.437 .344 .447
.875
1.375
1.812
.750
.500
.437
.437
.187
.6250
PIF 3/8 SS
.3750
.500 .406 .517 1.000
1.625
2.125
.937
.687
.562
.500
.250
.7187
PIF 7/16 SS .4375
.562 .437 .586 1.125
1.812
2.375 1.062
.750
.625
.562
.250
.8125
PIF 1/2 SS
.5000
.625 .500 .698 1.312
2.125
2.781 1.187
.875
.750
.625
.250
.937
PIF 5/8 SS
.6250
.750 .562 .839 1.500
2.500
3.250 1.500
1.000
.875
.750
.312
1.125
PIF 3/4 SS
.7500
.875 .687 .978 1.750
2.875
3.750 1.750
1.125 1.000
.875
.312
1.312
For left hand thread add “L” to Part No. eg. PIF3/16 L SS All specifications are subject to change without notice.
55
Maximum static Approx. load kN Thread Wt M g. Radial Axial .1900 UNF-32 .2500 UNF-28 .3125 UNF-24 .3750 UNF-24 .4375 UNF-20 .5000 UNF-20 .6250 UNF-18 .7500 UNF-16
6.02
2.22
14
6.78
2.67
23
9.33
4.11
37
12.89
6.00
59
16.00
7.78
82
20.01
10.0
132
24.01
12.45
191
33.80
18.23
286
Right Angle Drives - Type PV - Maintenance Free • An extremely inexpensive bevel gear drive • Bevel gears: plastic • Ratio: 1:1 • Case: cast aluminium • Shafts: steel St 60 ground F
• Bearings: plastic • No axial load • All sizes generally in stock
Power in kW Part No.
Module
A
b
c
d
e
f-h6
PV 10
1.0
10
4
35
15
19.4
5
PV 15
1.5
15
5
50
20
28.4
PV 20
2.0
20
6
60
30
35
8 10
g
h
R
F
4.8
32
6
13
rpm 100
400
800
0.004
0.006
0.01
5.8
45
9
20
0.008
0.04
0.06
7
55
11
24
0.01
0.07
0.11
PV 25
2.5
25
7
70
35
41
12
9
65
12.5
26
0.03
0.12
0.22
PV 30
3.0
30
8
80
40
47.5
15
9
75
15
31
0.05
0.21
0.35
PV 35
3.5
35
9
90
45
54
18
11
85
16
35
0.08
0.35
0.65
Right Angle Drives - Type L High Precision 1:1 Bevel Gearbox with Stainless Steel Shafts • • • • • • • • •
Case: black anodized aluminium alloy Bevel Gears: steel BS 970 817 M40T Shafts: stainless steel Bearings: ball races sealed or shielded type Lubrication: Kennomax L2 Grease - packed for life Temperature Range: -20°C to +150°C Max. input speed: 3000rpm Max. backlash: 1° Torque & Speed Graph: available on request
Part No. Dimension:
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
56
L2
L3
A
40
60
80
B
40
60
80
C
20
30
40
D
10
15
20
F
25
40
55
H
12
20
30
J
4
5
5
K
15
20
25
L
4
8
12
M
M4
M5
M6
N Weight grms
L1
5
7
9
80
265
665
Right Angle Drive - Type LMA For general mechanical engineering
Type LMA available with 1or 2 output shaft • • • • •
Lightweight design Lubrication: Grease - for lifetime Ratio: 1:1 (Ratio 2:1 available for LMA60, LMA120 and LMA240) Max input speed: 1000rpm Housing: Aluminium alloy
Type Input Speed rpm 1000 800 600 400 200 100 80 60 40 20 10
LMA12 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.083 0.79 0.067 0.80 0.050 0.80 0.034 0.81 0.017 0.83 0.009 0.84 0.007 0.85 0.005 0.85 0.004 0.89 0.002 1.08 0.001 1.30
LMA24 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.204 1.95 0.164 1.96 0.124 1.98 0.084 2.00 0.043 2.03 0.022 2.07 0.017 2.08 0.013 2.10 0.009 2.25 0.007 3.13 0.005 4.34
LMA60 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.513 4.90 0.438 5.23 0.362 5.76 0.276 6.59 0.144 6.89 0.073 6.98 0.059 7.01 0.044 7.05 0.032 7.57 0.022 10.51 0.015 14.60
LMA120 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 1.026 9.80 0.842 10.05 0.723 11.51 0.552 13.17 0.297 14.18 0.150 14.34 0.120 14.38 0.091 14.45 0.064 15.36 0.043 20.39 0.028 27.08
LMA240 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 2.084 19.90 1.795 21.43 1.422 22.63 0.964 23.02 0.496 23.69 0.255 24.39 0.206 24.62 0.157 24.91 0.112 26.74 0.075 35.96 0.047 45.00
Lifetime: 6000h Uniform load Continuous operation
Part No. LM A12-1 LM A12-1R LM A12-1D LM A24-1 LM A24-1R LM A24-1D LM A60-1 LM A60-1R LM A60-1D LM A120-1 LM A120-1R LM A120-1D LM A240-1 LM A240-1R LM A240-1D
i 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1
D1 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 15 15 15 17 17 17
D2 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
H1 16 16 16 21 21 21 25 25 25 30 30 30 35 35 35
L1 20 20 20 29 29 29 35 35 35 42 42 42 50 50 50
Torque graphs available on request. All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
L2 25.0 25.0 25.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 43.5 43.5 43.5 53.0 53.0 53.0 64.0 64.0 64.0
L3 17.5 17.5 17.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 32.0 32.0 32.0 37.5 37.5 37.5
57
L4 20 20 20 17 17 17 21 21 21 29 29 29 31 31 31
L5 17 17 17 16 16 16 19 19 19 27 27 27 29 29 29
L6 16.0 16.0 16.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 32.5 32.5 32.5 40.0 40.0 40.0
L7 17 17 17 20 20 20 23 23 23 27 27 27 32 32 32
L8 23 23 23 28 28 28
L9 12 12 12 14 14 14 22 22 22 22 22 22
B 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5
Kg. 0.2 0.2 0.21 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.94 0.94 0.94 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.8 2.8 2.8
Spiral Bevel Right Angle Gearbox - Type DZ & ZP DZ and ZP right angle drives are designed for industrial applications where rotary power must be transferred between two shafts at right angles to each other.
Features: Housing - single piece aluminium alloy casting with mounting points and centering conditions. Gears - spiral bevel gears cut on GLEASON hobbing machines to ensure maximum load capacity. Nickel chrome steel gears with surface case hardened gear teeth; this ensures maximum service life while leaving the tooth core tough and flexible to resist mechanical shocks. Units are manufactured with backlash tolerances to ensure perfect gear engagement and silent operation. Shafts - manufactured in steel with 80kg/mm2 surface treatment for corrosion protection. Shaft coupling on the power take-off has ISO standard keyways (except for size 1). Bearings - large bearings in deep races. Oil Seals - oil seal rings are fitted to all models. Special seal rings for high and low temperatures are available on request. Lubrication - units are supplied already filled with lubricant. Size 1 units are filled with long-life grease, all other sizes are oil filled - use Shell Omala 100 or similar mineral oil. Table 1a shows the following information for each model: the shaft diameter, the transmission ratio, the input shaft A, the output shaft B or C, and the direction of the rotation. In accordance with accepted usage, shaft A is the input shaft, on models with a 2:1 ratio, shaft A is the fast shaft. Table 1a - Type DZ 1:1, 2:1 Size
1
2
3
4
5
Shaft O mm
Approx. Weight Kg.
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
8
1:1
A
B
DZ 10S 3FAB
0.28
8
2:1
A
B
DZ 12S 3FAB
0.28
8
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 11 3FABC
0.30
8
2:1
A
B-C
DZ 13 3FABC
0.30
15
1:1
A
B
DZ 20S 3FAB
1.1
15
2:1
A
B
DZ 22S 3FAB
1.1
15
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 21 3FABC
1.2
15
2:1
A
B-C
DZ 23 3FABC
1.2
20
1:1
A
B
DZ 30S 3FAB
3.4
20
2:1
A
B
DZ 32S 3FAB
3.4
20
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 31 3FABC
3.5
20
2:1
A
B-C
DZ 33 3FABC
3.5
25
1:1
A
B
DZ 40S 3FAB
5.5
25
2:1
A
B
DZ 42S 3FAB
5.5
25
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 41 3FABC
5.8
25
2:1
A
B-C
DZ 43 3FABC
5.8
35
1:1
A
B
DZ 50S 3FAB
8.1
35
2:1
A
B
DZ 52S 3FAB
8.1
35
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 51 3FABC
8.8
35
2:1
A
B-C
DZ 53 3FABC
8.8
14mm hollow input & output +5mm keyway
1:1
A
B-C
DZ505-60
0.7
25mm hollow input 25.35 splined output 6 keys
1:1
A
B-C
DZ 512-31
4.1
Special
Special
58
Table 1b shows the following information for each model: the shaft diameter, the transmission ratio, the input shaft A, the output shaft B or C, and the direction of the rotation. In accordance with accepted usage, shaft A is the input shaft, on models with a 2:1 and 3:1 ratio, shaft A is the fast shaft.
Table 1b - Type ZP 1:1, 2:1, 3:1 Size
2
Shaft O mm
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
Approx. Weight Kg.
14
3:1
A
B
ZP 24S 4PAB
2.0
14
3:1
A
B-C
ZP 25 4PABC
2.0
1:1
A
B-C
ZP 211-4P3V
1.9
2:1
A
B-C
ZP 213-4P3V
1.9
3:1
A
B-C
ZP 215-4P3V
1.9
19
3:1
A
B
ZP 34S 4PAB
4.5
19
3:1
A
B-C
ZP 35 4PABC
4.5
1:1
A
B-C
ZP 311-4P3V
4.4
2:1
A
B-C
ZP 313-4P3V
4.4
3:1
A
B-C
ZP 315-4P3V
4.4
24
3:1
A
B
ZP 44S 4PAB
4.6
24
3:1
A
B-C
ZP 45 4PABC
4.6
14 input & keyed hollow output
2
3
19 input & keyed hollow output
3
4
How to select the correct right angle spiral bevel gearbox for your application: Selecting the correct type of right angle spiral bevel gears is not simply a question of defining the power required in relation to rpm and the torque to be transmitted. It also involves defining the conditions under which the gear box will be used. Defining operating conditions involves taking into consideration a number of factors such as the type of operating cycles (intermittent/continuous), radial and axial loads on the shaft ends, maximum and minimum temperatures, ambient conditions (eg. dust/dirt levels), and the type of lubricant used.
To 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
select the correct sized right angle spiral bevel gear box proceed as follows: Use Table 2 to define the Service Factor for your application (Fs). Calculate the Rated Power (Pn); Pn=Pe (kW) x Fs. On Table 3 (required ratio) use the output speed and the rated power (Pn) to select the right angle gear size and transmission ratio required for your application. Check that the radial and axial load at the midpoint of the exposed shaft end does not exceed the values shown in Table 4. Check that the operating temperature does not exceed -20째C to + 80째C. If you require a 2:1 or 3:1 ratio do not use a speed multiplier with an input more than 750rpm and 500rpm respectively. If the unit is to be used in very dusty conditions, protect the oil seal against direct exposure to dust to prevent abrasive damage which might shorten the working life of the unit.
59
Table 2 Service Factor Hours of operation per day
3 0.7 0.9 1.3
Uniform Load Load with moderate shock Load with shock
8 0.9 1 1.6
12 1 1.3 1.8
24 1.3 1.8 2.3
Table 3a Torque & Power Rating for DZ & ZP 1:1 Ratio 1:1 Size Model
1 DZ 10 DZ 11
Output Torque
Nm
Output in rpm
50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
DZ 20 DZ 21
Nm
4.7 3.9 3.3 2.8 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.7
kW
0.02 0.04 0.07 0.12 0.19 0.30 0.39 0.53
16.5 13.9 11.7 9.8 8.2 7.2 6.6 5.9
Nm kW
0.09 0.15 0.24 0.41 0.69 1.05 1.37 1.86
28.8 24.2 20.3 20.5 17.1 12.5 11.4 10.3
ZP 311
DZ 30 DZ 31
ZP 211
Nm kW
Input Power (Pn)
3
2
0.15 0.25 0.43 0.86 0.72 1.83 2.39 3.25
Nm kW
53.1 44.6 37.5 31.6 26.5 23.1 21.1 19.1
4 DZ 40 DZ 41 Nm
kW
0.28 0.47 0.79 1.32 2.22 3.38 4.42 5.99
75.7 63.7 53.5 45.0 37.9 32.9 30.1 27.2
0.40 0.67 1.12 1.89 3.17 4.82 6.30 8.54
5 DZ 50 DZ 51 Nm
kW
87.3 73.4 61.8 51.9 43.7 38.0 34.7 31.4
0.46 0.77 1.29 2.17 3.66 5.56 7.27 9.86
kW
119.5 100.5 84.5 71.0 59.7 51.9 47.5 42.9
0.63 1.05 1.77 2.98 5.00 7.61 9.95 13.48
Table 3b Torque & Power Rating for DZ & ZP 2:1 Ratio 2:1 Size Model
1 DZ 12 DZ 13
Output Torque
Nm
Output in rpm
50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
DZ 22 DZ 23 Nm
4.0 3.4 2.8 2.4 2.0 1.7 1.6 1.4
ZP 213 Nm
kW
Input Power (Pn)
3
2
kW
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.17 0.26 0.33 0.45
14.6 12.3 10.3 8.7 7.3 6.3 5.8 5.2
0.08 0.13 0.22 0.36 0.61 0.93 1.21 1.65
DZ 32 DZ 33 Nm
kW
28.1 23.7 19.9 16.7 14.1 12.2 11.2 10.1
0.15 0.25 0.42 0.70 1.18 1.79 2.34 3.17
Nm kW
42.5 35.7 30.1 25.3 21.3 18.5 16.9 15.3
0.22 0.37 0.63 1.06 1.78 2.71 3.54 4.80
Table 3c Torque & Power Rating for ZP 3:1 Ratio 3:1 Size Model Output Torque
2
3&4
ZP 24, ZP 25, ZP 215
ZP 34, ZP 35, ZP 315, ZP44, ZP45
Nm
Output in rpm
50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
Nm kW
Input Power (Pn) 27.5 23.1 19.4 16.3 13.7 12.0 10.9 9.9
0.14 0.24 0.41 0.68 1.15 1.75 2.29 3.10
kW 63.4 53.3 44.9 37.7 31.7 27.6 25.2 22.8
ZP 313
0.33 0.56 0.94 1.58 2.66 4.04 5.28 7.16
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
60
4 DZ 42 DZ 43 Nm
kW
71.3 59.9 50.4 42.4 35.6 31.0 28.3 25.6
0.37 0.63 1.06 1.77 2.98 4.54 5.93 8.04
Nm kW
82.3 69.2 58.2 48.9 41.1 35.8 32.7 29.6
5 DZ 52 DZ 53
0.43 0.72 1.22 2.05 3.44 5.24 6.85 9.28
kW
100.5 0.53 84.5 0.88 71.0 1.49 59.7 2.50 50.2 4.21 43.7 6.40 39.9 8.36 36.1 11.34
Table 4a Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for DZ & ZP 1:1 Ratio 1:1 Size Model
Output in rpm
1 DZ 10 DZ 11 Radial Load (N) Radial Axial Axial Load (N) 50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
139 117 98 83 70 60 55 50
94 79 66 56 47 41 37 34
3
2 DZ 20 DZ 21 Radial Axial
328 276 232 195 164 142 130 118
Axial
220 185 156 131 110 96 87 79
430 361 304 256 215 187 171 154
ZP 311 Radial
DZ 30 DZ 31 Radial
ZP 211 Radial
Axial
348 293 246 207 174 151 139 125
684 575 484 407 342 297 272 246
4 DZ 40 DZ 41 Radial
Axial
458 385 324 273 229 199 182 165
826 695 584 491 413 359 329 297
554 465 391 329 277 241 220 199
5 DZ 50 DZ 51 Radial
Axial
953 802 674 567 477 414 379 342
639 537 452 380 319 278 254 229
Axial
1102 927 779 655 551 479 438 396
736 619 520 438 368 320 293 264
Table 4b Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for DZ & ZP 2:1 Ratio 2:1 Size Model
Output in rpm
1 DZ 12 DZ 13 Radial Load (N) Radial Axial Axial Load (N) 50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
107 90 76 64 54 47 43 39
76 64 54 45 38 33 30 27
3
2 DZ 22 DZ 23 Radial Axial
276 232 195 164 138 120 110 99
168 141 119 100 84 73 67 60
DZ 32 DZ 33 Radial
ZP 213 Radial Axial
370 311 262 220 185 161 147 133
263 221 186 157 132 114 105 95
Axial
548 461 387 326 274 238 218 197
361 303 255 214 180 157 143 130
Table 4c Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for ZP 3:1 Ratio 3:1 Size Model Radial Load (N)
2
3&4
ZP 24, ZP 25, ZP 215
ZP 34, ZP 35, ZP 315, ZP44, ZP45
Radial
Output in rpm
50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000
Radial Axial
Axial Load (N)
357 301 253 213 179 155 142 128
199 167 141 118 99 86 79 71
ZP 313 Radial
Axial
619 521 438 368 310 269 246 222
346 291 245 206 173 151 138 124
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
61
4 DZ 42 DZ 43 Radial
Axial
696 585 492 414 348 303 277 250
422 355 299 251 211 184 168 152
5 DZ 52 DZ 53 Radial
Axial
803 675 568 478 402 349 319 289
483 406 341 287 241 210 192 173
Axial
927 779 655 551 463 403 369 333
562 473 397 334 281 244 223 202
Dimensions for Type DZ Size 1
Size 1
1
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
1:1
B
DZ10S 3FAB
2:1
B
DZ12S 3FAB
1:1
B&C
DZ11 3FABC
2:1
B&C
DZ13 3FABC
Output
Part Number
B
DZ20S 3FAB
B
DZ22S 3FAB
1:1
B&C
DZ21 3FABC
2:1
B&C
DZ23 3FABC
A
Size 2
Size 2
Ratio
Input
1:1 2:1
2
A
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
62
Dimensions for Type DZ Size 3
Size 3
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
B
DZ30S 3FAB
B
DZ32S 3FAB
1:1
B&C
DZ31 3FABC
2:1
B&C
DZ33 3FABC
Output
Part Number
B
DZ40S 3FAB
B
DZ42S 3FAB
1:1
B&C
DZ41 3FABC
2:1
B&C
DZ43 3FABC
1:1 2:1
3
A
Size 4
Size 4
Ratio
Input
1:1 2:1
4
A
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
63
Dimensions for Type DZ & DZ Specials Size 5
Size 5
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
B
DZ50S 3FAB
B
DZ52S 3FAB
1:1
B&C
DZ51 3FABC
2:1
B&C
DZ53 3FABC
1:1 2:1
5
A
DZ Special
Special
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
1:1
A
B&C
DZ505-60
Special All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
64
Dimensions for Type DZ Specials & Type ZP Special
Special
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
1:1
A
B&C
Ratio
Input
Output
Part Number
B
ZP 24S 4PAB
3:1
A B&C
ZP 25 4PABC
DZ512-31
Special
Size 2 Type ZP
Size 2
2 All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
65
Dimensions for Type ZP Size 2 Hollow Output
Size 2
Ratio
Input
Output
1:1 2:1
ZP 211 4P3V A
B&C
3:1
2
Part Number
ZP 213 4P3V ZP 215 4P3V
Size 3
Size 3
Ratio
Input
3:1
A
3
Output
Part Number
B
ZP 34S 4PAB
B&C
ZP 35 4PABC
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
66
Dimensions for Type ZP Size 3 Hollow Output
Size 3
Ratio
Input
Output
1:1 2:1
ZP 311 4P3V A
B&C
3:1
3
Part Number
ZP 313 4P3V ZP 315 4P3V
Size 4
Size 4
Ratio
Input
3:1
A
4 All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Output
Part Number
B
ZP 44S 4PAB
B&C
ZP 45 4PABC
67
Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type BG
General Spiral bevel gearboxes BG incorporate the most modern advances in bevel gearbox design and construction. These gearboxes offer an extensive range of ratios together with an excellent power to size relationship as well as low noise levels even at high speed operation.
1. Construction Features - The gearbox, which is made in cast iron, is of cuboid design with all external faces machined and with threaded fixing positions on each face (useable depth of threaded hole = twice the diameter). - Input and output covers and housings are supplied with two location spigot diameters (h7) together with threaded fixing holes (except size BG75) for possible co-axial fixing. - The alloy steel spiral bevel gears are cut in the GLEASON system, case hardened, tempered and lapped to the exact mounting position. - Input and output shafts are manufactured in hardened and tempered steel with all surfaces ground. - Input and output shaft tolerance (j6). Hollow shaft tolerance (H7). - All shafts supplied with threaded end to UNI 3221 - DIN 332. - Keyways to UNI 6604 - DIN 6885. On request and dependent upon speed type BG spiral bevel gearboxes may be assembled with minimum backlash. Due to the quality of the gears and machining tolerances, an overall efficiency of between 94 & 97% can be expected. The modular construction of BG spiral bevel gearboxes permits up to six input/output shafts (except ratio 1:1).
2. Lubrication BG spiral bevel gearboxes are supplied grease lubricated for input speeds up to 1000rpm, for higher speeds or on request oil lubrication is available. In this case the gearboxes will be supplied with a filler/breather plug, level indicator and drain plug. Filler, level and drain positions are indicated as follows: Filler/breather plug Level indicator plug Drain plug Motorised spiral bevel gearboxes, reversing bevel gearboxes and disengaging bevel gearboxes are usually oil lubricated. For high speed and/or high ambient temperature conditions it may be necessary to apply external cooling. Please consult T.E.A.
68
3. Construction Types Execution
Description
Type
Page
Execution
Type
2 output shafts Reduction type 0
A
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
BS
78
98
4
BH
0
BHC
80
BHS
0
1 output shaft Reduction type
2 hollow output shafts -Keyway (BH) -Shrink Disks (BHC) - Splined (BHS) 2 fast shafts Counter rotating
100 102
0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
See www.tea.net.au for BHS type
5
0
AS
1 slow shaft Single projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction type Ratio1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
Page
0
1 output shaft Reduction type
AD
Description 0
0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
82
- Hollow output with keyway (AH) - Shrink disks (AHC) - Splined hollow output (AHS)
84
C
1 slow shaft Single projection With bearing housing Reduction type 0
104
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1,
0
AH AHC
0
1 slow shaft Counter rotating 0
86
DR
0
AHS
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
88
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
0
AP
2 output shafts Reinforced (thick) Reduction type 0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
106
0
90
DX
Speed Increaser (X type) 2 counter rotating output shafts
108
0
Ratio 1:1, 1:1.5, 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5
0
AX
Speed increaser (X type) 2 output shafts Input shaft larger
IEC Motor flange adaptor 0
M...
92
0
Ratio1:1.5, 1:2
Ratio 1:1, 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5
110
0
B
1 slow shaft Double projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction Type
112
Spiral bevel gearboxes with multiple shafts 0
090째
94
I0 D0
0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1
reversing gear type I0 and disengaging gear type D0
113
0
Ratio 1:1, 1:2
0
BD
1 slow shaft Single projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction type
0
Co-axial reversing gear
96
IC
0
Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1 The bottom shaft is the input shaft. Arrows indicate the direction of rotation relevant to the rotation of the input shaft.
69
0
Ratio 1:1
113
4. Selection The selection assumes the following conditions: (for other conditions please refer to page 71) - Life rating: 20000 hours - Prime mover: Electric motor - Duty factor: Uniform load - Rotation: Right and left hand - Service time: 8 hours a day - Duty factor: 1 start/hour - Ambient conditions: Temperature 20°C - altitude <1000m above sea level
Unit Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
Input rpm 2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10
Ratio 1:1 Power Torque input output kW Nm 4.00 2.99 2.44 1.76 1.52 1.22 0.87 0.23 0.13 0.026
13.1 13.8 14.9 16.2 17.4 18.7 20.0 21.8 23.6 24.9
Ratio 1:1.5 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
Ratio 1:2 Power Torque input output kW Nm 2.09 1.55 1.22 0.88 0.77 0.61 0.44 0.12 0.07 0.01
13.7 14.1 14.9 16.2 17.4 18.7 20.0 21.7 23.6 24.9
Ratio 1:3 Power Torque input output kW Nm 0.77 0.60 0.49 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.17 0.04 0.03 0.01
7.5 8.1 8.9 9.7 10.5 11.1 11.5 11.2 12.7 13.1
Ratio 1:4 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
Ratio 1:5 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
2800
21.15
69.2
9.57
46.9
8.46
55.3
3.12
30.6
2.69
35.2
1.72
28
2000 1500 1000 800 600
15.52 11.92 8.13 6.59 5.01
71.1 72.9 74.6 75.5 76.4
6.99 5.36 3.65 2.95 2.25
48.1 49.0 50.1 50.7 51.4
6.15 4.68 3.20 2.59 1.96
56.4 57.2 58.6 59.4 59.9
2.28 1.74 1.18 0.95 0.72
31.2 31.8 32.3 32.6 33.0
1.5 1.13 0.77 0.62 0.47
27.5 27.6 28.3 28.5 28.8
1.25 0.94 0.64 0.51 0.39
28.4 28.7 29.2 29.3 29.6
400 100
3.41 0.90
78.0 81.7
1.51 0.39
52.0 53.9
1.33 0.35
60.7 63.4
0.48 0.13
33.5 34.3
0.32 0.08
29 29.7
0.26 0.07
29.7 30.4
50
0.46
82.8
0.20
54.6
0.17
64.0
0.07
34.5
0.04
29.9
0.04
30.6
10
0.09
83.9
0.04
55.2
0.04
64.6
0.01
34.8
0.01
30.2
0.01
30.9
2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10
23.24 17.39 13.48 9.35 7.62 5.86 4.00 1.07 0.55 0.12
76.1 79.6 82.4 85.8 87.3 89.5 91.7 97.8 100.1 103.3
15.82 11.54 8.83 6.05 4.88 3.72 2.52 0.65 0.33 0.07
77.7 79.4 80.8 83.0 83.8 85.4 86.7 89.8 91.0 92.4
10.60 7.79 5.92 4.02 3.25 2.46 1.66 0.42 0.21 0.04
69.4 71.3 72.4 73.5 74.3 75.1 76.1 76.5 76.8 77.3
4.58 3.35 2.55 1.73 1.40 1.07 0.72 0.18 0.09 0.01
44.9 46.0 46.8 47.5 48.3 48.6 49.4 50.5 50.7 50.9
5.07 3.69 2.81 1.91 1.53 1.17 0.78 0.20 0.10 0.03
66.4 67.6 68.6 69.9 70.3 71.1 71.8 72.9 74.1 74.8
3.47 2.61 1.99 1.35 1.09 0.85 0.57 0.14 0.08 0.01
56.8 59.9 60.8 61.7 62.4 64.2 64.8 66.8 67.3 68.6
2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10
53.04 39.52 30.68 21.19 17.29 13.26 9.10 2.47 1.17 0.26
173.4 180.9 187.2 194.7 198.3 203.4 208.3 222.1 227.1 234.6
30.55 22.88 17..81 12.22 10.14 7.80 5.33 1.30 0.65 0.13
149.7 157.3 162.8 168.4 174.0 177.8 183.4 187.2 190.9 194.7
20.15 14.95 11.44 7.80 6.37 4.81 3.25 0.78 0.39 0.13
132.3 137.2 139.7 142.2 144.8 147.2 149.7 154.7 159.7 162.2
9.53 7.49 5.72 3.87 3.16 2.41 1.64 0.42 0.21 0.04
93.6 102.9 104.7 106.7 108.5 110.5 112.3 116.0 117.9 119.8
7.05 5.38 4.08 2.76 2.24 1.69 1.14 0.30 0.16 0.03
92.3 98.5 99.8 101.1 102.3 103.6 104.7 109.8 112.3 114.7
4.58 3.43 2.61 1.77 1.44 1.11 0.74 0.20 0.09 0.03
74.8 78.6 79.8 81.1 82.4 84.2 85.5 87.3 88.6 89.8
2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10
113.36 83.33 64.22 43.94 35.88 27.43 18.85 4.94 2.47 0.52
371.2 382.2 392.6 403.0 411.4 419.9 430.3 453.7 462.1 477.1
75.01 53.3 40.82 27.82 22.62 17.29 11.70 3.12 1.56 0.26
355.5 366.6 374.4 381.9 390 396.5 404.3 423.1 432.1 442
38.87 28.60 21.97 15.08 12.22 9.23 6.24 1.69 0.78 0.17
254.8 261.3 267.8 275.6 279.15 283.4 288.6 300.3 304.2 310.7
19.6 14.3 10.9 7.49 6.06 4.62 3.12 0.81 0.40 0.08
192.4 197.6 200.2 205.4 208 211.2 214.5 221.6 223.6 227.5
15.99 11.70 8.84 5.98 4.81 3.64 2.47 0.65 0.33 0.07
209.3 213.2 217.1 221.0 222.3 225.5 229.4 236.6 238.5 241.8
12.87 9.36 7.15 4.81 3.90 2.99 1.95 0.52 0.26 0.05
210.6 215.1 219 222.3 224.9 227.5 229.4 236.6 239.2 241.8
70
Unit Size
Input rpm
Ratio 1:1 Power Torque input output kW Nm
2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50
133.3 98 75.5 51.7 42.2 32.3 22.1 5.85 2.99
BG42
BG55
BG75
Ratio 1:1.5 Power Torque input output kW Nm
437 450 461 474 484 494 507 534 546
81.2 59.8 45.8 31.5 25.6 19.5 13.3 3.5 1.8
399 412 421 434 441 447 459 481 489
Ratio 1:2 Power Torque input output kW Nm 45.7 33.5 25.7 17.6 14.3 10.9 7.4 1.9 0.9
Ratio 1:3 Power Torque input output kW Nm
299 308 316 324 329 334 339 354 361
23.1 16.9 12.8 8.8 7.1 5.4 3.6 0.9 0.48
228 231 235 242 244 248 252 261 264
Ratio 1:4 Power Torque input output kW Nm 17.8 13 9.8 6.7 5.4 4.1 2.8 0.7 0.33
234 238 243 248 251 254 257 265 268
Ratio 1:5 Power Torque input output kW Nm 12.8 9.3 7.1 4.8 3.9 2.9 1.9 0.5 0.26
211 216 219 222 225 228 230 237 239
10
0.65
562
0.4
498
0.2
365
0.09
268
0.07
272
0.05
242
1500 1000 800 600
162.5 111.8 91 68.9
992 1023 1040 1053
115.3 78.9 64.2 49
1057 1086 1105 1123
57.7 39.7 32.2 24.4
706 729 738 749
26 18 14.6 11
481 497 502 508
25.3 17.2 14 10.6
621 636 644 651
19.5 13.2 10.6 8.1
595 607 614 621
400 100
47.5 12.6
1092 1161
34 8.9
1161 1235
16.7 4.4
768 803
7.5 1.95
517 541
7.2 1.8
662 688
5.4 1.4
629 654
50
6.5
1186
4.5
1264
2.2
822
1.04
547
0.9
694
0.78
660
10
1.3
1223
0.9
1300
0.46
836
0.21
556
0.20
706
0.13
670
1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10
344 240 196 151 104 27 14 3
2109 2202 2264 2301 2371 2552 2612 2700
191 133 108 82 56 14 8 1.5
1754 1817 1847 1888 1937 2061 2102 2161
142 98 79 60 42 10 5 1.1
1723 1778 1808 1841 1884 1992 2028 2076
96 66 53 42 27 7.8 3.9 0.7
1772 1823 1850 1881 1918 2015 2046 2088
60 42 34 25 17 3.9 2.6 0.5
1466 1505 1525 1547 1576 1645 1667 1698
42 29 23 18 12 2.6 1.3 0.26
1278 1309 1323 1342 1364 1418 1435 1457
If the direction of rotation is bi-directional, reduce the performance data by 30%.
5. Selection Procedure When working conditions are different from those in the selection table, service factors must be considered. The service factors are as following: H : Service Time Hours / days
24
18
12
8
4
2
1
H
1.25
1.18
1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
Theoric time
60,000
40,000
20,000
15,000
10,000
5,000
2,000
L
1.3
1.15
1
0.95
0.9
0.85
0.8
L : Life rating
C : Duty factor
No. of starts / hour irregular
1
5
20
60
120
Uniform
1
1
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.7
Moderate shock
1
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.7
3.2
Heavy shock
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.7
3.2
3.8
The required torque (M) will be multiplied with the above mentioned factors to obtain the value of calculation torque (MU) to use to select a spiral bevel gearboxes of the correct size. MU = M x (H x L x C) All specifications are subject to change without notice.
71
6. Thermal Ratings (PT) The thermal rating is that power that can be applied at the input of the bevel gearboxes, working continuously at an ambient temperature of 20째 C, such as to maintain the lubrication temperature under 100째 C. Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
Input Power PT (kW)
1.5
3
6
10
16
20
35
60
Input RPM
2800
2800
2800
2800
2000
2000
1500
1000
.
When conditions are different from those above, it will be necessary to consider the following factors. Ambient temperature factor : T Temperature 째C
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
T
1.3
1.25
1.15
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
Duty Factor: ED % duty factor
100
80
60
40
20
ED
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Thermal rating (PT) should e multiplied by the above factors to obtain the actual thermal rating (PTR): PTR = PT x (T x ED) When the continuous absorbed rating in the bevel gearbox is over the actual thermal rating (PTR), excess heat must be removed by artificial cooling.
7. Weight Weights are referred to units construction type A, ratio 1:1. Size Weight (kg)
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
2.5
6
12
22
37
57
87
255
8. Lubricants (Quantities) Lubricants are referred to units type A, ratio 1:1. Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
Grease (1)
0.15
0.22
0.35
0.9
1.7
3.5
5.5
14
Oil (1)
0.1
0.15
0.22
0.6
1.1
2.2
3.6
9
Al specifications are subject to change without notice.
72
9. Shaft Loads 9.1 Radial Loads (daN)
Ratio
Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
PR1
1:1, 1:2, 1:3
55
85
140
200
400
600
1000
2500
PR1
1:4, 1:5
-
60
85
140
200
400
600
1000
PR2
ALL
90
150
220
350
700
1000
1500
3500
9.2 Axial Loads
Ball bearing Ratio
Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
PR1
1:1, 1:2, 1:3
30
45
70
110
170
270
500
1000
PR1
1:4, 1:5
-
40
45
70
110
170
270
500
PR2
ALL
50
70
130
170
340
480
680
1500
Taper roller bearing Ratio
Size
BG12
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
PR1
1:1, 1:2, 1:3
30
65
100
150
240
400
780
1600
PR1
1:4, 1:5
-
45
65
100
150
240
400
780
PR2
ALL
-
100
180
250
500
700
1000
2200
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
73
10. Series Connection When spiral bevel gearboxes type A or AH are mounted in a series, the maximum through torque (Nm) mentioned below must not be exceeded.
For model A and AH Size
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
Max. through torque
60
120
300
500
700
1600
4000
If working conditions are greater than above, type AP gear boxes must be used which have larger shaft diameters. For model AP Size
BG19
BG24
BG32
BG38
BG42
BG55
BG75
Max. through torque
120
300
500
700
1000
3000
6500
11. Order Code 11.1 Spiral Bevel Gearboxes BG Series Size (12-19....55-75) Type (A - AS....AH 180- AH 270) Ratio (1/1-2/1......1/1.5-1/2) Mounting position (10-11....40-41) Lubrication (0=Oil - G=Grease)
11.2 Spiral Bevel Gearboxes with IEC Motor Flange Adapter BG
M___
Series Size (12-19....55-75) Type (A - AS....AH 180- AH 270) Ratio (1/1-2/1......1/1.5-1/2) Mounting position (10-11....40-41) Lubrication (0=Oil - G=Grease) Motor size (63....160)
12. Parts Lists Bevel Gearbox Type A, AD, AS, AH, AP & with IEC Motor Flange Adapter (M) Please visit our website - www.tea.net.au - to download Parts Lists or contact us directly. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
74
Installation & Maintenance Attention: please read following information carefully before mounting or executing maintenance: When mounting the bevel boxes in the machines where they are used it is needed to check very well the alignment of the gearshafts with the machine shafts. When alignment is not correct, the mechanical parts, especially the mounted bearings, will be overcharged and lifetime will be shortened. The bevel boxes have to be mounted on a flat and rigid surface to prevent movements, oscillations or vibrations and to , see page 72. To mount the bevel boxes with threaded holes in the cubic box, flanges and hubs should be used. Note: The threaded holes in the cubic box are interfering with each other therefore it is only advisable to use the mounting holes only on one surface, see figure at the side.
Before mounting the units, the mounting surfaces from the gear unit as well as from the machine are to be cleaned carefully to prevent incorrect mounting. When mounting a transmission element, for example an elastic coupling, sprocket etc. for which it is needed to heat up the female part, this temperature should not exceed 100째C. The bevel boxes are supplied lubricated with grease for use at an input speed up to and not exceeding over 900 1000rpm. In all other cases oil lubrication must be used. If units are to be used with oil lubrication it has to be mentioned at ordering and these units will be supplied with mounted filling and breather plug, oil level plug and with a drain plug. The reversing and disengaging units are normally supplied with oil lubrication to satisfy the presence of needle roller bearings. All units with oil lubrication are supplied without lubricant.
, see page 72. must be according to the diagram on page 76. Filling or draining has to be carried out at stationary units for obvious reasons of safety. Regarding filling instructions concerning quantities of lubricants refer to table on page 72. In every case the level of oil in the gearbox, must be according to the diagram on page 76. Attention, do not overfill or completely fill the units, this reduces the lifetime of a gearbox. Overfilling would cause overheating and overpressure which causes oil leakage, and the gears as well as the bearings may be damaged.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
75
Oil filled spiral bevel gears boxes should be checked regularly for the loss of lubricant through the flanges or through the oil seals. These units are supplied with oil level plugs and the oil level can be checked at the oil level sight glass. Checking and filling should only be carried out on stationary units. The oil changing intervals depend on the use of the gearbox, but normally the lubricant should be changed every 10,000 hours. Every unit assembled is checked with a quick test to confirm correct mounting, however it is advisable not to excessively overcharge the units for the first few working hours. These spiral bevel gearboxes reach their best efficiency after a running-in period of several hours. If full load is applied during these first few hours it will shorten, by a little, the total lifetime. During this running-in period a higher noise level and overheating can occur - these will decrease after 20-30 working hours. To obtain a longer shelf life, if these gearboxes are to be stored in corrosive or salty atmospheres, they should be adequately protected. The shafts should be turned regularly 180oC so the lubricant is maintained in the upper part of the gearbox as well to help prevent corrosion. Shafts and if necessary other surfaces should be covered with a thin oil to prevent rusting. If the gearbox is not to be used for a long period of time, it is recommended prior to using, the oil be drained and replaced with new oil to the correct level.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
76
Anti-corrosive Surface Treatment “Niploy” CHARACTERISTICS: The Niploy Process is a purely chemical nickel-plating system which has a high phosphorous content. It can provide treated surfaces with a uniform coating which is not porous and highly resistant to corrosion and wear. A uniform thickness will provide for: - Excellent adhesion - Complete protection of internal areas (hollows, holes, etc.) - Absolute respect for basic roughness - No need for a final machine work (grinding) The Niploy Process platings have good adhesion to the substrate. Unlike galvanic platings, such as chrome, they will not tend to “exfoliate”. If the coating is mechanically damaged or the basic material is characterised by macroporosity, the coating will prevent corrosion from spreading.
RESISTANCE: The plating produced by the Niploy Process treatment will provide for a high resistance to corrosion thanks to the structure of coating and the presence of phosphorus. It may be used in food and drug application sectors instead of stainless steel. The table below shows a comparison of chrome treatments and the resistance after 120 hours of exposure to salt spray.
Hard Chrome (n. pores) Niploy Process (n. pores)
Depth (micron) 25 50 250 16 6 1
10 Numerous 30
75 8 0
It’s wear resistance is equal to hard chrome. The Niploy Process treatment provides excellent resistance to high thermal shocks from + 200 °C to 192 °C without any cracking. Thermal treatments at high temperatures (280 °C, 350 °C) will harden the coating from 500 HV up to values similar to the hardness of chrome (1000 - 1050 HV).
FIELD OF APPLICATION: It is recommended to apply the Niploy process to increase surface hardness and improve wear resistance. It may also be used for brazing tin - lead alloys and as a base for coating precious metals. This will involve considerable economic advantages for the user, such as: longer life of pieces, weight decrease by replacing a heavier alloy with a lighter nickel-plated one, lower costs thanks to the utilisation of a nickel-plated material instead of a more expensive one (stainless steel).
Main industrial sectors that could use the Niploy Process treatment: - Food / Pharmaceutical - Automobile / Motorbikes - Electronics / Telecommunications - Petrochemistry - Textile - Oleodynamic / Pneumatic - Mechanical / Precision Engineering - Aircraft / Aerospace / Naval
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
77
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type A DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
78
Mounting Positions - A
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
79
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AD DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
80
Mounting Positions - AD
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
81
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AS DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
82
Mounting Position - AS
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
83
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AH DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
84
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AHC DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
86
Mounting Positions - AHC
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
87
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AHS DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
88
Mounting Positions - AHS
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
89
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AP DIMENSIONS
Use type 'AP' to transmit greater through torque that type 'A' (see page 78). The gear rating remains as type 'A'.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
90
Mounting Position - AP
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
91
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AX DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
92
Mounting Positions - AX
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
93
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type B DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
94
Mounting Positions - B
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
95
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BD DIMENSIONS
Note: This gearbox may be used as an inline gearbox by removing D2 shaft.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
96
Mounting Positions - BD
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
97
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BS DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
98
Mounting Positions - BS
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
99
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BH DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
100
Mounting Positions - BH
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
101
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BHC DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
102
Mounting Positions - BHC
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
103
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type C DIMENSIONS
Type CR are for Type C bevel gearboxes that have ratios other than 1:1 Type CX are for Type C bevel gearboxes which have the blind cover mounted opposite the high speed shaft.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
104
Mounting Positions - BHC
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
105
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type DR DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
106
Mounting Positions - DR
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
107
Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type DX DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
108
Mounting Positions - DX
Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
109
Breather plug Level plug Drain plug
Spiral Bevel Gearbox with IEC Motor Flange Adaptor DIMENSIONS
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
110
The dimensions that are not indicated and the mounting positions can be taken from the tables of the standard types.
65
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
111
Multishaft Bevel Gearboxes Modular design permits supplementary gears and shafts for all ratio except 1:1
MULTI SHAFT TYPE
Multiple Shaft combinations for all other Spiral Bevel Gearbox types are also available, please go to our website www.tea.net.au to view or download data sheets, or contact us directly.
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
112
90 Degree Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type I0 90 degree reversing spiral bevel gearboxes are available with ratio 1:1 and 2:1 only. By moving the control lever from fully engaged through neutral to fully engaged in the opposite direction the 90 degree shaft will change rotation. Operation of the lever is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Engaging position is usually indifferent, and reversing spiral bevel gearbox is called FP (Full Position). On request these gearboxes can be supplied with the option SP (Single Position) which means a single engaging position on 360 degrees. Reversing bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 30%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107)
90 Degree Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type D0 Disengaging spiral bevel gearboxes are manufactured in ratios 1:1, 2:1, & 3:1 only. Operation of the lever disengages the 90 degree shaft. This is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Disengaging spiral bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 15%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107).
Co-Axial Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type IC Co-axial spiral bevel gearboxes are manufactured in ratios 1:1 only. By moving the control lever from fully engaged through neutral to fully engaged in the opposite direction the co-axial shaft will change rotation. On request co-axial reversing spiral bevel gearboxes can be supplied with a third projection shaft at 90 degrees. Operation of the lever is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Co-axial reversing bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 30%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107). All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
113
Worm Gearmotors Type
rpm
Torque Nm
Service Factor SF
Ratio
Type
Gearbox Code
rpm
Torque Nm
Service Factor SF
Ratio
Gearbox Code
0.55kW Motor MTT 80A-4 code M3400055 u MTT 0.09kW Motor MTT 56B-4 code M3400009 u MTT 1370 r/min 1.58 Amps 1320 r/min 0.43 Amps FRT 28-56
14 18 20 25 28 35 50 70 93 140 200
26 22 19 18 17 15 11 9.1 7.1 5 3.6
0.3 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.8 1.8 2.5 >3 >3
100 80 70 56 49 40 28 20 15 10 7
VRT02810005** VRT02808005** VRT02807005** VRT02805605** VRT02804905** VRT02804005** VRT02802805** VRT02802005** VRT02801505** VRT02801005** VRT02800705**
FTA 85-80
5.5 8
525 394
1.0 1.3
252 176
VTA08525208** VTA08517608**
FTA 70-80
11
325
0.9
126
VTA07012608**
FRT 85-80
14
210
1.0
100
VRT08510008**
18 20 25 28
163 155 135 126
1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5
80 70 56 49
VRT07008008** VRT07007008** VRT07005608** VRT07004908**
25 28 35 50
125 114 99 75
1.0 1.1 1.4 1.9
56 49 40 28
VRT06005608** VRT06004908** VRT06004008** VRT06002808**
50 70 93 140 200
75 57 44 32 23
1.1 1.1 1.7 2.4 >3
28 20 15 10 7
VRT05002808** VRT05002008** VRT05001508** VRT05001008** VRT05000708**
FRT 70-80
FRT 60-80
0.018kW Motor MTT 63B-4 code M3400018 u MTT 1350 r/min 0.68 Amps FTA 50-63
8 11
118 98
1.2 1.2
176 126
VTA05017606** VTA05012606**
FRT 50-63
14 18 20
57 51 45
0.8 1.1 1.4
100 80 70
VRT05010006** VRT05008006** VRT05007006**
FRT 40-63
25 28 35 50 70 93 140 200
38 35 30 23 18 14 10 7.3
1.0 1.2 1.4 2.1 2.1 3.0 >3 >3
56 49 40 28 20 15 10 7
VRT04005606** VRT04004906** VRT04004006** VRT04002806** VRT04002006** VRT04001506** VRT04001006** VRT04000706**
50 70 93 140 200
23 18 14 10 7
0.9 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4
28 20 15 10 7
VRT02802806** VRT02802006** VRT02801506** VRT02801006** VRT02800706**
FRT 28-63
FRT 50-80
0.72kW Motor MTT 80B-4 code M3400075 u MTT 380 r/min 1.93Amps Amps 1380 r/min 1.93 FTA 85-80
8 11
537 449
0.9 1.1
176 126
VTA08517608** VTA08512608**
18 20
239 225
1.2 1.3
80 70
VRT08508008** VRT08507008**
FRT 70-80
25 28
180 171
1.0 1.1
56 49
VRT07005608** VRT07004908**
FRT 60-80
35 50 70
135 102 79
1.0 1.4 1.5
40 28 20
VRT06004008** VRT06002808** VRT06002008**
93 140 200
60 43 31
1.2 1.7 2.4
15 10 7
VRT05001508** VRT05001008** VRT05000708**
FRT 85-80
0.37kW Motor MTT 71B-4 code M3400037 u MTT FRT 50-80 1370 r/min 1.11 Amps FTA 70-71
5.5
346
0.9
252
VTA07025207**
FTA 60-71
8 11
251 215
1.0 1.1
176 126
VTA06017607** VTA06012607**
1.1kW
FRT 70-71
14 18
130 110
1.0 1.4
100 80
VRT07010007** VRT07008007**
FTA 85-90S
18 20 25
106 97 85
1.0 1.3 1.5
80 70 56
VRT06008007** VRT06007007** VRT06005607**
FRT 85-90S
FRT 50-71
28 35
76 65
1.0 1.1
49 40
VRT05004907** VRT05004007**
FRT 40-71
50 70 93 140 200
48 38 20 21 15
1.0 1.0 1.4 2.1 2.9
28 20 15 10 7
VRT04002807** VRT04002007** VRT04001507** VRT04001007** VRT04000707**
FRT 60-71
FRT 70-90S
FRT 60-90S
Motor SLA90S-4 code M3400110 u HLA 1425 r/min 2.6 Amps 15 22
505 404
1.0 1.3
95 63
VTA08509509** VTA08506309**
25 28
285 246
1.1 1.3
56 49
VRT08505609** VRT08504909**
35 50 70
212 158 122
1.1 1.4 1.6
40 28 20
VRT07004009** VRT07002809** VRT07002009**
70 93 140 200
116 91 63 45
1.1 1.4 2.1 2.5
20 15 10 7
VRT06002009** VRT06001509** VRT06001009** VRT06000709**
u = Motor Flange, 5 = B5, 7 = B14A ** = Refer product code specification
114
Worm Gearmotors Type
rpm
Torq ue Nm
Service Factor SF
Ratio
Gearbox Code
Mounting Mountingarrangements arrangements
Motor SLA90L-4 code M3400150 u HLA 1430 r/min 3.4 Amps
1.5kW FTA 85-90 L FRT 85-90 L
FRT 70-90 L
FRT 60-90 L
22
550
1.0
63
VTA08506309**
29 35
330 295
1.0 1.4
49 40
VRT08504909** VRT08504009**
50 70 93 140
215 166 128 88
1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0
28 20 15 10
VRT07002809** VRT07002009** VRT07001509** VRT07001009**
93 140 200
125 86 61
1.0 1.5 1.8
15 10 7
VRT06001509** VRT06001009** VRT06000709**
(S) Standard Multi-mount
2.2kW Motor SLA 100LA-4 code M3400220 u HLA 1455 r/min 4.7 Amps FRT 85-100 L
FRT 70-100 L
3.0kW
319 246
1.0 1.3
28 20
VRT08502810** VRT08502010**
93 140 200
187 129 92
1.0 1.4 1.8
15 10 7
VRT07001510** VRT07001010** VRT07000710**
Terminal Box Position
Motor SLA100LB-4 code M3400300 u HLA 1455 r/min 6.2 Amps
FRT 85-100 L FRT 70-100 L
4.0kW
50 70
70 93
335 255
1.0 1.1
20 15
VRT08502010** VRT08501510**
140 200
176 126
1.0 1.3
10 7
VRT07001010** VRT07000710**
Motor SLA112M-4 code M3400400 u HLA 1455 r/min 8.2 Amps
FRT 85-112 M
140 200
235 168
1.1 1.5
10 7
VRT08501011** VRT08500711**
F, V
u = Motor Flange, 5 = B5, 7 = B14A ** = Refer product code specification
Service Factors Where the required service factor is not known it can be calculated using the following formula and tables: Service factor SF = F1 x F2 x F3 F1 selection
F2 selection
F3 selection
Hours per day
Uniform load
Variable load
Shock load
Starts per hour
F2
Expected lifetime
F3
3 to 4
0.8
1.0
1.5
6.0
1.0
10 000
0.8
8 to 10
1.0
1.2
1.8
60.0
1.2
15 000
1.0
10 to 24
1.4
1.6
2.0
120.0
1.4
20 000
1.4
115
F1, V1
Worm Gearmotors Dimensional Drawings FRT
Gearbox Dimensions Type FRT 28 - 56 - 63 FRT 40 - 63 - 71 FRT 50 - 63 - 71 - 80 FRT 60 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L FRT 70 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L FRT 85 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L - 112M
A
A1
AA
AA1
B
B1
C
D 1)
F1
G1
H
H1
H2
I
K
M1
N1
P1
R1
S
S1
S2
V12)
Z2
80
54
97
71
53
44
30
14
7
55
40
57
13
28
58
16.3
5
77
65
27.5
6
2.5
M6x10 (4)
8
100
70
121.5
90
71
60
41
18
7
60
50
71.5
15
40
71
21.8
6
88
75
38.5
7
2.5
M6x10 (4)
9
120
80
144
104
85
70
49
25
9
70
60
84
20
50
83
27.3
8
100
85
46.5
8
2.5
M8x10 (4)
10
144
100
174
130
100
85
60
25
9
80
72
102
22
60
94
28.3
8
110
95
57
10
3
M8x15 (8)
12
172
120
205
153
108
90
60
28
11
95
86
119
26
70
117
31.3
8
132
115
57
12
3
M8x15 (8)
12
206
140
238
172
130
100
61
35
13
110
103
135
33
85
134
38.3
10
160
130
67
15
3
M10x20 (8)
14
Alternative shaft sizes available. Please contact T.E.A. FTA 28 to 50 have 4 holes at 45째 offset from top. FTA 60 to 85 have holes at 0째 offset from top.
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
116
Worm Gearmotors Dimensional Drawing FTA
Type AC
FRT 28 FRT 40 FRT 50
FRT 60
FRT 70
FRT 8
3)
- 56 - 63 - 63 - 71 - 63 - 71 - 80 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L -100L - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L - 112M
Total Weight 3)
Motor Dimensions ØF
B5
ØF
B14
HB
LB
(kg)
120 130
120 140
80 90
100 110
172 189
3.3 4.3
130 145
140 160
90 105
110 117
189 210
4.3 6.2
130 145 165
140 160 200
90 105 120
110 117 137
189 210 250
4.3 6.2 10
145 165 180 180
160 200 200 200
105 120 140 140
117 137 157 157
210 250 271 297
6.2 10 17 18
145 165 180 180 203
160 200 200 200 250
105 120 140 140 160
117 137 157 157 170
210 250 271 297 340
6.2 10 17 18 24
165 180 180 203 221
200 200 200 250 250
120 140 140 160 160
137 157 157 170 192
250 271 297 340 388
23 17 18 24 31
Gear motor weight includes oil.
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
117
Type
FTA 50 - 63
FTA 60 - 71
FTA 70 - 71 - 80
FTA 85 - 80 - 90S - 90L
Total Weight
Gearbox dimensions
3)
l1
K1
Y1
Z3
(kg)
32
167
105
9
8.5
40
184
120
10
12.8
40 50
207 232
120 140
10 12
14.6 11
50
249
140
12
23
Worm Gearmotors Options and Extras Flange Mount
FRT
Type
Part Number
ØF
P
ØG
P2
U
ØR
V
Z
28 40 40 50 50
F F FL F FL
V530-203 V531-203 V531-203-001 V532-203 V532-203-001
80 110 110 125 125
50 60 60 70 70
53 69 99 93 123
23 28 58 44 74
68 87 87 90 90
4 4 4 5 5
7 9 9 9 9
(4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
7 6 8 10 10
50 60 60 70 85
FV F FL F F
V532-203-002 V539-203 V539-203-002\1 V533-203 V534-203
160 180 180 200 210
110 115 115 130 152
90.5 86 116 111 111
41.5 26 56 51 50
130 150 150 165 175
11 5 6.5 5 5
9 (4) 11 (4) 11 (4) 13 (4) 13 (4)
13 10 10 14 16
Torque Arms
Part Number
Dimensions
FRT Basic 28 40 50 60 70 85
V530-202-004 V531-202-004 V472-202-004 V539-202-004 V533-202-004 V474-202-004
Bushed V530-202-002 V531-202-002 V472-202-002 V539-202-002 V533-202-002 V474-202-002
A 138 168 185 235 295 313
118
B
C
D
E
F
F1
G
80 100 100 150 200 200
38 43 60 55 65 75
55 60 70 80 95 110
65 75 85 95 115 130
10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 20.5
10 10 10 10 10 20
7 7 9 9 9 12
l 4 4 4 6 6 6
l1 15 15 15 20 20 25
Worm Gearmotors Options and Extras Output Shafts
Part Number
Dimensions
FRT Single ended
Double ended
A
B
C
D
D1
E
L
M
28 40 40 (alt) 50 50 (alt)
V470-901-014 V471-901-018 V471-901-019 V472-901-025 V472-901-024
V470-902-014 V471-902-018 V471-902-019 V472-902-025 V472-902-024
58 80 80 95 95
1 10 10 10 10
30 40 40 45 45
14 18 19 25 24
M5 M8 M8 M8 M8
22 22 28 28
60 82 82 98 98
31 50 50 55 55
60 70 70 (alt) 85 85 (alt)
V479-901-025 V473-901-028 V473-901-030 V474-901-035 V474-901-032
V479-902-025 V473-902-028 V473-902-030 V474-902-035 V474-902-032
117 117 117 119 119
10 10 10 10 10
50 60 60 70 70
25 28 30 35 32
M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
30 34 34 38 38
120 120 120 122 122
60 70 70 80 80
Ordering Codes:
VRT 1-3
040
080
4-6
7-9
Positions 1 to 3 Series VRT = FRT wormbox VTA = FRT wormbox with FXA single stage helical box
063
S
10-12
13-14 Positions 13 and 14 Mounting arrangement S = Standard type F = Flange mount type F RHS F1 = Flange mount type F LHS V = Flange mount type FV RHS V1 = Flange mount type FV LHS
Positions 4 to 6 Gearbox size 028, 040, 050, 060, 070, and 085 Positions 7 to 9 Gearbox ratio Also available on request: FVS planetary variator (variable speed model) FVR mechanical variator (variable speed model) TLE & TLI torque limiting device (external fit & internal fit) SL travel limiting device (with limit switch)
Positions 10 to 12 Gearbox Input Size 056 = 56 B5 05A = 56 B14A 063 = 63 B5 06A = 63 B14A 071 = 71 B5 07A = 71 14A 080 = 80 B5 08A = 80 B14A
090 = 90 B5 09A = 90 B14A 100 = 100 B5 10A = 100 B14B 112 = 112 B5 11A = 112 B14A
For information regarding extra options listed above, installation and maintenance, and general characteristics, please contact T.E.A. All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
119
Worm Reduction Gearboxes - small precision, multi-shaft arrangement Metric Types M1, M2 & M3 • Ratios from 6:1 to 100:1, Torque 1 to 10 Nm • Drilled and tapped mounting holes on top and bottom Drawing Ref.
M1
M2
M3
A B C
38.89 31.75 19.05
52.37 44.45 25.40
77.77 63.50 34.92
D E F
29.36 15.87 19.05
41.3 22.22 25.40
60.32 31.75 44.45
G H J
6.35 11.10 3.96
9.52 15.87 4.75
9.52 25.40 4.75
KØ L MØ
3.00 19.05 4.00
4.00 22.22 6.00
7.00 25.40 9.00
N O
19.05 M3x5dp
14.27 M4x5dp
25.40 M5x6dp
• Flush fitting bearing caps easy to install • Input shafts mounted on precision ball bearings
Mounting holes "O" top-bottom faces Shaft arrangement "A" illustrated
Performance data: M1 Wormwheel
M2 AntiBacklash
Phosphor Bronze
Maximum input speed rpm Maximum friction torque at input g/cm (oz/in) Maximum continuous output torque Nm
Phosphor Bronze
AntiBacklash
Phosphor Bronze
AntiBacklash
10000
3000
10000
3000
10000
3000
5 (0.069)
60 (0.833)
12 (0.16)
250 (3.47)
20 (1.12)
1250 (17.3)
See graphs
0.009 (0.8333)
See graphs
0.17 (1.5)
See graphs
0.29 (2.6)
Backlash at outputs - minutes
30
Approx. weight kg. (oz.)
M3
30
0.08 (2.75)
0.08 (2.75)
30
0.2 (7)
0.2 (7)
0.6 (21)
0.6 (21)
Available Ratios Type
6
7.5
M1 M2 M3
X X
X
8
8.33 10 12 12.5 15 16 16.66 17 20
X
X
X
X X
X
X X X
X X
X
X
X
X
21.5 24 25
X X
X
30 32 36
48 50 60
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Shaft Arrangements (plan view)
Input shafts shown
40 42 45
Output shafts shown
These standard gearboxes are available in many shaft arrangements and ratios. For an application requiring minimum backlash, spring loaded wormwheels may be incorporated. The input shaft is mounted in precision ballraces, the output shaft in self-lubricating bearings and the final assembly packed with grease Duckhams Keenomax L2' (AFS 135) having a temperature range of 34° to + 150°C. When ordering please state worm reduction gearbox type, ratio, shaft arrangement and standard or anti-backlash version. Eg. Type 1, ratio 6:1, shaft arrangement "A", anti-backlash.
120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
70 90 100
X
X
X
X
X
Angular Gear 200X
Small dimensions with maximum torque
- Angular gear for manifold applications - Aluminium housing, anodised - Ratio 1:1 - 7 sizes, side length from 32mm to 60mm - Steel bevel wheels, surface hardened - Maintenance-free - Permitted operating temp. 0 to +60°C - Backlash 3° + 1° - Lifetime under total load and input speed of 500rpm is 1000 hours with a duty cycle of 20% - Duty cycle 20% (at 5 min.) - Smooth running, silent - Simple screw mounting
o
Øm
Øm p
Ø r (2x)
a
Ø f (8x)
d
t
h
j
u
g
a
h
I
d
b
Ø s (4x)
c
n
a
q
t
i
j
Ø e (2x)
c
h
h
b
a d d
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
5
Mijno Precision Planetary Gearheads * * * * * *
Satellite gears are case hardened to 58-62 HRC and ground to class DIN 6 to 5 AGMA 12 to 13. All satellite gears feature Rotaxe® tooth profile modification. This reduces friction, increase lifetime and offers quiet operation. All bearings are oversized and purchased from the world’s most reliable suppliers. All gears rotate on full-complement needle bearings instead of caged needle bearings for longer life and greater load capacity. All backlashes are guaranteed for rated gearhead life. All torque ratings are conservative, calculated to provide the longest lifetime possible. Type MRP Max torque 290Nm Economical range dedicated to servo applications requiring precision & robustness with economy. Backlash - from 15 to 8 arc-mins. Can be mounted to any motor appropriate for its torque rating. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.
Type MNT Heavy duty servo grade. Backlash - 8 to 1 arc-min. High radial and axial load capability. Quiet and reliable. Life rating: 15,000 hours. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Also available for low temperatures and wash down environments. Stainless Steel version (MSS) see below.
Type MRA Heavy duty servo grade right angle series servo gearbox. Backlash - 15, 10 or 3 arc-min. Easy 1 minute clamping to any motor shaft. Double output shafts, quad or hollow shafts also available. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.
Type MSS the all Stainless Steel version • All stainless steel construction: flanges, housing, shafts etc. • Heavy duty servo grade for applications requiring precision and robustness. • Backlash 10 to 1 arc-mins. Backlash specification holds for rated life. • Food grade lubrication. Type BDB Unique gearhead family dedicated to servo applications requiring compactness and high torques. Backlash - 5 to 1 arc-min. Ratios 4:1 to 220:1 High torsional stiffness IP65 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.
• Suitable for wash-down applications. (IP 67 standard). • Available in sizes 080, 115 & 140. • In-line version - MSS (pictured above). • MSS dimensions same as MNT 080, 115 & 140. • Right angle version - MRS. • MRS dimensions are the same as MRA 080, 115 & 140. • Dedicated to the food, chemical and pharmaceutical industries.
Please contact T.E.A. Transmissions for additional information & data sheets or download them directly from our web site www.tea.net.au
126 2
Planetary Gearboxes type EP The EP Series planetary gearboxes are manufactured in particular for the following applications: • • • • • • • • •
Machine tools Machines for woodworking Transfer machines Printing machines Automatic machines for packaging Automation Mecanical hands Silk-screen process machines Linear guides
The EP series is available in 5 sizes (55, 75, 90, 120 and 155), with 1 or 2 reduction stages, with two types of output shaft (A and T) and three types of output flange (A, T and Q). Housing: made of special nitrided steel to assure strength, high reliability and long life. Flanges: input and output flanges made of aluminium and available in several versions.
Planetary gearbox
EP
Shafts: made of hardened tempered alloy steel.
Precision REP series also available Please contact T.E.A. Transmissions
and
Gears: made of case hardened and tempered alloy steel, with ground toothing. Bearings: high quality and suitably sized to assure long life and noiseless working.
Size
Steps
Coaxial
RatIo
Ouput shaft
Output flange
Input shaft
Input flange
55
2
C
100
A
A
AE..
P..
55 75 90 120 155
1 2
C
3 - 100
A T
A T
See tables
See tables
The selection of Planetary Gearbox EP series has to be made after the checking of service factor. For intermittent or continuous duty it is necessary to apply the following formulas: 1) Intermittent duty: Tm * i * RD * fc T2N cycle/h 1000/2000 1000 2) Continuos duty: Tm * i * RD * fc /0.65T2N
fc
1
2000/3000
1.2/1.5
where: Tm = nominal torque of motor (Nm) i = transmission ratio of gearbox RD = dynamic efficiency fc = cycle factor (see table)
For application with operation cycles based on frequent accelerations it is necessary to verify that max. acceleration torque is equal or inferior to the T2A value shown in the tables.
Backlash ( max.) Max. backlash measured on output shaft by torque equals to 2% of the nominal torque value with input shaft blocked.
127
1.5/2
Radial and axial load on output shaft The table of performances shows admissi ble axial and radial load values expressed in N for different speeds and for a bearing life of 20,000 hours.Radial load FR2 calculations have been based on loads applied to the center line of the output shaft extension. For a different distance it is possible to calculate the new maximum admissible load by using formula and coefficient shown in the table.
a b
EP 55 27 18
EP 75 46 32
Lubrication EP gearboxes are supplied filled with long-life lubricant and do not require any maintenance. When ordering it is important to specify the exact mounting position.
Symbols and unit of measure i n1 nom n1 max T2N T2A T2S LpA Rd Lh FR2 FA2
Nominal ratio Nominal input speed [min -1] Maximum input speed [min -1] Intermittent output torque [Nm] Maximum acceleration output torque [Nm] Maximum emergency output torque [Nm] Noise level dB(A) at 3000 min -1 Dynamic efficiency Bearing life [h] Output radial load [N] at 100 min -1 Output axial load [N] at 100 min -1
Rt
Torsional rigidity [ Nm/ arcmin] Standard backlash [arcmin] Min. moment of inertia [kg.cm2] Max. moment of inertia [kg.cm2]
max
J min J max
128
EP 90 56 39
EP 120 77 52
EP 155 95 64
1.5 Technical data
EP 55
See pages 130-131 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3 12 22 44
4 14 24 48
5 16 24 48
2 7 12 22 44
10 10 20 40
9 14 24 48
12 16 28 56
15 16 28 56
16 16 28 56
20 16 28 56
100 12 n1nom 22 n1max 44 LpA 0.0736 0.0626 0.0587 0.0553 0.0536 0.0734 0.0722 0.0718 0.0620 0.0617 0.0580 0.0552 0.0551 0.0536 0.0536 0.0535 0.0535 Lh 0.0909 0.0799 0.0759 0.0726 0.0709 0.0906 0.0894 0.0889 0.0791 0.0789 0.0751 0.0723 0.0722 0.0707 0.0707 0.0707 0.0706 FR2 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.9 FA2 0.96 0.93 max
EP 75
25 16 28 56
28 16 28 56
35 16 28 56
40 16 28 56
50 16 28 56
70 14 24 48
1
2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 300 450 15' 20'
See pages 132-133 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3 22 40 80
4 28 45 90
5 32 50 100
2 7 28 45 90
10 20 40 80
9 26 50 100
12 32 60 120
15 36 60 120
16 36 60 120
20 36 60 120
100 22 n1nom 45 n1max 90 LpA 0.1707 0.1163 0.1063 0.0927 0.0860 0.1597 0.1549 0.1538 0.1159 0.1153 0.1017 0.0927 0.0925 0.0860 0.0859 0.0857 0.0857 Lh 0.2166 0.1622 0.1522 0.1386 0.1319 0.2056 0.2008 0.1997 0.1618 0.1612 0.1476 0.1386 0.1384 0.1319 0.1318 0.1316 0.1316 FR2 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 FA2 0.96 0.93 max
EP 90
25 36 60 120
28 36 60 120
35 36 60 120
40 36 60 120
50 36 60 120
70 30 50 100
1
2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 1800 1400 15' 20'
See pages 134-135 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3 50 80 160
4 55 90 180
5 60 100 200
2 7 55 90 180
10 50 80 160
9 65 100 200
12 70 110 220
15 75 120 240
16 75 120 240
20 75 120 240
100 55 n1nom 90 n1max 180 LpA 0.5159 0.3371 0.2742 0.2247 0.2008 0.5193 0.4995 0.4925 0.3272 0.3233 0.2651 0.2215 0.2202 0.1992 0.1985 0.1980 0.1978 Lh 0.7271 0.5483 0.4854 0.4359 0.4120 0.7305 0.7305 0.7036 0.5384 0.5345 0.4763 0.4326 0.4314 0.4103 0.4097 0.4092 0.4090 FR2 9.0 7.5 9.0 7.5 FA2 0.96 0.93 max
EP 120
25 75 120 240
28 75 120 240
35 75 120 240
40 75 120 240
50 75 120 240
70 65 100 200
1
2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 2600 2000 15' 20'
See pages 136-137 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3 120 190 400
4 150 240 500
5 180 290 600
2 7 150 220 460
10 100 180 380
9 150 240 500
12 180 290 600
15 220 350 700
16 220 350 700
20 220 350 700
100 110 n1nom 200 n1max 400 LpA 2.0027 1.1339 0.8557 0.6244 0.5047 1.9802 1.8962 1.8552 1.0736 1.0505 0.8023 0.6048 0.5977 0.4951 0.4918 0.4895 0.4883 Lh 4.1528 3.2840 3.0058 2.7745 2.6548 3.1885 3.1045 3.0636 2.2819 2.2589 2.0106 1.8132 1.8061 1.7035 1.7002 1.6979 1.6967 FR2 FA2 32 28 32 30 28 0.96 0.93 max
EP 155
25 220 350 700
28 220 350 700
35 220 350 700
40 220 350 700
50 220 350 700
70 170 270 540
1
2 3000 4000 < 70 20000 4500 4000 15' 20'
See pages 138-139 Steps
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
1
2
3 4 5 7 10 9 12 15 16 20 28 35 40 50 70 100 25 240 320 380 300 220 320 400 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 350 250 420 540 600 480 400 480 600 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 560 460 880 1140 1260 1000 850 1000 1250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1120 920
1
n1nom n1max LpA 6.2232 3.6993 2.8162 2.1069 1.7391 6.0151 5.8025 5.7092 3.4671 3.4118 2.6324 2.0320 2.0135 1.7026 1.6934 1.6864 1.6827 Lh FR2 (AA) 13.9214 11.3975 10.5144 9.8051 9.4373 13.7133 13.5057 13.4074 11.1653 11.1100 10.3306 9.7302 9.7117 9.4008 9.3916 9.3846 9.3809 F R2 (TT) FA2 (AA) 60 50 60 50 FA2 (TT) 0.96
0.93
129
max
2 3000 4000 < 70 20000 6500 5300 3250 2650 15' 20'
EP55 Dimensions
AA
TT Output flange
18 14
1.5
6.5
Output flange
M4x8
18 14
1.5
M5x10
4x4
12 k6
12 k6
AE
AE
4x4
5.5
M4x10
M4x10 5.5
35 h7 44 55
S
C1 T
1 62.5 87
Steps
C1 T
2 81.5 106
4.5
32 h7
S
C1
40 55
T
1 63.5 87
Steps
AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11
C1 T
2 82.5 106
AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11
TQ
AQ
Output flange
Output flange
1.5
18 14
18 14
8
13
5.5
1.5
8
13
5.5
4x4 AE
12 k6
12 k6
AE
4x4
74
M4x10
74
M4x10 36 g6 55 65
12 C1
S
T
1 56 87
Steps
C1 T
2 75 106
36 g6 55 65
12 C1
S
T
1 56 87
Steps
AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11
C1 T
2 75 106
AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11
Technical data EP 55 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N
3 12
4 14
T2A
22
24
T2S Jmin Jmax
44
48
Rt Rd
5 16
2 7 12
10 10
9 14
12 16
15 16
24
22
48
44
16 16
20 16
20
24
28
40
48
56
28
28
28
56
56
56
25 16
28 16
35 16
28
28
28
56
56
56
40 16
50 16
70 14
100 12
28
28
24
22
n1nom n1max
1
56
56
48
44
LpA
0.0736
0.0626
0.0587
0.0553
0.0536
0.0734
0.0722
0.0718
0.0620
0.0617
0.0580
0.0552
0.0551
0.0536
0.0536
0.0535
0.0535
0.0909
0.0799
0.0759
0.0726
0.0709
0.0906
0.0894
0.0889
0.0791
0.0789
0.0751
0.0723
0.0722
0.0707
0.0707
0.0707
0.0706
Lh FR2
0.9
FA2
1.0
0.9
1.0
0.96
0.93
130
max
2 4000
5000 < 70 20000 300 450 15'
20'
EP55 Lmax
Input flange
H
O
AE H7
O
D
V
S1 S
R H7 I F
R H7 Q I
Input shaft Input flange
AE 6
R
6.35
7
8
9
9.52
11
F
Q
V
I
(H7)
O
S
S1
D
L max
H
L max
H
L max
H
L max
H
L max
H
L max
H
L max
P01*
60
=
=
43.82
22
4.5
10
3
22
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P02*
=
60
80
66.67 38.1
5.5
10
3
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P03*
=
60
80
63
40
5.5
10
3.5
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P04
=
70
90
75
60
6.5 10.5 3.5
32
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
P05
105
=
=
85
70
6.5 10.5 3.5
7.5
P06
=
80
110 98.42 73.02
P07
=
95
120
P08
=
98
130
115
95
9
P09
=
116 160
130
110
9
P10 *
60
=
=
39
26
P11*
60
=
=
42
P12*
65
=
=
P13*
80
=
P14*
60
P15 P16*
H
32
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
3.5
35
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
4
32
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
11.5
4
32
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
31.5
8.5
12
4.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
4.5
10
3
26
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
32
4.5
10
3
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
46
32
4.5
10
3.5
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
=
65
50
5.5
10
3.5
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
=
=
39
20
4.5
10
2.5
20
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
=
75
100
90
60
5.8
12
3.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
60
=
=
45
30
3.5
14
7
30
34
11
34
11
34
11
34
11
34
11
34
11
100
80
6
11
6.5 11.5
9
34
11
P17
=
60
82
70
50
4.5 16.5
32
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
36.5
13.5
P18
=
60
80
60
50
M4 10.5 3.5
32
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
P19*
60
=
=
36
25
4.5
25
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P20
=
60
82
70
50
5.5 10.5 3.5
32
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
30.5
7.5
P21*
60
=
=
46
30
4.5
10
3
30
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P22
=
60
80
70.71
36
4.5
10
2
32
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
P23
=
62
85
70
50
5.5 15.5 3.5
32
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5
35.5
12.5 9
10
8 3
P24
=
75
100
90
70
5.8
12
3.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
P25
=
70
95
85
55
5.8
12
3.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
P26*
=
60
80
65.5
34
5.5
10
3.5
33
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
30
7
95
50
6.5
12
3.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
M4
9
2.5
32
29
6
29
6
29
6
29
6
29
6
29
6
29
6
M3
11
4
32
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
P27
=
80
110
P28
=
60
80
P29
60
=
=
66.67 38.1 45
30
P30
=
70
95
85
60
5.8
12
3.5
32
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
32
9
P31
=
62
85
70
50
M4
11
3.5
32
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
31
8
To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.
131
EP75 AA
TT Output flange
28 25
1.5
8
Output flange
M5x10
28 25
1.5
M5x10
5x5
16 k6
14 k6
AE
AE
5x5
6.5
M5x12
M5x12 5.5 T
1 78.5 114.5
Steps
C1 T
2 101 137
4
52 h7 62 72
S
C1
T
1 80 114.5
Steps
AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14
C1 T
2 102.5 137
AQ 1.5
28 25
AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14
TQ Output flange
10
18
40 h7 52 72
S
C1
5.5
28 25
1.5
Output flange
10
18
5.5
5x5 AE
14 k6
16 k6
AE
5x5
97
M5x12
97
M5x12 52 g6 72 85
16 C1
S
T
1 68.5 114.5
Steps
C1 T
2 91 137
52 g6 72 85
16 C1
S
T
1 68.5 114.5
Steps
AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14
C1 T
2 91 137
AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14
Technical data EP 75 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
2
3 22
4 28
5 32
7 28
10 20
9 26
12 32
15 36
16 36
20 36
25 36
28 36
35 36
40 36
50 36
70 30
100 22
n1nom
4000
40 80
45 90
50 100
45 90
40 80
50 100
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
60 120
50 100
45 90
n1max LpA
0.1707
0.1163
0.1063
0.0927
0.0860
0.1597
0.1549
0.1538
0.1159
0.1153
0.1017
0.0927
0.0925
0.0860
0.0859
0.0857
0.0857
0.2166
0.1622
0.1522
0.1386
0.1319
0.2056
0.2008
0.1997
0.1618
0.1612
0.1476
0.1386
0.1384
0.1319
0.1318
0.1316
0.1316
Lh FR2
5000 < 70 20000 1800
3.0
FA2
3.5
3.0
3.5
0.96
0.93
132
1
max
2
1400 15'
20'
EP75 Input flange
Lmax H
O
AE H7
O
D
V
S1 S
R H7 I F
R H7 Q I
Input shaft AE
Input flange 6 R
6.35
7
8
9
9.52
11
12
12.7
14
L L L L L L L L L L max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H
F
Q
V
I
(H7)
S1
D
P01*
60
=
=
43.82
22
4.5 10
3
22
35 4.5
35
4.5
35 4.5
26
6.5
26 6.5
35
6.5
26 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
P02*
=
60
80 66.67 38.1 5.5 10
3
32
35 4.5
35
4.5
35 4.5
26
6.5
26 6.5
35
6.5
26 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
O
S
P03*
=
60
80
63
40
5.5 10 3.5
32
35
4.5
P04
=
70
90
75
60
6.5 10.5 3.5
32
35.5 5
35.5
5
P05
105
=
=
85
70
6.5 10.5 3.5
32
35.5
35.5
5 35.5
P06 P07
=
80 110 98.42 73.02
35
36 5.5
=
95 120 100
80
6.5 11.5 4
32
36.5
6 36.5
P08
=
98 130 115
95
9 11.5 4
32
36.5
6
116 160 130
110
9
32
37 6.5
37
6.5
37 6.5
28
8.5
28 8.5
37
37 8.5
37
26
35 4.5
35
4.5
35 4.5
26
6.5 26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
4.5
6.5 26
6
11 3.5
35 4.5
5
36
5.5
35 4.5 35.5 5 5
36 5.5
26
6.5
26.5
7
26.5
7 26.5
27
6
36.5
6 27.5
36.5 6
36.5
6
7.5
26 6.5 26.5 7 7
27 7.5
35
6.5
35.5
7
35.5
7 26.5
36
8
27.5
8 36.5
27.5 8
27.5
8
7.5
26 6.5 26.5 7 7
27 7.5
35
6.5
35.5
7 35.5
7
35.5
7
35.5
7 35.5
7
35.5
7
36
7.5
36
8
27.5
8 36.5
36.5 8
27.5
8
7.5
36 7.5
8
36.5
8 36.5
8
36.5 8
36.5
8 36.5
8
P09
=
P10*
60
=
=
39
26
4.5 10
3
P11*
60
=
=
42
32
4.5 10
3
32
35 4.5
35
35 4.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P12*
65
=
=
46
32
4.5 10 3.5
32
35
4.5
35 4.5
35
4.5
26 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P13*
80
=
=
65
50
5.5 10 3.5
32
35
4.5
35 4.5
35
4.5
26 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P14*
60
=
=
39
20
4.5 10 2.5
20
35
4.5
35 4.5
35
4.5
26 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P15
=
75 100
90
60
5.8 12 3.5
32
37
6.5
37 6.5
37
6.5
28 8.5
28
8.5
37 8.5
28
8.5
37 8.5
37
8.5
37 8.5
P16*
60
=
=
45
30
3.5 14
7
30
39 8.5
39
39 8.5
12 4.5
8.5
28 8.5
37
8.5
8.5
8.5
30 10.5 30 10.5 39 10.5 30 10.5 39 10.5 39 10.5 39 10.5
P17
=
60
82
70
50
4.5 16.5 8
32
41.5 11 41.5 11 41.5 11 32.5 13 32.5 13 41.5 13 32.5 13 41.5 13 41.5 13 41.5 13
P18
=
60
80
60
50
M4 10.5 3.5
32
35.5
P19*
60
=
=
36
25
4.5 10
25
P20
=
60
82
70
50
5.5 10.5 3.5
32
P21*
60
=
=
46
30
4.5 10
3
30
2
3
5 35.5
35 4.5 35.5 5
35
5 4.5
35.5
5
35 4.5
35
4.5
35
35 4.5
35.5
5 26.5
35 4.5 35.5 5
26 26.5
7
26.5
6.5 26 7
35 4.5
26
35
26 6.5
7 35.5 6.5
26.5 7
6.5 26
7
35 6.5 35.5
7
26.5 26
7 35.5 6.5
26.5 7
7
35 6.5 35.5
35.5 35
7 35.5
7 35.5 6.5 7
7
35 6.5 35.5
7
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P22
=
60
80 70.71
36
4.5 10
P23
=
62
85
50
5.5 15.5 3.5
P24
=
75 100
90
70
5.8 12 3.5
32
37
37 6.5
37
28 8.5
28
37 8.5
28
37 8.5
37
P25
=
70
95
85
55
5.8 12 3.5
32
37 6.5
37
37 6.5
28
28 8.5
37
28 8.5
37
37 8.5
37
P26*
=
60
80
65.5
34
5.5 10 3.5
33
35
4.5
35 4.5
35
4.5
26 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
26
6.5
35 6.5
35
6.5
35 6.5
P27
=
80 110
95
50
6.5 12 3.5
37 8.5
P28
=
60
80 66.67 38.1 M4 9
P29
60
=
=
45
30
M3 11
P30
=
70
95
85
60
P31
=
62
85
70
50
70
32 32
4.5
4.5
26
40.5 10 40.5 10 40.5 10 31.5 12 31.5 12 40.5 12 31.5 12 40.5 12 40.5 12 40.5 12 6.5
6.5
6.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
37 8.5 8.5
32
37
6.5
37 6.5
37
6.5
28 8.5
28
8.5
37 8.5
28
8.5
37 8.5
37
8.5
2.5
32
34
3.5
34 3.5
34
3.5
25 5.5
25
5.5
34 5.5
25
5.5
34 5.5
34
5.5
4
32
36 5.5
36
5.5
36 5.5
27
7.5
27 7.5
36
7.5
27 7.5
36
7.5
36 7.5
36
5.8 12 3.5
32
37 6.5
37
6.5
37 6.5
28
8.5
28 8.5
37
8.5
28 8.5
37
8.5
37 8.5
37
8.5
M4 11 3.5
32
36 5.5
36
5.5
36 5.5
27
7.5
27 7.5
36
7.5
27 7.5
36
7.5
36 7.5
36
7.5
To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141) . for assembly drawings.
133
34 5.5 7.5
EP90 AA
TT Output flange
36 30
3
10
Output flange
M6x12
36 30
3
M6x12
6x6
22 k6
19 k6
AE
AE
6x6
7
M8x16
M6x16 7.5 T
1 98 144
Steps
C1 T
2 127 173
4.5
68 h7 80 90
S
C1
50 h7 65 90
S
C1 T
1 101 144
Steps
AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19
C1 T
2 130 173
AQ
AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19
TQ Output flange
Output flange
3
36 30
36 30
12
20
7
3
12
20
7
6x6
22 k6
19 k6
AE
AE
6x6
120
M8x16
65 g6 90 105
18 C1
S
T
1 88 144
Steps
C1 T
2 117 173
120
M6x16
65 g6 90 105
18 C1
S
T
1 88 144
Steps
AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19
C1 T
2 117 173
AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19
Technical data EP 90 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3 50 80 160
4 55 90 180
5 60 100 200
2 7 55 90 180
10 50 80 160
9 65 100 200
12 70 110 220
15 75 120 240
16 75 120 240
0.5159
0.3371
0.2742
0.2247
0.2008
0.5193
0.4995
0.4925
0.3272
0.7271
0.5483
0.4854
0.4359
0.4120
0.7305
0.7305
0.7036
0.5384
9.0
7.5
20 75 120 240
25 75 120 240
100 55 n1nom 90 n1max 180 LpA 0.3233 0.2651 0.2215 0.2202 0.1992 0.1985 0.1980 0.1978 Lh 0.5345 0.4763 0.4326 0.4314 0.4103 0.4097 0.4092 0.4090 FR2 FA2 9.0 7.5
0.96
28 75 120 240
0.93
134
35 75 120 240
40 75 120 240
50 75 120 240
70 65 100 200
max
1
2
4000 5000 < 70 20000 2600 2000 15'
20'
EP90 Lmax
Input flange
H
O
AE H7
O
D
V
S1 S
R H7 I F
R H7 Q I
Input shaft Input flange
AE 9
I
R
F
Q
V
P01*
80
=
=
P02
= 106.5 140 125.72 55.52
P03*
=
80
90
75
60
5.5 12 3.5
45
P04*
105
=
=
85
70
6.5 12 3.5
P05
=
P06
=
90
120 100
80
6.5 13
P07
=
100 135 115
95
8.5 13 4.5
P08
=
116 160 130
110
P09*
80
=
=
39
26
4.5 12
P10*
80
=
=
65
50
5.5 12 3.5
(H7)
=
150 182 166
115
=
80
105
90
70
P14
105
=
=
90
70
P15 *
80
=
=
70
142 190 165
= 80
7
11
82.5 110 98.425 73.02 6.5 12
P11
P16
S
66.67 38.1 5.5 12
P12*
P17*
O
=
=
9
9
L max
12 L max
12.7 L max
14 L max
15.87 L max
16 L max
19 L max
D
3
38.1
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
3
45
43
5.5
43
8
28
8
43
8
43
8
43
8
43
8
43
8
43
8
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
3
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
4
45
45
7.5
45
10
30
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
4
11
6.5 12 3.5 6
L max
11
S1
13 4.5
32
L max
9.525 H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
45
45
7.5
45
10
30
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
45
7.5
45
10
30
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
26
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
64 26.5 64
50x14 32
44
6.5
29
49
29
64
29
64
29
64
29
64
29
64
29
64
29
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
19
9
32
51 13.5 51
16
36
16
51
16
51
16
51
16
51
50
4.5 17
8
45
49 11.5 49
14
34
14
49
14
49
14
49
14
49
14
49
14
49
14
130
11 13 4.5
45
45
7.5
45
10
30
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
45
10
63
40
5.5 12 3.5
40
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
32
63 25.5 63
28
48
28
63
28
63
28
63
28
63
28
63
28
63
28
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P18
=
130 170 145
110
M8 31
P19*
=
80
105
90
60
6.5 12 3.5
32
7
6.5
44
16
51
16
51
16
P20*
=
80
105
85
55
5.5 12 3.5
36
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P21
=
80
110
95
50
M6 12 3.5
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P22
80
=
=
70
50
M4
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P23
=
80
90
75
60
M5 12 3.5
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P24
80
=
=
46
30
M4
30
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
P25
80
=
=
99
60
M6 12 3.5
45
44
6.5
44
9
29
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
44
9
12
12
4
4
To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.
135
EP120 AA
TT
4
115
Output flange
58 50
12
Output flange
M8x16
50 45
2.5
M8x16
8x7
32 k6
25 k6
AE
AE
10x8
7
M12x24
M10x22 6 T
1 115.8 185.8 134.8 204.8
Steps
C1 T C1 T
5
90 h7 108 125
S
C1
2 148.4 218.4 167.4 237.4
T
1 120.8 177.8 139.8 196.8
Steps
C1 T C1 T
AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28
2 153.4 210.4 172.4 229.4
AQ 4
50 45
15
25
AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28
TQ Output flange
58 50
70 h7 85 115
S
C1
9
2.5
Output flange
15
25
9
8x7
32 k6
25 k6
AE
AE
10x8
155
M12x24
90 g6 115 135
20 C1
S
T
1 102.8 185.8 121.8 204.8
Steps
C1 T C1 T
2 135.4 218.4 154.4 237.4
155
M10x22
90 g6 115 135
20 C1
S
T
1 102.8 177.8 121.8 196.8
Steps
C1 T C1 T
AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28
2 135.4 210.4 154.4 229.4
AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28
Technical data EP 120 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd
3
4
5
2 7
10
9
12
15
16
20
25 220 350
28
35
40
50
70
100
1
n1nom n1max 400 500 600 460 380 500 600 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 540 400 LpA 2.0027 1.1339 0.8557 0.6244 0.5047 1.9802 1.8962 1.8552 1.0736 1.0505 0.8023 0.6048 0.5977 0.4951 0.4918 0.4895 0.4883 Lh 4.1528 3.2840 3.0058 2.7745 2.6548 3.1885 3.1045 3.0636 2.2819 2.2589 2.0106 1.8132 1.8061 1.7035 1.7002 1.6979 1.6967 FR2 FA2 32 28 32 30 28 120 190
150 240
180 290
150 220
100 180
150 240
180 290
220 350
220 350
220 350
0.96
220 350
0.93
136
220 350
220 350
220 350
170 270
110 200
max
2
3000 4000 < 70 20000 4500 4000 15'
20'
EP120 Lmax
Input flange
H
O
AE H7
O
D
V
S1 S
R H7 I
R H7 Q I
F
Input shaft AE
Input flange 12.7 F
Q
V
I
R
O
S
115 140 125.72 55.52 6.5
P01*
=
P02*
115
=
=
P03*
115
=
=
P04*
115
=
=
P05*
120
=
=
P06*
=
P07
(H7)
S1
D
L max
H
14 L max
15.87 H
L max
H
16 L max
19 H
L max
22 H
L max
24 H
L max
28 H
L max
H
13
3
55.52
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
75
60
5.5
13
3.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
85
70
6.5
13
3.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
98.42 73.02 6.5
13
3
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
100
80
6.5
13
4
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
115 140
115
95
9
13
4.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
=
115 160
130
110
8.5
13
4.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6 6
P08
=
142 190
165
130
11
13
4.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
P09
=
192 250
215
180
13
14
4.5
60
44
7
36
7
44
7
44
7
44
7
63
7
63
7
63
7
P10*
115
65
50
6.5
13
3.5
50
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
P11
=
130 170
145
110
M8
31
7
60
61
24
53
24
61
24
61
24
61
24
80
24
80
24
80
24
P12
=
130 170
145
110
M8
17
7
60
47
10
39
10
47
10
47
10
47
10
66
10
66
10
66
10
P13
=
115 160
130
110
M8
13
4.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
P14*
115
=
=
70
50
6.5
13
3.5
50
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
P15
115
=
=
90
70
M5
11
3.5
60
41
4
33
4
41
4
41
4
41
4
60
4
60
4
60
4
P17*
115
=
=
90
70
6.5
13
3.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
=
=
P18
=
130
95
8.5
13
4.5
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
P19*
115
=
=
95
50
6.5
13
3.5
50
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
P20
115
=
=
99
60
M6
13
4
60
43
6
35
6
43
6
43
6
43
6
62
6
62
6
62
6
115 155
To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.
137
EP155 AA
TT
5
140
Output flange
80 70
15
Output flange
M10x20
55 50
2.5
M12x20
10x8
40 k6
32 k6
AE
AE
12x8
15
M16x36
M12x28 8 T
1 156 251 181 276
Steps
C1 T C1 T
8
120 h7 140 160
S
C1
2 197.5 292.5 222.5 317.5
80 h7 110 140
S
C1 T
1 156 226 181 251
Steps
C1 T C1 T
AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38
2 197.5 267.5 222.5 292.5
AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38
AQ Output flange
80 70
6
23.5
30
11
40 k6
AE
12x8
188
M16x36
105 g6 140 165
23 C1
S
T
1 141 251 166 276
Steps
C1 T C1 T
2 182.5 292.5 207.5 317.5
AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38
Technical data EP 155 Steps
1
Steps
i T2N T2A
2
3
4
5
7
10
9
12
15
16
20
35
40
50
70
100
320
380
300
220
320
400
500
500
500
25 500
28
240
500
500
500
500
350
250
n1nom
3000
600
480
600
750
750
750
750
750
750
750
750
n1max LpA Lh FR2 (AA) FR2 (TT)
4000 < 70 20000 6500 5300
FA2 (AA) FA2 (TT)
3250 2650
420
540
480
400
560
460
T2S Jmin
880
1140 1260 1000
850
1000 1250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1120
920
6.2232
3.6993
1.7391
6.0151
Jmax
13.9214 11.3975 10.5144 9.8051
Rt
60
Rd
2.8162
2.1069
2.0320
2.0135
1.7026
1.6934
1.6864
1.6827
9.4373 13.7133 13.5057 13.4074 11.1653 11.1100 10.3306 9.7302
9.7117
9.4008
9.3916
9.3846
9.3809
50
5.8025
5.7092
3.4671
3.4118
2.6324
60
0.96
50 0.93
138
1
max
2
15'
20'
EP155 Lmax
Input flange
H
O
AE H7
O
D
V
S1 S
R H7 I
R H7 Q I
F
Input shaft AE
Input flange 15.87 F
Q
V
P01* 140
=
= 125.72 55.52 6.5
P02* 140
=
=
100
=
=
P03* 140
I
R (H7)
O
S
S1
D
L max
H
16 L max
19 H
L max
22 H
L max
24 H
L max
28 H
L max
32 H
L max
35 H
L max
38 H
L max
H
15
4
55.52
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
80
6.5
15
4
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
115
95
8.5
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P04*
=
140 160
130
110
8.5
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P05
=
142 190
165
130
11
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P06
=
190 250
215
180
13
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P07
=
250 300
265
230
13
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P08
=
130 165
145
P09
=
180 230
200
P10
=
115 150
130
95
P11
=
180 230
198
155 13.5 22
P12
=
220 270
235
200 13.5 15
5
70
P13
=
190 250
215
130
13
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P14
=
142 190
165
110
11
15
4.5
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
90
70
6.5
15
4
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
P15* 150
=
=
M 8 18
7
70
60.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 45.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3
114.3 13.5 22
110
11
70
64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 49.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3
70
57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
M 8 15
4.5 7
120x11 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 49.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3
* To mount the motor it is necessary to remove the gearbox flange. Please go to www.tea.net.au for assembly drawings.
139
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
6W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Part No. of Motor
Output Voltage Frequency
Allowable Torque
Poles
RPM
Duty Motor
Hz
p
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
Motor with gear box
W
V
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
2IK6RA-A
2IK6RGN-A
6
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.05
0.50
0.03
0.29
0.03
0.33
3.0/250
2IK6RA-C
2IK6RGN-C
6
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.05
0.50
0.03
0.29
0.03
0.33
0.8/450
2RK6RA-A
2RK6RGN-A
6
1ph110
50
4
30Min
90~1350
0.06
0.55
0.03
0.32
0.04
0.38
3.5/250
2RK6RA-C
2RK6RGN-C
6
1ph220
50
4
30Min
90~1350
0.06
0.55
0.03
0.32
0.04
0.38
1.0/450
ì F/VAC
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-2:60mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 6:6W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat type; GN: Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio
2GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 2GN20K-GN50K 2GN60K-GN200K Motor
L(mm)
(kg)
32
0.24 0.30 0.33 0.75
42
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 2:60mm; Gear Type GN:Helical Gear: Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1; Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 2GNK - Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. Frequency
3
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed r/min
50Hz
Output Shaft Speed
5
500 417 300
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
250 200 166 150 120 100
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
N.m
0.13 0.15 0.21 0.26 0.31 0.38 0.42 0.53 0.63 0.76 0.76 0.95 1.14 1.36 1.52 1.72 2.06 2.57 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94
kgf.cm
1.3
r/min
600 500 360
N.m
0.10 0.13 0.17 0.21 0.26 0.30 0.34 0.43 0.51 0.62 0.62 0.76 0.92 1.11 1.24 1.39 1.67 2.09 2.50 2.78 2.94 2.94
Allowable Torque
60Hz
3.6
continued below
Allowable Torque kgf.cm
1.0
1.5
2.1
1.3 1.7
2.6
3.2
3.9
4.3
5.4
6.4
7.7
7.7
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
2.1
2.6
3.1
3.5
4.4
5.2
6.3
90
6.3
9.7 11.6 13.9 15.5 17.5 21.0 26.2 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 72
7.8
60
9.4
50
45
36
30
24
20
18
15
12
11.3 12.6 14.2 17.0 21.3 25.5 28.4 30.0 30.0
Gearbox type 2GNK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed r/min
ì
Voltage
L±
W±1
H ±1
Capacity ±5% Allowable Deviation±5%
0.8 1.0 3.0 3.5
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
50Hz
V
mm
mm
mm
37 37 47 47
14 14 22 22
28 28 34 34
7.5
2.94 2.94
kgf.cm 30.0 Output Shaft Speed r/min
Down-lead
200
8
Allowable Torque
Type
450 450 250 250
N.m
180
60Hz
N.m Allowable Torque
10
30.0 9
2.94 2.94
kgf.cm 30.0
30.0
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
140
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
15W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor
Output Voltage
Motor
Motor with gear box
W
3IK15RA-A
3IK15RGN-A
15
Frequency
V
Allowable Torque
Poles
Hz
P
1ph110
50
4
Duty CONT
1200r/min
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
0.12
1.20
0.04
0.35
90~1350
CONT
Starting Torque
RPM
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
0.06
0.55
5.0/250
kgf.cm
3IK15RA-C
3IK15RGN-C
15
1ph220
50
4
90~1350
0.12
1.20
0.04
0.35
0.06
0.55
1.2/450
3RK15RA-A
3RK15RGN-A
15
1ph110
50
4
30Min
90~1350
0.13
1.30
0.04
0.40
0.07
0.65
6.0/250
3RK15RA-C
3RK15RGN-C
15
1ph220
50
4
30Min
90~1350
0.13
1.30
0.04
0.40
0.07
0.65
1.5/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-3:70mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 15:15W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight
Reduction Ratio 4GN3K-GN18K 3GN20K-GN50K 3GN60K-GN200K
Gearbox
L(mm) 32
(kg) 0.38 0.47 0.52 1.20
42
Motor
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 3:70mm; Gear Type GN:Helical Gear: Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1; Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 3GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
0.31 0.38 0.53 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.06 1.32 1.59 1.90 1.90 2.37 2.85 3.42 3.81 4.28 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90
kgf.cm
3.2
3.9
r/min
600
500 360
5.4
250 200 166 150 120 100
6.5
8.1
9.7
10.8 13.5 6.2 19.4 19.4 24.2 29.1 34.9 38.8 43.6 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
300 240 200 180 144
120 100
90
72
60
50
45
36
30
24
20
18
15
12
N.m
0.29 0.35 0.50 0.60 0.75 0.89 0.99 1.25 1.49 1.79 1.79 2.24 2.68 3.22 3.58 4.02 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90
kgf.cm
3.0
3.6
5.1
6.1
7.6
9.1 10.1 12.7 15.2 18.2 18.2 22.8 27.3 32.8 36.5 41.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
Gearbox type 3GNK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F Allowable Deviation ± 5%
1.2 1.5 5.0 6.0
50Hz
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 450 250 250
37 37 47 47
14 14 22 26
28 28 34 38
Type
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
r/min
180
200
8
7.5
N.m
4.90 4.90
kgf.cm
50.0 50.0
r/min
10
9
N.m
4.90 4.90
kgf.cm
50.0 50.0
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
141
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
25W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor
Output Voltage
Frequency
Allowable Torque
Poles
Motor
Motor with gear box
W
V
Hz
P
4IK25RA-A
4IK25RGN-A
25
1ph110
50
4
4IK25RA-C
4IK25RGN-C
25
1ph220
50
4RK25RA-A
4RK25RGN-A
25
1ph110
50
4RK25RA-C
4RK25RGN-C
25
1ph220
50
RPM
Duty
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
0.45
0.13
0.45
7.0/250
0.05
0.45
0.13
0.45
1.8/450
0.05
0.50
0.15
0.50
8.0/250
0.50
0.18
0.50
2.2/450
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
CONT
90~1350
0.19
1.90
0.05
4
CONT
90~1350
0.19
1.90
4
30Min
90~1350
0.20
0.20
4
30Min
90~1350
0.20
0.20
0.05
kgf.cm
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-4:80mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 25:25W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A:Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Description Individual Reduction Reduction Ratio Gearbox 4GN3K-GN18K Model 4:80mm Gearbox 4GN20K-GN50K Gear Type GN:Helical Gear 4GN60K-GN200K Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Intermediate 4GN10K Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing Gearbox
43.5
0.43
32
1.65
Motor
Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Key dimensions
(kg) 0.43 0.57 0.61
L(mm) 32
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 4GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque
3
60Hz
Allowable Torque
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
0.52 0.63 0.87 1.05 1.31 1.57 1.74 2.19 2.62 3.15 3.15 3.94 4.72 5.66 6.29 7.12 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84
kgf.cm
Output Shaft Speed
3.6
continued below
r/min
5.3
6.4 8.9
600 500 360
250 200 166 150 120 100
10.7 13.4 16.0 17.8 22.3 26.7 32.1 32.1 40.2 48.2 57.8 64.2 72.6 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
50
45
36
30
24
20
18
15
12
N.m
0.43 0.51 0.72 0.85 1.07 1.28 1.43 1.78 2.15 2.57 2.58 3.22 3.86 4.64 5.16 5.82 6.99 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84
kgf.cm
4.4
5.2 7.3
8.7 10.9 13.1 14.6 18.2 21.9 26.2 26.3 32.9 39.4 47.3 52.6 59.4 71.3 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0
Gearbox type 4GNK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F Allowable Deviation ± 5%
1.8 2.2 7.0 8.0
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
50Hz
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 450 250 250
38 38 47 47
18 18 26 26
28 28 38 38
Type
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
r/min
180
200
8
7.5
N.m
7.84 7.84
kgf.cm
80.0 80.0
r/min
10
N.m
7.84 7.84
9
kgf.cm
80.0 80.0
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
142
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
40W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor
Output Voltage
Frequency
Allowable Torque
Poles
Motor
Motor with gear box
W
V
Hz
P
5IK40RA-A
5IK40RGN-A
40
1ph110
50
4
5IK40RA-C
5IK40RGN-C
40
1ph220
50
5RK40RA-A
5RK40RGN-A
40
1ph110
50
5RK40RA-C
5RK40RGN-C
40
1ph220
50
RPM
Duty
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
0.60
0.19
1.90
10.0/250
0.06
0.60
0.19
1.90
2.5/450
0.07
0.65
0.21
2.10
12.0/250
0.65
0.21
2.10
3.0/450
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
CONT
90~1350
0.30
3.00
0.06
4
CONT
90~1350
0.30
3.00
4
30Min
90~1350
0.32
3.20
4
30Min
90~1350
0.32
3.20
0.07
kgf.cm
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 40:40W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A:Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio
L(mm)
5GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 5GN20K-GN36K 5GN40K-GN200K Motor
(kg) 0.73 1.03 1.13 2.50
42 60
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
0.68 0.82 1.14 1.37 1.72 2.06 2.29 2.86 3.43 4.13 4.59 5.16 6.20 7.44 8.26 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
6.94 8.37 11.6 14.0 17.6 21.0 23.4 29.2 35.0 42.1 46.8 52.6 63.3 75.9 84.3 100 100 100 100 100 100
100
r/min
600 500 360
12
250 200 166 150 120 100
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
50
45
36
30
24
20
18
15
N.m
0.58 0.70 0.97 1.16 1.45 1.74 1.93 2.41 2.90 3.48 3.87 4.36 5.23 6.28 6.97 8.72 9.46 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
5.92 7.14 9.90 11.8 10.8 17.7 19.7 24.6 29.6 35.5 39.5 44.5 53.4 64.1 71.1 89.0 96.5 100 100 100 100
100
Gearbox type 5GNK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
50Hz
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
V
mm
mm
mm
2.5 3.0 10.0 12.0
450 450 250 250
37 47 57 57
18 22 26 32
28 34 38 36
Type
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
r/min
180
200
8
7.5
N.m
9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
100 100
r/min
10
N.m
9.80 9.80
9
kgf.cm
100
100
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
143
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
60W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Motor
Output Voltage
Motor with gear box
W
Frequency
V
Allowable Torque
Poles
Hz
P
RPM
Duty
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
5IK60RA-AF
5IK60RGN-AF
60
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.50
5.00
0.14
1.40
0.31
3.10
15.0/250
5IK60RA-CF
5IK60RGN-CF
60
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.50
5.00
0.14
1.40
0.33
3.30
4.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 60:60W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GN: Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P: Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio
L(mm)
5GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 5GN20K-GN36K 5GN40K-GN200K Motor
60
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.
R8
(kg) 0.73 1.03 1.13 2.70
42
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 40 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3 r/min N.m
3.6
5
6
500 417 300
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
250 200 166 150 120 100
1.03 1.24 1.72
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
2.6 2.58 3.10 3.10 3.88 4.65 5.38 5.60 7.01 8.41 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
10.5 12.7 17.6 21.0 26.3 31.6 31.6 39.6 47.4 54.9 57.1 71.6 85.8 100 100
100 100
100 100 100
100 100
r/min
600 500 360
36
24
15
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
50
45
N.m
0.9
kgf.cm
9.18 11.0 15.3 18.4 23.0 27.6 27.6 34.5 41.3 49.5 49.5 62.2 74.7 90.0 100
30
20
18
12
1.08 1.50 1.80 2.23 2.70 2.70 3.38 4.05 4.88 4.88 6.10 7.33 8.97 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 100 100
100 100 100
100 100
Gearbox type 5GNK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 57
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
4.0 15.0
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
22 32
34 46
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
r/min
180
200
8
7.5
N.m
9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
100
100
r/min
10
9
N.m
9.80 9.80
kgf.cm
100
100
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
144
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
60W
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Motor
Motor with gear box
Output Voltage W
V
Frequency
Allowable Torque
Poles
Hz
P
Duty
RPM
1200r/min
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
Starting Torque
90r/min N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
Capacitor/Ve ì F/VAC
5IK60RA-AF
5IK60RGU-AF
60
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.50
5.00
0.14
1.40
0.31
3.10
15.0/250
5IK60RA-CF
5IK60RGU-CF
60
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.50
5.00
0.14
1.40
0.33
3.30
4.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 60:60W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU: Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P: Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor
Key dimensions
(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 2.70
L(mm) 65
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 18 & 40 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
250 200 166 150 120 100
N.m
1.03 1.24 1.72
2.6 2.58 3.10 3.10 3.88 4.65 5.38 5.60 7.01 8.41 10.1 11.2 14.0 16.8 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
10.5 12.7 17.6 21.0 26.3 31.6 31.6 39.6 47.4 54.9 57.1 71.6 85.8 103 114
r/min
600 500 360
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
50
45
1430 171 36
30
200 200 200
200 200
24
15
20
18
12
N.m
0.9 1.08 1.50 1.80 2.23 2.70 2.70 3.38 4.05 4.88 4.88 6.10 7.33 8.79 9.76 12.2 14.6 18.3 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
9.18 11.0 15.3 18.4 23.0 27.6 27.6 34.5 41.3 49.5 49.5 62.2 74.7 90.0 99.8
124 149
187 200 200
200 200
Gearbox type 5GUK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 57
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
4.0 15.0
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
145
22 32
34 46
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
180
200
r/min
8
7.5
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200 200
r/min
10
9
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200
200
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
90W
with digital readout
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Motor
Motor with gear box
Output Voltage
Frequency
Allowable Torque
Poles
W
V
Hz
P
RPM
Duty
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
5IK90RA-AF
5IK90RGU-AF
90
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.71
7.10
0.23
2.30
0.48
4.80
20.0/250
5IK90RA-CF
5IK90RGU-CF
90
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.71
7.10
0.23
2.30
0.45
4.50
5.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 90:90W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor
Key dimensions
(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 3.20
L(mm) 65
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm. Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
1.55 1.86 2.58 3.10 3.87 4.64 4.65 5.81 6.98 8.37 8.40 10.5 12.6 15.1 16.8 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
250 200 166 150 120 100
kgf.cm
15.8 19.0 29.2 31.6 39.6 47.2 47.4 59.3 71.2 85.4 85.7 107 129
154 171
200 200
r/min
600 500 360
50
36
N.m
1.35 1.62 2.25 2.70 3.37 4.04 4.05 5.06 6.07 7.29 7.32 9.15 11.0 13.2 14.6 18.3 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
13.8 16.5 23.0 27.6 34.4 41.2 41.3 51.6 61.9 74.4 74.7 93.4 112
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
45
135 149
200 200 200
30
187 200
24
20
18
200 200 200
200 200 15
12
200 200
Gearbox type 5GUK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 68
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
5.0 20.0
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
22 32
34 56
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
180
200
r/min
8
7.5
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200 200
r/min
10
9
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200
200
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
146
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
120W
with digital readout
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor
Output Voltage
Motor
Motor with gear box
W
5IK120A-AF
5IK120RGU-AF
120
5IK120A-CF
5IK120RGU-CF
120
Frequency
V
Allowable Torque
Poles
RPM
Duty
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
Hz
P
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.75
7.50
0.40
4.00
0.55
5.50
25.0/250
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.75
7.50
0.40
4.00
0.65
6.50
7.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 120:120W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Yype; GU Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor
Key dimensions
(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 3.20
L(mm) 65
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
2.14 2.57 3.57 4.29 5.38 6.43 6.43 8.05 9.66 11.6 11.6 14.6 17.5 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
250 200 166 150 120 100
kgf.cm
21.8 26.2 36.4 43.8 54.7 65.6 65.6 82.1 98.6 118 118 149 196
200 200
200 200
r/min
600 500 360
50
36
N.m
1.80 2.16 3.00 3.60 4.49 5.39 5.39 6.75 8.10 9.72 9.72 12.2 14.6 17.6 19.5 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
18.4 22.0 30.6 36.7 45.8 55.0 55.0 68.9 82.7 99.2 99.2 124 149
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
90
72
60
45
180 199
200 200 200
30
200 200
24
20
18
200 200 200
200 200 15
12
200 200
Gearbox type 5GUK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 68
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
7.0 25.0
26 32
38 56
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
180
200
r/min
8
7.5
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200 200
r/min
10
9
N.m
19.6 19.6
kgf.cm
200
200
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
147
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
120W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Motor
Output
Motor with gear box
Allowable Torque
Voltage Frequency Poles
W
V
Hz
P
Duty
RPM
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
6IK120RA-AF
6IK120RGU-AF
120
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.75
7.50
0.40
4.00
0.51
5.10
25.0/250
6IK120RA-CF
6IK120RGU-CF
120
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.75
7.50
0.40
4.00
0.65
6.50
8.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-6:100mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, Motor Series :K; Output Power 120:120W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU:Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 6GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 6GU10K-GU18K 6GU20K-GU200K Motor
(kg)
L(mm)
1.87 2.10 2.75 4.85
72
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 6:100mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Key dimensions Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 6GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
continued below
60
75
90
100
120
150
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
2.06 2.48 3.44 4.13 5.16 6.19 6.19 7.75 9.30 11.2 11.2 14.0 16.8 20.0 22.4 28.0
33.6 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
21.0 25.3 35.1 42.1 52.6 63.2 63.2 79.1 94.9 114
171 206 228 286
343 400
r/min
600 500 360
60
30
250 200 166 150 120 100
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
114 143 90
72
50
45
36
24
400 400 400 400 20
18
15
12
N.m
1.74 2.09 2.90 3.48 4.35 5.22 5.22 6.54 7.85 9.42 9.42 11.8 14.2 17.0 18.9 23.6
28.4 35.5 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
17.8 21.3 29.6 35.5 44.4 53.3 53.3 69.7 80.0 96.1 96.1 121
289 362
146 174 193 241
400 400 400 400
Gearbox type 6GUK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 68
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
8.0 25.0
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
26 32
38 56
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
180
200
r/min
8
7.5
N.m
39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
400 400
r/min
10
N.m
39.2 39.2
9
kgf.cm
400
400
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
148
AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes
The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.
140W
with digital readout
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Motor
Output
Motor with gear box
Allowable Torque
Voltage Frequency Poles
W
V
Hz
P
Duty
RPM
1200r/min
Starting Torque
90r/min
Capacitor/Ve
r/min
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
N.m
kgf.cm
ì F/VAC
61K140RA-AF
6IK140RGU-AF
140
1ph110
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.85
8.50
0.45
4.50
0.62
6.20
30.0/250
6IK140RA-CF
6IK140RGU-CF
140
1ph220
50
4
CONT
90~1350
0.85
8.50
0.45
4.50
0.68
6.80
10.0/450
Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-6:100mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, Motor Series :K; Output Power 140:140W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU:Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.
Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 6GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 6GU10K-GU18K 6GU20K-GU200K Motor
(kg)
L(mm)
1.87 2.10 2.75 5.05
72
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 6:100mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing
Key dimensions Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 6GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
50Hz
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
60Hz
Allowable Torque
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
10
12.5
15
continued below
18
20
25
30
36
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
150
83
75
60
50
41
37
30
25
20
16
15
12
10
r/min
500 417 300
N.m
2.36 2.83 3.93 4.71 5.89 7.07 7.07 8.85 10.6 12.7 12.7 16.0 19.2 23.0 25.6 32.0 38.4 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
24.1 28.8 40.1 48.1 60.1 72.1 72.1 90.3 108 130
r/min
600 500 360
N.m
2.03 2.44 3.39 4.06 5.08 6.09 6.09 7.60 9.15 11.0 11.0 13.8 16.6 19.9 22.1 27.6 33.1 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
20.7 24.9 34.6 41.2 51.8 62.1 62.1 77.6 93.4 112
250 200 166 150 120 100
300 240 200 180 144 120 100
130 163 196 90
72
60
112 141 169
235 261 50
45
203 226
327 392 36
30
282 338
400 400 400 24
20
18
400 400 400
400 400 15
12
400 400
Gearbox type 6GUK
Capacitor
Frequency
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
ì
capacity ì F
Voltage
L± 1
W ±1
H ±1
V
mm
mm
mm
450 250
47 68
50Hz
Type
Allowable Deviation ± 5%
10. 30.0
26 32
38 56
Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed
Down-lead
60Hz
Allowable Torque
180
200
r/min
8
7.5
N.m
39.2 39.2
kgf.cm
400 400
r/min
10
N.m
39.2 39.2
9
kgf.cm
400
400
Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
149
DC Motors
6-10W
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Voltage
No Load Parameters Speed Current
Power
Load Parameters Speed Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight
V
W
RPM
A
RPM
mN.m
A
H
kg.
12 12 24 24 90 90
6 6 6 6 6 6
3200 3200 3200 3200 3000 3000
0.6 Max. 0.6 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.2 Max. 0.2 Max.
2950 2950 2950 2950 2800 2800
19 19 19 19 20 20
0.8 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.3
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Z2D10-12 Z2DW10-12 Z2D10-24 Z2DW10-24 Z2D10-90
12 12 24 24 90
10 10 10 10 10
3200 3200 3300 3300 3200
1.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.3 Max.
2800 2800 3000 3000 2800
34 34 32 32 34
2.0 2.0 0.9 0.9 0.6
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Z2DW10-90
90
10
3200
0.3 Max.
2800
34
0.6
2000
0.7
Z2D06-12 Z2DW06-12 Z2D06-24 Z2DW06-24 Z2D06-90 Z2DW06-90
Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z2:60mm; DC Motor Type: D: internal brush DW: external brush Output Power: 06:6W; 10:10W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V Shape of Motor Shaft: GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.
a
Reduction Gearbox
Gearbox
2GN3K-GN18K
32
2GN25K -GN200K
41
How to order Motor: Z2-D(DW)-06(10)-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 2GN-Ratio-K
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 2:60mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing
L(mm)
Reduction Ratio
Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Gearbox type 2GN...K
Z2D06-24
3
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
r/min N.m
Allowable Torque
Z2D10-24
Reduction Ratio
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
36
50
60
75
90
81
59
49
39
32
100 120 150 180 200 29
24
19
16
14
a
0.04 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.14 0.19 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.42 0.51 0.70 0.76 0.96 1.15 1.28 1.53 1.92 2.30 2.56 0.48 0.57 0.80 0.96 1.20 1.45 2.00 2.40 2.89 3.61 4.34 5.21 7.23 7.85 9.81 11.7 13.1 15.6 19.6 23.5 26.1 30
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
83
60
50
40
33
a
Output Shaft Speed
r/min N.m
Allowable Torque
30
25
20
16
15
a
0.07 0.09 0.12 0.15 0.19 0.23 0.32 0.38 0.46 0.58 0.69 0.83 1.16 1.26 1.57 1.89 2.10 2.52 3.0
3.0 3.0
a
kgf.cm
0.78 0.94 1.31 1.57 1.97 2.96 3.29 3.94 4.73 5.92 7.11 8.53 11.8 12.8 16.1 12.2 21.4 25.7 30 75
L
Ø60
Ø60
75
3.6
a
kgf.cm
Model Type
30
983 819 590 491 393 327 236 196 163 118 98
a
30
30
L
60
Model Type
60
63
24
Ø60
Wiring Diagram of Motor
Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type 60
All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.
150
DC Motors
15W
List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage
Load Parameters
Power
Speed
Current
V
W
RPM
A
RPM
Z2D15-12 Z2DW15-12 Z2D15-24 Z2DW15-24 Z2D15-90
12 12 24 24 90
15 15 15 15 15
3200 3200 3300 3300 3200
0.8 Max. 0.8 Max. 0.4 Max. 0.4 Max. 0.2 Max.
2950 2950 3000 3000 3000
Z2DW15-90
90
15
3200
0.2 Max.
3000
L(mm)
Reduction Ratio 2GN3K-GN18K
32
2GN25K -GN200K
41
Speed
How to order Motor: Z2-D(DW)-15-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 2GN-Ratio-K
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 2:60mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing
Reduction Gearbox
Gearbox
Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z2:60mm; Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. DW: external brush Output Power: 15:15W 48 2.0 2000 0.9 48 2.0 2000 0.9 Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 48 1.0 2000 0.9 Shape of Motor Shaft: 48 1.0 2000 0.9 GN: For connection to gearbox, or 48 0.4 2000 0.9 A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway 48 0.4 2000 0.9 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.
Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Gearbox type 2GN...K
Z2D15-24
Reduction Ratio
3
Output Shaft Speed
r/min N.m
Allowable Torque
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
83
60
50
40
33
30
25
20
16
15
a
0.11 0.13 0.19 0.23 0.29 0.34 0.48 0.58 0.69 0.87 1.04 1.25 1.74 1.89 2.36 2.83 3.0
3.0 3.0
3.0 3.0
30
30
a
kgf.cm
1.18 1.42 1.97 2.36 2.96 3.55 4.93 5.92 7.10 8.89 10.6 12.8 17.7 19.2 24.1 28.9 30
89
L
Ø60
Ø60
89
30
1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100
a
60
30
30
L
60
Model Type
63
Ø60
24
Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type
Wiring Diagram of Motor
60
Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10
All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.
151
DC Motors
25W
List of Motor Characteristics
Model of Motor Voltage
Z3D25-12 Z3DW25-12 Z3D25-24 Z3DW25-24 Z3D25-90 Z3DW25-90
No Load Parameters Speed Current
Power
Load Description of Motor Part Number: Parameters Speed Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight Model & Dimensions-Z3:70mm; Z4: 80mm
V
W
RPM
A
RPM
mN.m
A
H
kg.
12 12 24 24 90 90
25 25 25 25 25 25
3300 3300 3200 3200 3100 3100
1.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.3 Max.
3000 3000 2800 2800 2700 2700
80 80 85 85 88 88
3.5 3.5 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
12 24 90
25 25 25
3200 3000 3200
1.4 Max. 0.7 Max. 0.2 Max.
3100 2850 3000
77 84 80
3.6 1.7 0.5
2000 2000 2000
1.7 1.7 1.7
DC Motor Type: D: internal brush DW: external brush Output Power: 25:25W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V Shape of Motor Shaft: GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.
a
Z4D25-12 Z4D25-24 Z4D25-90
Reduction Ratio
L(mm)
3GN3K-GN18K Gearbox for Z3D25 3GN25K -GN200K
42
4GN3K-GN18K Gearbox for Z4D25 4GN25K -GN200K
42.5
How to order Motor: Z3(4)-D(DW)-25-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 3(4)GN-Ratio-K
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 3:70mm 4:80mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing
Reduction Gearbox 32
32
Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Gearbox type 3GN...K
Model Type Z3D25-24GN
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque
3 r/min
Z4D25-24GN
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
30
36
50
60
75
90
933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112 93
77
56
46
37
31
100 120 150 180 200
0.20 0.24 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.62 0.86 1.03 1.12 1.55 1.86 2.24 3.11 3.37 4.22 5.0
23
18
15
14
5.0 5.0
28
5.0
5.0
5.0
2.11 2.53 3.52 4.22 5.28 6.34 8.80 10.5 11.4 15.8 19.0 22.8 31.7 34.4 43.1 50
50
50
50
50
50
Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Reduction Ratio
Allowable Torque
6
a
Gearbox type 4GN...K
Output Shaft Speed
5
a
N.m kgf.cm
Model Type
3.6
a
3
25
30
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
791 570 475 380 316 228 190 158 114
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
95
79
57
47
38
31
a
r/min
950
28
23
19
15
14
a
N.m
0.20 0.24 0.33 0.41 0.50 0.61 0.84 1.01 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.20 3.05 3.31 4.14 4.97 5.52 6.63 8.0
8.0 8.0
a
kgf.cm
2.07 2.49 3.46 4.15 5.19 6.23 8.65 10.3 12.4 15.6 18.7 22.4 31.2 33.8 42.3 50.7 56.4 67.7 80
80
80
Dimensions for Z3D25 (in mm) - For dimensions of Z4D25 please contact TEA or go to www.tea.net.au 96
Ø60
L
Ø70
33
Ø60
L
Ø60
101
73
70
Wiring Diagram of Motor
Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.
152
DC Motors
40W
List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage
Z4D40-12 Z4D40-24 Z4D40-90
Load Parameters
Power
Speed
Current
V
W
RPM
A
RPM
12 24 90
40 40 40
3100 3100 3200
2.0 Max. 0.8 Max. 0.3 Max.
2800 2800 3000
12 24 90
40 40 40
3100 3000 3200
2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.2 Max.
2800 2800 3000
Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z4:80mm; Z5:90mm Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. Output Power: 40:40W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 136 5.2 2000 1.8 127 2.1 2000 1.8 Shape of Motor Shaft: 127 0.7 2000 1.8 GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway 136 5.2 2000 1.9 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage 136 2.2 2000 1.9 is the same as the rated voltage of motor. 127 0.7 2000 1.9
Speed
a
Z5D40-12 Z5D40-24 Z5D40-90
Reduction Gearbox Gearbox for Z4D40 Gearbox for Z5D40
Approx.(kg)
Reduction Ratio
L(mm)
4GN3K-GN18K
32
4GN25K -GN200K
42.5
1.00
5GN3K-GN18K
42
1.35
5GN25K -GN200K
60
1.68
How to order Motor: Z4(5)-D-40-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 4(5)GN-Ratio-K
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 4:80mm 5:90mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing
0.80
Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 4GN...K
Model Type Z4D40-24
Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque
3 r/min N.m
Model Type Z5D40-24
Allowable Torque
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
83
60
50
40
33
30
25
20
16
15
a
0.30 .032 0.51 0.61 0.77 0.92 1.28 1.54 1.85 2.32 2.78 3.34 4.64 5.04 6.30 7.56 7.84 8.0 8.0 3.15 3.78 5.26 6.31 7.89 9.47 13.1 15.7 18.9 23.7 28.4 34.1 47.4 51.4 64.3 77.1 80
80
80
8.0 8.0 80
80
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
30
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112
93
77
56
46
37
31
a
r/min N.m
28
23
18
15
14
a
0.33 0.39 0.55 0.66 0.82 0.99 1.38 1.65 1.98 2.48 2.98 3.58 4.50 5.40 6.75 8.10 9.00 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 a
kgf.cm
3.37 4.05 5.63 6.76 8.45 10.1 14.1 16.9 20.2 25.4 30.4 36.5 45.9 55.1 68.9 82.6 91.8 100 100 100 100
Dimensions for Z5D40
L
L
Ø80
Ø80
Dimensions for Z4D40
5
Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
3.6
a
kgf.cm
Gearbox type 5GN...K
30
1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100
a
80
Ø80
90
Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type
Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type
90
Wiring Diagram of Motor
80
All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10
153
DC Motors
60-90W
List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage
Z5D60-12 Z5D60-24 Z5D60-90
Load Parameters
Power
Speed
Current
V
W
RPM
A
RPM
12 24 90
60 60 60
3000 3100 3100
2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.3 Max.
2600 2800 2900
12 24 90
90 90 90
3100 3300 3000
2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.3 Max.
2600 2800 2900
Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z5:90mm Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. Output Power: 60:60W; 90:90W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 220 9.0 2000 2.2 205 3.5 2000 2.2 Shape of Motor Shaft: 198 1.0 2000 2.2 GU: Re-inforced helical gear. Shaft suitable for connection to gearbox, or 330 12.0 2000 2.2 A: Round shaft, A1 with keyway 307 5.0 2000 2.2 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage 307 1.4 2000 2.2 is the same as the rated voltage of motor.
Speed
a
Z5D90-12 Z5D90-24 Z5D90-90
Reduction Gearbox
Gearbox
Reduction Ratio
L(mm)
5GU3K -GU200K
65.5
How to order Motor: Z5-D-60(90)-12(24/90)-GU(A)-(M) Gearbox: 5GU-Ratio-KB
Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 5:90mm Gear Type: GU:Re-inforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: KB:Ball Bearing
Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.
Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GU...K
Model Type Z5D60-24GU
Ratios 3 to 9 & 25 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque
3 r/min
Model Type Z5D90-24GU
Allowable Torque
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
25
30
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112
93
77
56
46
37
31
28
23
18
15
14
0.49 0.59 0.82 0.99 1.24 1.49 1.86 2.24 2.68 3.37 4.05 4.86 6.75 8.10 10.1 10.8 12.0 14.4 18.1 20.0 20.0 a
5.07 6.08 8.45 10.1 12.6 15.2 19.0 22.8 27.4 34.3 41.3 49.6 68.9 82.6 103 110 123 147 184 200 200
Ratios 3 to 9 & 25 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.
Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed
5
a
N.m kgf.cm
Gearbox type 5GU...K
3.6
a
25
30
36
50
60
75
90 100 120 150 180 200
933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112
3
3.6
5
6
7.5
9
12.5 15
18
93
77
56
46
37
31
a
r/min
28
23
18
15
14
a
N.m
0.74 0.89 1.24 1.49 1.86 2.23 2.80 3.36 4.03 5.06 6.07 7.29 10.1 12.1 15.1 16.2 18.1 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 a
7.61 9.13 12.6 15.2 19.1 22.8 28.5 34.2 41.1 51.6 62.0 74.4 103 124 155 166 184 200 200 200 200
kgf.cm
Dimensions for Z5D60 & Z5D90 L
65.5
130
Ø36
Ø80
Ø36
143
90 37
Ø80
Wiring Diagram of Motor
Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type
Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 90
All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC Motors are also available in 120W & 250W Please contact TEA or visit our website www.tea.net.au for details.
154
ZIMM – Screw Jack Building Block System Complete Solutions
We lift, lower, push and pull loads from 2.5kN to 1,000kN • Efficient construction due to our Screw Jack Building Block System – all components compatible • All components from one supplier saves purchase costs • Delivery of pre-mounted units and assembly groups, motors included • Short delivery times • Capable of bearing tension and compression loads • Attractive design • Stainless spindles and components on request • Custom components for specialist applications on request
Standard Version with Standing Spindle S Cast iron housing version S Aluminium housing version S
Standing spindle S The worm wheel has an internal thread and Safety nut SIFA for fail safe wear control transforms rotary motion into linear movement as long as the spindle is prevented from rotating either Ball Screws with optional by connection to the customer's fabrication or by pitches - version KGT incorporating the protection against rotation VS option. Anti Backlash AB with adjustable thread play
Standard Version with Rotating Spindle R Cast iron housing - version R
Aluminium housing version R
Rotating spindle R A flange nut moves up and down on a rotating screw.
Safety nut SIFA for fail safe wear control Ball Screws with optional pitches - version KGT
155
System Overview - Screw Jacks S System Components, Standing Spindle S
Fixing flange BF
Pivot bearing head SLK Spiral spring SF Rod end KGK
Motor
Bellow FB Tr left handed thread
Forked head GK Coupling KUZ
Tr INOX (stainless) Locking nut
Tr double pitch KGT Ball Screw
Rotary pulse encoder DIG
Tr Standard
Motor flange MF Handwheel HR
Spring brake FDB
Lubrication strip SL
Protective cap SK Assembly group limit switches ESSET
Fixing strips BFL
Hinged bearing plate KAR
Protection against rotation VS
Escape protection AS
Linear measuring system WMS
Contact T.E.A. for specifications on system components.
156
Connecting Shaft VWZ
System Overview - Screw Jacks R System Components, Rotating Spindle R
KGT Driving flange KGMFL
Opposed bearing plate GLP
KGT Pivot adapter KGKAR Spiral spring SF
KGT-F KGT Flange nut
Tr Driving flange TRMFL
Greaseless nut FFDM Self-aligning nut PM
Bellow FB
Duplex nut DM
Flange nut FM
Motor
Safety nut SIFA Spindle types: Standard Tr INOX (stainless) Double pitch Left handed thread Larger diameter spindle Ball screw KGT
Coupling KUZ
Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF
Handwheel HR
Spring brake FDB
Protective cap SK
Fixing strips BFL
Hinged bearing plate KAR
Contact T.E.A. for specifications on system components.
157
Connecting shaft VWZ
Overview Sizes / types Z Series
GSZ Series
Screw Versions: increased / double pitch / left-handed / stainless steel 158
When should I use a Z series screw jack? Z series screw jacks are the preferred range with the largest number of types. The Z series feature through holes for top mounting and integral pivot bearings, features not available on the GSZ series.
When should I use a GSZ series screw jack? GSZ series screw jacks are designed for applications where smooth surfaces are required. These screw jacks are easier to clean and therefore ideal for applications in the food processing industry.
The development of ZIMM screw jack system
Note: SHZ and MSZ series units made from cast iron and aluminium are available as spare parts on request. ZIMM offers advice on conversion to the new Z and GSZ types.
159
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice Design & Specification The customer, based on the application criteria, can determine the selection and dimensioning of the system from the information contained in this catalogue. On request we can provide design advice and calculations to determine the correct components and compile a full quotation based on your application criteria. ZIMM guarantee the quality of all of the components shown in the catalogue. The screw jacks are designed for industrial use and for loads & operational duty as stated in the catalogue. For further information please contact T.E.A. Lifting Speed Normal version N:
Slow version L:
1 mm stroke per movement of drive shaft (MSZ-150 and bigger sizes - higher speed acc. to table) at 1500 min-1: 1.5 m/min 0,25 mm stroke per movement of drive (MSZ-150 and bigger sizes - higher speed acc. to table) at 1500 min-1: 0.375 m/min
In order to increase the speed of the system the following options can be considered: - Double pitch screw (Attention: max. input torque, system is not self-locking, system brake required) - Larger diameter spindle with R version (spindle of the next larger size): depending on the screw jack size faster pitch, higher torque requirement - Ball screw: various pitch options - Rotary pulse encoder: Enables an increase in motor speed of more than 1500. This system is only designed for light loads and low duty operation. To reduce system speed - Use a motor with more poles / lower speed (6, 8, 10 or 12 poles) - Rotary pulse encoder (for slower speed operation below 25 Hz an adequate method of cooling the motor is required) - Geared motor (Attention to max input torque is required) - Bevel gearbox with gear reduction (only for certain applications)
Temperature and Operating time Screw jacks are generally not designed for continuous operation. Max operational time is stated as ED (see pages 174197*). These values are for reference only and must be checked against the individual application criteria. In borderline cases the next biggest gearbox may require selection or contact our technical dept. Operating temperatures should not exceed 80 degrees celsius. *Visit our website www.tea.net.au Parallelism and Angularity Care must be exercised to ensure that the systems are parallel to each other as well as level and aligned with the mounting surfaces. Connecting shafts, pillow blocks etc. must be axially aligned with each other. Guidance The guide bushes incorporated in the screw jack gearbox can only tolerate a play of between 0.2 & 0.6mm are not designed to take high side forces on the system. For most applications a suitable additional guidance system should be designed into the application to counteract any side forces. Protection Against Rotation With the standing screw version S the spindle is free running within the gearbox (worm wheel). It is therefore necessary to protect the spindle from rotating due to the friction in the worm wheel. This can be achieved by incorporating an additional external guidance system or by using the protection against rotation (mounted internally within the protective tube).
160
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice Design & Specification
Self-locking / Overrun Screw jacks with a single pitch trapezoid thread have a limited self-locking capability. Where shock or vibration is evident a brake should be incorporated into the system. The potential overrun after having stopped the motor differs from application to application. In order to minimise the overrun to a minimum we recommend to use a brake motor or a spring pressure brake FDB. A braked motor is essential where a double pitch trapezoid screw or ballscrew is used as they are not self locking.
A flat-machined surface is necessary. The four attachment bolts are designed for the rated static loads of the gearbox in tension and compression. Additional impact loads and vibration must be taken into account (Grey cast iron housing GG25). The length of the mounting screws must be observed. Tension loads on the mounting bolts should be avoided. With unknown factors like shock and vibration we recommend additional protection of the screw jack by using guide rails and threaded rods. This will ensure loads in tension and compression are secured.
Drive In order to achieve soft start for acceleration and deceleration we recommend the use of a frequency inverter. The lifetime of the system will be increased and the noise of the system will be reduced.
Safety Distances Safety distances must be observed between moving and stationary components otherwise there is the risk of damage to the system.
Trial Run A trial run under normal operating conditions including load, is necessary to ensure correct operation. On-site trial runs are necessary to ensure precise alignment of the system and make any necessary adjustments.
Accuracy The repeat accuracy of the gearbox can be up to 0.05mm if the load is constant and in the same direction. This also requires suitable control of the drive system e.g. using a rotary voltage braked motor in connection with a frequency converter, a rotary pulse encoder or a servo motor with encoder, etc. The pitch precision of the trapezoid screw is 0.2mm per 300mm of spindle length. With ballscrews it is 0.05mm per 300mm of spindle length. Under alternating load, tension & compression the axial play can be up to 0.4mm with the trapezoid spindle and 0.08mm with the ballscrew. For systems which require zero clearance we recommend the use of the gearbox version incorporating AntiBacklash AB with adjustment. Contact T.E.A. for more details.
Spare Parts It is recommended that a range of spare parts gearboxes, spindles etc. are held by your customer. This is especially relevant where high duty applications are involved. Stage Engineering ZIMM systems are specified to meet the regulation of the Stage Lifting industry. Vehicles for Land, Air or Water For applications, which are mobile either on land, sea or air are generally excluded from our normal warranty terms. Special conditions will apply. Please contact T.E.A.
Direction of Rotation and Movement Check the direction of the required rotation and detail this in your design drawing or select one of the standard system layouts (see pages 167 & 168). With T bevel gearbox the direction of rotation can be changed by rotating the gearbox around.
Environmental Conditions For special applications outside of normal environmental conditions please contact T.E.A.
161
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice The mounting surfaces for the nuts should also be at right angles. The option of the self aligning nut should be considered for certain applications.
Lubrication Sufficient lubrication is essential for the lifetime of the system. The spindle, gearbox & protection against rotation must be suitably lubricated. The red lubrication strip for the protection against rotation can be mounted in optional positions to meet your requirements. Please also see the automatic lubrication system and maintenance instructions. Mounting, Operation and Maintenance Instruction The installation instructions must be adhered to.
Alternatively the use of the hinged bearing plate KAR could be considered.
Construction Advice for Plant Engineers: Where machined surfaces are used few assembly problems should be encountered. However geometric errors can occur in welded frames despite accurate assembly and it is therefore important to consider the following: Parallelism / Angularity: Screws and linear guides must be parallel otherwise the whole system could seize up during operation. All mounting surfaces for the gearboxes must be at right angles to the linear guides otherwise wear or damage to the components could occur.
For additional data please go to www.tea.net.au
162
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 1 - Parameters Company:
Date:
Address:
Phone:
Contact:
Fax:
Department:
Number of pages: An application sketch and the completed checklist will enable us to submit our quotation more speedily.
1 Max. lifting force in kN - per gearbox kN per system kN - in tension kN in compression kN - load: static kN dynamic kN - installation position: vertical / horizontal / pivot - idle / impact / load / vibration 2 Lift / Travel
mm
effective working stroke
3 Lifting speed Type N = 25mm/s (1.5 m/min.)
mm
Type L = 6.25mm/s (0.375 m/min.)
4 Duty factor, work cycle, description of cycle strokes per day strokes per hour hours per day: 8 16 24 ! For high duty factors or long strokes, please provide an exact detailed description 5 Type:
S standing spindle
R rotating spindle
Z Screw Jack
6 Standard arrangement no. Dimension X1 X2 see standard arrangements, checklist 5 and 6 (for multi-jack systems) 7 Motor:
Three-phase AC motor
8 Operating conditions: Dry Ambient operating temperature: min.
with brake Humid 째C
9 Quantity:
Required
Series
10 Schedule:
Quotation
Delivery
163
manual release Dusty max.
Chips 째C
GSZ Screw Jack X3
Y
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 2 - Operating Times Only required for extended operating times and high duty cycles. Operating cycle for permanent operations / operation times Diagrams with times in seconds or minutes, resulting operating period in percent %, with calculation 8 16 or 24 hours - operation / day
still 5 sec. down 5 sec.
down 5 sec.
up 10 sec.
still 5 sec.
operation time
sec
Example:
still 60 sec.
1 cycle 90 sec.
Idle time in
sec.
min.
hours
Formula for calculating the relative operating period ED: ED =
ED =
te x 100 ED in % (te+tp)
ED= operating period te = operating time (in sec.) tp = idle time (in sec.)
10 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. (10 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 60 sec.)
164
x 100 = 22.2% per hour when operated 8hr/day
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 3 - Accessories S also see overview page 156 Type:
SN (Translating screw, normal speed) SL (Translating screw, low speed Variant: TR screw SIFA safety nut with SIFA monitoring KGT Ball screw
Stroke
Tension load [kn] static Tension load [kn] dynamic Compression load [kn] static Compression load [kn] dynamic Standard screw end Fixing flange BF Pivot bearing end SLK
base line
Forked end GK Rod end KGK Bellows FB Spiral spring SF Handwheel HR Motor with brake Motor without brake Coupling KUZ Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF Pivot mounts LB Pivot bearing plate KAR Lubricator Z-LUB Spring pressure brake FDB Protective cap SK Lubrication strip SL 2 x Limit switch ES Rotation protection VS Escape protection AS Protective tube SRO
165
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 4 - Accessories R also see overview page 157 Type: RN (Rotating screw, normal speed) RL (Rotating screw, low speed) Variant: TR screw SIFA safety nut with SIFA Monitoring KGT Ballscrew
Tension load [kN] static Tension load [kN] dynamic Compression load [kN] static Compression load [kN] dynamic Opposed bearing plate GLP Bellows FB Spiral spring cover SF
Lubricator Z-LUB
Cardan adaptor DMA Duplex nut DM Tr flange nut FM KGT flange nut KGT-F Self-aligning nut PM Greaseless nut FFDM Driving flange TRMFL Safety nut SIFA Wear monitoring SIFA control Handwheel HR Motor with brake Motor without brake Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF Coupling KUZ Pivot mounts LB Pivot bearing plate KAR Spring pressure brake FDB Protective cap SK
166
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 5 - Standard Arrangements
167
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 5 - Standard Arrangements continued.
11
12
14
13
16 15
17
168
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Critical Buckling Force of the Lifting Screws fk = 0,25
fk = 2
fk = 4
Version S guided lifting motion with hinged plate
Version S non guided lifting motion, gear firmly mounted
Version S guided lifting motion, gear firmly mounted
Version R for a small L1 there applies: fk = 2 guided lifting motion
Critical buckling force Fk in kN
fk = 1
There is a buckling risk especially with gearboxes with long, thin spindles in combination with compression load. With the following calculation you can find the max. allowed axial load acc. to Euler.
Maximum allowed axial load Fall = 0.8 x Fk x fk Fall maximum allowable axial load (kN) Fk theoretical critical buckling force (kN) acc. to diagram fk correction value (considers kind of bearing support, respectively guidance of lifting load) see pictograms above free length L in mm
If the maximum calculated load is lower than required, a larger spindle diameter could be selected. The calculations must then be reworked. With the rotating screw version a larger diameter screw can be selected (from the next bigger gearbox size). Any increase in pitch/ lifting speed must be taken into account. The safety factors for the type of system specified must be used, as shown above, to calculate the max allowable axial load for the system.
169
Selection, Calculation, Checklists
theoretical spindle whirling speed nkr [min-1]
Critical Whirling Speed of Spindle - R Version with opposed bearing plate
fkr = 1
without opposed bearing plate
fkr = 0.5
Maximum allowable spindle speed nall = 0.8 x nkr x fkr
.
.
. .
spindle speed =
.
unsupported screw lengths [m]
For R version gearboxes (with rotating spindle) with long, thin spindles it is necessary to calculate the maximum allowable spindle speed. Please take the theoretical critical speed nkr from the diagram. Also consider the additional lengths for spindle covers, etc. when calculating the unsupported screw lengths . Together with the correction factor for the bearing layout the max. allowable spindle speed can be calculated.
If the calculated maximum spindle speed is lower than that required, a larger spindle should be selected. The calculations must then be reworked. If a larger diameter spindle is used in the R version the potential for higher drive torque's must be considered. The safety factors for the type of system specified must be used, as shown above, to calculate the maximum allowable axial load for the system.
170
input speed igearbox
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Determining the Drive Torque [MG] of a Lifting Gear With the formula shown below it is possible to calculate the necessary drive torque. In order to facilitate the calculation of the drive torque we have determined multiplication factors out of this formula and have stated them in the technical data for the single gearbox version.
MG F Gearbox Spindle
P i ML PM
Required drive torque [Nm] of a lifting gear Lifting load (dynamic) [kN] Efficiency of the lifting gear (without spindle) Efficiency of the spindle Spindle pitch [mm] Transmission of the lifting gear Idling torque [Nm] Power of motor
Formula1): Drive torque: MG =
Example: F [kN] · P [mm] 2·
·
Power of motor: PM[kW] =
Gearbox
·
i Spindle ·
+ ML [Nm]
MG [Nm] · n [min-1] 9550
Safety factor (start torque) = calculated drive torque x 1.3 to 1.5 (for smaller systems use up to x 2).
MSZ-25-SN F = 12 kN (lifting load dynamic) Gearbox = 0.87 Spindle = 0.375 P=6 i=6 MG =
!
PM =
2·
12 kN · 6mm + 0.36 Nm = 6.21 Nm · 0,87 · 0,375 · 6
6.21 Nm · 1500 min-1 = 0.975 kW 9550
Example: 0.975 kW · 1.4 = 1.365 kW
motor 1.5 kW
1)
For gearboxes with one-pitch trapezoidal spindles it is also possible to multiply the factor which is stated on the corresponding gearbox page with the load. Tr spindle Spindle Efficiency single pitch Tr 12 18 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140
P lubricated 0.427 3 0.399 4 0.375 4 0.375 6 0.344 7 0.314 8 0.368 12 0.368 16 0.314 16 0.273 16 0.288 20
Tr spindle Spindle Efficiency double pitch Tr 12 18 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140
P lubricated 0.592 6 0.565 8 0.540 8 0.540 12 0.509 14 0.474 16 0.532 24 0.532 32 0.474 32 0.426 32 0.444 40
The efficiency of a trapezoid screw is substantially lower than that of ball screws due to friction. However, the trapezoid screw is technically more simple and more favourable. A safety device (e.g. a brake) is rarely required for trapezoid Efficiency of gearboxes
Gearbox
screws due to their selflocking capability. With a ballscrew system an efficiency factor of =0.9 can be used. It is essential to incorporate a break into a ballscrew system.
(without spindle) at n = 1.500
5 2 10 25 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 MSZ N 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.87 0.89 0.85 0.84 0.86 0.87 0.84 0.85 0.77 0.62 0.69 0.69 0.74 0.65 0.67 0.72 0.70 0.62 0.65 L
Idling torques ML of gearboxes [Nm] 5 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 25 10 2 MSZ N 0.06 0.10 0.26 0.36 0.76 1.68 1.90 2.64 3.24 3.96 5.60 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.26 0.54 1.02 1.20 1.94 2.20 2.84 3.40 L
With ball screws you basically can calculate with an efficiency factor of
171
=0.9
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Drive Torque for Gearboxes
MR = MG x 2.25
Calculation The required drive torque of a lifting gear results from the sum of the moments of the individual lifting units. This is increased due to frictional losses of transmission components like couplings,
MR = MG x 2.1
MR = MG x 3.1
MR = MG x 3.35
MR = MG x 4.6
MR = MG x 6.8
MR = MG x 4.4
MR = MG x 3.34
MR = MG x 3.27
connecting shafts, bevel gears, etc. To simplify the calculation, some factors for determining the drive torque in the most common applications are provided below.
MR - Total drive torque for the whole system MG - Input torque of a single gearbox MA - Starting torque max. 1.5 x MR
Example (example from previous page, 12 kN per gearbox)
MR = MG x 4.6 = 6.21 Nm x 4.6 = 28.57 Nm x safety factor 1.3 = 37.14Nm
172
Attention: It is recommended to multiply the calculated value with a safety factor of 1.3 to 1.5 (for smaller systems factor up to 2). The indicated values are applicable in cases of uniform distribution of the lifting gear load onto all gears!
Selection, Calculation, Checklists Maximum Power / Moments
F
Load definitions
lifting screw
FS
F - Lifting load tension and/or compression FS - Side forces on the spindle vH - Lifting speed of the spindle (or nut of the R version) FA - Axial load of the input shaft FR - Radial load of the input shaft MR - Drive torque nR - Drive speed
VH
FR
MR
Please examine the information on the following pages before making your choice of the lifting gear suited for your application. Various influences and assumptions can only be estimated on the basis of information gained by experience. In case of doubt please contact T.E.A.
Maximum side force FS [N] (static)
Max. drive torque The stated values of the table on the right should not be exceeded. If gearboxes are arranged in tandem or in larger arrangements the maximum drive torque may be higher. If there are more than 5 gearboxes in an arrangement please contact T.E.A.
Maximum drive torque MR [Nm]
Radial load on the input shaft The radial forces of the table on the right should not be exceeded if you use chain drives or belt drives.
Maximum radial load acting on the input shaft FR [N]
100 360 600 900 3000 5000 5500 9000 15000 29000 34800 46000
200 160 280 470 2000 4000 5000 9000 13000 29000 34800 46000
Type
min-1
MR SN/RN MR SN/RN MR SL/RL MR SL/RL
1500 500 1500 500
300 100 180 300 1300 3000 3900 6500 12000 29000 34800 39000
SHZ02 0.7 1.0 0.5 0.7
extended screw length in mm
900 800 700 1000 1200 1500 2000 2500 500 400 600 – 12 28 32 38 18 25 55 20 70 45 15 20 50 60 70 30 47 100 40 130 80 35 45 100 110 130 60 90 180 70 240 150 130 160 380 420 500 230 330 700 280 900 600 350 400 1100 1300 600 850 950 1800 700 2300 1500 400 500 750 850 2800 2300 1800 1500 1300 1200 1000 760 900 4900 3800 3000 2500 2200 2000 1900 1450 1250 10000 8800 7000 6000 5500 4800 4300 3500 3000 2000 1600 29000 29000 24000 20000 17000 15000 14000 12000 9000 7000 5600 34800 34800 28800 24000 20400 18000 16800 14400 10800 8400 6720 36000 32000 30000 25000 29000 25000 23500 20000 17000 12000 10000
MSZ5 6.4 10.4 2.6 4.3
MSZ10 12.6 20.5 5.3 8.4
MSZ25 21.7 34.2 7.8 12.5
MSZ50 44.7 70.3 15.5 24.5
MSZ100 72.0 114.9 17.0 27.8
MSZ150 67.3 107.0 17.3 27.7
MSZ250 118.4 185.1 23.5 36.6
MSZ350 187.0 295.7 40.2 63.9
MSZ500 204.3 325.6 42.8 71.2
MSZ650 268.3 427.9 62.8 102.6
MSZ750 415.0 663.0 83.0 132.0
- Consider that the starting torque is factor 1.5 of the operation torque - Limit values are mechanical - consider thermical factors depending on operating time
FR max.
SHZ02 18
MSZ5 110
MSZ10 215
173
MSZ25 300
FA
input shaft = worm shaft
Side forces on the spindle Please refer to the adjoining table for the maximum permissible side force. Side forces should be supported by a guidance system whenever possible. The bronze bushings in the gearbox are a secondary support only and should not be relied upon as adequate guidance. The maximum side force at a given screw extension must not exceed that stated in the adjoining table. Attention: only statically allowed!
MSZ 5 10 25 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 750
nR
MSZ50 520
MSZ100 800
MSZ150 810
MSZ250 1420
MSZ350 2100
MSZ500 3780
MSZ650 4536
3000 – – 30 100 250 350 660 1400 4900 5880 8000
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-5-S - Translating Screw 5 kN
deep
base line deep
deep
Basic Versions Tr
1)
Standard types S Basic model S Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Aluminium housing
Version
Type
Speed
Z-5-SN Z-5-SL Z-5-RN Z-5-RL
Standing Screw Rotating Screw
Normal Low Normal Low
Standard Screw2) Tr 18x4 Tr 18x4
i
Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types R Ball screw KGT
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
KGT 16 x 5 KGT 16 x 10
Aluminium housing
174
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
Wear control of the nut
KGT 16 x 5 KGT 16 x 10
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-5-R - Rotating Screw R 5 kN
deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 5 mm
deep
System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159 - 173
Technical data S and R
Duty cycle thermal limit, for S and R These curves are for guidance under industrial conditions, (ambient temp. etc) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are at www.tea.net.au
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 5 kN (0,5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 18x42) Gear reduction - 4:1 (N) / 16:1 (L) Material of box - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case-hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid grease Screw lubrication - grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 1.20 kg Weight of spindle/m - 1.58 kg Drive through torque - max. 39 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 º C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au - Tr18x4 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr20x4 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 4mm
Trapezoidal screw Tr 18x4
2)
175
% duty cycle/10 min at 20 ° C
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-10-S - Standing Screw 10 kN
deep
base line deep
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
MSZ-10-SN Standing Screw MSZ-10-SL MSZ-10-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-10-RL 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Normal Low Normal Low
Tr 20x4 Tr 20x4
i
Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
Standard Screw2)
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Rotation control and Aluminium housing wear control of the nut
Ball screw KGT
Anti-Backlash AB
KGT 25 x 5 KGT 25 x 10 Adjustable KGT 25 x 25 anti-backlash KGT 25 x 50
176
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
KGT 25 x 5 Wear control KGT 25 x 10 Aluminium housing KGT 25 x 25 of the nut KGT 25 x 50
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-10-R - Rotating Screw 10 kN
deep
base line
deep deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Technical data S and R
Duty cycle thermal limit, for S and R
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 10 kN (1 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 20x42) Gear reduction - 4:1 (N) / 16:1 (L) Material of box - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 1.20 kg Weight of spindle/m - 2 kg Drive through torque - max. 57 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 ° C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr20x4 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr30x6 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 4mm
Trapezoidal screw Tr 20x4
177
% duty cycle/10 min at 20 ° C
These curves are for guidance under standard industrial conditions (ambient temperature etc.) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are at www.tea.net.au
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-25-S - Standing Screw 25 kN
deep
base line deep
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
MSZ-25-SN Standing Screw MSZ-25-SL MSZ-25-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-25-RL 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Tr 30x6 Tr 30x6
i
Stroke per revolution5) 6:1 1.00 mm 24:1 0.25 mm 6:1 1.00 mm 24:1 0.25 mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types R
Standard types S Basic model S
Normal Low Normal Low
Standard Screw2)
Safety nut SIFA
Rotation control and Aluminium housing wear control of the nut
Ball screw KGT
Anti-Backlash AB
KGT 32 x 5 KGT 32 x 10 KGT 32 x 20 KGT 32 x 40
Adjustable anti-backlash
178
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
KGT 32 x 5 Wear control KGT 32 x 10 Aluminium housing KGT 32 x 20 of the nut KGT 32 x 40
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-25-R - Rotating Screw 25 kN
deep
base line
deep deep
x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 5 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 25 kN (2.5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 30x62) Gear reduction - 6:1 (N) / 24:1 (L) Material of screw jack body - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm Shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of lifting gear - 6.5 kg Weight of spindle/m - 4.5 kg Drive through torque - max. 57 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 °C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr30x6 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr40x7 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 6mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
static dynamic
Technical data S and R
Trapezoidal screw Tr 30x6
basis: 20°C
179
% duty cycle/10 min at 20 °C operating time in % per 10 ‘
These curves are for guidance under standard industrial conditions (ambient temperature etc.) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are available at www.tea.net.au
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-50-S - Standing Screw 50 kN
4 deep M10/12 deep
base line ± 0,00
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
MSZ-50-SN Standing Screw MSZ-50-SL MSZ-50-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-50-RL 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Standard Screw2)
Normal Low Normal Low
Tr 40x7 Tr 40x7
i
Stroke per revolution5) 7:1 1.00 mm 28:1 0.25 mm 7:1 1.00 mm 28:1 0.25 mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
Speed
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Ball screw KGT
Anti-Backlash AB
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
KGT 40 x 5 KGT 40 x 10 KGT 40 x 20 KGT 40 x 40
Adjustable anti-backlash
180
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
KGT 40 x 5 Wear control KGT 40 x 10 KGT 40 x 20 of the nut KGT 40 x 40
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-50-R - Rotating Screw 50 kN
deep deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 6 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
These curves are
N = Normal speed used for L = Low speed
[kN] load
guidance under
50
Thisstandard diagram industrial indicates the conditions maximum capacity (ambient (under optimal temperature conditions). Where load etc.)duty andorcorrect are maintenance near upper limits we recommend (lubrication the etc.). selection of a bigger The max. input gearbox. drive torques for
40 L/1 00 N/ 0 m in -1 10 L/1 00 m 50 in -1 N/ 0 m in -1 15 00 mi n -1
30 20 10
static
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 25 kN (2.5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm 2) Screw dimension - TR 40x7 Gear reduction - 7:1 (N) / 28:1 (L) Material of screw jack body - GGG-50, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 17 Kg Weight of spindle/m - 8 Kg Drive through torque - 260 Nm Operating temperature - Max 60 °C, higher on request
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
0
Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr40x7 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr50x8 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 7mm
dynamic
Technical data S and R
0%
2
5
Trapezoidal basis: 20°C Tr 40x7
181
optimum service
10
screw
The maximum duty life are available cycle is affected by % time dutyincycle/10 operating % per 10 ‘ min at at 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: www.tea.net.au lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.
15
20
25
30
35
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-100-S - Standing Screw 100 kN
deep deep
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
MSZ-100-SN Standing Normal Screw MSZ-100-SL Low MSZ-100-RN Rotating Normal Screw MSZ-100-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Tr 50x8 Tr 50x8
i
8:1 32:1 8:1 32:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.00 0.25 1.00 0.25
mm mm mm mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types R
Standard types S Basic model S
Standard Screw2)
Safety nut SIFA
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Ball screw KGT
Anti-Backlash AB
Adjustable KGT 50 x 10 KGT 50 x 20 anti-backlash
182
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
Wear control KGT 50 x 10 of the nut KGT 50 x 20
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-100-R - Rotating Screw 100 kN
deep deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 10 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Technical data S and R
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 100 kN (10 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm
- TR 55x92) - 9:1 (N) / 36: (L) - GGG-50, corrosion resistant - Steel, case hardened, ground - Synthetic fluid grease - Grease lubrication - 29 Kg - 15.7 Kg - 540 Nm - max. 60 °C
[kN] load 100 80
40
static
20
Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr50x8 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr60x12 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 8mm
L/1 00 0m N/ in -1 50 0 N/ m 10 in -1 L/1 00 m in 50 0m 1 in -1 N/ 15 00 mi n -1
60
0
dynamic
Screw dimension Gear reduction Material of the screw jack body Worm shaft Gearbox lubrication Spindle lubrication Weight of the screw jack body Weight of spindle/m Drive through torque Operating temperature
Trapezoidal 5 0% 2 55x9 basis:Tr20°C
183
screw 10
15
20% duty 25
These curves are N = Normal speed for guidance L = Low speed under standard industrial This diagram conditions indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature (under optimal etc.) and correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are near upper limits The max. input we recommend the drive of torques for selection a bigger optimum service gearbox. life are available The at maximum duty cyclewww.tea.net.au is affected by
cycle/10 30 35 min °Cmany factors: e.g.:
operating time in % per at 10 20 ‘
lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-150-S - Standing Screw 150 kN
M42x2 deep deep
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
MSZ-150-SN Standing Normal Tr 60x12 Screw MSZ-150-SL Low MSZ-150-RN Rotating Normal Tr 60x12 Screw MSZ-150-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
9:1 36:1 9:1 36:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.33 0.33 1.33 0.33
mm mm mm mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types R
Standard types S Basic model S
i
Safety nut SIFA
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Ball screw KGT
Anti-Backlash AB
KGT 63 x 10
Adjustable anti-backlash
184
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
Wear control KGT 63 x 10 of the nut KGT 63 x 20
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-150-R - Rotating Screw 150 kN
deep deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
These curves are N= speed forNormal guidance under L =standard Low speed industrial
[kN] load 150 120 90 L/5
00
60
L/1
min
-1
N/5 00
min
-1
000
30 0
dynamic
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 150kN (15 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm 2) Screw dimension - Tr 60x9 Gear reduction - 9:1 (N) / 36:1 (L) Material of the screw jack body - GGG-50, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of the screw jack body - 42 Kg Weight of spindle/m - 19 Kg Drive through torque - Max. 540 Nm Operating temperature - Max. 60 °C Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see chapter 4 2) - Tr60x12 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr80x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 12mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
static
Technical data S and R
5 0%Trapezoidal 2
60x9 basis: Tr 20°C
185
min -1 N /10 00 L/1 min N/1 500 min -1 500 m in -1
-1
conditions This(operating diagram indicates the etc.) temperature maximum capacity and correct (under optimal maintenance conditions). (lubrication etc.). Where duty or load The max. input are near upper limits drive torques for we recommend the optimum life are selection of a bigger available at gearbox. www.tea.net.au The maximum duty
min cycle is affected by at 20 °C many factors: e.g.: operating time in % per 10 ‘
screw 10 15
20% duty 25 cycle/10 30 35
lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-250-S - Standing Screw 250 kN
M56x2 deep deep
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
MSZ-250-SN Standing Normal Tr 80x16 Screw MSZ-250-SL Low MSZ-250-RN Rotating Normal Tr 80x16 Screw MSZ-250-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
10:1 40:1 10:1 40:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.60 0.40 1.60 0.40
mm mm mm mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
i
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Anti-Backlash AB
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Adjustable anti-backlash
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Ball Screw KGT
Wear control KGT 80 x 10 of the nut KGT 80 x 20
186
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-250-R - Rotating Screw 250 kN
deep deep
base line
deep
x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 10 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
These curves are N =for Normal speed guidance L = under Low speed standard
[kN] load 250 200
N/1 00 m
in -1
150 100 50 0
L/ L/1 500 m L/1 000 m in 500 i -1 min -1n
dynamic
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 250kN (25 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile (25 t) Max. shaft speed force static -- 250 1800kN rpm Max. dimension drive shaft speed -- 1800 min2) -1(higher on request) Screw Tr 80x16 Screw dimension - Tr 80x16 2) Gear reduction - 10.66:1 (N) / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction - 10:1 (N) / 40:1 (L) Material corrosion resistant Materialofofthe boxscrew jack body -- GGG-50, GG grey cast Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication -- grease Gearbox fluid, grease Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- Synthetic 57 kg Weight lubrication of spindle/m -- Grease 42 kg lubrication Spindle 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] -- F59[kN] Weight of the M screw jack body Kg x 1.05 3)5)+ ML(N-Normal) G F [kN] x 0.31 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 32 Kg Starting torque - drive torque MG x 1.5 Drive through torque - Max. 770 Nm 4) Idle torque ML [Nm] - 2.64 (N-Normal) Operating temperature 60 °C -- Max. 1.94 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr80x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr100x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
static
Technical data S and R
0%
2
basis: 20°C
187
5
10
15
N/ 5 N/ 00 m 10 in -1 N/ 00 m 10 00 in -1 N/ m 150 0 m in 1 in -1
-1
20
25
30
35
operating time in % per 10 ‘
industrial Thisconditions diagram indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under andoptimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are The nearmax. upper limits input we recommend drive torquesthe for selection of aservice bigger optimum gearbox. life are available at The www.tea.net.au maximum duty cycle is affected by many factors: e.g.: lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-350-S - Standing Screw 350 kN
deep deep
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
i
MSZ-350-SN Standing Normal Tr 100x16 Screw MSZ-350-SL Low MSZ-350-RN Rotating Normal Tr 100x16 Screw MSZ-350-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
1.60 0.40 1.60 0.40
mm mm mm mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
10:1 40:1 10:1 40:1
Stroke per revolution5)
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Anti-Backlash AB
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Adjustable anti-backlash
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Wear control of the nut
188
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z -350-R - Rotating Screw 350 kN
deep deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 7 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 350kN (35 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile 350 kN (35 t) Max. shaft speed force static -- 1200 rpm Max. dimension drive shaft speed -- Tr 1800 min 2)-1(higher on request) Screw 100x16 2) Screwreduction dimension -- 10.66:1 Tr 100x16 Gear (N) / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction - 10:1 (N) / 40:1 (L) Material corrosion resistant Materialofofthe boxscrew jack body -- GGG-50, GG grey cast Worm shaft case hardened, ground Lubrication -- steel, grease Gearbox Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- Synthetic 87 kg fluid, grease Spindle Weightlubrication of spindle/m - Grease 66 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque MG[Nm] -- 112 F [kN] Weight of the screw jack body Kgx 1.213)5)+ ML(N-Normal) F [kN] x 0.38 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 52 Kg Starting torque -- Max. drive 1800 torqueNm MG x 1.5 Drive through 4) torque Idle torque ML [Nm] - 3.24 (N-Normal) Operating temperature - Max. 60 °C - 2.20 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr100x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr120x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R These curves are N =for Normal speed guidance L = under Low speed standard
[kN] load 350 300
N/
10
250
0m in
200 150 N/1
100 50 0
L/1
static
Technical data S and R
L/1
500
0m
min
Trapezoidal screw
5 0% Tr 100x16 2 basis: 20°C
189
00
10
500 min -1 N/1 0 500 00 mi -1 min -1 n
N/1
-1
industrial Thisconditions diagram indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under andoptimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are The nearmax. upperinput limits we recommend drive torquesthe for selection of a service bigger optimum gearbox. life are available
at The www.tea.net.au maximum duty % duty cycle/10 mincycle is affected by 15 20 25 30 at 3520 °Cmany factors: e.g.: lubrication, operating time in % per 10 ‘ environment temperature, bellows, etc. in
-1
-1
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-500-S - Standing Screw 500 kN
deep
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
MSZ-500-SN Standing Normal Tr 120x16 Screw MSZ-500-SL Low MSZ-500-RN Rotating Normal Tr 120x16 Screw MSZ-500-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.143 0.286 1.143 0.286
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
i
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Anti-Backlash AB
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Adjustable anti-backlash
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Wear control of the nut
190
mm mm mm mm
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-500-R - Rotating Screw 500 kN
deep
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 500kN (50 t) Max. shaft speedforce static - - 500 1000kNrpm Max.drive pressure/tensile (50 t) Max. drive shaft speed - - 1800 min -12)(higher on request) Screw dimension Tr 120x16 2) Screwreduction dimension - - Tr 120x16(N) Gear 10.66:1 / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction (N) / 56:1 (L) resistant Material of the screw jack body - - 14:1 GGG-50, corrosion Material of box - GG grey cast Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication - grease Gearbox Synthetic Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- 165 kg fluid, grease Spindle Grease Weight lubrication of spindle/m - - 78 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] - - F168 [kN]Kg x 1.03 3)5)+ ML(N-Normal) Weight of the M screw jack body G - - F77[kN] Weight of spindle/m Kg x 0.35 + ML(L-Low) Starting torquetorque - - drive MG x 1.5 Drive through Max. torque 1940 Nm 4) Idle torquetemperature ML [Nm] - - 3.96 Operating Max. (N-Normal) 60 °C - 2.84 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr120x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr140x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
[kN] load
N = Normal speed These curves are L = for Lowguidance speed
under standard Thisindustrial diagram indicates the conditions maximum capacity 400 (ambient (under optimal etc.) temperature conditions). and correct 300 Where duty or load maintenance are (lubrication near upper etc.). limits N/ 1 200 00 we recommend the The max. input mi N/ n 1 50 drive torques for selection of a bigger 0m in -1 optimum service gearbox. N/ 100 L/1 N/ L/5 L/1 1 0 1 0 50 0m 00 00 life are available 0 m 500 in -1 mi - min -1 in -1 min -1 n 1 The at maximum duty 0 duty 30 cycle/10 Trapezoidal www.tea.net.au is affected by 5 screw 0% 2 10 20 %25 35 mincycle at 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: Tr 120x16 basis: 20°C operating time in % per 10 ‘ lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc. 500
static
Technical data S and R
191
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-650-S - Standing Screw 650 kN
base line
deep
Basic Versions Tr Version
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
MSZ-650-SN Standing Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-650-SL Low MSZ-650-RN Rotating Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-650-RL Low 1)
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.429 0.357 1.429 0.357
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S Basic model S
i
Standard types R Safety nut SIFA
Anti-Backlash AB
Rotation control and wear control of the nut
Adjustable anti-backlash
Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Safety nut SIFA
Wear control of the nut
192
mm mm mm mm
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-650-R - Rotating Screw 650 kN
base line
deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 3 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R - 750kN (75 t) 1000kNrpm - - 650 (65 t) - -1800 min -12)(higher on request) Tr 140x20 2) - - Tr13.33:1 140x20(N) / 40:1 (L) - - 14:1 (N) / 56:1 (L) resistant GGG-50, corrosion - - GG cast steel,grey case hardened, ground - grease Synthetic - - 202 kg fluid, grease Grease - - 105 kg lubrication 3)5) - - F262 [kN]Kg x 1.21 + ML(N-Normal) 3)5) - - F104 [kN]Kg x 0.39 + ML(L-Low) - - drive MG x 1.5 Max.torque 4570 Nm - - 5.60 Max. (N-Normal) 60 °C - 3.40 (L-Low)
Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr140x20 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr160x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 20mm
N = Normal speedare These curves L = Low speed for guidance under standard This diagram 650 industrial indicates the 600 conditions maximum capacity (ambient 500 (undertemperature optimal conditions). etc.) and correct 400 N/ Wheremaintenance duty or load 10 0m are near upper limits (lubrication in -1 300 we recommend the etc.). selection a bigger The of max. input L/1 200 N/1 00 000 min -1 gearbox. drive torques for N/ L/5 min -1N/1 10 100 50 00 optimum service 00 0 min -1 min -1 min -1 The maximum duty life are available 0 cycle at is affected by 5 screw 0%Trapezoidal 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 % duty cycle/10 min manywww.tea.net.au factors: e.g.: basis:Tr20°C operating time in % per 10 at ‘ 20 °C 140x20 lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc. [kN] load
193
dynamic
Max. pressure/tensile force static Max. drive shaft speedforce static pressure/tensile Max. drive shaft speed Screw dimension Screwreduction dimension Gear Gear reduction Material of the screw jack body Material of box Worm shaft Lubrication Gearbox Weight oflubrication lifting gear Spindle lubrication Weight of spindle/m Weight of theMscrew Drive torque [Nm]jack body G Weight of spindle/m Starting torquetorque Drive through Idle torque4)temperature ML [Nm] Operating
static
Technical data S and R
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-750-S - Standing Screw 750 kN
base line
Basic Versions Tr Version deep
Type
Speed
Standard Screw2)
MSZ-750-SN Standing Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-750-SL Low MSZ-750-RN Rotating Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-750-RL Low 1)
i
14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1
Stroke per revolution5)
1.429 0.357 1.429 0.357
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
Standard types S
Standard types R
Basic model S
Basic model R
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing
194
mm mm mm mm
Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-750-R - Rotating Screw 750 kN
base line
x = on request. System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. deep
These curves are N= speed forNormal guidance L =under Low speed standard
[kN] load 750 700 600 500 N/1 00 m
400
in
-1
300 200 100
dynamic
Max. pressure/tensile force static - 1000kN (100 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile (75 t) Max. shaft speedforce static - - 750 1000kNrpm Max. drive shaft speed - - 1800 min -12)(higher on request) Screw dimension Tr 160x20 2) Screwreduction dimension - - Tr 140x20(N) Gear 13.33:1 / 40:1 (L) Gear reduction - 14:1 (N) / 56:1 (L) Material of the screw jack body GGG-50, corrosion resistant Material of box - steel Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication - - grease Gearbox Synthetic Weight oflubrication lifting gear - - 270 kg fluid, grease Spindle Grease Weight lubrication of spindle/m - - 105 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] - - F408 [kN]Kgx 1.173)5)+ ML(N-Normal) Weight of the M screw jack body G F [kN] x 0.35 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 139 Kg Starting torquetorque - - drive MG x 1.5 Drive through Max. torque 4570 Nm 4) Idle torque ML [Nm] - 7.28 (N-Normal) Operating temperature Max.(L-Low) 60 °C - - 4.42 Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see chapter 4 2) - Tr140x20 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr160x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 20mm
Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R
static
Technical data S and R
Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173
L/1 00 N/1 min -1 000 min -1 N /50 L/5 L/1 0m 00 000 in -1 min -1 min -1
Trapezoidal screw 0 5 0% 2 10 Tr 160x20 basis: 20°C
195
industrial This diagram conditions indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under and optimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or etc.). load (lubrication areThe near upper limits max. input wedrive recommend torques the for selection of aservice bigger optimum gearbox. life are available
at Thewww.tea.net.au maximum duty % duty cycle/10 mincycle is affected by 15 20 25 30 at35 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: operating time in % per 10 ‘ lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.
Z Series - Features
Variant: Trapezoidal Screw Tr
Sealed Gearbox
Variant: Safety nut SIFA
Variant: Ball screw KGT
Corrosion resistant Four mounting options
High performance hardened and ground gears
Integrated pivot bearing
Standard flange, simple and costeffective
Fluid grease in the gearbox permits high performance
Basic Versions Tr Version
Direct screw lubrication
Type
MSZ-5-A-SN Standing Screw MSZ-5-A-SL MSZ-5-A-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-5-A-RL 1)
Speed Normal Low Normal Low
Standard Screw2) Tr 18x4 Tr 18x4
i
Side marking Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm
- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au
196
GSZ Series - Features
Variant: Trapezoidal screw Tr
Optional stainless
Sealed gearbox
Variant: Safety nut SIFA
Variant: Ball screw KGT
Corrosion resistant
Smooth, easy to clean surface Top or bottom mounting
High performance hardened and ground gears
Fluid grease in the gearbox permits high
Standard flange, simple and
Direct screw lubrication
197
Miniature Screw Jack GSZ Series GSZ-2-S and GSZ-2-R
Miniature Screw Jack Building Block System. Whether complete system or single gear, whether driven by hand or by motor; now available the ZIMM Miniature Screw Jack with a plug-type building block system. Max. pressure Max. drive shaft speed Screw dimension Gear reduction Integrated pivot bearing Material of the box pivot rangetime at 250N Operating Lubrication Weight of lifting gear Weight of screw/m
- 260kN - 3000 min-1 - TR 12x3, TR 12x6P3 - 7.5:1 / 12:1 - Aluminium, black anodised - 20% in 10 min; 10% in 1 hr - Grease - 0.49kg - 0.75kg
High-performance toothing: hardened and ground
Please contact T.E.A for additional information or refer www.tea.net.au
199
Linear Actuator Range - overview Pages
Powerful Miniature Actuators Standar
d
Optiona
l
12/24V Max. Load 120kg. (50:1), 40kg. (12:1) Max. Stroke 925mm - Open spindle type Max. Stroke 300mm - Protected spindle type Most sizes in stock
202-203
CX.LAT Series 12/24V Max. Load 400kg. 12 orStroke 24V 500mm Max. Ballscrew or Acme Max. Stroke 400mm Max. Thrust 400kg. - Ball screw Max. Thrust 300kg. - Acme Max. Speed at full load 16mm/s IP54 Options: IP65 / Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ - 36VDC
LAM1-1 & LAM1-2
204-205
204-205
LAM 3 12 or 24 V Max. Stroke 400mm Max. Thrust 600kg. Max. Speed at full load 11.5mm/s IP66 Options: IP66 - Safety nut - Back fixture turned 90ยบ
206-207
LAI1 12 or 24 V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 400kg. Max. Speed at full load 6mm/s IP20 Options: IP66 - Hall Sensor
208-209
LAS1-1 & LAS1-2 12/24V Max. Stroke 250mm, Max. Thrust 120kg. Max. Speed at full load 16mm/s - IP54 Options: IP65, 36V, Rod end with flat connector, External reed switches, Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ.
210-211
LAS 3 As above with following options: IP65, Position Feedback or Optical Sensor, 36V, Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ
212-213
LAS 4 In-line Actuator, Max. stroke 300mm, Max. Thrust 80kg. Max. speed at full load 30mm/s, 12/24V, IP54 Options: IP65, Hall Sensor
200
214-215
Linear Actuator Range - overview LAN 1 12/24V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 600kg. Max. Speed under full load 12mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - 24V Quick Motor - Position feedback Safety nut - Mechanical spline (push only) - Back fixture turned 90° - Mechanical quick release - motor cable outlet - 36V
Pages
216-217
LAN3 24V Max. Stroke 500, Max. Thrust 1000kg. Max. Speed under full load 9.5mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - Potentiometer - Safety nut - Spline (push only) -Mechanical quick release - Back fixture turned 90º - 36V - External reed switches
218-219
LAN4 12/24V Max. Stroke 400, Max. Thrust 350kg. Max. Speed under full load 11mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - Safety nut - Mechanical Spline (push only) -Mechanical quick release - Back fixture turned 90º - 36V - External reed switches 220-221
LAN5 24V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 800kg. Max. Speed under full load 9.5mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - 24V Quick Motor - Hall Sensor Safety nut - Mechanical Spline (push only) - Back fixture turned 0º, 45º, 90º or 135º - Back fixture and rod eye hole Ø12.1mm
222-223
LAC3 24V Max. Stroke 500mm Max. Thrust 200kg. Max. Speed under full load 8.4mm/s IP54 Option: Position Feedback
Keypads, Controllers & other accessories 201
224-225
226-227
Powerful Miniature Actuators • Compact - only 126.5mm long • Strong - can lift up to 1200N (120 kg) • Lightweight - see below • 12 to 24V DC • Stroke Speed - 5-20mm per sec. • Max. stroke length - 925mm
le
pind ted S rotec
P
d
chine
d pplie e - su
unma ends e l d spin d and e l b m e unass
l Spind Open
Material:
Spur gear mechanism Spindle nut Spindle
Standard Clevis Head
Zinc diecast Hostaform double roller bearing Free cutting steel
Maximum stroke
925mm (observe buckling risk)
Voltage . Current consumption
0-24V D.C
Required input
10-48 VA
Stroke Speed
5-20mm/sec
Duty cycle
Intermittent or short time (30-80%)
Weight
Protected spindle 300mm stroke .94 kg Open spindle 300mm stroke .60kg
Spindle
TR 10x3 (length = stroke +75mm) Note: Spindle ends unmachined
Stroke per rpm
0.25mm
Open spindle type supplied with:
Standard clevis head (machine end of spindle to fit 6mm, secure with supplied split pins) 4 x split pins for securing parts to spindle 2 x threaded pins to mount the unit 1 x end block
0-2 Amp.
Optional clevis head for open spindle To attach - spindle must be machined to suit M6 Grease
Unigear LA 02
All specfications are subject to change without notice.
202
Optional Clevis Head
Powerful Miniature Actuators
Optional Clevis Head P/N MHG-GK-6
Load/Speed/Voltage Graph Ratio 12:1 Max. load - 400N (40 kg)
Load/Speed/Voltage Graph Ratio 50:1 Max. load - 1200N (120 kg)
Ratio
Type
Stroke Length
Y mm
Part Number
12:1
Open
Max. 925mm
9908900 + stroke length
50:1
Open
Max. 925mm
9908904 + stroke length
12:1
Protected
50mm 100mm 120mm 200mm 250mm 300mm
115 165 215 265 315 365
9908580 9908581 9908582 9908583 9908584 9908585
50:1
Protected
50mm 100mm 120mm 200mm 250mm 300mm
115 165 215 265 315 365
9908550 9908551 9908552 9908553 9908554 9908555
a
a
All dimensions in mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.
203
Linear Actuators - LAM Series LAM Series (1) LAM1-1 & LAM1-2
Screw type
Ball screw / ACME
Weight*
2.31 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B
Working temperature
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 100 mm Options:
(1) IP65 (2) Gear box material : Steel (standard Zn(85%) AL(15%)) (3) Gear box housing turned 90° (4) 36VDC Motor (5) UL version only 24VDC motor specifications
Ø12.2±0.1
Ø12.2±0.1
(6) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
27
(Only 24VDC certified by UL) 29
RL
(150) (123)
Ø63.5
27
14 21
Ø50
19
78
MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M
13 Ø33
(19.3)
_ 400mm LAM1-1/-2 RL = S + 153mm Stroke< RL = S + 203mm Stroke >400mm _ 400mm LAM1-1A RL = S + 162mm Stroke< RL = S + 212mm Stroke >400mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
204
LAM -1 & 2 Specifications P/N
Screw
Thrust
Pulling
Holding force
Type
max.
max.
max.
(mm/s)
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
4000
3000
4000
8/11
LAM-1 Ballscrew
Speed
Duty Standard stroke (mm) : S 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Max. current
cycle
(A)
%
12VDC 24VDC
10
12
6
LAM-2 Ballscrew
2000
2000
1200
16/21
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10
12
6
LAM-1A ACME
3000
3000
3000
8/11
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10
12
6
LAM-1/ -2 / -1A
24(12)VDC Motor 25
Speed (mm/s)
20 LAM-1 15
LAM-2 LAM-1A
10 5 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Load (N)
LAM-1/ -2 / -1A
24 VDC Motor 0
6
Current (Amp)
5 LAM-1
4
LAM-2 3
LAM-1A
2 1 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
LAM-1/ -2 / -1A
12 VDC Motor 12
Current (Amp)
10 LAM-1
8
LAM-2
6
LAM-1A
4 2 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information
LAM - 1 - 0 - 200 - 24 E
Model number (Ballscrew: 1 / 2, ACME 1A)
Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
0: Basic model (without magnet) 1: Complete with external limit switches Stroke length
Voltage
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
205
Linear Actuators - LAM Series LAM3
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
2.95 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector: Audio/DIN 4pin
Working temperature
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Safety Nut (RL = S+183mm) (3) Back fixture turned 90° (4) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
Ø25.4
6.2
Ø25
Ø10 +0.2 -0
RL 154
13
14
98 81 66.5 32.7
15
141.5 83
52 39.7
11
(20.5)
28 83
21.5
+0.2
10 - 0
Ø25.9
MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000mm
_ RL = S + 171mm Stroke <300mm < RL = S + 221mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
206
LAM - 3 Specifications P/N LAM3-1
Thrust max.
Pulling max.
Holding force max.
Speed (mm/s)
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
6000
5000
5000
4/5.5
Duty cycle
Standard stroke (mm) : S
% 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Max. current (A) 12VDC
10
12
24VDC
6
LAM3-2
4000
4000
4000
5.5/7.5
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10
10
5
LAM3-3
3000
3000
3000
7/9
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10
8
4
LAM3-4
2000
2000
1500
11.5/14.5
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10
8
4
LAM3-1/2/3/4
24 (12) VDC Motor
Speed (mm/s)
25 20 LAM3-1 15
LAM3-2 LAM3-3
10
LAM3-4
5 0 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Load (N)
6
LAM3-1/2/3/4
24VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
5 4 LAM3-1 3
LAM3-2 LAM3-3
2
LAM3-4
1 0 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply. 12
LAM3-1/2/3/4
12VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
10 8 LAM3-1
6
LAM3-2 LAM3-3
4
LAM3-4 2 0 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information
LAM3 - 1 - 1 - 300 - 24 - G - E
Model number
Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
0: without internal limit switches 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches
Color B : Black G : Grey
Stroke length
Voltage
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
207
Linear Actuators - LAI Series LAI Series (1) LAI1
Screw type
Ball screw / ACME
Weight*
2.4 kg
Protection
IP 20
Compatible Controller
LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B
Working temp
+5째C ~ 40째C
* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Hall Sensor (3) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
LAI1-1A _ 300mm RL = S + 190mm Stroke < RL = S + 240mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke LAI1- 1A
15
LAI1-1
_ 300mm RL = S + 170mm Stroke < RL = S + 220mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke LAI 1
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
208
LAI1 - Specifications P/N
Screw type
Thrust max.
Pulling Holding max. max.
Speed (mm/s)
Duty cycle
Standard stroke (mm) : S
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
Max. current (A)
%
12VDC
24VDC
LAI-1
Ballscrew
4000
4000
1200
6/9
100 150 200 250 300
10
8
4
LAI-1A
ACME
4000
4000
3000
6/9
100 150 200 250 300
10
10
5
LAI-1 / -1A
24(12) VDC Motor 12
Speed (mm/s)
10 8 6
LAI1-1 LAI1-1A
4 2 2000
1000
0 0
3000
1000
2000
5000 3000
4000
Load (N)
LAI-1 / -1A
24VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
5 4
LAI1-1
3 LAI1-1A 2 1 0 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
LAI1-1/ -1A
12VDC Motor
1
Current (Amp)
9 7
LAI1-1
5
LAI1-1A
3 1 0 0
2000
1000
3000
4000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information LAI1
1
0
200
Model number (Ballscrew: 1) (Acme: 1A) 0: Basic model (without magnet) 1: Complete with external limit switches
24 E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required) Voltage
Stroke length
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
209
Linear Actuators - LAS Series (1) LAS1-1/2
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
1.04 kg
Protection**
IP 54
Compatible Controller
Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector: Audio/DIN 4pin)
Working temp
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200 mm ** Option: (1) IP65 (2) Gearbox housing turned 90° (3) Rod end with flat connector (RL=S+110mm) (4) 36VDC motor (5) External reed switches (6) Plastic gear (max. Load: 800N)
Flat connector
(7) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
40 5
Ø19 Ø18
Ø18.8
2-Ø8.1 ±0.1
9.5
19.5
73.5
83
Ø38
(100)
MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M
8 10
20
(RL-55) RL
(25) 9.4
27
_ RL = S + 119mm Stroke <250mm < RL = S + 169mm Stroke >250mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
210
LAS1 - Specifications P/N
Thrust max.
Pulling Holding force max. max.
Speed (mm/s)
Duty cycle
Standard stroke (mm) : S
%
Max. current (A) 12VDC 24VDC
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
LAS1-1
1200
1200
800
8/12
50 100 150 200 250
10
6
2.5
LAS1-2
600
600
300
16/25
50 100 150 200 250
10
6
3
LAS1-1/ -2 24(12) VDC Motor 30
Speed (mm/s)
25 20 LAS1-1
15
LAS1-2
10 5 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N)
LAS1-1/ -2
24 VDC Motor 3.0
Current (Amp)
2.5 2.0 LAS1-1
1.5
LAS1-2
1.0 0.5 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
LAS1-1/ -2
12 VDC Motor 6
Current (Amp)
5 4 LAS1-1
3
LAS1-2
2 1 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information
LAS - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number a
0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches
Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)
a
Stroke length
Voltage All specifications are subject to change without notice.
211
Linear Actuators - LAS Series LAS - 3
Screw type
ACME
Position feedback specifications (Optical Sensor)
Weight*
1.27 kg
Protection
IP 54
Supply Voltage
a
Compatible Controller Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector:
24VDC
12VDC
5VDC
High level 24VDC Low level 0.2V/40mA PNP PS. Open collector
High level 12VDC Low level 0.2V/40mA PNP PS. Open collector
TTL
a
Output
Audio/DIN 4pin Working temp
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP65 (2) Position feedback 1: Potentiometer 10k ohm (RL=S+154mm) 2: Optical sensor: PNP (standard), NPN. TTL (3) 36VDC motor (4) Back fixture turned 90°
±0.1
_ RL = S + 146mm Stroke 250mm < RL = S + 196mm Stroke >250mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
212
LAS - 3 Specifications Thrust Pulling Holding force
Speed
Duty
Max.current
Resolution
Resolution
(mm/pulse)
(Ohm/mm)
Optical Sensor Potentiometer
max.
max.
max.
(mm/s)
Standard stroke
cycle
(A)
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
(mm) : S
%
12VDC 24VDC
LAS3-1 1200
1200
800
8/12
50 100 150 200 250
10
6
2.5
0.3175
21
LAS3-2 600
600
300
16/25
50 100 150 200 250
10
6
3
0.635
10.5
P/N
LAS3-1/ -2
24(12) VDC Motor 30
Speed (mm/s)
25 20 LAS3-1
15
LAS3-2
10 5 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N)
LAS3-1/ -2
24 VDC Motor 3.0
Current (Amp)
2.5 2.0 LAS3-1
1.5
LAS3-2
1.0 0.5 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
LAS3-1/ -2
12 VDC Motor 6
Current (Amp)
5 4 LAS3-1
3
LAS3-2
2 1 0 0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information
LAS 3 - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number 1/ 2 a
0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches
Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)
a
Stroke length a
Voltage All specifications are subject to change without notice.
213
Linear Actuators - LAS Series (4) LAS 4
Screw type
ACME
Position feedback specifications (Hall Sensor)
Weight*
1.36 kg
Protection
IP 54
Supply Voltage 24VDC
a
Compatible Controller Compatible with all controllers
Working temp
12VDC
5VDC
High level 12VDC
TTL
a
Output High level 24VDC
Notice type of connector:
Low level 0.2v/10mA sink
Low level 0.2v/10mA sink
Audio/DIN 4pin
(NPN)
(NPN)
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP65 (2) Hall sensor (RL=S+226mm)
5
(3) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M MOTOR CABLE DIAMETER=Ø5
29.5
8.8
Ø1
15.5
45
2-Ø6 ±0.1
8.5
4 15
7
5
(27.5) RL
9.4
45
_ 300mm RL = S + 222.5mm Stroke < RL = S + 272.5mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
214
LAS4 - Specifications Thrust Pulling Holding force P/N
Duty
Max.current
Hall Sensor
max.
max.
max.
(mm/s)
Speed Standard stroke
cycle
(A)
Resolution
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
(mm) : S
%
12VDC 24VDC
(mm/pulse)
LAS4-1 800
800
600
10/15
100 150 200 250 300
10
5
2.3
0.0085
LAS4-2 300
300
200
30/46
100 150 200 250 300
10
6
3.6
0.02
LAS4-1/ -2
24(12) VDC Motor 50
Speed (mm/s)
40 30
LAS4-1 LAS4-2
20 10 0 200
0
400
600
800
Load (N)
LAS4-1/ -2
24 VDC Motor 4
Current (Amp)
3.5 3 2.5 LAS4-1
2
LAS4-2
1.5 1 0.5 0 0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
6
LAS4-1/ -2
12 VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
5 4 LAS4-1
3
LAS4-2
2 1 0 0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.
Ordering Information
LAS4 - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number 1 / 2 0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches
Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)
Stroke length
Voltage
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
215
Linear Actuators - LAN Series (1) LAN1
Screw type
ACME
Position feedback specifications (Hall Sensor)
Weight*
2.6 kg
Supply
Protection
IP 54
Voltage 24VDC
Compatible with all controllers Output High level 24VDC Low level 0.2v/10mA sink Compatible Controller Notice type of connector: (NPN) Audio/DIN 4pin Working temp
12VDC
5VDC
High level 12VDC
TTL
Low level 0.2v/10mA sink (NPN)
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Position feedback (3) Safety nut (RL=S+185mm (4) Mechanical Spline (push only) (RL=S+223mm) (5) Back fixture turned 90°
(6) Mechanical quick release (RL=S+230mm), only for LAN1-4 (7) Motor cable outlet: (A) Standard (B) Front (C) Back (8) 36VDC motor (9) UL Version (10) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
RL 82.6
(25) 11 Ø21.9
6.2
7.5
Ø26
33
-0 Ø10+0.2
11
33.5
54.8
50.8
57.8
158 170
-0 Ø10+0.2
(C)
71
24.9
24.6
173.5 166
(B)
(A) 78 MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000mm MOTOR CABLE DIAMETER=Ø5.5mm
_ 300mm RL = S + 173mm Stroke < RL = S + 223mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
216
LAN1 Specifications Standard Motor P/N
Thrust max. (N)
Pulling max. (N)
Holding max. (N)
LAN1-1
6000
5000
5000
2.7/5
100 150 200 250 300
10
4
0.3
LAN1-2
4000
4000
4000
5/7
100 150 200 250 300
10
4
0.5
Speed (mm/s)
Duty Max.current Hall Sensor cycle (A) Resolution % 24VDC (mm/pulse)
Standard stroke (mm) : S
Load=Max/Load=0
LAN1-1/ -2
24 VDC Motor
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0
Current (Amp)
Speed (mm/s)
Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding motor short-circuited.
LAN1-1 LAN1-2
1000
0
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
LAN1-1/ -2
24 VDC Motor
4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
LAN1-1 LAN1-2
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Load (N)
Load (N)
24VDC Motor - Quick Motor P/N
Thrust max. (N)
Pulling max. (N)
Holding Duty Max.current Speed (mm/s) Standard stroke max. cycle (A) (mm) : S (N) % 24VDC Load=Max/Load=0 5000 5/7 100 150 200 250 300 10 6
LAN1-1
6000
5000
LAN1-2
4000
4000
4000
7/9
100 150 200 250 300
10
6
0.4
LAN1-3
3000
3000
3000
9/11.5
100 150 200 250 300
10
6
0.5
LAN1-4
2000
2000
2000
12/17
100 150 200 250 300
10
5.5
0.8
Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse) 0.3
24 VDC Motor(24Q)
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0
LAN-1/ -2 / -3 LAN1-1/2/3/4 6
Current (Amp)
Speed (mm/s)
Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.
LAN1-1 LAN1-2 LAN1-3 LAN1-4
LAN1-1/2/3/4 LAN-1/ -2 / -3
24 VDC Motor
5 4 3
LAN1-1 LAN1-2
2
LAN1-3 LAN1-4
1 0
0
1000
2000
3000 Load (N)
4000
5000
0
6000
1000
2000
3000 Load (N)
4000
5000
6000
12VDC Motor P/N
Thrust max. (N)
Pulling max. (N)
Holding Speed (mm/s) max. Load=Max/Load=0 (N)
Duty Max.current Hall Sensor cycle (A) Resolution % 12VDC (mm/pulse)
Standard stroke (mm) : S
LAN1-1
5000
5000
5000
3/6
100 150 200 250 300
10
11
0.3
LAN1-2
4000
4000
4000
4/8
100 150 200 250 300
10
11
0.4
LAN1-3
3000
3000
3000
5/10
100 150 200 250 300
10
10
0.5
Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply. LAN1-1/ -2 / -3
12 VDC Motor
12 VDC Motor 8 6
LAN1-1 LAN1-2
4
LAN1-3
2 0 0
1000
2000
Load (N)
3000
4000
5000
Current (Amp)
Speed (mm/s)
10
12.0 10.5 9.5 7.5 6.0 4.5 3.0 1.5 0 0
LAN1-1/ -2 / -3
LAN1-1 LAN1-2 LAN1-3
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
Load (N)
Ordering Information Model number 1 / 2
LAN1 - 1
1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E
Force direction 1: Standard 2: Suspending install, pull
Color B : Black G : Grey
0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches Stroke length
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
217
Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick) 12 : 12VDC Standard
Linear Actuators - LAN Series LAN3
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
5.31 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
LAK6B/LAK2J
Working temp
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Potentiometer 10K ohm (RL=S+221mm, S<200mm / RL=S+271mm, S:200~500mm) The maximum stroke lengths with potentiometer: LAN3-1 max. 250mm, LAN3-2 max. 330mm, LAN3-3 max. 420mm (3) Mechanical spline (RL=S+252, S<200mm / RL=S+302, S:200~500mm) (4) Safety nut (RL=S+222, S<200mm / RL=S+272, S:200~500mm) Safety nut + mechanical spline (RL=S+259, S<200mm / RL=S+309, S:200~500mm) (5) Mechanical quick release (6) Back fixture turned 90º (7) Fast motor 24Q (8) 36VDC motor (9) External reed switches (RL=S+290mm, S<200mm/RL=S+340mm, S=200~500mm) (10) MR Sensor feedback (11) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
+0.1 -0.05
RL=S+210mm Stroke <200mm RL=S+260mm Stroke 200mm~500mm
RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
218
LAN3 Specifications P/N
Thrust max.
Pull max.
Hold max.
(N)
(N)
(N)
LAN3-1 10000 LAN3-2 7000 LAN3-3 5000
Speed
Duty Max Potentiometer cycle current Resolution (A) % 24VDC (Ohm/mm)
Standard stroke Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)
mm : S
5/8 7/9 9.5/12.5
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
6000 10000 6000 7000 5000 5000
10 10 10
8.3 8 7
37.5 28 22.5
Stroke over 200mm(included), RL=S+260mm (Longer tube required for extra strength against buckling) * The max. stroke lengths with potentiometer : LAN3-1 max. 250mm, LAN3-2 max. 330mm, LAN3-3 max. 420mm
LAN3-1/ -2 / -3
LAN3-1/ -2 / -3
24 VDC Motor 9
24 VDC Motor
8
15
LAN3-1 LAN3-2 LAN3-3
5
Current (Amp)
Speed (mm/s)
7
10
6 5
LAN3-1
4
LAN3-2
3
LAN3-3
2 1
0
0
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
0
10000
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
Load (N)
Load (N)
Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.
24 VDC Fast motor (24Q) P/N
Thrust max.
Pull max.
Hold max.
(N)
(N)
(N)
LAN3-1 10000 LAN3-2 7000 LAN3-3 5000
Speed Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)
mm : S
8/11 9/13 13/18
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
6000 10000 6000 7000 5000 5000 LAN3-1/2/3
10 10 10
12 11 11
37.5 28 22.5
LAN3-1/2/3 12
20
10
15 LAN3-1 LAN3-2
10
LAN3-3
5 0
Current (Amp)
Speed (mm/s)
Duty Max Potentiometer cycle current Resolution (A) % 24VDC (Ohm/mm)
Standard stroke
8
LAN3-1
6
LAN3-2 LAN3-3
4 2 0
0
1000
2000
3000
4000 5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
0
10000
1000
2000
3000
4000 5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
Load (N)
Load (N)
Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.
Ordering Information
LAN3 - 1
1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number Force direction 1: Standard 2: Pull
Color B : Black G : Grey
1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches
Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick)
Stroke length
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
219
Linear Actuators - LAN Series (4) LAN4
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
2.33 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B
Working temp
+5°C ~ 40°C
* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Safety nut RL=S+174mm, S<400 / RL=S+224, S>400 (3) Mono jack-plug (Standard is stereo) (4) Mechanical spline (push only) RL=S+200mm, S<400 / RL=S+250, S>400 (5) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
RL
22
Ø21.9 24.9
(22) 11
6-0
+0.2 -0
Ø30
94
Ø10
+0.2
185
+0.2
+0
Ø25.9-0.2 87
Ø10- 0
18.6
+0.2 6.1- 0
11 24 MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000MM
_ 200mm RL = S + 160mm Stroke < RL = S + 210mm Stroke >400mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions in mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.
220
LAN4 Specifications P/N LAN4-1 LAN4-2 LAN4-3 LAN4-4
Thrust max.
Pull max.
Hold max.
Speed
Duty cycle
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)
mm : S
%
3500 3000 2000 1500
3500 3000 2000 1500
3500 3000 2000 1500
3.5/7 4.2/9 7/13 11/20
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
10 10 10 10
Standard stroke
Max current (A) 12VDC 24VDC 5 5 5 5
12 12 12 12
LAN4-1/2/3/4 24 (12) VDC Motor 25
Speed (mm/s)
20 LAN4-1 15
LAN4-2 LAN4-3
10
LAN4-4
5 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
Load (N)
LAN4-1/2/3/4 24 VDC Motor 6.0
Current (Amp)
5.0 LAN4-1
4.0
LAN4-2 3.0
LAN4-3
2.0
LAN4-4
1.0 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
Load (N)
LAN4-1/2/3/4 12 VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
12.0 10.0 LAN4-1
8.0
LAN4-2 6.0
LAN4-3 LAN4-4
4.0 2.0 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
Load (N)
Note: Test results obtained using 12VDC power supply
Ordering Information LAN4
1
0
300
24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number
Color B : Black G : Grey
Thrust 0 : Basic model *1 : Over-Current protection
Voltage
Stroke length
* Note: Complete with internal over-current protection circuitry to ensure that the actuator stops if obstacles or stroke limits are reached.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
221
Linear Actuators - LAN Series (5) LAN5
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
1.96 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
Compatible with all controllers (Notice type of connector - Audio/DIN4 PIN)
Working temp
+5°C ~ 40°C
a
* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) Hall Sensor (2) Safety nut (3) Mechanical Spline (push only) (4) Back fixture turned 0°, 45°, 90°, 135° (5) IP65; IP66 (6) Back fixture and rodeye hole Ø12.1mm
(7) Quick release (For LAN5-3, LAN5-4 only) (8) UL version (9) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
_ 300mm RL = S + 163mm Stroke < RL = S + 213mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
222
LAN5 (24V) Specifications P/N
LAN5-1 LAN5-2 LAN5-3 LAN5-4
Thrust max.
Pull max.
Hold max.
Speed
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)
mm : S
8000 6000 4000 3000
4000 4000 3000 2000
6000 5000 4000 1500
2/3.5 3/4.5 4/5.5 6/9
100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300
9 8 7
Speed (mm/s)
10 10 10 10
Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse)
5 4 4 4
0.08 0.10 0.14 0.22
When the stroke of LAN5-1 is between 250mm and 300mm,please refer to the diagram below right of maximum load.
LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4
10
Duty Max cycle current (A) % 24VDC
Standard stroke
LAN5-1
6
LAN5-2
5
LAN5-3
4
LAN5-4
3 2 1 0
0
1000
3000
2000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
Load (N)
LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4
5.0
LAN5-1(24/24Q)
4.5 4.0 LAN5-1
3.0
LAN5-2
2.5
LAN5-3
2.0
8000
Load (N)
Current (Amp)
3.5
LAN5-1-250
6000
LAN5-1-300
5000 4000
LAN5-4
1.5
7000
1.00 0.5 0
0 0
1000
3000
2000
5000
4000
6000
7000
0
8000
100
200
150
250
300
400
450
S (mm)
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
LAN5 (24Q) Specifications P/N
LAN5-1 LAN5-2 LAN5-3 LAN5-4
Thrust max.
Pull max.
Hold max.
Speed
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)
mm : S
8000 6000 4000 3000
4000 4000 3000 2000
6000 5000 4000 1500
5/7 7/9 9/11 15/19
100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300
LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4
20 18 16 14
Speed (mm/s)
Duty Max cycle current (A) % 24VDC
Standard stroke
LAN5-1
12
10 10 10 10
Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse)
7.5 6.5 6 6
0.08 0.10 0.14 0.22
When the stroke of LAN5-1 is between 250mm and 300mm,please refer to the diagram below right of maximum load.
LAN5-2
10
LAN5-3
8
LAN5-4
6 4 2 0
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
Load (N)
LAN5-1(24/24Q)
LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4 7.5 5.5
LAN5-1
4.5
LAN5-2
3.5
LAN5-3
2.5
LAN5-4
1.5
8000
Load (N)
Current (Amp)
6.5
7000
LAN5-1-250
6000
LAN5-1-300
5000 4000
0.5 0 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
0
8000
0
Load (N)
100
150
200
250
300
400
450
S (mm)
Ordering Information LAN5 - 1 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to Customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number Thrust 1: Push 2: Pull
Color B : Black G : Grey
Basic model complete with internal limit switches
Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick)
Stroke length
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
223
Linear Actuators - LAC Series LAC3
Screw type
ACME
Weight*
8.1 kg
Protection
IP 54
Compatible Controller
Compatible with all controllers (Notice type of connector - Audio/DIN 4 pin
Working temp
+5째C ~ 40째C
a
* Stroke length 400mm Options: (1) Position feedback: Potentiometer (2) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug
0
RL = 171mm + S/2 RL : Retracted length S : Stroke
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
224
LAC3 Specifications Duty
Max.current
Potentiometer
max.
max.
max.
(mm/s)
Standard stroke
cycle
(A)
Resolution
(N)
(N)
(N)
Load=Max./Load=0
(mm) : S
%
24VDC
(ohm/mm)
500
2000
8.4/12
300 400 500
10
5
6.42
Thrust Pulling Holding force P/N
LAC3-1 2000
Speed
LAC3
Speed (mm/s)
24 VDC Motor 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0
500
1000
1500
2000
1500
2000
Load (N)
5
LAC3
24 VDC Motor
Current (Amp)
4 3 2 1 0 0
500
1000
Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.
Ordering Information LAC3
1
1
400
24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)
Model number 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches
Color G : Grey
Stroke length
Voltage
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
225
Linear Actuators - Accessories Controllers: LAK-2LR
LAK-2
LAK-2BN
- Control 1 actuator with external limit switches IP 54 - Over load protection - Electronic protection for relays - 4 mtr cable Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66 - Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP 54 - Over load protection - Electronic protection of relays - 4 mtr cable AC - 1 mtr cable DC Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Input 24VDC / output 24 VDC Input 12VDC / output 12 VDC Option: IP66 - Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP 54 - Over load protection - Soft start/stop - 4 mtr cable Rechargeable battery - Low battery indicator Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Can have synchronous program when used with actuators with feedback. Option: IP66
LAK-2D
- Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP54 - Over load protection - 4 mtr cable - insert 2 x 9V alkaline batteries to lower actutators during emergency power loss Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66
LAK-2J
- Control 1 or 2 Linear Actuators IP54 - Optional IP65 & Customised program - portable design (operated by battery - Emergency stop button - Emergency operation via front panel - Over load protection - soft start/stop - battery rechargeable via LAKCH charger - Automatic alarm when battery is low - Automatic energy saving mode - LED for power indication.
LAK-4
- Control 1 to 3 Linear Actuators IP54 - Standard 4 mtr cable - can be mounted directly on LAN1. Optional IP66
LAK-4D
- Control 1 to 4 Linear Actuators IP54 - - Standard 4 mtr cable - Detachable cable retainer for protections against accidental unplugging - removable AC power cable External ground and LED power display - can be mounted directly on the LAN5 (must have RL greater than 300mm). Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66
Please contact T.E.A. or visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for further information, Installation Instructions, and Safe Operating Regulations.
226
Linear Actuators - Accessories Controllers: LAK4N - Control 1 to 4 linear actuators Standard Features: IP 54 - 4 mtr cable - detachable cable retainer for accidental unplugging protection - LED power indicator - External DC input (LAKB1/2) - Re-configurable simultaneous movement - Microprocessor (Software version) can receive the signal of hall sensor, optical sensor or potentiometer - over load protection - removable AC power cable - soft start/stop - external battery input - can be mounted directly to LAN. Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Options: IP66 - Customised program - Two axes move simultaneously - Two axes move synchronously (actuators must have feedback)
LAK6B - Control 1 to 6 linear actuators Standard Features: IP 54 - over load protection - Soft start - 4 mtr cable - Rechargeable battery Low battery indicator (alarm) - Automatic energy saving - Main fuse replaceable by external plug - Spare fuse inside the fuse plug - External ground connection - LED power indication. Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Options: IP66 - Customised program Note: Simultaneous movement not available for LAN3-1/2/3(24Q)
Keypads: LAP 1, 2 & 3, LAP3N - Keypads for control up to 2 linear actuators IP 66 - Ergonomic design, LAP2 smaller size Cable length 600mm coiled, 1100mm total
LAP 4 - Keypads for control up to 4 linear actuators IP 66 - Ergonomic design, LAP2 smaller size Optional cable length up to 2250mm
LAP5 - Control up to 5 linear actuators IP66 - Ergonomic design - compatible with LAK6B & LAK2J Cable length 600mm coiled, 1100mm total
LAFS1 - Foot Operated Control for 1 Linear Actuator Compatible with all controllers - Easily portable with attached magnet - standard cable length 1100mm
Please contact T.E.A. or visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for further information.
227
Enquiry Form for HIWIN Linear Actuators Please photocopy this page, complete with as much information as possible, then fax or e-mail to T.E.A. for a quotation. Fax: 07-4129 2437. Email: sales@tea.net.au Date:
Application:
Company:
Phone:
Contact Person:
Fax:
ACTUATOR
CONTROLLER
Voltage: VDC (V)
Input voltage (V)
Max. current: (A)
Control axis no.
Max thrust force (N)
Battery
Max. pulling force (N)
Power cord type US
Max. holding force (N)
Overload protection
Stroke length (mm)
IP class
Speed (mm/s)
- No load
Output power (VA)
- Full load
Power cord length
AC (V) or DC (V)
Yes EU
UK
No Other
Yes
No
Yes
No
Load (N)
Removable power cord
IP class
Duty cycle
No-Load current (A)
Operation temp. (째C)
Duty cycle
Outdoor use
Yes
No
Operation temp. (째C)
With HIWIN actuator
Yes
No
Custom program
Yes
No
Housing colour
Black
Grey
Outdoor use Direction
Yes Horizontal
No Vertical
Bending moment
Yes
No
With HIWIN limit switch
Yes
No
With HIWIN controller
Yes
No
Control axis. no
With customers limit switch
Yes
No
Custom mask
Yes
No
Over current
Yes
No
Lock function
Yes
No
Position feedback
Yes
No
With HIWIN controller
Yes
No
Special install requirement (Fixture, space etc)
Quantity (year/month)
KEYPAD
Housing colour
Black
Grey
Key mode
Membrane
Rubber
228
Timing Belts & Pulleys Ideally suited for large quantity orders
Timing Belts: Material: Nylon covered, fibreglass reinforced Neoprene Temperature Range: -18째C to +85째C 3mm pitch - 6mm & 9mm widths Breaking strength: 122 N/mm belt width 5mm pitch - 6, 9 & 15mm widths Breaking strength: 255 N/mm belt width For full specification data sheets please visit our web site www.tea.net.au or contact us directly.
Timing Belt Pulleys: Material: Aluminium - clear anodized or, Polycarbonate, fibreglass reinforced with aluminium inserts (Also steel, cast iron, plastic) Sizes to suit our range of Timing Belts 6mm, 9mm and 15mm belts 3mm and 5mm pitch Options: No flange - Single flange - Double flange For full specification data sheets please visit our web site www.tea.net.au or contact us directly.
Ordering Information: Timing Pulley - Teeth (number) - Pitch - Width - Flange type (single / double / no flange) - Bore size - Material type
Timing Belt - Length (or number of grooves) - Pitch - Width - Material type
229
Chambrelan Telescopic Slides Heavy Duty Slides from the market leader More than 30 types of slides are available - Load capacity from a few kilos to more than 1000 kgs. for automatic doors, vehicle equipment, machine tools etc.
• Partial extension Easy to install • Total extension
3 types of slide materials: steel, aluminium and stainless steel for all standard applications, corrosive environment and specific applications.
• Over extension
Partial, total or over extension 2, 3 or 4 beams, some of which are compatible with double extension (two way movement).
On page 233 you will find a load table to help you select the right telescopic slide. If you would like a quotation please contact us. If you need assistance with selection please photocopy this page, then complete the form below and fax or email it to us for selection help, price and delivery. You may also like to visit the Chambrelan website to download CAD drawings and technical data www.chambrelan.com Their website can also be accessed via our website www.tea.net.au
T.E.A. Transmissions Pty Ltd Fax: 07-4129 2437 Email: sales@tea.net.au
Your Name: Company: Phone/Fax/Email: 1. 2.
3.
Closed length (dimension 1): Extension (dimension 2): Partial Total Specific: Load (dimension 3):
mm
Double extension (two way movement) Yes No
7.
mm Over
N.B. Double extension is not compatible with any locking mechanism
8. 9.
mm
kg/pair
Manual Frequency:
Load position if different: 4. 5. 6.
Slides mounted: on the major axis Material: Zinc plated steel
Required options: Conditions of use: Mechanical/Automatic per/hr.
Speed:
on the minor axis
Environment:
Anodised aluminium Stainless steel 10.
Open position Locking mechanism: Closed position Open & closed position
230
mtr/sec. Heat
Dust Application Notes:
Damp Sand
5
231
7
150
55 130
60 135 310
65 130 320
65
65 300
70 310
290
290
125
50
85
30
40
400
300
90
33
95
90
35
37
85
45
350
39
50
300
25
250
15
200
55 83
80
335
340
330
140
75
120
450
330
140
75
85
50
35
75
50
400
RA414 - STEEL RA654 - STEEL RA554 - STEEL E1904 - STEEL E1014 - STEEL E1024 - STEEL ST658 - STAINLESS STEEL
Closed length L (mm)
150
200
47
47
250
45
42
42 90
45
60
350
85
300
40
95
40
56
400
OVER EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 4 beams
78 145
80 150
83 140
460
125
455
340 130
135
145 335
150
78
80
53 90
55
38
77
53
350
95
43
52
80 40
75
49
55
300
57
250
60
62
D444 - ALUMINIUM D500 - ALUMINIUM D1422 - ALUMINIUM RA31 - STEEL RA41 - STEEL RA44 - STEEL RA5R - STEEL RA7R - STEEL RA9 -- STEEL E1400 - STEEL E1700 - STEEL E1902 - STEEL E1012 - STEEL E1020 - STEEL ST448 - STAINLESS STEEL ST508 - STAINLESS STEEL St708 - STAINLESS STEEL E1708 - STAINLESS STEEL E1908 - STAINLESS STEEL E1018 - STAINLESS STEEL
200
150
Closed length L (mm)
37
90
37
53
450
325
135
73
115
445
325
135
73
80
48
33
73
48
450
280
60
280
120
48
80
28
32
450
TOTAL EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 3 beams
D402 - ALUMINIUM R20 - STEEL R26 - STEEL R28 - STEEL R53 - STEEL R71 - STEEL R82 - STEEL R102 - STEEL ST48 - STAINLESS STEEL ST78 - STAINLESS STEEL
Closed length L (mm)
PARTIAL EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 2 beams
900
925
900
32
210
220
35
80
32
46
85
35
50
550
555
550
500
305
125
305
130
65
555 925
550
70
105
435
305
125
65
70
43
28
65
43
550
260
55
260
110
43
70
23
18
110
440
305
130
70
75
45
30
70
45
500
270
60
270
115
45
75
25
25
550
30
200
75
30
43
600
950
565
300
120
60
950
565
100
430
300
120
60
65
40
25
60
40
600
250
195
70
27
40
650
925
550
295
115
55
925
550
95
425
295
115
55
60
38
20
55
38
650
240
50
495
510 55
240
100
38
60
17
650
250
105
40
65
20
15
600
190
65
25
36
700
900
535
290
110
50
900
535
90
410
290
110
50
55
35
55
35
700
230
180
60
22
33
750
875
518
280
105
45
875
518
85
400
280
105
45
50
32
50
30
750
220
45
950
850 50
470
220
90
33
50
13
750
485
230
95
35
55
15
700
1250
475 710
500 750
50 165
170
55
20
30
850
950
800
825
850
485
265
95
1000
500
270
100
35
950 1200
1000 40
825
485
75
375
265
95
35
40
28
35
850
200
1000
445
200
80
28
40
850
850
500
80
385
270
100
40
45
30
40
25
800
210
45
1050
460
210
85
30
45
10
800
670
450
160
45
900
900
800
465
250
90
30
1150
900
800
465
70
360
250
90
30
35
25
30
900
190
950
435
190
75
25
35
900
800
700
395
210
70
1050
800
700
395
300
210
70
15
10
1100
150
800
385
150
55
1100
45
750
650
360
190
60
1000
750
650
360
275
190
60
1200
130
750
360
130
700
600
325
170
50
950
700
600
325
245
170
50
1300
110
700
335
110
35
1300
600
550
290
150
40
900
600
550
290
220
150
40
1400
90
600
310
90
25
1400
550
500
225
130
30
850
550
500
225
175
130
30
1500
70
550
285
70
1500
500
450
220
110
20
800
500
450
220
155
110
20
1600
50
500
260
50
1600
450
400
90
750
450
400
185
135
90
1700
30
450
235
30
1700
400
350
70
700
400
350
150
110
70
1800
400
210
1800
350
300
50
650
350
300
115
85
50
1900
350
185
1900
300
250
30
600
300
250
80
60
30
2000
300
160
2000
(standard types are highlighted)
1200
25
550
375
135
15
510
350
120
105 480
325
90 430
300
80 390
275
70 350
250
60 315
225
50 280
200
40 250
175
30 220
150
Technical specifications are given for your guidance, and can be modified without notice.
590
400
150
35
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000
850
750
430
230
80
20
1100
850
750
430
50
340
230
80
20
25
20
20
1000
170
850
410
170
65
1000
Load table in KGs per pair of slides 500
Permanent Magnet Coupling This two piece rare-earth permanent magnet coupling is for contact-free torque transmission through any non-ferrous wall, with the benefit of slipping when the maximum torque is exceeded, protecting mechanical components in the drive line from damage. Ideally suited to: ? Marine applications removing the need for shaft seals
? Laboratory mixers and vessel agitators ? Driving submerged pumps or compressors ? Driving across vessels where contents must be isolated ? Food processing ? Pharmaceutical industry ? Where a safety slip mechanism is required ? Solar / low power applications requiring extremely efficient torque transmissions ? Rotary indication through barriers
How Disc Couplings Work Disc couplings consist of opposing discs with powerful rare earth magnets. The torque applied to one disc is transferred through an air gap to the other disc. Because of the simple flat design, you can have angular misalignment of up to 3o or a parallel misalignment of up to 6mm and still transmit nearly full rotational torque. Easily isolate drive side components from clean or contained processes. This is our simplest and most versatile coupling.
Angular Misalignment 3o Max.
Parallel Misalignment 1/4â&#x20AC;? Max.
Advantages of Disc type Couplings: ? No wearing parts - wear free transmission of torque ? Synchronous design ? No slip at any speed - protecting mechanical components in the drive-line from damage ? No physical contact between driving and driven parts ? Simplifies containment barrier ? Custom designs available ? Overload protection up to 110% ? Electrical, mechanical and chemical isolation
Technical Data: Material - 400 Series stainless steel Magnet (Nickel-Plasted) NdFeB* Operating temperature - 140oC *Also available with SmCo magnets rated up to 280oC
Note: Couplings are delivered with an integrated stainless steel cover to protect magnets and allow for clean operation and easy maintenance. The above images show exposed magnets for illustration only.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
232
Permanent Magnet Coupling
P/N
Max *Weight Torque Speed per hub Normal Kg. Nm
HP @ 1750 rpm
KW @ 1750 rpm
0.03
0.02
42500
0.05
0.08
0.06
26000
0.10
Torque Peak Nm
A mm
B mm
0.11
0.16
28.0
20.6
0.45
0.56
43.7
20.6
C Max mm
D mm 16.0
16.0
3.5
N/A
see
15.0
15.0
4.9
N/A
E mm
G mm
H mm
a a
PMK20 a
PMK40 a
PMK50
0.17
0.13
23000
0.15
0.68
0.90
50.3
28.5
chart
15.0
15.0
4.9
N/A
0.25
0.19
19000
0.26
1.02
1.36
60.0
38.1
below
19.1
19.0
4.9
N/A
25.4
25.4
4.9
N/A
35.0
25.4
25.4
4.9
N/A
a
PMK60 a
PMK70
0.45
0.34
15500
0.58
1.69
2.26
72.7
50.8
1.2
0.90
11000
1.10
4.97
5.42
97.6
69.9
2
1.49
10500
1.16
8.13
9.04
106.7
69.9
35.0
25.4
25.4
6.4
N/A
3
2.24
9000
1.99
12.20
13.56
129.6
76.2
42.0
38.1
31.8
6.4
52.4
5
3.73
9200
2.17
20.34
22.60
125.0
69.9
42.0
38.1
31.8
6.4
52.4
a
PMK91 a
PMK110 a
PMK130 a
PMK150 a
PMK170
7.5
5.59
9200
3.14
30.51
33.90
125.0
108.0
55.0
47.5
41.4
6.4
68.4
10
7.46
7800
4.07
40.67
45.19
147.1
108.0
65.0
52.6
46.0
6.4
77.8
13
9.69
7800
3.23
53.10
61.01
147.1
60.2
38.0
41.7
31.8
6.4
47.8
a
PMK190 a
PMK200
Notes: *Weight per hub includes magnets. Hubs sold separately. Please refer to recommended bore sizes in the table below, see Notes and then How to Order. Bore Code
0000 0125 0188 0197 0236 0250 0313 0315 0375 0394 0433 0472 0500 0551 0625 0709 0748 0750 08751000
a
Bore Size
Solid 1/8” 3/16” 5mm 6mm 1/4” 5/16” 8mm 3/8” 10mm 11mm 12mm ½” 14mm 5/8” 18mm 19mm 3/4” 7/8” 1”
a
P/N a
PMK20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
a
PMK40
X
a
PMK50
X
X
X
X
a
PMK60
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
a
PMK70
X
X
X
a
Notes: PMK20 has one set screw (grub screw), PMK40 and PMK50 have two set screws. PMK60 and PMK70 have one set screw and keyway (for bores 11mm and larger.) Keyways start with bores 11mm and larger. All larger sizes of Permanent Magnet Couplings are supplied as solid bores, with additional costing for boring & keyway machining. PMK150-PMK200 are manufactured to order. Minimum order quantity 2 hubs (different bores accepted).
How to Order: P/N for 1 hub + bore code + P/N for the other hub + bore code EG: 1 off PMK20-0000(solid) + 1 off PMK20-0236 (6mm bore)
CAD files available via our website: www.tea.net.au
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
233
TRASCO速 Couplings TRASCO速flexible coupling allows safe power transmission by absorbing peak loads and torsional vibrations. The elastic and radial misalignments and also absorbs small shaft length variation. The involute profile of the gear ring teeth prevents high stress concentration on reduced surfaces and the crowned profile avoids the transmissions of axial stress. The high duty factor is due to the fact that the elastic element works under compression and never under flexion. Suitable for working in both horizontal and vertical positions and easily support any load variation or reversal motion. The two coupling halves are electrically insulated from each other.
For AL & BL executions contact T.E.A. * Sintered steel.
TRASCO速 Coupling (2 hubs plus spider) Material: Die cast aluminium Cast Iron GG25 On Request: Steel, Cast Iron GGG40
How to Order: Hub GRMP: Standard Trasco Hub GRMALU: Trasco Aluminium Hub Size A: execution A B: execution B AL: long execution A BL: long execution B F: Diameter of the bore
GRMP 48/60 AL F50
Spider Trasco Spider Size 92 Sh A (yellow if not indicated) R: 98 Sh A (red) V: 64 Sh D (green)
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
234
AR 48/60 R
Double Loop Couplings Good resistance to: petrol, oil, Benzol, Toluol, aromatic and non aromatic coal hydrogen, alcohol, Glycole solvents and many other chemicals. DKPS 2928
DIN 916 M3x4 (4x)
* Other bores on request.
a
DKPS 3835 DIN 916 M4x6 (4x)
b
c Material: Hub: 9SMnPb28 Zinc Plated Steel Spring Element: Polyurethane
d
e
DKPS 4848 DIN916 M4x6 (4x)
How to Order: DKPS 2928 04/06 Part Number Size Bores
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
235
Helix Couplings Technical Data
WKAK 1928
WKAK 2532
Max. speed
min -1
6000
6000
Max. torque
Ncm
80
120
Max. radial offset
mm
±0.25
±0.35
Max. axial offset
mm
±0.4
±0.5
Max. angular offset
degree
±4
±4
Torsion spring stiffness
Nm/rad
8
16
Radial spring stiffness
N/mm
36
45
Moment of inertia
gcm2
8.7
29
Max. clamping torque
Ncm
80
100
Weight approx.
g
16
34
Material
Aluminium chromised
d1 mm 4
d2 mm 4
WKAK 1928 04/04
4
6
WKAK 1928 04/06
5
5
WKAK 1928 05/05
5
6
WKAK 1928 05/06
6
6
WKAK 1928 06/06
d1 mm 6
d2 mm 6
WKAK 2532 06/06
6
8
WKAK 2532 06/08
6
10
WKAK 2532 06/10
8
8
WKAK 2532 08/08
8
10
WKAK 2532 08/10
10
10
WKAK 2532 10/10
10
12
WKAK 2532 10/12
Part Number
Part Number
Bore Reducers - for adapting a coupler to a variety of shaft dimensions. Adapters can also prevent screws from scoring the shafts and permits repeated re-positioning and easy removal of the coupler. (See also notes on page 253).
237
Outside Diam. (mm)
Reducing to (mm)
Part Number
10
5
REAN 1007 05
10
6
REAN 1007 06
10
6.35 (1/4")
REAN 1007 63
10
7
REAN 1007 07
10
8
REAN 1007 08
12
6
REAN 1208 06
12
6.35 (1/4")
REAN 1208 63
12
7
REAN 1208 07
12
8
REAN 1208 08
12
9.53 (3/8")
REAN 1208 95
12
10
REAN 1208 10
Couplers Bellows Couplings Stainless Steel with Aluminium Flange Technical Data
BKXS 1520
BSK3502
BKXS 1525
BKXS 2035
BSK 3504
Max. speed
min-1
10000
8000
10000
10000
8000
Max. torque
Ncm
40
20
40
80
80
Max. radial offset
mm
±0.2
±0.2
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
Max. axial offset
mm
±0.4
±0.4
±0.5
±0.5
±0.5
Max. angular offset
degree
±3
±2
±4
±4
±4
Torsion spring stiffness
Nm/rad
90
160
70
140
230
Radial spring stiffness
n/mm
40
-
15
10
-
Moment of inertia
gcm2
2.0
4.8
2.3
9
22
Max. clamping torque
Ncm
70
70
70
150
150
Weight approx.
g
6
14
7
16
34
Flange material
Anodised Alu.
CuZn39Pb3
Anodised Alu.
Anodised Alu.
CuZn39Pb3
Bellows material
Stainless steel
CuSn6
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
CuZn20
Surface finish
-
Nickel plated
-
-
Nickel plated
238
d1 mm 3
d2 mm 3
BKXS 1520 03/03
3
5
BKXS 1520 03/05
3
6
BKXS 1520 03/06
4
4
BKXS 1520 04/04
4
5
BKXS 1520 04/05
4
6
BKXS 1520 04/06
5
5
BKXS 1520 05/05
Part Number
6
6
BKXS 1520 06/06
1/4"
1/4"
BSK 35 02 60
d1 mm 3
d2 mm 3
BKXS 1525 03/03
3
5
BKXS 1525 03/05
3
6
BKXS 1525 03/06
4
4
BKXS 1525 04/04
4
5
BKXS 1525 04/05
4
6
BKXS 1525 04/06
5
5
BKXS 1525 05/05
6
6
BKXS 1525 06/06
d1 mm 4
d2 mm 4
BKXS 2035 04/04
4
6
BKXS 2035 04/06
6
6
BKXS 2035 06/06
6
10
BKXS 2035 06/10
8
8
BKXS 2035 08/08
10
10
BKXS 2035 10/10
10
12
BKXS 2035 10/12
Part Number
Part Number
12
12
BKXS 2035 12/12
3/8"
3/8"
BSK 35 04 30
1/4"
1/4"
BSK 35 04 14
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
239
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
240
blind hubs & standard discs specify 2 hubs + 1 disc per coupler
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
Contact T.E.A. for further details.
241
thro' hubs (X-Y series) & standard discs specify 2 hubs + 1 disc per coupler
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
blank hubs
performance with standard (black) acetal discs
Page 244 takes you through the installation procedure.
242
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
243
performance with standard (black) acetal discs
Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers
installation & servicing with standard (black) acetal discs
244
UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers
245
UNI-LATÂŽ Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers
set screw styles 2 screws per hub spaced at 90Âş
Ref. 203 Long hub, large bore versions
Ref. 201 Short hub, small bore versions
page 249 for availability.
246
UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers
clamp styles
Ref. 205 & 206 are manufactured with integral leaf clamps
Ref. 207 is manufactured with collet hubs and ring clamps
247
UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers
performance
offset
torsional deflection
248
Bore Adaptors
249
Multi - Beam Couplers • Torsionally rigid design • Zero backlash • No moving part • 3 - Beam single stage compatible with industry standard types • 6 - Beam two stage for increased radial compliance Multi-Beam coupler will readily accommodate any combination of axial motion, angular and parallel misalignment. The 3 start helical-cut design provides higher torque capability and greatly reduce wind-up compared with single beam couplers. Available in three standard materials: stainless steel, aluminium and acetal, for shaft diameters 1mm to 38mm.
The Huco Multi-Beam coupler utilises the well-established beam flexure principle, which in its simplest form comprises a single helical slot cut into a cylindrical section. In the Multi-Beam version, flexure is achieved through 3 start beams, which offer the same amount of misalignment compensation as single beam couplers but with the benefits of higher torsional stiffness and lower radial loads. Two types are available, 6-beam and 3-beam The 6-beam version comprises two sets of helical-cut slots, providing higher radial misalignment capability than the 3 beam version. The 3-beam version is shorter in length to fit in confined spaces and to allow for easy retrofits in existing equipment. When to Choose Multi-Beam In applications where there is a need to compensate for misalignment, maintain constant velocity, and provide axial compliance … Multi-Beam offers a one-piece integrated solution. Multi-Beam couplers are ideal for light duty power transmission applications such as stepper motors and servo motors in motion control systems. The performance benefits inherent in Multi-Beam couplers are vital to the accuracy, repeatability and reliability of demanding servo system applications. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Speed, Torque and Misalignment Multi-Beam couplers are suitable for the majority of applications involving speeds up to 5000 rpm. Torque and misalignment ratings are mutually exclusive and should not be exceeded. Due account should be taken of the service factors given.
Multi-Beam couplers also suit light duty, precision applications, those involving components such as encoders and tachogenerators for example. The small bearings on these components make low radial forces essential to longevity and continued high performance. Material options include aluminium, stainless steel and acetal. Available in sizes up to 64mm diameter, the Multi-Beam coupler is also suitable for a wide variety of power transmission applications.
Relief Under the Beams Most Multi-Beam couplers can be supplied with or without relief under the beams as shown in the diagrams opposite. When the drive or driven shafts extend under the beams relief is essential to ensure that the coupler remains flexible. Where non-relieved versions are used, shafts must not be allowed to penetrate under the beamed section of the coupler. Unless otherwise specified, relieved versions will be supplied.
250
Multi - Beam Couplers Set screw hubs
Clamp hubs
Relieved
3-Beam Couplers: Dimensions & Order Codes
If either shaft extends beneath the beams, the area shown in orange must be relieved to provide clearance under the flexure.
Bore Sizes
251
Multi - Beam Couplers
Non-Relieved
6-Beam Couplers: Dimensions & Order Codes
Relieved
If either shaft extends beneath the beams, the area shown in orange must be relieved to provide clearance under the flexure.
Bore Sizes
252
Slip Clutch The safety slip clutch is a structurally simple device designed to give many years of reliable protection for motors, transmissions and other connected equipment against overload. The torque can be adjusted after installation by means of a knurled nut (3) from very sensitive â&#x20AC;&#x153;0â&#x20AC;? to a maximum value. At the moment of overload the friction disk (4) slips. The friction disk is clamped with the knurled nut (3) and the disk springs (6) between the hub collar (2) and the lock washer (5). By turning the knurled nut (3) the disk springs (6) adjusts the tension as required. Longer slipping time is not heating or damaging the friction disk.
Safety Slip Clutch RK1
Safety Slip Clutch RK 2 C
1. Housing hub 2. Hub collar 3. Knurled nut 4. Friction disk 5. Lock washer 6. Disk Springs
253
Slip Clutch Applications: Adjustable transformer Motor potentiometers Cam controls Exact/precise mechanisms General mechanisms
Part No. RK 1
Ød1 6
Ød2 6
Part No. for Friction Disk RK1-RB
Options: d1 max. 8h7 d2 max 10h7 Keyway to DIN 6885 BI1
Part No. RK 2C
Ød1 8
Ød2 8
RK 1
Part No. for Friction Disk RK2-RB
Options: d1 max. 10h7 d2 max 15h7 Keyway to DIN 6885 BL 1
RK 2 C
Specifications Max. speed (approx.) Max. torque Max. angular misalignment Max. axial misalignment Weight Material Clutch body Friction disk Disk springs
min-1 Nm Degree mm g
500 500 0.7 2.5 ±1º ±1º 0.5 0.5 15 256 Delrin Chrome Plated Steel Material free of asbestos Spring steel Spring steel
254
Stainless Steel Machine Feet Material:
Foot: 304 Stainless steel Thread: 303 Stainless steel Damper: Perbunan, 70° Shore A Includes: 2 hex. Nuts DIN 934 Most sizes are usual stock items Exceptionally well priced
Part No.
Thread
MF 8.40 SS
M8 x 1.25
D 37
Load
Approx.
D1
h
Hd
L
m
m1
SW
N
Weight kg.
40
12
76
60
6.5
4
13
2000
0.08
MF10.60 SS
M10 x 1.5
57
60
15
88
70
8
5
17
3000
0.18
MF12.60 SS
M12 x 1.75
57
60
15
99
79
10
6
19
4000
0.22
MF14.80 SS
M14 x 2
75
80
17
121
98
11
9
22
10000
0.42
MF16.80 SS
M16 x 2
75
80
18
146
120
13
9
24
15000
0.52
MF20.100SS
M20 x 2.5
MF24.100SS
M24 x 3
95 95
100
22
184
153
16
15
30
20000
0.94
100
22
210
178
18
15
36
25000
1.28
All dimensions in mm All specifications subject to change without notice
Other types of machine feet and components available: Machine feet manufactured in special glass fibre reinforced black technopolymer base with matte finish, and zinc plated steel or stainless steel thread. M8 - M24 15 ° Articulation
Plastic base, galvanized thread. Very inexpensive versions - ideal for large quantity orders.
Ground Mounting machine feet of the same material choices. M20 - M30 2° / 8° / 15° Articulations
Square End Caps to fit square shaped legs for maximum static load of 5000N. M10 - M20
Individual components i.e. bases, threads & nuts. M8 - M24
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets and further information.
255
Knobs & Handles Spherical Knobs Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded socket without insert
OD Thread P/N P/N Ø black red 12 M 4 1001 16 M 4 1002 1087 18 M 5 1003 1088 20 M 5 1004 22 M 6 1005 1089 25 M 6 1006 28 M 8 1007 1090 30 M 8 1008 1091 36 M 6 1009 36 M10 1010 1092 40 M10 1011 1093 45 M10 1012 45 M12 1013 1094 50 M12 1014 56 M12 1015
Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded socket with insert
Made of thermoplastic, to fit with hammer-stroke
Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded stud
OD Thread P/N P/N Ø black red 16 M 4 1016 18 M 5 1017 20 M 5 1018 22 M 6 1019 1095 25 M 6 1020 28 M 8 1021 1096 30 M 8 1022 36 M10 1023 1097 40 M10 1024 45 M10 1025 45 M12 1026 1098 50 M12 1027 56 M12 1028
OD Ø 16 18 22 28 30 36 40 45 45 56
Thread x length M 4x 8 M 5x 9 M 6x10 M 8x14 M 8x14 M10x18 M10x18 M10x18 M12x25 M12x25
P/N black 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038
OD Ø 22 28 30 30 40 40 45
Hole Ø 8 10 10 12 12 14 16
P/N black 1039 1040 1041 1042 1044 1045 1046
Also see pages 270-273 for other types of available knobs, such as:
Mushroom-shaped Knobs Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert
OD Ø 17 21 25 29 33
Thread
P/N
M4 M5 M6 M6 M8
1101 1102 1103 1104 1105
Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert
Ø 32 45 52
Thread M 8 M10 M12
P/N 3101 3102 3103
Made of bakelite, black with insert
Made of bakelite, black with threaded stud
Stainless steel on request
Stainless steel on request
OD Ø 17 17 21 21 25 29 33 45
Thread
P/N
M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M6
1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113
Made of bakelite, black with through hole
Ø 32
Hole Ø 5.5
“Soft touch”
with transparent cap for self adhesive label OD Ø 17 21 21 25 33
Thread x length M4x 8 M5x 9 M6x10 M6x10 M8x14
P/N 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118
Made of bakelite, black with blind hole
P/N 3104
Ø 52
All dimensions are in mm All dimensions are subject to change without notice
256
Hole Ø 10
P/N 3105
Choice of colour caps
Made of bakelite, black without insert
Ø 37.5
Thread M10
P/N 4601
Bow-type Handles
Made of bakelite, black with threaded sockets without inserts
Made of Polyamide 6, black Made of reinforced polyamide 6
Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 112 85 M6 1204 148 125 M6 1205 186 160 M6 1206
Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 130 110 M6 1213
with threaded inserts
MadeMade of ABS of aluminium profile Acrylonitrile Butadien Styrene, black, with threaded inserts Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 146 130 M5 1214
Stirrup Handles
Made of thermoplastic, black with through threaded holes
Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded inserts
Distance between Length holes 120 94 145 117 163 132 213 180
Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 120 94 M6 1230 145 117 M8 1231 163 132 M8 1232 213 180 M8 1233
Thread Ø 6.5mm 8.5mm 8.5mm 8.5mm
P/N 1220 1221 1222 1223
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey Type a - with threaded socket Type b - with continuous bore holes
Length 123.5 162.2 201.0
Distance between holes 106.5 145.2 184.0
Type a bore Ø P/N M6 6301 M6 6302 M8 6303
Type bore Ø 6.4mm 6.4mm 6.4mm
b P/N 6304 6305 6306
See also pages 270 & 272 for other industrial handles, such as:
Suspended Handles
Crank Handles
a) Made of thermoplastic, black, with threaded stud b) Made of thermoplastic, grey
Made of thermoplastic, black with galvanized steel hub with rotatable machine handle
304 fine ground stainless steel
with a choice of colour caps
a b
Type a Type b
Width
Height
110 110
88 106
Thread x length M6x7
Aluminium tube with epoxy resin based coating
P/N 9701 9702
Length 103 103 103 124 124 124
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
Height 100 100 100 101 101 101
257
Hole Ø 10 12 14 10 12 14
P/N 4004 4005 4006 4001 4002 4003
Choice of 7 colours Clean room
Handles Made of PVC, black with blind hole
Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded bolt
Extended Operating Handles
Gearshift Knobs Made of bakelite, black without insert
Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert
Length
Hole Ø
P/N
Length
117
27
1421
147
Thread x length M12x20
OD Ø 20 20 25 25 30 30 35 35 35
P/N Length 50 60 75 90 100
1422
Thread M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14
P/N 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405
thread
P/N
M 5 M 6 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M 8 M10 M12
9301 9302 9303 9304 9305 9306 9307 9308 9309
Machine Handles Made of bakelite, black rotatable type with threaded stud
Made of bakelite, black fixed type with threaded stud
See also page 273 for other handles & crank handles, such as: High impact strength technopolymer Chrome plated steel arm
Length 68 64 81 81
Thread x length M 8x12 M 8x13 M10x20 M12x25
P/N
Length
2201 2210 2203 2204
46 58 68 86 86
Thread x length M 6x14 M 8x16 M10x20 M10x25 M12x25
P/N 2305 2301 2302 2303 2304
Fold-away handles
Tapered Handles Made of bakelite, black fixed type with threaded stud
Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert
Made of bakelite, black rotatable type with threaded stud
See pgs 270-3 for:
“Clean Room” knobs
Length 38 38 50 60 70 80 80 90
Thread x length M4x 8 M5x 8 M6x 9 M5x 8 M6x 9 M6x 9 M8x12 M8x12
P/N
f
c
1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413
Length 73 89 120 120
Thread x length M 8x16 M10x20 M10x25 M12x25
P/N 1414 1415 1425 1426
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
258
b
D
d
“soft Touch”
L
L 58 70 81
D b d c f P/N 25 8 M 6 29 14 4301 30 10 M 8 35 17 4302 35 12 M10 41 22 4303
Counterweight balanced crank handles
Clamping Levers
Length
Made of thermoplastic, black, with ratchet mechanism, with gal. threaded stud (see righthand table), or with insert (see below). Available as: a) Black - most sizes standard stock items b) Orange c) Anthracite grey (new style)
Type A or B with threaded stud
Type C New Style with threaded stud/insert
Type A or B with threaded insert Length Threaded insert 45 45 45
M 4 M 5 M 6
a black P/N 9466 9467 9468
b orange P/N 9530 9531 9532
c new P/N 6966 6967 6968
60 60 60
M 4 M 5 M 6
9429 9430 9441
9550 9551 9552
6929 6930 6941
80 80
M 6 M 8
9404 9405
9553 9554
6904 6905
100 100
M10 M12
9406 9407
9555 9556
6906 6907
Clamping Levers
Made of die cast aluminium with ratchet mechanism with threaded stud
Thread
P/N
47 47 70 70 94 94 112
M 4 M 5 M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14
9408 9409 9410 9411 9412 9413 9414
a black P/N 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 9515 9516 9518 9519 9520 9521 9522 9523
b orange P/N 9533 9534 9535 9536 9537 9538 9539 9541 9542 9543 9544 9545 9546
c new P/N 6910 6911 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922 6923
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
4x10 4x15 4x20 5x12 5x15 5x20 5x25 6x10 6x12 6x16 6x20 6x25 6x32 6x40 6x50
9442 9431 9433 9443 9432 9434 9445 9446 9447 9448 9440 9449 9484 9485 9486
9557 9558 9559 9560 9561 9562 9563 9564 9565 9566 9567 9568 9569 9570 9571
6942 6931 6933 6943 6932 6934 6945 6946 6947 6948 6940 6949 6984 6985 6986
74 74
M 8x40 M 8x63
9612 9613
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
M M M M M M M M M M M
6x20 6x25 8x10 8x12 8x16 8x20 8x25 8x30 8x40 8x50 8x63
9424 9435 9487 9488 9489 9425 9436 9426 9491 9492 9493
9572 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 9579 9580 9581 9582
6924 6935 6987 6988 6989 6925 6936 6926 6991 6992 6993
M10x16 M10x20 M10x25 M10x30 M10x40 M10x50 M10x63 M12x20 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40 M12x50 M12x60
9494 9495 9427 9437 9497 9438 9498 9453 9454 9428 9439 9456 9457
9583 9584 9585 9586 9587 9588 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596
6994 6995 6927 6937 6997 6938 6998 6953 6954 6928 6939 6956 6957
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Made of die cast aluminium with ratchet mechanism with threaded insert
Length
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
Thread x length M 4x10 M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x12 M 5x16 M 5x20 M 5x25 M 6x12 M 6x16 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x32 M 6x40
Made of blackend steel with ratchet mechanism with threaded insert Length 60 60 60 80
Thread x length M 6x20 M 8x20 M 8x30 M10x20
P/N
Length
Thread
P/N
9415 9416 9417 9418
60 70 77 108 108
M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14
9419 9420 9421 9422 9423
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
259
Knurled Screws Knurled Nuts Made of bakelite, black with gal. threaded stud Stainless steel on request
OD Ø 18 18 20 20 20 24 24 24 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35
Thread x length M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x18 M 5x25 M 5x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 8x25 M 8x32 M 8x12 M 8x25 M10x30
P/N 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716
OD Thread Ø 18 M 4 20 M 5 24 M 5 24 M 6 30 M 6 30 M 8 35 M 7 35 M 8 35 M10
Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with threaded brass insert Stainless steel on request
P/N
M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M12
1500 1501 1502 1503 1504
P/N 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612
See page 269 for all stainless steel knurled screw & nuts
Star Grips
Thread
Lock Nuts
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket
OD Ø 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35
OD Ø 30 30 30
Threaded through hole, with brass nickle plated insert Stainless steel on request
See page 272 for “Clean Room” knurled knobs
OD Ø 40 40 50 60 60
Grooved Screws
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
Thread x length M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x18 M 5x25 M 5x10 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 8x25 M 8x32 M 8x12 M 8x25 M10x30
Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with galvanized threaded stud Stainless steel on request
OD Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60
Thread x length M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40
260
P/N 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6610 6611 6612 6613 6620 6621 6622 6624 6625 6630 6631 6632
Thread
P/N
M5 M6 M8
6505.02 6506.02 6508.02
Grooved Nuts
Made of PA 6 anthracite grey With threaded socket OD Ø 20 20 25 25 30 30 30 35 35
Thread
P/N
M 4 M 5 M 5 M 6 M 5 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10
6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509
Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with blind hole
P/N 1555 1556 1557 1505 1559 1560 1506 1561 1562 1507 1563 1564 1508 1565 1566
OD Ø 40 50 60
Hole Ø 10 10 12
P/N 1509 1510 1511
Star Grips Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with “D” shaped hole and screw
Made of bakelite, black with insert and clean cut hole
Made of thermoplastic, black a) with insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
Made of thermoplastic, black a) with blind hole b) with insert and clean cut hole Stainless steel on request
a
b
OD Ø
Hole
P/N
OD Ø
Hole
P/N
OD Ø
a Thread
40 50 60
10 10 12
1512 1513 1514
40 50 60
5 5 6
1515 1516 1517
50 50
M8
Made of bakelite, black square hole a) with insert b) without insert
Made of thermoplastic, black a) with brass threaded insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
b Thread x length M8x14
P/N
OD Ø
Hole Ø
P/N
1519 1520
a) 50 b) 50
10 10
1518 1521
Made of bakelite, black a) with threaded insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
See pages 268 & 271 for other versions of star grips, such as:
a a OD Ø 50 63 80 100
Square hole with insert 6x6 7x7 8x8 9x9
a
Polished aluminium
P/N 3410 3411 3412 3413
OD Ø 40 40
Thread
P/N
M6 M8
4501 4502
OD Ø 40 50 60 75
Thread M 8 M 8 M10 M12
P/N 4701 4702 4703 4704 “Clean Room”
b OD Square hole Ø without insert 50 6x6 50 7x7 63 6x6 63 7x7 80 8x8 80 9x9
P/N
b
3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425
OD Ø 40 40 40 40
b Thread x length M6x16 M8x20 M8x25 M8x35
P/N 4503 4504 4505 4506
OD Ø 40 50 60 75
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
261
Thread x length M 8x14 M 8x14 M10x18 M12x25
P/N 4705 4706 4707 4708
Certified Self Extinguishing or “Soft Touch” elastomer
Star Handles
Star Grips Made of thermoplastic, black through hole with threaded insert Stainless steel on request
Ø
Thread
P/N
40 40 40 40
M4 M5 M6 M8
3601 3610 3602 3603
Scallop Handwheels Made of PA.6, black with threaded insert
Ø
Thread
P/N
28 40 50 60
M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
5501 5502 5503 5504
Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40
Thread x length M5x18 M6x12 M6x20 M8x16 M8x20 M8x25
P/N
Ø
Thread
P/N
3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609
32 40 50 63 80
M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M16
4801 4802 4803 4804 4805
Made of PA.6, black through hole with threaded insert
Ø
Thread
P/N
28 40 50 60
M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
5519 5520 5521 5522
Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud
Star Handwheels Made of PA.6, black with threaded insert Ø
Ø
Thread
P/N
28 40 50 60
M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
5601 5602 5603 5604
28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60
Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
262
According to DIN 6335 Made of bakelite, black with gal. steel threaded insert Stainless steel on request
P/N 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618
Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud
Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60
Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40
P/N 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 5518
Made of PA.6, black through hole with threaded insert
Ø
Thread
P/N
28 40 50 60
M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
5619 5620 5621 5622
Wing Nuts
Wing Screws
Wing Nuts
Wing Screws
Made of PA.6, black a) with threaded insert b) through hole with threaded insert
Made of PA.6 , black with threaded stud
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud Stainless steel on request
a
b
OD Ø 28 40 50 60
Thread M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
a P/N 5301 5302 5303 5304
b P/N 5319 5320 5321 5322
OD Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60
Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40
P/N 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318
Tristar Handwheels Made of PA.6, black a) with threaded insert b) through hole with threaded insert
OD Ø 35 35 50 50 50 70 70
Thread
P/N
M 4 M 5 M 5 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10
7000 7001 7010 7011 7012 7020 7021
OD Ø 35 35 35 35 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Thread x length M 4x15 M 5x18 M 4x10 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x25 M 5x18 M 6x10 M 8x14 M 5x10 M 5x25 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x20 M 8x30 M 8x40 M 8x14 M10x18 M 8x20 M 8x30 M 8x40 M10x25 M10x40
P/N 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7030 7031 7032 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7029
Star-shaped Handles Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket
Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud
Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud
a
b OD Ø 28 40 50 60
Thread M 5 M 6 M 8 M10
a P/N 5401 5402 5403 5404
b P/N 5419 5420 5421 5422
OD Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60
Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40
OD Ø 40 40 50 50 60 60
P/N 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
263
Thread
P/N
M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M10 M12
6401 6402 6405 6406 6409 6410
OD Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60
Thread x length M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x30 M 8x40 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40
P/N 6403 6413 6414 6404 6415 6416 6407 6417 6418 6419 6408 6420 6421 6411 6422 6423 6412 6424 6425
Star-shaped Wheels Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with gal. steel hub without handle
Crown Wheels Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with galvanized steel hub & clean cut hole
Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with gal. steel hub, with rotatable handle type a) or b)
b OD Ø
Hole Ø
P/N
80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125
10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14
1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609
OD Ø 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160
a
Spoke Wheels
OD Ø
Hole Ø
a P/N
b P/N
80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125
10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14
1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809
2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809
Made of bakelite black with gal. steel hub a) without handle b) with rotatable machine handle
a
Hole Ø. 10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 12 14 16 18 20
P/N 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 6808 6809 6810 6811 6812 6813 6814
Disk Wheels Made of bakelite black with gal. steel hub a) without handle or b) with rotatable handle
b
a OD Ø
Hole Ø
a P/N
b P/N
100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250 250 315 315 315
10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 16 18 20 18 20 25 25 28 32
1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922
2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122
OD Ø 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250
Hole Ø 10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 12 14 16 18 20 16 18 20 20 25
b
a P/N 9817 9818 9819 9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9807 9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815 9816
b P/N 9917 9918 9919 9901 9902 9903 9904 9905 9906 9907 9908 9909 9910 9911 9912 9913 9914 9915 9916
See page 266 for aluminium Spoke & Disk wheels. See page 270 - 271 for other types of hand wheels including safety foldaway handle type.
All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
264
Vibration Dampers Zinc Plated - Types A/B/C/D/E Material: Natural rubber NR with steel hardware Not resistant to mineral oils and grease Temperature range: -30o to +80oC steel Part No. Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
D mm
H mm
F Nm
M mm
I mm
S m
S1 mm
F cm2
Shore
15.15A 20.15A 25.20A 25.30A 30.20A 30.30A 40.30A 40.40A 50.30A 50.40A 70.45A 75.40A 75.50A 100.40A 100.60A 100.75A 150.55A 150.75A
15.15B 20.15B 25.20B 25.30B 30.20B 30.30B 40.30B 40.40B 50.30B 50.40B 70.45B 75.40B 75.50B 100.40B 100.60B 100.75B 150.55B 150.75B
15.15C 20.15C 25.20C 25.30C 30.20C 30.30C 40.30C 40.40C 50.30C 50.40C 70.45C 75.40C 75.50C 100.40C 100.60C 100.75C 150.55C 150.75C
15.15D 20.15D 25.20D 25.30D 30.20D 30.30D 40.30D 40.40D 50.30D 50.40D 70.45D 75.40D 75.50D 100.40D 100.60D 100.75D 150.55D 150.75D
15.15E 20.15E 25.20E 25.30E 30.20E 30.30E 40.30E 40.40E 50.30E 50.40E 70.45E 75.40E 75.50E 100.40E 100.60E 100.75E 150.55E 150.75E
15 20 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 50 70 75 75 100 100 100 150 150
15 15 20 30 20 30 30 40 30 40 45 40 50 40 60 75 55 75
0.040 0.090 0.150 0.150 0.210 0.210 0.300 0.300 0.600 0.600 1.000 1.200 1.200 2.000 2.000 2.000 6.000 6.000
M4 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M12 M12 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16
12 19 15 15 20 20 20 20 25 25 37 37 37 42 42 42 42 42
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 16.5 16.5 16.5 16.5 16.5
2.36 3.14 4.91 4.91 7.07 7.07 12.57 12.57 19.64 19.64 38.47 44.18 44.18 78.54 78.54 78.54 176.62 176.62
55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
Type A (zinc) Type 50 (ss)
Type B (zinc) Type 51 (ss)
Type C (zinc) Type 52 (ss)
Type D (zinc) Type 53 (ss)
Type E (zinc) Type 54 (ss)
with bolt on both sides.
bolt on one side & threaded insert other side.
Threaded insert on both sides.
with bolt on one side only.
with threaded insert on one side only.
Stainless Steel - Types 50/51/52/53/54 Material: Nitrile rubber NBR with stainless steel (1.403) hardware (standard). Temperature range: -30oC to +120oC Optional material: Natural Rubber NR with stainless steel (1.403) hardware (Please add NR to end of Part No.) Temperature range: -30oC to +80oC Oil resistant Part No. Type 50 5050.02015 5050.03020 5050.04025 5050.05030 5050.07535 5050.10040 5050.15045
Type 51
Type 52
Type 53
5051.02015 5051.03020 5051.04025 5051.05030 5051.07535 5051.10040 5051.15045
5052.02015 5052.03020 5052.04025 5052.05030 5052.07535 5052.10040 5052.15045
5053.02015 5053.03020 5053.04025 5053.05030 5053.07535 5053.10040 5053.15045
Type 54
D mm
5054.02015 20 5054.03020 30 5054.04025 40 5054.05030 50 5054.07535 75 5054.10040 100 5054.15045 150
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
265
H mm 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
F N
M mm
I mm
S mm
90 210 300 600 1200 2000 6000
M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 M16 M16
15 18 23 28 37 41 41
2 2 3 3 3 3 4
S1 mm 5 6 7 8 10 13 14
F cm2 3.14 7.07 12.57 19.64 44.16 78.50 176.60
Shore 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
Polished Aluminium Two-Spoke Hand Wheels Type ZPK Part No.
D
d
I1
I2
A
ZPK 80 ZPK 100 ZPK 125 ZPK 140 ZPK 160 ZPK 180 ZPK 200 ZPK 250 ZPK 320
80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320
26 30 35 35 40 42 45 50 51
16 17 18 19 20 22 24 28 33
14 15 16 17 17 19 21 22 28
14 15 16 17 18 19 21 24 30
Supplied pilot bored: ZPK80-100: 5 mm, 125-200: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm
Polished Aluminium Spoke Wheels Type DIN 950 Part No. DIN950.80 DIN950.100 DIN950.125 DIN950.140 DIN950.160 DIN950.180 DIN950.200 DIN950.225 DIN950.250 DIN950.280 DIN950.315 DIN950.360 DIN950.400 DIN950.500 DIN950.560
D
d
I1
I2
A
80 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 360 400 500 560
24 26 28 30 32 40 38 42 45 50 53 61 65 78 90
16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 35 38 45 50
13 16 18 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 25 27 32
14 15 16 17 18 20 22 24 26 26 28 30 32 34 36
Keyways and operating handles are not standard. P/N DIN950.80 to 200 have three spokes, 225 to 560 have five spokes. Supplied pilot bored: 80-100: 5 mm, 125-225: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm
Polished Aluminium Disk Wheels Type SGF-GH Part No. SGF-GH 80 SGF-GH 100 SGF-GH 125 SGF-GH 140 SGF-GH 160 SGF-GH 180 SGF-GH 200 SGF-GH 225 SGF-GH 250 SGF-GH 280 SGF-GH 315
D
d
I1
I2
A
80 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
25 28 30 32 40 42 50 50 50 55 55
16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 33
13 16 18 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23
16 18 20 22 23 25 26 28 30 32 33
Note: Operating handle is not standard and must be ordered separately, then attached.
Supplied pilot bored: SGF-GH80-100: 5 mm, 125-225: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm Operating handles not standard. All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
266
Unpolished Aluminium Spoke Wheels Type HR-RI - suitable for valves etc. Part No.
D
d
s
I1
HR-RI. 60 HR-RI.100 HR-RI.125 HR-RI.140 HR-RI.160 HR-RI.180 HR-RI.200 HR-RI.225 HR-RI.250 HR-RI.315 HR-RI.400 HR-RI.500
60 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 315 400 500
18 26 40 40 40 40 45 55 55 60 70 80
9 11 11 12 14 14 17 17 19 24 27
12 17 18 19 20 22 22 26 26 30 34 38
Supplied pilot bored. Square hole not standard.
Polished Aluminium Fixed Machine Handles Type GF - made of light alloy - with threaded stem and internal steel pin Part No.
d1
d2
d3
L1
L2
GF-E16 GF-E20 GF-E25 GF-E32
16 20 25 32
M6 M8 M10 M12
10 13 16 20
50 64 80 100
11 13 14 16
The threaded stem has a hexagonal bore and can easily be fastened into a handwheel using a hexagonal key.
Polished Aluminium Rotatable Handles Type DIN 98 - in accordance with DIN 98 - made of light alloy - with threaded stem Part No.
d1
d2
d3
L1
L2
DIN98E16 DIN98E20 DIN98E25 DIN98E32
16 20 25 32
M6 M8 M10 M12
10 13 16 20
54 67 83 105
11 13 14 16
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
267
Polished Aluminium Star Handles Type STG - in accordance with DIN 6336 Part No.
d1
d2
h2
t1
STG6336-40 STG6336-50 STG6336-63 STG6336-80
40 50 63 80
14 18 20 25
25 32 40 50
18 21 25 32
Most sizes are usual stock items. Supplied pilot bored. With minimum orders of 50 pieces, handles can be ordered with steel inserts for threads or through holes.
Polished Aluminium Star Handles Type KG - in accordance with DIN 6335 - made of light alloy Part No.
d1
d2
h2
t1
KG-DIN6335-40 KG-DIN6335-50 KG-DIN6335-63 KG-DIN6335-80
40 50 63 80
14 18 20 25
25 32 40 50
18 21 25 32
Most sizes are usual stock items. Supplied pilot bored. With minimum orders of 50 pieces, handles can be ordered with steel inserts for threads or through holes.
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
268
Stainless Steel Knurled Screws & Nuts Material: stainless steel 1.4305
Most sizes are stock items.
Part No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Weight g
8100-16-M4-10 8100-16-M4-15 8100-20-M5-10 8100-20-M5-15 8100-24-M6-15 8100-24-M6-20 8100-30-M8-20 8100-30-M8-30
16 16 20 20 24 24 30 30
M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
10 15 10 15 15 20 20 30
3.5 3.5 4 4 5 5 6 6
9.5 9.5 11.5 11.5 15 15 18 18
8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16
16 17 27 28 50 51 84 85
Part No.
A
B
C
D
E
Weight g
8120-16-M4 8120-20-M5 8120-24-M6 8120-30-M8
16 20 24 30
M4 M5 M6 M8
3.5 4 5 6
9.5 11.5 15 18
8 10 12 16
3 13 24 46
Part No.
A
B
C
D
E
Weight g
8140-16-M4 8140-20-M5 8140-24-M6 8140-30-M8 8140-36-M10 8140-40-M12
16 20 24 30 36 40
M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
6 8 10 12 14 16
10 12 14 17 20 24
8 14 16 20 28 32
13 17 29 52 85 125
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
269
Knobs and Handles
The Ergostyle® colours:
• BLACK RAL 7021 • ORANGE RAL 2004 • GREY RAL 7035 • YELLOW RAL 1021 • LIGHT BLUE RAL 5024 • RED RAL 3000 ETW. Two-spoke handwheels with boss cap, in one of the Ergostyle colours, with or without side handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 160 - 200 mm
EWN.p Wing nuts with centre cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black, matte finish. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped hole or threaded stud. Sizes: 48 - 55 - 70 mm
ETW+IR
ERX.
Two-spoke handwheels with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, with fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 160 - 200 mm
Adjustable handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer lever, grey-black, matte finish. Glossy finish push button in one of the Ergostyle colours. Glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer locking element with brass insert with tapped blind hole or zinc-plated threaded stud. Available also with AISI 303 stainless steel inserts and studs steel. Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95 mm
ESW+I Solid handwheels with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, with side handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 150 - 175 mm
ERZ. Adjustable handles. Material: lever in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Clamping element in black oxide or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with threaded bushing or threaded stud. Toothed element in zinc alloy and AISI 303 stainless steel retaining spring. Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95 mm
EKH. Crank handles with hub cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel hub with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Sizes: 100 - 125 mm
ERF. Lever handles. Special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Brass insert with tapped blind hole, cylindrical blind and plain hole with brass reinforcement or square hole with transversal set screw (ERF.N) or zinc-plated steel threaded stud (ERF.p). Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95
ELC. Control levers with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Sizes: 67 - 85 - 110 - 140 mm
EKK. Knurled knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer in one of the Ergostyle colours, matte finish. Brass insert with tapped blind hole or zinc-plated steel threaded stud. Diameters: 16 - 18 - 21 - 25 - 31 mm
EGK. Grip knob with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer covered with soft touch elastomer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameter: 50 - 63 mm
EPR-PF Flush pull handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Snap-in mounting. Size: 120 mm
EBK-SOFT Special high impact strength technopolymer covered with soft touch elastomer (Shore A hardness 70), grey-black matte finish. Brass tapped insert or zinc-plated threaded steel stud. Dimension: 64 mm
EPR/F-SH Flush pull handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black colour with matte finish. Screw cover in one of the Ergostyle colour with glossy finish. Technopolymer flap and stainless steel return spring. Size: 120 mm
EGH-SOFT Special soft touch elastomer technopolymer (Shore A hardness 90), grey-black matte finish. Push-fit on plain shaft made from standard drawn stock bars. Dimension: 85 mm
ETH. Tubular handles. Aluminium tube with epoxy resin based coating. Handle shanks in glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer assembled to the tube through a special expansion system to prevent from rotation during operation. Side caps in one of the Ergostyle colours with glossy finish. Fitting centre distance: 300 - 500 - 700 - 1000 mm
ELK. Lobe knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Plain or bored (type ELK.FP) boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, ultrasonically welded to the knob body. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance plain or tapped hole or threaded stud. Diameters: 45 - 56 - 70 mm
EBP. EBP.B Bridge pull handles with caps in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Mounting by means of passing through holes in the plastic material or brass inserts with tapped blind holes. Fitting center distance: 95.3 - 117 - 150 mm
ESN. Single wing nuts with centre cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Brass insert with tapped hole. Sizes: 55 - 70 mm
ESP. Guard safety handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Safety cover in one of the Ergostyle colours to protect operator fingers against accidents, snap mounting, glossy finish. Mounting by means of two cylindrical head (CH) or countersunk screws (SH). Fitting center distance: 93.5 mm
EWN. Wing nuts with or without center cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Brass insert with blind or passing through tapped hole (EWN.FP), available also with AISI 303 stainless steel insert. Sizes: 48 - 55 - 70 mm
ECH+x Two-volume revolving handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Zinc-plated steel shank with hexagonal socket in the threaded end. Sizes: 65 - 73 - 86 - 95 mm
270
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets
Operating Elements
Clamping And Control Elements
VRTP.
VB.639
Two-spoke handwheels with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte anodised aluminium central plate. Diameters: 80 - 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 375 mm
Three-arm knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. Brass insert with tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 63 - 80 - 100 - 130 mm
VR.FP
VCT. VCT. AE-V0
Three-spoke handwheels with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled. Diameters: 100 - 125 - 140 - 160 - 180 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 375 mm
Lobe knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer or special technopolymer certified self-extinguish (VCT. AE-V0). Steel or brass insert with plain or tapped hole. Brass insert with tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 25 - 32 - 40 - 50 - 63 - 74 mm
VDS.
VCT-SOFT
Solid handwheels with boss cap, with or without side handle, with fold-away handle or safety fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Diameters: 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 250 - 300 mm
Lobe knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, covered with soft touch elastomer. Brass insert with tapped blind hole. Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 43 - 53 mm
VDT.
VC.692
Solid handwheels with boss cap, with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Diameters: 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 mm
Lobe knobs Material: special glass fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 303 stainlees steel or brass insert with tapped blind hole. Zinc-plated steel stud (type p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type S-p-INOX). Diameters: 32 - 40 - 50 - 60 mm
VD.FP
VC.692-CLEAN
Solid handwheels with or without side handle. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled or with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Diameters: 50 - 63 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 140 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 225 250 - 300 - 350 mm
Lobe knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, white colour similar to RAL 9002 with matte finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole Diameters: 32 - 40 - 50 - 60 mm
VDO.FP
VC.192
Solid handwheels with or without side handle, with fold-away handle or with safety fold-away handle. Rim with front and rear finger grips. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Diameters: 125 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 225 - 250 mm
Lobe knobs. Material: Duroplast AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. AISI 303 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel threaded stud. Diameters: 25 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 85 - 100 mm
LBR.
VCRT.
Control levers. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer lever body. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte chrome-plated steel arm with handle type I.280. Matte anodised aluminium central plate. Sizes: 85 - 110 - 130 - 170 mm
Lobe knobs with square hole. Material: glass reinforced technopolymer, black with matte finish. Square through hole with brass reinforcement. Coloured centre caps for closing the mounting hole. Diameters: 40 - 50 - 63 - 74 mm
VBR.2 VBR.4
VL.640
Two or four-arm handwheels. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer centre body. Black oxide steel insert with through hole. Matte chrome-plated steel arms with handle type I.222. Diameters: 200 - 280 - 320 - 370 mm
Lobe knobs. Material: glass reinforced technopolymer, black with glossy finish. Uncovered front end hub available in different executions: not drilled, plain through hole, tapped through hole. Diameters: 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 mm
ME.
VC.308 VC.309
Balanced handles with incorporated counterweight. Material: reinforced Duroplast, or special high strength technopolymer (ME.95). Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance blind hole. Matte anodised aluminium front plate (ELESA original design). Sizes: 65 - 80 - 95 - 110 - 140 mm
Latch-type knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Tropicalized zinc-plated steel latch. Knob opens both to the right and left. Nickel-plated brass key for lock numbered with different numbers or same numbering, master key, etc. Knobs diameter: 40 mm
MT
VCK. VCK. INOX
Crank handles with revolving or fold-away handle. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Black oxide steel hub with standard H7 tolerance reamed through hole, pilot blind hole or square hole. Sizes: 50 - 64 - 80 - 100 - 130 - 160 - 210 mm
Latch-type knobs. Material: knob in Duroplast. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel stud. Sintered and oxidised or sintered AISI 316 L stainless steel helical latch with partly machined hole. Compensating latch spring for door thickness. Knob opens both to the right and left. Knobs diameters: 50 - 60 - 70 mm
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets
271
Industrial Handles CT.476
M.843
Swing knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Brass insert with blind or through tapped hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type S-p-INOX). Sizes: 20 - 25 - 30 - 40 mm
Handles. Material: polyamide based technopolymer with glossy finish. Brass inserts with tapped blind hole. Available in six standard colours. Fitting centre distances: 117 - 179 mm
BT.
M.843 CLEAN
Fluted grip knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with blind or tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type p). Diameters: 16 - 20 - 25 - 32 - 40 - 50 mm
Handles. Material: polyamide based technopolymer, in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole. Fitting centre distances: 117 - 179 mm
B.193
M.643
Knurled grip knobs. Black Duroplast with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel studs (type p), or brass insert with tapped blind hole or through hole (type FP) Diameters: 15 - 18 - 20 - 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 - 50 mm
Handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, matte finish. Brass die-cast zinc alloy or brass inserts with tapped blind hole.
M.643 HT Suitable for working temperature up to 200°C. Fitting centre distances: 86 - 117 - 120 - 130 - 150 - 179 - 300 mm
B.259-CLEAN
M.443 CH
Knurled knobs. Material painted Duroplast, in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole. Diameters: 20 - 25 - 30 mm
Handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, RAL colours: black, orange, red, grey. Fitting by means of cylindrical head screws.
M.443 AE-V0 Material: special black technopolymer certified self-extinguish, Fitting by means of cylindrical head screws. Fitting centre distances: 93.5 - 117 - 132 - 179 - 235 mm
MBT-SOFT
GR.
Fluted grip knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, rim covered with soft touch elastomer. Zinc-plated threaded steel stud (type p) or brass insert with tapped blind hole. Diameters: 45 - 55 mm
Bent tubular handle. Tube and lateral caps in AISI 304 fine grounded stainless steel. Diameter 30x1.5 mm Lateral handle shanks in aluminium with black epoxy resin coating. Back mounting by means of two threaded blind holes. Fitting centre distances: 500 - 600 mm
IZP.
M.1043
Knurled grip knobs with or without triangular index or graduation. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Laser precision engraved triangular index or graduation with standard 0 - 9 numbering (20 marks) or special numbering on request. Diameters: 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 mm
Tubular handles. Material: aluminium tube Ă&#x2DC; 30 mm with a polyurethane coat on an epoxy base, special reinforced technopolymer handle shanks. Fitting by means of cylindrical socket head screws. Fitting centre distances: 300 - 350 - 400 - 500 - 600 - 700 mm
IZN.380
M.1066-CLEAN Aluminium tube with high resistance epoxy resin based coating. White colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. Handle shanks and side caps in glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, matte finish. Mounting by means of zinc-plated steel special screws and brass nuts. Fitting centre distances: 200 - 250 - 300 - 400 - 500 - 600 mm
Knurled grip knobs with boss cap. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Model IZN.380+K with pointer flange. Model IZN.380+FGS with calibrated flange. Diameters: 32 - 36 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 56 - 63 - 80 mm
F.N F.K F.GS
PL. PS. S.N
Flanges for IZN. knurled grip knobs. Material: matte anodised aluminium. Executions: plain (type N), with black index (type K), with marks and numbers standard from 0 to 9 (type GS). Diameters: 32 - 36 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 56 - 63 mm
Plain spherical knobs. Material: Duroplast. Tapped blind hole or special technopolymer self-locking bushing, push-fit mounting, brass insert with tapped blind hole (type PL.B). Diameters: 20 - 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 60 mm
MBT+I
I.622 I.622 N
Diamond cut knurled knobs with side handle. Material: special high impact strenght technopolymer, black with matte finish. Brass insert with plain blind hole and socket set screw for fitting to shaft. Diameters: 40 - 50 - 60 mm
Handles. Material: high-impact strength technopolymer with glossy finish. Tapped blind hole (I.622) available in black standard colour or plain blind hole (I.622 N) in black or red similar to RAL 3000. Sizes: 25 - 30 - 40 - 55 mm
MR.
I.622 N-CLEAN
Adjustable handles. If necessary the lever can be disassembled. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 302 stainless steel return spring. Black oxide steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. Black oxide steel stud (type p). RAL colours: black, orange, grey. Sizes: 40 - 63 - 80 - 100 mm
Handles. Material: high impact strength technopolymer in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. Plain blind hole, push-fit mounting. Sizes: 25 - 30 - 40 - 55 mm
MRX. MRX. S-INOX Adjustable handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Technopolymer push button. AISI 302 stainless steel return spring. Brass or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole (type MRX.S-INOX). Zinc-plated steel stud (type MRX.p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type MRX.S-p-INOX). Sizes: 40 - 63 - 80 - 100 mm
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets
272
IEL.
SFV.
Push-fit fixed or revolving handles. Material: matte finish elastomer technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel shank (type IEL.+x). Transparent cap for self-adhesive labels with marks and symbols (type IEL.N-H). Size: 65 mm
Valve breather caps. Material: special polyamide based technopolymer, orange colour cover with “valve” Symbol. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Valve setting 0.010 bar or 0.100 bar. Threads: BSP 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1; metric (pitch 1.5) 16 - 18 - 20 - 22
I.168-SOFT
SFW.
Knurled handles. Black matte finish, thermoplastic elastomer technopolymer, coated with soft touch elastomer (Shore A hardness 90). Brass insert with plain hole. Complete with socket set screw for fitting to shaft. Size: 60 mm
Pressure filler breather caps. Material: special polyamide based technopolymer, orange colour cover with “valve” Symbol. Safety valve setting: 0.350 bar, suction valve setting: 0.030 bar. Air filter, filtration 40µ. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Bayonet mounting or BSP threads: 3/4 - 11/4
BL.366 BL.368 BL.668
FRF+C FRB+C
Lever arms. Matte chrome-plated steel arm with Duroplast black handle with glossy finish (BL.366 - BL. 368) or zinc-plated steel arm (BL.668) with black technopolymer handle with glossy finish. Dimensions: 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 -16 mm
Threaded or bayonet flanges with basket (filtration 30 mesh). Material: flange in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer or in zinc-plated steel. Flat cork MGS rubber impregnated gasket. Mounting by means of six zinc-plated steel self tapping screws. Threaded or bayonet type breather cap fitting.
I.601+x I.601+x-INOX
PLRF+C PLRB+C
Revolving handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel shank.
Threaded or bayonet style side mount flanges with basket (filtration 30 mesh). Material: mount in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Flange in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer or in zinc-plated steel. Flat cork MGS rubber impregnated gasket. Mounting by means of seven M6 screws and relative washers. Threaded or bayonet type breather cap fitting.
I.301+x Material: Duroplast. Sizes: 28 - 40 - 50 - 56 - 65 - 80 - 90 - 100 - 115 mm
I.621+x
HGFT.
Two-volume revolving handles. Material: special technopolymer, black with matte finish. Zinc-plated shank with hexagonal socket at threaded end. Sizes: 45 - 60 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm
Oil level indicators. Material: case in special black polyamide based technopolymer. Special transparent polyamide window. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Matte anodised aluminium contrast screen. Model HGFT.HT-PR: prismathyque window. Maximum working temperature: 140°C. Threads BSP: 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 2
IR.302 IR.407 IR.612
HFTX.
Fold-away handles. Material: Duroplast or technopolymer handle with sintered and oxidised or AISI 303 stainless steel base. Double-guided stud and coaxial bushes to make the handle pivoting freely during operations. Sizes: 56 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm
Oil level indicators. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Matte anodised aluminium contrast screen. Threads: BSP 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4; metric (pitch 1.5) 16 - 20 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 30 - 35 - 40
IR.620
HCFE/C
Two-volume fold-away handles. Material: special technopolymer, black colour with matte finish. Black oxide steel stud and sintered and oxidised steel flat base. Sizes: 45 - 60 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm
Dome-shaped level indicators. Material: special transparent technopolymer. NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Threads BSP: 1/2 - 3/4 - 1
IRS.802
HCX. HCX. INOX
Fold-away - "Fold-O-Matic" handles. Material: technopolymer handle with sintered and oxidised or AISI 303 stainless steel base. Black oxide or treated steel double guide stud. Fold-O-matic special return system: the handle returns automatically back to its retracted position as soon as the operator lets it go. Sizes: 65 - 80 - 90 mm
Vertical column level indicators, 180° readability. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel set screws and nuts with OR type NBR synthetic rubber packing rings. White laquered aluminium contrast screen. Incorporated thermometer (execution HCX/T). Execution HCX.INOX with bolts and nuts in AISI 303 stainless steel and OR type Viton® packing rings.
HCX. INOX-BW
Accessories For Hydraulic Systems
Column level indicators for boiling water.
HCZ. Vertical column level indicators with reduced width. Fitting centre distances: 76 - 127 - 254 mm
TCD. TSD. TN. Oil plugs plain (TN.) or with DIN graphic symbols “fill” (TCD.) or “drain” (TSD.). Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer in black (TCD. TN) or red (TSD.) with matte finish. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Flat phosphatised steel dipstick (type TCD+a). Threads BSP: 1/8 - 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 11/2
Viton® is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers.
HCX/E Electric vertical column level indicators, 180° readability. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel set screws and nuts with OR type NBR synthetic rubber packing rings. Black polyamide expanded technopolymer float. Black polyamide technopolymer watertight sensor bracket. White laquered aluminium contrast screen. Electric device to generate a signal when the oil level drops to a minimum. Fitting centre distance: 127 mm
T.440 Caps. Material: special technopolymer. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring Flat phosphatised steel dipstick (type T.440+a). Threads BSP: 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 11/2
Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets
273
Direct drive indicators
DD52R
new narrower design
ELESA original design
Narrow Digital position indicators direct drive • Use mounted on passing-through control spindles in any position, for giving actual reading of the positioning of a machine component. They are designed also for motor driven applications. • Lowered height of the case. Compact roller counter. Ergonomically designed digits for rapid reading. The readability of the counter is increased by the magnifying window. • Polyamide-based (PA) technopolymer case, ultrasonically welded to its support to prevent accidental tampering and dust penetration. Standard colour RAL 2004 orange and RAL 7035 grey. Glossy finish. Resistant to solvents, oils, grease and other chemical agents. • Five figure digital counter (4 black units and 1 red decimal or 3 black units and 2 red decimal places). An additional graduated scale next to the last digit offers further accuracy of reading. The display indicates the distance covered by the mechanism controlled by the spindle from the start position. The counter wheels are compact with ergonomically designed numbers for rapid reading. The magnifying window (lens effect) improves the readability. The snap connection with light interference between window and case prevent dust penetration. • Black oxide steel insert with standard Ø 20 mm H7 tolerance reamed hole, fitting to shaft by means of a grub screw with hexagon socket and cup end (according to UNI 5929-85). • Rear polyurethan gasket (standard accessory). • Location rear torque pin for positioning. • Weight 90 grams. 37
Accessories to be ordered separately: Steel reduction sleeves RB52 (AISI 303 stainless steel available on request and for sufficiently large quantities) technopolymer reduction sleeves RBT.52, front powdertight NBR synthetic rubber gasket DG.52 (code CE.87910).
6
Reduction Sleeve
Reduction Sleeve
Code
Description
d H7
Code
Description
d H9
CE.87940 CE.87950 CE.87955 CE.87960
RB52-12 RB52-14 RB52-15 RB52-16
12 14 15 16
CE.87940 CE.87950 CE.87955 CE.87960
RB52-12 RB52-14 RB52-15 RB52-16
12 14 15 16
INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
23
40
43.5
Installation instructions: • Drill a Ø 6 mm by 10 mm deep hole in the body of the machine with centre distance of 30 mm from the spindle, to fit the rear referencing pin. • Zero set the spindle. • Re-fit the zeroed roller counter onto the spindle and make sure the rear pin locates into the hole. • Tighten the socket head grub screw.
66.5
30
AN
D
S
Clockwise rotation to increase
Anti-clockwise rotation to increase
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
274
AR
FN
FR
Table of the possible combinations Pitch
Type
0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.58 1.607 1.75 2.0 2.5 2.54 3.0 3.15 3.175 3.5 4.0 5.0 5.08 5.294 6.0 6.25 6.35 7.5 8.0 9.0 10.0 10.5 12.0 13.0 15.0 20.0
Reading Position
0000.5 AN inclined upper
AR inclined lower
DD52
FN front upper
FR front lower
Speed Direction of Colour (rpm) rotation
Reading after one revolution
0001.0 0001.2(5) 0001.5 0001.5(8) 0001.6(07) 0001.7(5) 0002.0 0002.5 0002.5(4) 0003.0 0003.1(5) 0003.1(75) 0003.5 0004.0 0005.0 0005.0(8) 0005.2(94) 0006.0 0006.2(5) 0006.3(5) 0007.5 0008.0 0009.0 0010.0 0010.5 0012.0 0013.0 0015.0 0020.0
000.50 000.05 001.00 000.10 000.12(5) 000.15 000.15(8) 000.16(07) 000.17(5) 000.20 000.25 000.25(4) 000.30 000.31(5) 000.31(75) 000.35 000.40 000.50 000.50(8) 000.52(94) 000.60 000.62(5) 000.63(5) 000.75 000.80 000.90 001.00 001.05 001.20 001.30 001.50 0020.0
00050 00005 00100 00010 00012(5) 00015 00015(8) 00016(07) 00017(5) 00020 00025 00025(4) 00030 00031(5) 00031(75) 00035 00040 00050 00050(8) 00052(94) 00060 00062(5) 00063(5) 00075 00080 00090 00100 00105 00120 00130 00150 00200
AR orange
D clockwise
GR grey
S anti-clockwise NR anthracite
500 1500 250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1420 1250 1000 980 830 790 780 710 625 500 490 470 415 400 390 330 315 270 250 235 200 190 160 125
Inches reading
Speed (rpm)
00.019(6875) 00.019(6875) 00.039(375) 00.039(375)
1270 1270 630 630
00.078(75)
310
00.118(125)
210
000.15(75) 000.19(6875)
1500 1270
000.39(375)
630
The maximum rotational speed of the indicator corresponds to a maximum rotational speed of 25000 digits per minute of the right hand side wheel. Rotational speed tests have been performed in our laboratory under standard operating conditions. The internal mechanism counts also the figures between brackets, even if they do not appear on the display.
CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF STANDARD COMBINATIONS DD52R - AN Code
DD52R - AR
DD52R - FN
Code
Code
DD52R - FR Code
Grey
Orange
Description
Grey
Orange
Description
Grey
Orange
Description
Grey
Orange
Description
CE.82101 CE.82102 CE.82131 CE.82132 CE.82151 CE.82152 CE.82181 CE.82182 CE.82197 CE.82198 CE.82211 CE.82212 CE.82231 CE.82232 CE.82251 CE.82252 CE.82263 CE.82264 CE.82291 CE.82292
CE.82103 CE.82104 CE.82133 CE.82134 CE.82153 CE.82154 CE.82183 CE.82184 CE.82199 CE.82200 CE.82213 CE.82214 CE.82233 CE.82234 CE.82253 CE.82254 CE.82265 CE.82266 CE.82293 CE.82294
DD52R-AN-0005.0-D DD52R-AN-0005.0-S DD52R-AN-001.00-D DD52R-AN-001.00-S DD52R-AN-0001.0-D DD52R-AN-0001.0-S DD52R-AN-0002.0-D DD52R-AN-0002.0-S DD52R-AN-0002.5-D DD52R-AN-0002.5-S DD52R-AN-0003.0-D DD52R-AN-0003.0-S DD52R-AN-0004.0-D DD52R-AN-0004.0-S DD52R-AN-0005.0-D DD52R-AN-0005.0-S DD52R-AN-0006.0-D DD52R-AN-0006.0-S DD52R-AN-0010.0-D DD52R-AN-0010.0-S
CE.82601 CE.82602 CE.82631 CE.82632 CE.82651 CE.82652 CE.82681 CE.82682 CE.82697 CE.82698 CE.82711 CE.82712 CE.82731 CE.82732 CE.82751 CE.82752 CE.82763 CE.82764 CE.82791 CE.82792
CE.82603 CE.82604 CE.82633 CE.82634 CE.82653 CE.82654 CE.82683 CE.82684 CE.82699 CE.82700 CE.82713 CE.82714 CE.82733 CE.82734 CE.82753 CE.82754 CE.82765 CE.82766 CE.82793 CE.82794
DD52R-AR-000.50-D DD52R-AR-000.50-S DD52R-AR-001.00-D DD52R-AR-001.00-S DD52R-AR-0001.0-D DD52R-AR-0001.0-S DD52R-AR-0002.0-D DD52R-AR-0002.0-S DD52R-AR-0002.5-D DD52R-AR-0002.5-S DD52R-AR-0003.0-D DD52R-AR-0003.0-S DD52R-AR-0004.0-D DD52R-AR-0004.0-S DD52R-AR-0005.0-D DD52R-AR-0005.0-S DD52R-AR-0006.0-D DD52R-AR-0006.0-S DD52R-AR-0010.0-D DD52R-AR-0010.0-S
CE.83101 CE.83102 CE.83131 CE.83132 CE.83151 CE.83152 CE.83181 CE.83182 CE.83197 CE.83198 CE.83211 CE.83212 CE.83231 CE.83232 CE.83251 CE.83252 CE.83263 CE.83264 CE.83291 CE.83292
CE.83103 CE.83104 CE.83133 CE.83134 CE.83153 CE.83154 CE.83183 CE.83184 CE.83199 CE.83200 CE.83213 CE.83214 CE.83233 CE.83234 CE.83253 CE.83254 CE.83265 CE.83266 CE.83293 CE.83294
DD52R-FN-000.50-D DD52R-FN-000.50-S DD52R-FN-001.00-D DD52R-FN-001.00-S DD52R-FN-0001.0-D DD52R-FN-0001.0-S DD52R-FN-0002.0-D DD52R-FN-0002.0-S DD52R-FN-0002.5-D DD52R-FN-0002.5-S DD52R-FN-0003.0-D DD52R-FN-0003.0-S DD52R-FN-0004.0-D DD52R-FN-0004.0-S DD52R-FN-0005.0-D DD52R-FN-0005.0-S DD52R-FN-0006.0-D DD52R-FN-0006.0-S DD52R-FN-0010.0-D DD52R-FN-0010.0-S
CE.83601 CE.83602 CE.83631 CE.83632 CE.83651 CE.83652 CE.83681 CE.83682 CE.83697 CE.83698 CE.83711 CE.83712 CE.83731 CE.83732 CE.83751 CE.83752 CE.83763 CE.83764 CE.83791 CE.83792
CE.83603 CE.83604 CE.83633 CE.83634 CE.83653 CE.83654 CE.83683 CE.83684 CE.83699 CE.83700 CE.83713 CE.83714 CE.83733 CE.83734 CE.83753 CE.83754 CE.83765 CE.83766 CE.83793 CE.83794
DD52R-FR-000.50-D DD52R-FR-000.50-S DD52R-FR-001.00-D DD52R-FR-001.00-S DD52R-FR-0001.0-D DD52R-FR-0001.0-S DD52R-FR-0002.0-D DD52R-FR-0002.0-S DD52R-FR-0002.5-D DD52R-FR-0002.5-S DD52R-FR-0003.0-D DD52R-FR-0003.0-S DD52R-FR-0004.0-D DD52R-FR-0004.0-S DD52R-FR-0005.0-D DD52R-FR-0005.0-S DD52R-FR-0006.0-D DD52R-FR-0006.0-S DD52R-FR-0010.0-D DD52R-FR-0010.0-S
Complete the description of the standard item needed specifying one of the colours reported in the table: GR (Grey) or AR (Orange).
Special options on request Special readings after one revolution (for use with spindles having their pitch in mm or inches), stainless steel insert, special reduction sleeves.
275
Rotary Indicators GA01 GA02 GA05 Gravity controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Zinc-plated mild steel case and polished AISI 303 stainless steel bezel. Clear glass window, matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy.
GA11 GA12 Gravity controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations.
MBT.50/GA11 MBT.70/GA12 Gravity controlled analogue indicators integral with hand knobs, for use on control spindles, with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent, polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529 . The outside rim has been designed with a truncated diamond knurl that provides a comfortable grip and aids adjustment of the knob during rotation.
GW12 Gravity controlled digital-analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Five figures digital counter with 1 decimal place on red wheel.
DD52R Direct drive digital position indicators to be mounted on passing through control spindles in any position. Special technopolymer case ultrasonically welded to its support. Standard colours grey and orange. Four or five figures digital counter with 1 or 2 decimal places on red wheel. The magnifying window (lens effect) improves the readability. Digit height 6 mm. Black oxide steel or stainless steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Rotational speed: the indicator is designed also for use in motor driven applications.
PA01 PA02 PA05 Positive drive controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles in any position. Zinc-plated mild steel case and polished AISI 303 stainless steel bezel. Clear glass window, matte silver anodized aluminium dial with black graduations.
Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GA01 Ø = 50 mm: 12/1 - 20/1 GA02 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 GA05 Ø = 113 mm: 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 - 60/1 100/1 (other ratios on request).
Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GA11 Ø = 50 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 40/1 GA12 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 (other ratios on request). Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Black oxide steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: MBT.50/GA11 Ø = 51 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 40/1 MBT.70/GA12 Ø = 70 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 36/1 (other ratios on request). Digit height 6 mm. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Standard readings after one revolution of the indicator with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GW12 Ø = 68 mm: 0000.2 - 0000.5 - 0001.0 - 0002.0 - 0002.5 0004.0 - 0005.0 (other readings on request). Standard readings after one revolution of the indicator with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: DD51 H = 47 mm: 00.50 - 01.00 - 001.0 - 001.2/5 - 001.5 002.0 - 002.5 - 003.0 - 004.0 - 005.0 - 006.0 - 008.0 - 010.0 DD52 H = 66 mm: 000.50 - 001.00 - 0001.0 - 0002.0 - 0002.5 0003.0 - 0004.0 0005.0 - 0006.0 - 0010.0 (other readings on request). Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: PA01 Ø = 50 mm: 12/1-20/1, PA02 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 PA05 Ø = 113 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 - 60/1 - 100/1 (other ratios on request).
PA11 PA12 Positive drive controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles in any Position. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP65 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations.
Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: PA11 Ø = 50 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 30/1 PA12 Ø = 68 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 30/1 (other ratios on request).
MBT. Diamond cut knurled knobs for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: special black technopolymer with outside rim having a truncated diamond knurl that provides a comfortable grip and aids adjustment of the knob during rotation. Black oxide steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole and socket head grub screw with cup end.
Aluminium black gloss epoxy finish hand knob model VAK. also available. Technopolymer knurled grip hand knob model IZN. also available. Diameters: 60 - 80 mm
VHT. VHT. INOX Lobe hand knobs for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: special black technopolymer. The special type of design of the rim (lobes, blended radius and well proportioned rim height) allows the operator to have a firm grip and apply a high torque.
VDC. VDC+I Solid handwheels for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: black reinforced Duroplast, rim with rear finger grips (diameters from 125 to 200 mm). Duroplast revolving handle for rapid movements (type VDC+I). Black oxide steel hub, not drilled (G type), with standard H7 tolerance blind hole (P type).
Black oxide steel or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Aluminium black gloss epoxy finish hand knob model VAL. also available. Diameters: 85 - 110 mm
Diameters: type G and type P: Ø = 80 - 100 mm type G: Ø = 125 - 140 - 160 - 180 - 200 mm Aluminium black matte epoxy finish handwheel model VAD. also available. type G with screw mounted indicator housing: Ø = 225 - 250 - 300 - 350 mm
VRTP. VRTP+I Two-spoke handwheels for use with gravity indicators. Material: special black technopolymer with indicator housing installed. Technopolymer revolving handle for rapid movements (type VRTP+I).
276
Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Black Duroplast three-spoke handwheel model VR., VR+I also available. Diameters: 160 - 200 - 250 mm Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets
Titanium Round Bar Titanium CP Grade 2 (ASTM B 348) - Titanium commerical pure UNS R 50400, WS 3.7035
Typical Chemical Analysis Grade
C
O
N
Fe
max
max
max
max
0.08
0.25
0.03
0.3
Al
U
Pd
Mo
Ni
H Max
Ti
0.15
Balance
a
Gr2
Typical Mechanical Properties Grade
Tensile
Yield
% Elongation
KSI Min
KSI Min/Max
Min
50
40/56
20
a
Gr2
Part Number selection table - Standard lengths available from stock OD mm
250mm
Part Number x OD x Length (mm) 500mm 750mm 1000mm 1500mm
2000mm
5 6 8
Ti/5/250 Ti/6/250 Ti/8/250
Ti/5/500 Ti/6/500 Ti/8/500
Ti/5/750 Ti/6/750 Ti/8/750
Ti/5/1000 Ti/6/1000 Ti/8/1000
Ti/5/1500 Ti/6/1500 Ti/8/1500
Ti/5/2000 Ti/6/2000 Ti/8/2000
10 12 15
Ti/10/250 Ti/12/250 Ti/15/250
Ti/10/500 Ti/12/500 Ti/15/500
Ti/10/750 Ti/12/750 Ti/15/750
Ti/10/1000 Ti/12/1000 Ti/15/1000
Ti/10/1500 Ti/12/1500 Ti/15/1500
Ti/10/2000 Ti/12/2000 Ti/15/2000
18 20 25
Ti/18/250 Ti/20/250 Ti/25/250
Ti/18/500 Ti/20/500 Ti/25/500
Ti/18/750 Ti/20/750 Ti/25/750
Ti/18/1000 Ti/20/1000 Ti/25/1000
Ti/18/1500 Ti/20/1500 Ti/25/1500
Ti/18/2000 Ti/20/2000 Ti/25/2000
1/4” ½” 3/4”
Ti/1/4”/250 Ti/½”/250 Ti/3/4”/250
Ti/1/4”/500 Ti/½”/500 Ti/3/4”/500
Ti/1/4”/750 Ti/½”/750 Ti/3/4”/750
Ti/1/4”/1000 Ti/½”/1000 Ti/3/4”/1000
Ti/1/4”/1500 Ti/½”/1500 Ti/3/4”/1500
Ti/1/4”/2000 Ti/½”/2000 Ti/3/4”/2000
1” 1 ½”
Ti/1”/250 Ti/1½”/250
Ti/1”/500 Ti/1½”/500
Ti/1”/750 Ti/1½”/750
Ti/1”/1000 Ti/1½”/1000
Ti/1”/1500 Ti/1½”/1500
Ti/1”/2000 Ti/1½”/2000
2” 2 ½”
Ti/2”/250 Ti/2½”/250
Ti/2”/500 Ti/2½”/500
Ti/2”/750 Ti2½”/750
Ti/2”/1000 Ti/2½”/1000
Ti/2”/1500 Ti/2½”/1500
Ti/2”/2000 Ti/2½”/2000
a
a
a
a
a
a
Other Titanium Products Available: Wire/Rod type Platinized Titanium Anode/Electrode - from 1mm sizes Mesh type Platinized Titanium Anode/Electrode - from 25mm x 25mm square Sheet/Plate Platinized Titanium Anode/Ectrocde - from 25mm x 25mm square Please request further information on these from TEA Transmissions.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
277
Linear Slide Systems - overview Precision Round Shaft
Page
Steel - hardened, ground & chromium plated Stainless steel - hardened & ground Metric/Inch Bearing Blocks & Shaft Support
280-285
Ball Screws & Nuts Thread sizes: 14 x 4 to 80 x 10 Single or Double Nuts - with or without flange High lead type Miniature type Low noise type Internal or external ball types Plus support units for Ball Screw
286-303
Hiwin HG & EG Series Linear Guideways
304-314
Rail widths from 15 to 65mm Normal to ultra high precision Blocks with or without flange
DualVee Motion Technology
315-322
Single edge track - 4 sizes - to mtr lengths 6 sizes of guidewheel Special washdown guidewheel in 2 sizes
UtiliTrak速 Linear Guides Steel, aluminium or stainless steel to 3.6 mtrs
323
MinVee速 Miniature linear guideway system Using DualVee size 0 wheels
324
LoPro Driven Systems Belt actuated system Chain actuated system Lead Screw actuated system Ball screw actuated system
325-328
LoPro Un-driven System Non actuated system - supplied ready to install 4 sizes available
329
278
Linear Slide Systems - overview HepcoMotion® GV3 Linear Guidance and Transmission System High accuracy and fine finish of components - allows constant driving force without vibration Friction free motion allows smaller - lower cost motors to be used Optimised bearing and slide interface design - very high speeds with low wear Low stick friction and low inertia of bearing rotation - fast acceleration for shortest stroke High degree of slide parallelism and minimum bearing clearance - virtually zero play Important dimensions accurately controlled Specially designed bearing and slide geometry - quiet system All steel slideway & Rugged construction Compliant bearing design for tolerance of misalignment Reliable performance confirmed by testing Wide choice of slides, carriages, bearings, gearboxes & motors Single & double edge spacer slides Single & double edge flat slides Standard carriages Belt driven carriages Rack driven carriages Flat Track Narrow Rollers Wide Rollers Slimline Rollers
Page
330-360
HepcoMotion® PRT Ring Slide & Track System
361-380
HepcoMotion® Heavy Duty Slide System
381-385
HepcoMotion® SL2 Stainless Steel Slide System
386-394
HepcoMotion® PDU2 Aluminium Profile Belt Driven System
395
HepcoMotion® DLS Driven Linear System with AC geared motors & worm gearboxes
396
HepcoMotion® HPS Powerslide-2
397
HepcoMotion® PSD80 Screw Driven Linear Unit
398
HepcoMotion® PSD120 Profile Screw Driven Linear Unit
399
HepcoMotion® SBD Sealed Belt Driven unit standard and clean room configurations
400
Linear Slide System Type AD with 120 degree grooved guide wheels
401-403
Mechanical Linear Guides Type AK
404-405
279
Precision Round Shaft
Ra = Average roughness value It identifies a mean arithmetic value of all distances of the roughness diagram points, referred to a mean line and a given length. Tp = Supporting surface The ratio between the actual contact area of the surface examined and a perfectly smooth surface, and the ideal contact area that can be reached if the two surfaces were perfectly smooth.
Series W - Hardened & Ground Material: CK60 (1.1221) Surface Hardness: 62±2 HRc Tensile Strength: 550-750 N/mm2 Shaft Diam.*
Weight per mtr.
Standard Hardening Standard Length** Depth Tolerance
d Part No.
mm
kg.
mm
Rht (max) DIN6773
ISO h6
mm
µm
Special Tolerances
Roundness Parallelism Straightness (circular) (cylindric)
ISO j6
ISO g6
T1
T2
T3
µm
µm
µm
µm
µm
W 6
6
0.22
3000
0.8
0 -8
+6 -2
-4 -12
4
6
300
W 8
8
0.39
3000
1.0
0 -9
+7 -2
-5 -14
4
6
300
W10
10
0.61
3000
1.0
0 -9
+7 -2
-5 -14
4
6
300
W12
12
0.89
3000
1.3
0 -11
+8 -3
-6 -17
5
8
200
W15
15
1.37
3000
1.3
0 -11
+8 -3
-6 -17
5
8
200
W16
16
1.57
3000
1.6
0 -11
+8 -3
-6 -17
5
8
200
W20
20
2.45
3000
1.6
0 -13
+9 -4
-7 -20
6
9
100
W25
25
3.83
3000
1.8
0 -13
+9 -4
-7 -20
6
9
100
W30
30
5.51
3000
2.0
0 -13
+9 -4
-7 -20
6
9
100
W40
40
9.80
3000
2.5
0 -16
+11 -5
-9 -25
7
11
100
W50
50
15.3
3000
3.0
0 -16
+11 -5
-9 -25
7
11
100
* Other sizes available on request **
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
280
Precision Round Shaft Series WV - Hardened, Ground and Chromium Plated Material: CK60(1.1221) CF53(1.1213) Surface Hardness: 800-1100 HV Chrome Hardening Depth Standard Special Roundness Parallelism Straightness Rht (max) Tolerance Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 ISO h7 ISO h6 T1 T2 T3
Shaft Diam.* d
Weight per mtr.
Standard Length**
Part No.
mm
kg.
mm
mm
µm
µm
µm
µm
µm
WV12 WV16 WV20 WV25 WV30
12 16 20 25 30
0.89 1.58 2.47 3.85 5.55
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
1.3 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.0
0 -18 0 -18 0 -21 0 -21 0 -21
0 -11 0 -11 0 -13 0 -13 0 -13
8 8 9 9 9
12 12 12 12 12
200 200 100 100 100
Series WRB - Hardened and Ground Stainless Steel Material: X46Cr13 (1.4034) Tensile Strength: 650-800N/mm2 Surface hardness: 55±2 HRC Hardening Standard Depth Standard Roundness Parallelism Straightness Length** DIN50190 Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 ISO h6 T1 T2 T3
Diam.* d
Weight per mtr.
Part No.
mm
kg.
mm
mm
µm
µm
µm
µm
WRB 8 WRB 10 WRB 12 WRB 16 WRB 20 WRB 25 WRB 30
8 10 12 16 20 25 30
0.40 0.62 0.89 1.58 2.47 3.85 5.55
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.4
0 -9 0 -9 0 -11 0 -11 0 -13 0 -13 0 -13
4 4 5 5 6 6 6
6 6 8 8 9 9 9
300 300 200 200 100 100 100
Series WZ - Hardened and Ground Inch dimensions Material: CK60(1.1221) CF53(1.1213) Surface Hardness: 62±2 HRC Shaft Diam.*
Part No. WZ 9 WZ12 WZ15 WZ19 WZ25 WZ31 WZ50
mm
inch
9.525 3/8” 12.700 1/2” 15.875 5/8” 19.050 3/4” 25.400 1” 31.750 1 1/4" 50.800 2”
Hardening Depth Tolerance Standard Roundness Parallelism Straightness Rht (max) Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 Class ISO h6 T1 T2 T3
Weight Per mtr.
Standard Length**
kg.
mm
mm
0.56 0.99 1.55 2.24 3.97 6.22 15.91
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
1.0 1.3 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 3.0
"L" -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -15 -33
* Other sizes available on request **
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
281
µm
µm
µm
µm
0 -9 0 -12 0 -12 0 -13 0 -13 0 -16 0 -19
4 5 5 6 6 7 7
6 8 8 9 9 11 11
300 200 200 200 100 100 100
Bearing Block Type SC - Aluminium alloy housing - Standard ball bushing - Sealed
W Datum plane
B1
4-S 1x
l
L
B
C
A
T h H1 H THK marking side
4-S2 W1
Dimensions in mm Shaft size Height Width Length
Mounting hole position
Basic load rating
±0.02 ±0.02
TA P
Part No. ø
H
W
L
SC 12UU
12
29
42
36
SC 16UU
16
38.5
50
SC 20UU
20
42
SC 25UU
25
SC 30UU
B
B1
C
30.5
5.75
26
44
36
7
54
50
40
51.5
76
67
30
59.5
78
SC 40UU
40
78
SC 50UU
50
102
Unit Weight
c N
co N
g
8
412
598
102
46
9
775
1180
189
36
52
11
863
1370
237
38
41
68
12
980
1570
555
30
39
49
72
15
1570
2750
685
M8
40
51
62
96
20
2160
4020
1600
M8
52
61
80
116
25
3820
7940
3350
S2
h
A
H1
W1
M5x12
M4
15
21
25
39
34
M5x12
M4
19
25
35
7
40
M6x12
M5
21
27
54
11
50
M8x18
M6
26
72
58
10
58
M8x18
M6
102
90
80
11
60
M10x25
122
110
100
11
80
M10x25
T
1N=0.102kgf
Bearing Block Type SC-V - Compact aluminium housing - 2 mounting holes - Standard ball bushing - Sealed
W Datum plane
B1
L M
B A
M/2
2–S 1x l M/2
T h H1 H
2–S 2
W1
Dimensions in mm
Part No.
Shaft size Height Width Length
Mounting hole position
Basic load rating
±0.02 ±0.02
TA P
Unit Weight
S2
h
A
H1
W1
T
c N
co N
g
M5x10
M4
15
22
26
41
8
411
598
74
23.5
M5x12
M4
19
25
35
46
9
774
1176
132
7
27.4
M6x12
M5
21
27
36
52
11
862
1372
170
54
11
37.4
M8x10
M6
26
38
41
68
12
990
1568
405
64
58
10
40.9
M8x18
M6
30
39
49
72
15
1568
2794
495
102
80
80
11
56.4 M10x25
M8
40
51
62
96
20
2156
4019
1220
122
100
100
11
68.9 M10x25
M8
52
61
80
116
25
3823
7941
2300
ø
H
W
L
B
B1
M
SC 12VUU
12
30
44
30
33
5.5
20.5
SC 16VUU
16
38.5
50
37
36
7
SC 20VUU
20
42
54
42
40
SC 25VUU
25
51.5
76
59
SC 30VUU
30
59.5
78
SC 40VUU
40
78
SC 50VUU
50
102
1N=0.102kgf
282
Bearing Block Type SC-TK - Aluminium alloy housing - Super ball bushing - Self-aligning capability - Sealed
Also available with: Stainless steel or ceramic bearings or Tandem version (2 bearings per housing) W
Datum plane
B1
4-S1x
l L
B
C
A
T h H1 H
4-S2 W1
Dimensions in mm Shaft size Height Width Length
Mounting hole position
TA P S1x
Basic Unit load rating Weight
±0.02 ±0.02
Part No. ø
H
W
L
B
B1
C
SC 12TKUU
12
30
44
39
33
5.5
26
SC 16TKUU
16
38.5
50
44
36
7
SC 20TKUU
20
42
54
53
40
SC 25TKUU
25
51.5
76
67
SC 30TKUU
30
59.5
78
SC 40TKUU
40
78
SC 50TKUU
50
102
l
c N
co N
g
8
1020
1290
100
46
9
1250
1550
160
52
11
2090
2630
230
41
68
12
3780
4720
460
39
49
72
15
5470
6810
630
40
51
62
96
20
6590
8230 1270
52
61
80
116
25
8600
7100 2450
S2
h
A
H1
W1
M 5x10
M4
15
22
26
41
34
M 5x12
M4
19
25
35
7
40
M 6x12
M5
21
27
36
54
11
50
M 8x18
M6
26
38
76
58
10
58
M 8x18
M6
30
102
90
80
11
60
M10x25
M8
122
110
100
11
80
M10x25
M8
T
1N=0.102kgf
Bearing Block Set Type SC-TKOPN - Aluminium alloy housing - Super ball bushing - Self-aligning capability - Sealed
Also available with: Stainless steel or ceramic bearings or Tandem version (2 bearings per housing)
W Datum plane
B1
4-S 1x
l
L
B
C
A
T h H1 H
h1 4-S 2
60° W1
Dimensions in mm
Part No.
Shaft size Height Width Length
Mounting hole position
Basic Unit load rating Weight
±0.02 ±0.05
TA P
c N
co N
8
816
1032
90
9
1000
1240
140
52
11
1672
2104
200
41
68
12
3024
3776
420
49
72
15
4376
4126
580
51
62
96
20
5232
6554
1210
61
80
116
25
8940
7380
2380
S1x l
S2
h
A
H1
W1
7
M5x10
M4
15
22
26
41
9
M5x12
M4
19
25
35
46
40
9
M6x12
M5
21
27
36
11
50
12
M6x18
M6
26
38
10
58
14
M8x18
M6
30
39
80
11
60
20
M10x25
M8
40
100
11
80
23
M10x25
M8
52
ø
H
W
L
B
B1
C
h1
SC 12TKUUOPN
12
28
44
39
33
5.5
26
SC 16TKUUOPN
16
35
50
44
36
7
34
SC 20TKUUOPN
20
39
54
53
40
7
SC 25TKUUOPN
25
47
76
67
54
SC 30TKUUOPN
30
55
78
76
58
SC 40TKUUOPN
40
74
102
90
SC 50TKUUOPN
50
98
122
110
T
g
1N=0.102kgf
283
Standard Ball Bushings
Also available: Stainless steel version L
- All steel outer - Resin retainer - Sealed both ends - Standard ball bushing dimensions - Available as open or closed series
B W
W
dr D
D1
Dimensions in mm dr ø
D
L
KB 5GUU
5
4
12
22
KB 8GUU
8
4
16
25
KB 12GUU
12
4
22
32
KB 16GUU
16
4
26
36
KB 20GUU
20
5
32
45
KB 25GUU
25
6
40
58
KB 30GUU
30
6
47
68
KB 40GUU
40
6
62
80
KB 60GUU
60
6
90
125
*KB 80UU
80
6
120
165
Part No.
Basic Unit load rating Weight
Tolerance
No. of ball circuits
tol
B
W
D1
c N
co N
g
1.1
11.5
206
265
11
1.1
15.2
265
402
22
1.3
21
510
784
45
1.3
24.9
578
892
60
1.6
30.3
862
1370
102
1.85
37.5
980
1570
235
1.85
44.5
1570
2740
360
2.15
59
2160
4020
770
3.15
86.5
4700
9800 2220
4.15
116
7350 16000 5140
tol
0 -0.12 14.5 0 16.5 -0.2 0 22.9 -0.2 0 24.9 -0.2 0 31.5 -0.2 0 44.1 -0.2 0 52.1 -0.3 0 60.6 -0.3 0 101.7 -0.4 0 -0.4 133.7
0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 0 -0.4 0 -0.4
1N=0.102kgf
*KB80UU has a steel retainer
Super Ball Bushings - Higher load capacities - Longer travel life - Self-aligning capabilities
Also available: Stainless steel version
- Integral floating seals - Standard ball bushing dimensions - Available as open or closed series Recommended Tolerance for Shaft O.D. and Housing Bore.
Housing bore
Shaft diameter dr D D1
Part No.
dr mm
Tol.(h6) µm
D mm
Tol.(h7) µm
TK12
12
0
22
+21
TK16
16
-11
26
0
TK20
20
0
32
+25
TK25
25
-13
40
0
TK30
30
TK40
40
1°
W
Self-aligning 1° in all directions
W B L L
47 0/-16
+30/0
62
Dimensions in mm dr ø
D
L
TK 12UU
12
5
22
32 ±0.2
TK 16UU
16
5
26
36 ±0.2
TK 20UU
20
6
32
45 ±0.2
TK 25UU
25
6
40
58 ±0.2
TK 30UU
30
6
47
68 ±0.2
TK 40UU
40
6
62
80 ±0.2
Part No.
Basic Unit load rating Weight
Tolerance
No. of ball circuits
284
tol
B
tol
0 22.9 -0.2 0 24.9 -0.2 0 31.5 -0.2 0 44.1 -0.2 0 52.1 -0.2 0 60.6 -0.2
W
D1
c N
co N
g
1.3
21
1020
1290
21
1.3
24.9
1250
1550
43
1.6
30.3
2090
2630
58
1.85
37.5
3780
4720
123
1.85
44.5
5470
6810
216
2.15
59
6590
8230
333
Shaft Support Blocks Type SK
Dimensions in mm Shaft size Part No. d
H
W
L
B
S
Unit
Mounting ±0.02 ±0.05 bolt h A
b
I
g
Tightening Weight bolt g
SK10
10
32.8
42
14
32
5.5
M5
20
21
5
18
6
M4
24
SK12
12
37.5
42
14
32
5.5
M5
23
21
5
20
6
M4
30
SK16
16
44
48
16
38
5.5
M5
27
24
5
25
8
M4
40
SK20
20
51
60
20
45
6.6
M6
31
30
7.5
30
10
M5
70
SK25
25
60
70
24
56
6.6
M6
35
35
7
38
12
M6
130
SK30
30
70
84
28
64
9
M8
42
42
10
44
12
M6
180
SK40
40
96
114
36
90
11
M10
60
57
12
60
15
M8
420
SK50
50
120
126
40
100
14
M12
70
63
13
74
18
M12
750
Flanged Shaft Support Blocks W
Type SHF - Aluminium Alloy
B
Dimensions in mm Unit S Adjusting Weight (bolt size) bolt size g
Shaft diameter
W
L
T
F
G
B
SHF10
10
43
10
5
24
20
32
5.5 (M5)
M4
13
SHF12
12
47
13
7
28
25
36
5.5 (M5)
M4
20
SHF13
13
47
13
7
28
25
36
5.5 (M5)
M4
20
SHF16
16
50
16
8
31
28
40
5.5 (M5)
M4
27
SHF20
20
60
20
8
37
34
48
7 (M6)
M5
40
SHF25
25
70
25
10
42
40
56
7 (M6)
M5
60
SHF30
30
80
30
12
50
46
64
9 (M8)
M6
110
SHF35*
35
92
35
14
58
50
72
12 (M10)
M8
380
SHF40*
40
102
40
16
67
56
80
12 (M10)
M10
510
SHF50*
50
122
50
19
83
70
96
14 (M12)
M12
890
SHF60* * Cast iron
60
140
60
23
95
82
112
14 (M12)
M12
1500
Part No.
2-S
L T
G
F
NB mark
Shaft Support Rails - High rigidity - Low overall height - Light weight aluminium alloy Shaft support Rails are designed to support the shafts on which ball bushings run to prevent them from bending under load. Shaft Support Rails are delivered in ready sections of high dimensional accuracy and are designed to give high rigidity. Their low overall height allows the construction of extra compact linear motion assemblies.
T/2
T
T/2 Length
Dimensions in mm Part No.
d M
Hole spacing
±0.01 d
H
A
V
M
O1
U1
N
E
t
O2
U2
T1
T2
1050-512-00
12
22
40
5
5.8
M 4x20
4
8
29
4.5 M 4x12
4
75
120
1050-516-00
16
26
45
5
7
M 5x20
5
9
33
7.5 M 5x16
5
100
150
1050-520-00
20
32
52
6
8.3
M 6x25
6
11
37
8
M 6x16
6
100
150
1050-525-00
25
36
57
6
10.8
M 8x30
8
15
42
7.5 M 6x16
6
120
200
1050-530-00
30
42
69
7
11
M10x35
10
17
51
9.5 M 8x25
8
150
200
1050-540-00
40
50
73
8
15
M10x40
10
19
55
9.5 M 8x25
8
200
300
1050-550-00
50
60
84
9
19
M12x45
12
21
63
11.5 M10x30
10
200
300
285
145o N o H 50o for 12-40
O2 U2
46 for 50
t
V O1
U1 E A
Ball Screws & Nuts
A Ball Screw is a threaded shaft that provides a spiral raceway for the ball bearings assembled in a nut. This combination provides a precision screw to enable controlled rotational motion to be converted into linear motion. Ball Screws are able to withstand high thrust loads with minimal internal friction. They are made to close tolerances and are therefore suitable for use in applications where high precision is necessary. While reducing friction, Ball Screws can operate with some preload, effectively eliminating backlash between input rotation and output linear motion. This feature is essential when they are used in computer-controlled motion-control systems e.g. CNC machines tools. The four preload classes available in our standard nuts are P0 With Backlash, P1 No Backlash, P2 Light Preload and P3 Heavy Preload. These low friction Ball Screws yield high mechanical efficiency compared to other alternatives. A typical Ball Screw may be 90% efficient, versus 50% efficiency for a trapezoidal thread of equal size. This low internal friction also means Ball Screws can be back driven (depending upon their lead angle) and therefore are usually unsuitable for hand operated machine tools, in which case trapezoidal thread spindle is the better choice. Ball Screws are fabricated as either ground or rolled screw shafts. Although Ground Ball Screw is designed for the highest precision requirements, Rolled Ball Screw, which is less precise and considerably less expensive, is still a mechanically efficient product to be considered. Rolled Ball Screw can have positional precision as low as 0.008mm over 300mm of travel for the highest precision grade (C3) and 0.05mm for the same length of travel for the lowest grade available (C7). Whether using Ground or Rolled Ball Screw great care is needed to avoid contamination by dirt and other abrasive particles so as to maintain the inherent accuracy and ensure long life. This is easily and simply achieved by using rubber or leather bellows to completely or partially enclose the working surfaces.
286
Ball Screw & Nut Part Number Description
2R25-05A2-2-FSED-2000-2500- C 7 - R-P2 Axial clearance and preload code: PO : with backlash, P1 : No-backlash, P2 : light preload, P3 : heavy preload a
R: Rolled ball screw G: Ground ball screw a
Accuracy grade code: C3, C5, C7 (more details see pg. 295) a
Overall length of shaft (mm) a
Thread length (mm) a
Flange cut type: N : Full flange O S : Flange cut on one side (O) O D : Flange cut two sides (O) Circuit Type: W: External type U : Internal type DIN69051 I : Internal circulation E : High lead type K : Miniature type C : Low noise type Y : Cylindrical type (with keyway) Nut type: S : Single nut D : Double nut a
a
Flange: F : with flange R : without flange X : special flange a
Number of nuts on one screw shaft a
Quantity of circulation tubes a
Effective ball circuits: T A B C
: 1 circuit : 1.8 circuits : 2.5 circuits : 3.5 circuits
a
Lead (mm) a
Screw nominal O.D. a
Thread direction: R : right, L : left a
Number of threads
287
Type FSU - flanged single nut, internal circuit type DIN69051
Type FSI -
flanged single nut, internal circulation
.
All specifications are subject to change without notice
288
Type FDU -
Type FDI -
flanged double nut, internal circuit type DIN69051
flanged double nut, internal circulation
.
All specifications are subject to change without notice
289
Type FSW -
flanged single nut, external circuit type
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
290
Type FDW -
flanged double nut, external circuit type
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
291
Type FSC -
flanged single nut, low noise type
Left helix option
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
292
Type FSE -
flanged single nut, high lead type
Type RSW -
single nut, external circuit type
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
293
Type RSU -
single nut, internal circuit type DIN69051
Type FSK -
flanged single nut, miniature type
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
294
5
7
8
18
50
6
8
3
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
295
Selection of Nut
296
297
Support Units for Ball Screw
298
Recommended Shaft End Shape for Support Unit Types BK, FK and EK Fixed Side
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
299
Recommended Shaft End Shape for Support Unit Types FF, EF and BF (Floated side)
()
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
300
FK
Fixed side
FF
Floated side
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
301
BK
Fixed side
BF
Floated side
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
302
EK
Fixed side
EF
Floated side
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
303
Linear Guideways HG Series HG Series - Heavy Load Ball Type Linear Guideway HG series linear guideways are designed with load capacity and rigidity higher than other similar products with circular-arc groove and structure optimization. It features equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions, and self-aligning to absorb installation-error. Thus, HIWIN HG series linear guideways can achieve a long life with high speed, high accuracy and smooth linear motion.
Features of HG Series (1) Self-aligning capability By design, the circular-arc groove has contact points at 45 degrees. HG series can absorb most installation errors due to surface irregularities and provide smooth linear motion through the elastic deformation of rolling elements and the shift of contact points. Self-aligning capability, high accuracy and smooth operation can be obtained with an easy installation.
(2) Interchangeability Because of precision dimensional control, the dimensional tolerance of HG series can be kept in a reasonable range, which means that any blocks and any rails in a specific series can be used together while maintaining dimensional tolerance. And a retainer is added to prevent the balls from falling out when the blocks are removed from the rail.
(3) High rigidity in all four directions Because of the four-row design, the HG series linear guideway has equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions. Furthermore, the circular-arc groove provides a wide-contact width between the balls and the groove raceway allowing large permissible loads and high rigidity.
Construction of HG Series Block
Bolt cap
Rail
End cap
End seal ( Double s eals and s craper )
Grease nipple Bottom seal Ball Retainer
Rolling circulation system: Block, Rail, End Cap and Retainer Lubrication system: Grease Nipple and Piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, Bottom Seal, Bolt Cap, Double Seals and Scraper
Part Numbers of HG Series HG series guideways can be classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes are identical. The only difference between the two types is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged, and their accuracy can reach up to P class. The model number of HG series contains the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc..
304
Non-interchangeable type
Part Number of HG Block
HG W 25 C
A
E
2
R 1600 E ZA P
II + DD/E2 Dust Protection 2
Series HG
No. of Rails per Matched Set 1
Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type
Precision Code: C, H, P, SP, UP
Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65
Preload Code: Z0, ZA, ZB
E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap
E: Special Rail None: Standard Rail
Load Type C : Heavy Load H : Super Heavy Load
Rail Length (mm)
Block Mounting A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom C : Top or Bottom
Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom Note: 1. The r oman numerals expr es s a matched s et of r ails 2. No s ymbol indicates s tandar d pr otection (end s eal and bottom s eal)
No. of Blocks per Rail
E: Special Block None: Standard Block
ZZ : End s eal, bottom s eal and s cr aper KK: Double s eals , bottom s eal and scraper DD: Double s eals and bottom s eal
Interchangeable type
Part Number of HG Block
HG W 35 C
A
E ZA P
+ ZZ/E2 E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap
HG Series
Dust Protection
Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type
2
Precision Code : C, H, P Preload Code : Z0, ZA
Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65 Load Type C : Heavy Load H : Super Heavy Load
E: Special Block None: Standard Block Block Mounting Type A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom, C : Top or Bottom
Part Number of HG Rail
HG R 25 R
1200 E
HG Series
P Precision Code : C, H, P
Interchangeable Rail
E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail Model size Rail Length (mm) 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65 Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom
305
Linear Guideways HG Series Preload HG Series - Heavy Load Ball Type Linear Guideway
(1) Definition
Elastic displacement
HG series linear guideways are designed with load capacity and rigidity higher than other similar products with A preload can be applied to each guideway. Oversized balls Z0 circular-arc groove and structure optimization. It features equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial Elasticand displacement are used. Generally, a linear motion guidway has a negative without preload lateral directions, and self-aligning to absorb installation-error. Thus, HIWIN HG series linear guideways can clearance between groove and balls in order to improve achieve a long life with high speed, high accuracy and smooth linear motion. stiffness and maintain high precision. ZB Elastic displacement The figure shows the load is multiplied by the preload, the with heavy preload rigidity is doubled and the deflection is reduced by one half. Features of HG Series The preload not larger than ZA would be recommended for Self-aligning capability the model(1)size under HG20 to avoid an over preload Preload amount By design, the circular-arc groove has contact points at 45 degrees. HG series can absorb most installation errors affecting the guidewayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s life. due to surface irregularities and provide smooth linear motion through the elastic deformation of rolling elements and the shift of contact points. Self-aligning capability, high accuracy and smooth operation can be obtained with an easy installation.
(2) Preload classes
(2) Interchangeability HIWIN offers three classes of standard preload for various applications and conditions. Because of precision dimensional control, the dimensional tolerance of HG series can be kept in a reasonable range, which means that any blocks and any rails in a specific series can be used together while maintaining dimensional Table 2.15 Preloadtolerance. ClassesAnd a retainer is added to prevent the balls from falling out when the blocks are removed from the rail. Class Code Preload Condition Examples of Application
(3) High rigidity in all four directions
Tr ans por tation devices , auto-packing machines , X -Y L ight tain load ection,low impact, Cerdesign, Because of 0.02C the four-row thedirHG series linear guideway has equal load ratings in the radial,machines reverse radial Z0 0~ axis for gener al indus tr ial machines , welding , pr ecis ion r equir ed preload and lateral directions. low Furthermore, the circular-arc groove provides a wide-contact width between the balls and welder s
the groove raceway allowing large permissible loads and high rigidity. Medium preload Heavy preload
ZA
0.05~ 0.07C
High pr ecis ion r equir ed
Construction of HG Series ZB
0.10C~ 0.12C
High r igidit y r equir ed, with vibr ation and impact
Machining center s , Z axis for gener al indus tr ial, machines , EDM, NC lathes , pr ecis ion X-Y tables , meas ur ing equipment Machining inding Blockcenter s , grBolt capmachines , NC lathes , hor izontal and ver tical milling machines , Z axis of machine tools , Heavy cutting machines Rail
End cap Note : 1. The C inEnd preload dynamic load rating. seal column means basic 2. preload Classes Interchangeable Guideway: Z0, ZA. ( Double s ealsof and s craper ) preload Classes of Non-Interchangeable Guideway: Z0, ZA, ZB
Grease nipple Bottom seal Ball Retainer
Rolling circulation system: Block, Rail, End Cap and Retainer Lubrication system: Grease Nipple and Piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, Bottom Seal, Bolt Cap, Double Seals and Scraper
Part Numbers of HG Series HG series guideways can be classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes are identical. The only difference between the two types is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged, and their accuracy can reach up to P class. The model number of HG series contains the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc..
306
Non-interchangeable Accuracy Classestype
PartofNumber HG Block The accuracy HG series canof be classified into normal (C), high (H), precision (P), super precision (SP), ultra precision (UP), five classes. Please choose the class by referring the accuracy of applied equipment.
HG W 25 C
A
E
2
R 1600 E ZA P
II + DD/E2 Dust Protection 2
Series HG
No. of Rails per Matched Set 1
Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type
Precision Code: C, H, P, SP, UP
Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65
(1) Accuracy
Preload Code: Z0, ZA, ZB E: Special Rail None: Standard Rail
Load Type C : Heavy Load : Super Heavy Load of Hnon-interchangeable
Rail Length (mm) Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom
Block Mounting Table 2.6 Accuracy Standards A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom C : Top or Bottom
Item
HG - 15, 20
No. of Blocks per Rail
Normal
Accuracy Classes
E: Special Block (C) None: Standard Block
Dimens ional toler ance of height H
Interchangeable type
Dimens ional toler ance of w idth N
Part Number of HG Block
Var iation of height H Var iation of w idth N
HG W 35 C
A
Unit: mm
Note: 1. The r oman numerals expr es s a matched s et of r ails Super Ultra 2. No s ymbol indicates s tandar d pr otection High Precision (end s eal and bottom s eal) Precision Precision (H)
± 0.1
± 0.03
± 0.1
± 0.03
0.02
0.01
ZZ(P) : End s eal, bottom(SP) s eal and s cr aper(UP) KK: Double s eals , bottom s eal and scraper DD: 0 Double s eals and 0 bottom s eal 0
- 0.03 0 - 0.03 0.006
E ZA 0.01 P + ZZ/E2 0.02 0.006
R unning parallelis m of block s ur face C to s ur face A
- 0.008 0 - 0.008 0.003
0.004
0.003
E2: Self-Lubricant
R unning parallelis m of block s ur face D to s ur face B
see Table SE:2.14 Metallic End Cap Dust Protection
Block Type
Table 2.7 Accuracy W Standards : Flange Type
2
Unit: mm
Precision Code : C, H, P
H : Square Type
HG - 25, 30 35
Preload Code : Z0, ZA
Accuracy Classes
- 0.015 0 - 0.015 0.004
see Table 2.14
HG Series
Item
E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap
Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65
Normal
High
E: Special Block None: (C ) Standard Block (H)
Precision
Super Precision
Ultra Precision
(P)
(SP)
(UP)
Variation of height H
0 ± Block 0.1 Mounting ± Type 0.04 - 0.04 A : Mounting from Top : Bottom, C± : Top or Bottom 0 ± B0.1 0.04 - 0.04 0.02 0.015 0.007
0 - 0.02 0 - 0.02 0.005
0 - 0.01 0 - 0.01 0.003
Variation of width N
0.03
0.005
0.003
Dimensional toler ance of height H
Load Type C : Heavy Load Dimensional toler ance of width NH : Super Heavy Load
Part Number of HG Rail
Running parallelism of block sur face C to sur face A
HG R 25 R Running parallelism of block sur face D to sur face B
0.015
1200 E
0.007
P
s ee Table 2.14 s ee Table 2.14
HG Series
Additional data pages showing additional sizes, the interchangeable block type and Precision Coderunning : C, H, P parallelism are available. Please contact T.E.A. or go to www.tea.net.au Interchangeable Rail E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail
Model size 45, 55, 65
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
Rail Length (mm) Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom
307
Linear Guideways HG Series Types (1) Block types HIWIN offers two types of linear guideway which are flange and square types. Because of the low assembly height and larger mounting surface, the flange type is suitable for heavy moment load application.
Table 2.4 Block Types
Square
Type
Model
Shape
(mm)
Rail Length (mm)
28
100
Height
Main Application
Machine Centers
HGH-CA
¯ ¯ NC L athes
HGH-HA
90
4000
Grinding Machines Pr ecis ion Machining Machines Heavy Cutting Machines
24 HGW-CA
Automation Devices
¯ ¯ Tr ans por tation Equipment Meas ur ing Equipment 90 4000 Devices R equir ing High P os itional Accur acy
HGW-HA
24
Flange
100
100
HGW-CB ¯ ¯ HGW-HB 90
4000
24
100
HGW-CC ¯ ¯ HGW-HC 90
4000
(2) Rail types Besides the standard top mounting type, bottom mounting type of rails are also available.
Table 2.5 Rail Types Mounting from Top - dimensions same tables as Blocks
Mounting from Bottom - see page 299 for dimensions
308
Dust Proof Accessories (1) Codes of accessories If the following accessories are needed, please add the code followed by the model number.
t2
Bottom seal
End seal Scraper
End seal No symbol: Standard Protection (End seal + Bottom seal)
Spacer
ZZ (End seal + Bottom seal + Scraper)
End seal
End seal
Spacer
Spacer t1
Scraper KK (Double seals + Bottom seal + Scraper)
DD (Double seals + Bottom seal)
(2) End seal and bottom seal To prevent life reduction caused by iron chips or dust entering the block.
(3) Double seals Enhances the wiping effect, foreign matter can be completely wiped off.
Table 2.18 Dimensions of end seal Size
Thic kness (t1) (mm)
Size
Thic kness (t1) (mm)
HG15 E S
3
HG 35 ES
3.2
HG20 E S
3
HG 45 ES
4.5
HG25 E S
3
HG 55 ES
5
HG30 E S
3.2
HG 65 ES
5
(4) Scraper The scraper removes high-temperature iron chips and larger foreign objects.
Table 2.19 Dimensions of scraper Size
Thic kness (t2) (mm)
Size
Thic kness (t2) (mm)
HG15 SC
1.5
HG 35 SC
1.5
HG20 SC
1.5
HG 45 SC
1.5
HG25 SC
1.5
HG 55 SC
1.7
HG30 SC
1.5
HG 65 SC
1.7
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
309
Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (1) HGH-CA / HGH-HA
l
Model No.
Dimensions of Assembly (mm)
Basic Basic Mounting Dynamic Static Dimensions of Rail (mm) Bolt for Load Load Rail Rating Rating
Dimensions of Block (mm)
Static Rated Moment MR
H HGH 15CA
W
B
B1
28 4.3 9.5
34
26
4
30 4.6 12
44
32
6
H1
N
HGH 20CA
C
L1
L
G
Mxl
T
H2
H3 WR HR D
h
d
P
E
(mm)
26 39.4 61.4
5.3
M4x5
6
8.5 9.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20
M4x16
12
M5x6
8
36 50.5 77.5
HGH 20HA
6
7
20 17.5 9.5 8.5
6
60 20
35 58 40 5.5 12.5 48
84
35 6.5
HGH 25HA
12
M6x8
8
10
13
23 22 11
9
7
60 20
40 70 45
6
16
60
HGH 30HA HGH 35CA 55 7.5
18
70
97.4
40 10
12 60 93
120.4
50 80
112.4
50 10
HGH 35HA
12
M8x10
8.5 9.5 13.8 28 26 14 12
M8x12 10.2 16 19.6 34 29 14 12
9
9
80 20
80 20
60 97 70 9.5 20.5 86
HGH 45HA
75 117.7 166.7 80
13 23.5 100 75 12.5
HGH 55HA
12.9 M12x18 17.5 22
29
53 44 23 20 16 120 30
70 144.2 200.2 90
15 31.5 126 76 25
HGH 65HA
0.17
0.15
0.15
0.18
17.75
37.84
0.38
0.27
0.27
0.30
21.18
48.84
0.48
0.47
0.47
0.39
26.48
56.19
0.64
0.51
0.51
0.51
32.75
76.00
0.87
0.88
0.88
0.69
38.74
83.06
1.06
0.85
0.85
0.88
47.27
110.13
1.40
1.47
1.47
1.16
49.52
102.87
1.73
1.20
1.20
1.45
60.21
136.31
2.29
2.08
2.08
1.92
77.57
155.93
3.01
2.35
2.35
2.73
94.54
207.12
4.00
4.07
4.07
3.61
114.44
227.81
5.66
4.06
4.06
4.17
139.35
301.26
7.49
7.01
7.01
5.49
12.9 M16x20 25
15
15
63 53 26 22 18 150 35
163.63
324.71
10.02
6.44
6.44
7.00
120 203.6 259.6
208.36
457.15
14.15
11.12
11.12
9.82
Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
310
1.45
2.21
3.21
4.47
6.30
10.41
15.08
M14x45
95 155.8 204.8
HGH 65CA
25.31
12.9 M10x17 16 18.5 30.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 80 128.8 171.2
HGH 55CA
11.38
M8x25
139.4
60 13
kg kg/m
M8x25
72 105.8 138.2
HGH 45CA
C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m
M6x20
50 78.6 104.6
HGH 30CA
MY Block Rail
M5x16
50 65.2 92.2
HGH 25CA
C(kN)
MP
Weight
21.18
M16x50
Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (2) HGW-CA / HGW-HA
Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.
Dimensions of Block (mm)
Dimensions of R ail (mm)
Basic B asic Mounting Dynamic Static Bolt for Load L oad Rail Rating R ating
Static R ated Moment MR
H HGW15CA
N
W
B
24 4.3 16
47
38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4
H1
B1
C
L1
L
G
M
T
5.3 M5
12
T1 H2 H3 WR HR D
h
d
P
E
(mm)
6
8.9 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20
M4x16
8
10
M5x16
50.5 77.5
HGW20CA 30 4.6 21.5 63
53
5
40
HGW20HA
M6
6
7
20 17.5 9.5 8.5
6
60 20
65.2 92.2
HGW25CA
58
84
36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HA
12
M8
8
14
6
9
23 22 11
9
7
60 20
70 42
6
31
90 72
9
HGW30HA HGW35CA 4 8 7.5
33 100 82
9
97.4
52
12 93
120.4
80
112.4 12
62
HGW35HA
M10 8.5 16 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12
M10 10.1 18
9 12.6 34 29 14 12
9
9
80 20
80 20
97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10
HGW45HA
117.7 166.7 70
13 43.5 140 116 12
12.9 M14 17.5 26.5 12 19
95
53 44 23 20 16 120 30
HGW65CA
144.2 200.2 90
15 53.5 170 142 14 110
HGW65HA
25.31
0.17
0.15
0.15
0.17
17.75
37.84
0.38
0.27
0.27
0.40
21.18
48.84
0.48
0.47
0.47
0.52
26.48
56.19
0.64
0.51
0.51
0.59
32.75
76.00
0.87
0.88
0.88
0.80
38.74
83.06
1.06
0.85
0.85
1.09
47.27
110.13
1.40
1.47
1.47
1.44
49.52
102.87
1.73
1.20
1.20
1.56
60.21
136.31
2.29
2.08
2.08
2.06
77.57
155.93 3.01
2.35
2.35
2.79
94.54
207.12
4.00
4.07
4.07
3.69
114.44
227.81
5.66
4.06
4.06
4.52
139.35
301.26
7.49
7.01
7.01
5.96
12.9 M16 25 37.5 15
15
63 53 26 22 18 150 35
163.63
324.71
10.02
6.44
6.44
9.17
203.6 259.6
208.36
457.15
14.15
11.12
11.12 12.89
Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
311
kg/m 1.45
2.21
3.21
4.47
6.30
10.41
M14x45
155.8 204.8
HGW55HA
11.38
kg
12.9 M12 15.1 22 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 128.8 171.2
HGW55CA
C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m
M8x25
139.4
80
C(kN)
M8x25
105.8 138.2
HGW45CA
MY Block Rail
M6x20
78.6 104.6
HGW30CA
MP
Weight
15.08
M16x50
21.18
Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (3) HGW-CB / HGW-HB
Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.
B asic B asic Mounting Dynamic Static Dimensions of R ail (mm) Bolt for L oad L oad Rail R ating R ating
Dimensions of Block (mm)
Static R ated Moment MR
H
H1
N
W
B
B1
C
L1
L
G M T T1 T2 H2 H3 WR HR D
h
d
P
E
(mm)
5.3 4.5 6 8.9 6.5 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20
M4x16
12
M5x16
C(kN)
Ă&#x2DC;
HGW15CB
24 4.3 16
47
38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4 50.5 77.5
HGW20CB 30 4.6 21.5 63
53
5
40
HGW20HB
6
8 10 9.5 6
7
20 17.5 9.5 8.5
6
60 20
65.2 92.2
HGW25CB
58
84
36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HB
12
7
8 14 10 6
9
23 22 11
9
7
60 20
70 42
6
31
90 72
9
HGW30HB HGW35CB 4 8 7.5
33 100 82
9
97.4
52
12 93
120.4
80
112.4 12
62
HGW35HB
9 8.5 16 10 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12
9 10.1 18 13 9 12.6 34 29 14 12
9
9
80 20
80 20
97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10
HGW45HB
12.9 11 15.1 22 15 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5
117.7 166.7 70
13 43.5 140 116 12
12.9 14 17.5 26.5 17 12 19
95
53 44 23 20 16 120 30
144.2 200.2
HGW65CB 90
12.9 16 25 37.5 23 15 15
15 53.5 170 142 14 110
HGW65HB
63 53 26 22 18 150 35
203.6 259.6
Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
312
25.31
0.17
0.15
0.15
0.17
17.75
37.84
0.38
0.27
0.27
0.40
21.18
48.84
0.48
0.47
0.47
0.52
26.48
56.19
0.64
0.51
0.51
0.59
32.75
76.00
0.87
0.88
0.88
0.80
38.74
83.06
1.06
0.85
0.85
1.09
47.27
110.13
1.40
1.47
1.47
1.44
49.52
102.87
1.73
1.20
1.20
1.56
60.21
136.31
2.29
2.08
2.08
2.06
77.57
155.93
3.01
2.35
2.35
2.79
94.54
207.12
4.00
4.07
4.07
3.69
114.44
227.81
5.66
4.06
4.06
4.52
139.35
301.26
7.49
7.01
7.01
5.96
163.63
324.71
10.02
6.44
6.44
9.17
208.36
457.15
14.15
11.12
11.12 12.89
1.45
2.21
3.21
4.47
6.30
10.41
M14x45
155.8 204.8
HGW55HB
11.38
M12x35
128.8 171.2
HGW55CB
kg kg/m
M8x25
139.4
80
C 0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m
M8x25
105.8 138.2
HGW45CB
MY Block Rail
M6x20
78.6 104.6
HGW30CB
MP
Weight
15.08
M16x50
21.18
Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (4) HGW-CC / HGW-HC
Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.
Dimensions of Block (mm)
Dimensions of R ail (mm)
Basic Basic Mounting Dynamic Static Bolt for Load Load Rail Rating Rating
Static R ated Moment MR
H
H1
N
W
B
B1
C
L1
L
G M
T T1 T2 H 2 H3 WR HR D
h
d
P
E
(mm)
5.3 M5 6 8.9 6.5 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20
M4x16
12 M6 8 10 9.5 6
M5x16
C(kN)
Ă&#x2DC;
HGW15CC
24 4.3 16
47
38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4 50.5 77.5
HGW20CC 30 4.6 21.5 63
53
5
40
HGW20HC
7
20 17.5 9.5 8.5
6
60 20
65.2 92.2
HGW25CC
58
84
36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HC
12 M8 8 14 10 6
9
23 22 11
9
7
60 20
70 42
6
31
90 72
9
HGW30HC HGW35CC 4 8 7.5
33 100 82
9
97.4 12 M10 8.5 16 10 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12
52 93
120.4
80
112.4 12 M10 10.1 18 13
62
HGW35HC
9 12.6 34 29 14 12
9
9
80 20
80 20
97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10
117.7 166.7 70
13 43.5 140 116 12
12.9 M1417.5 26.5 17 12 19
95
53 44 23 20 16 120 30
144.2 200.2
HGW65CC 90
12.9 M16 25 37.5 23 15 15
15 53.5 170 142 14 110
HGW65HC
0.17
0.15
0.15
0.17
17.75
37.84
0.38
0.27
0.27
0.40
21.18
48.84
0.48
0.47
0.47
0.52
26.48
56.19
0.64
0.51
0.51
0.59
32.75
76.00
0.87
0.88
0.88
0.80
38.74
83.06
1.06
0.85
0.85
1.09
47.27
110.13
1.40
1.47
1.47
1.44
49.52
102.87
1.73
1.20
1.20
1.56
60.21
136.31
2.29
2.08
2.08
2.06
77.57
155.93
3.01
2.35
2.35
2.79
94.54
207.12
4.00
4.07
4.07
3.69
114.44
227.81
5.66
4.06
4.06
4.52
139.35
301.26
7.49
7.01
7.01
5.96
63 53 26 22 18 150 35
163.63
324.71
10.02
6.44
6.44
9.17
203.6 259.6
208.36
457.15
14.15
11.12
11.12 12.89
Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
313
1.45
2.21
3.21
4.47
6.30
10.41
M14x45
155.8 204.8
HGW55HC
25.31
12.9 M12 15.1 22 15 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 128.8 171.2
HGW55CC
11.38
M8x25
139.4
80
HGW45HC
C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m kg kg/m
M8x25
105.8 138.2
HGW45CC
MY Block Rail
M6x20
78.6 104.6
HGW30CC
MP
Weight
15.08
M16x50
21.18
EG Series - Low Profile Ball Type Linear Guideway The design of the EG series offers a low profile, high load capacity and high rigidity. It also features an equal load rating in all four directions and self-aligning capability to absorb installation error, allowing for higher accuracies. Additionally, the lower assembly height and the shorter length make the EG series more suitable for high speed automation machines and applications where space is limited. The retainer is designed to hold the balls in the blocks even when it is removed from the rail.
Construction of EG Series
Cap
Block
Rail End cap End seal (Double seals ) Scraper
Grease nipple
Rolling circulation system: Block, rail, end cap and retainer Lubrication system: Grease nipple and piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, bottom seal, cap and scraper
Ball Retainer Bottom seal
Two Types of EG Series EG series linear guideways are classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes of these two types are the same as one another. The main difference is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged and they can maintain p-class accuracy. Because of strict dimensional control, the interchangeable type linear guideways are a wise choice for customers when rails do not need to be matched for an axis. The model number of the EG series identifies the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc.
Part Number description for the Interchangeable EG Block
EG W 25 C A
E ZA P
+ ZZ
Series Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type
Dust Protection - ZZ -End Seal, bottom seal and scraper KK -Double Seal, bottom seal and scraper Precision Code : C, H, P DD -Double Seal and bottom seal
Model Size 15, 20, 25, 30
Preload Code : Z0, ZA
Load Type C : Heavy Load s: Medium Load
E: Special Block None: Standard Block
Block Mounting Type A : Top Mounting B : from Bottom
Part Number description for Interchangeable EG Rail
EG R 25 R
1200
E
P
Series Precision Code : C, H, P
Interchangeable Rail
E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail
Model Size 15, 20, 25, 30
Rail Length (mm)
Rail Mounting Type R/U : Mounting from Top T : Bottom
For full specifications of the non-interchangeable types please visit our website www.tea.net.au or contact T.E.A.
314
Guide Wheel Dimensions & Materials
W 90째
MDw INSIDE A
B 60째 MDw OUTSIDE
90째
Dimensions3,11 in mm & (inches) Part Number
W1X
Outside Diameter A 19.58 (0.771)
W2X
30.73 (1.210)
W3X
45.80 (1.803)
W4X
59.94 (2.360)
W4XXL W1SSX
W1SS2279, 10 W2SS2279, 10 W3SS2279, 10 W4SSCR10
52100
52100
52100
Nylon 66
A591
NBR
Alvania 2
52100
52100
52100
Nylon 66
A591
NBR
Alvania 2
52100
52100
52100
Nylon 66
A591
NBR
Alvania 2
52100
52100
52100
Nylon 66
A591
NBR
Alvania 2
52100
52100
52100
Nylon 66
A591
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
Nylon 66
304
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
Nylon 66
304
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
Nylon 66
304
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
Nylon 66
304
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
Nylon 66
304
NBR
Alvania 2
440C
440C
440C
304
304
None
Krytox227
440C
440C
440C
304
304
None
Krytox227
440C
440C
440C
304
304
None
Krytox227
440C
440C
440C
304
304
None
Krytox227
7.95
11.89
9.53
11.13
12.70
18.26
12.00
15.88
19.05
27.00
(0.4724) (0.625) (0.750) (1.063) 15.00
19.05
25.40
34.92
(0.5906) (0.750) (1.000) (1.375) 25.40
31.75
44.45
(1.250)
(1.750)
4.76
7.87
7.95
11.89
30.73 45.80 59.94
Grease7
(0.3750) (0.438) (0.500) (0.719)
(1.000)
19.58
Retainer1 Shield1 Seal2
(0.1875) (0.310) (0.313) (0.468)
22.00
(2.360) W4SSXXL
7.87
Ball8
(0.8661)
(1.803) W4SSX
4.76
Inner Race8
75.39
(1.210) W3SSX
Width W6
(2.968) (0.771) W2SSX
Bore Size B4,5
Material
Inside Outside Vee Vee Outer Radius Radius Race8 MDw MDw Inside Outside
(0.1875) (0.310) (0.313) (0.468) 9.53
11.13
12.70
18.26
(0.3750) (0.438) (0.500) (0.719) 12.00
15.88
19.05
27.00
(0.4724) (0.625) (0.750) (1.063) 15.00
19.05
25.40
34.92
(0.5906) (0.750) (1.000) (1.375)
75.39
22.00
25.40
31.75
44.45
(2.968)
(0.8661)
(1.000)
(1.250)
(1.750)
19.58
4.76
7.87
7.95
11.89
(0.771)
(0.1875)
(0.310)
(0.313)
(0.468)
30.73
9.53
11.13
12.70
18.26
(1.210)
(0.3750)
(0.438)
(0.500)
(0.719)
45.80
12.00
15.88
19.05
27.00
(1.803)
(0.4724)
(0.625)
(0.750)
(1.063)
59.94
15.00
19.05
25.40
34.92
(2.360)
(0.5906)
(0.750)
(1.000)
(1.375)
Notes: 1. "A591"shield material (JIS SECC) is cold rolled carbon steel with electrolytic zinc coating (classified by ASTM A591). "304" reflects 304 stainless steel. 2. "NBR" seal material is nitrile butadiene rubber. 3. All dimensions are in mm & (inches). 4. Bore ID tolerance is +.0000, -.0003 inch, except W4XL. 5. W4XL Bore ID tolerance is +.0000, -.0004 inch. 6. Width tolerance is +.0000, -.0047 inch. 7. Krytox GPL 227 is a DuPont product. Alvania # 2 is a Shell Oil product. 8. "52100" reflects hardened AISI 52100 bearing steel (Rc 60-62); "440C" reflects hardened AISI 440C stainless steel (Rc 58-60). 9. High Temperature Compatible - Heat stabilized components allow for operating temperatures to 500째F. 10. Clean Room Compatible - All stainless steel components are internally lubricated with Krytox GPL 227. 11. Guide wheels are manufactured to ABEC class 5 tolerances. 12. Weights: W1 - 12g, W2 - 40g, W3 - 136g, W4 - 285g. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
316
W
LA
90째
Guide Wheels
MDw INSIDE
LR
A B 60째 MDw OUTSIDE
90째
Load Capacity (N)
Load Capacity (lbf ) Part Number
Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax (lbf )1, 2
Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax (lbf )1, 2
Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax
Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax
(N)2,3
(N)2,3
650
123
W0
146
28
W1X (SS)
274
57
1220
252
W2X (SS)
596
141
2650
625
W3X (SS)
1326
382
5900
1701
W4X (SS)
2181
900
9700
4001
W4XXL
3215
1473
14300
6552
Notes: 1. Sizing and selection should be based on working load capacity ratings according to the sizing guidelines presented in the technical reference section. See load/life relationship page 321. 2. Working load capacities reflect lubricated wheel/track interface. 3. W..X = steel version, W..XSS stainless steel version. 4. Load Capacities for all versions of Guide Wheels see page 322. 5. For Studded or Integral Studded Guide wheels please go so www.tea.net.au for further data and specifications. 6. For Wheel Cover and Lubricator Assemblies please go so www.tea.net.au for further data and specifications.
Washdown Wheels a
Proven to extend life in harsh and extreme environments. FDA approved grease. AISI type 440C stainless steel balls and races. Unique outer shield and inner seal for exceptional protection from liquids and debris. Ideally suited for food and beverage applications, as well as high speed water jet cutting machinery. Use together with DualVee standard AISI 420 stainless steel track.
Part Number
Radial Load (N)
Radial Load (lbf)
Axial Load (N)
Axial Load (lbf)
Weight (g)
2420
544
400
89.9
37.8
5200
1169
580
130.4
128.3
Bore Size B
Width W
Inside Vee
Outside Vee
(+.0000, -.0003in)
(+.0000, -.0047in)
Radius MDW
Radius MDW
a
WDW2SSX a
WDW3SSX
mm (inch)
Size
Outside Diam. A
a
2
30.73 (1.210)
9.53 (.3750)
11.13 (.438)
12.70 (.500)
18.26 (.719)
3
45.80 (1.803)
12.00 (.4724)
15.88 (.625)
19.05 (.750)
27.00 (1.063)
a
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
317
Single Edge Track - Undrilled 90°
• Easy installation/available from stock • Single edge design allows for flexible track pair spacing • Patented mounting shoulder allows for accurate positioning of Vee ways • Available from stock as induction hardened, polished and undrilled, AISI1045 carbon steel • Induction hardened track remains soft below the mounting shoulder, allowing for drilling or other machining • 420 stainless steel available on request • Can be easily butt-joined for stroke lengths exceeding maximum single piece lengths (4 mtrs) • Single edge track with drilled mounting holes available - please go to www.tea.net.au for further details and specifications. • Size 0 double edge track, drilled and undrilled available - please go to www.tea.net.au for further details and specifications.
DualVee Track Part No.
Width
Height
W mm (inch)
H mm (inch)
Mounting Shoulder Location MDT mm (inch)
MDT
W MSD
MSC
H
Mounting Shoulder to Centre Line MSC mm (inch)
Mounting Shoulder depth MSD mm (inch)
Kg/m (lbs./ft)
Weight
T1
11.10 (0.437)
4.75 (0.187) 3.17 (0.125)
0.79 (0.031)
1.57 (0.062)
0.272 (0.183)
T2
15.87 (0.625)
6.35 (0.250) 4.75 (0.187)
0.79 (0.031)
2.39 (0.094)
0.510 (0.343)
T3
22.22 (0.875)
8.71 (0.343) 6.35 (0.250)
1.57 (0.062)
2.77 (0.109)
1.03 (0.690)
T4
26.97 (1.062)
11.10 (0.437) 7.92 (0.312)
2.36 (0.093)
3.17 (0.125)
1.64 (1.100)
Track available from stock to 4 metres cut to 500mm increments Please advise exact length required at time of ordering, as there is a 5mm cutting wastage. Ordering Example: T1-1000 represents a 1 metre length of hardened, carbon steel, size 1 track T1-1000-SS represents a 1 metre length of stainless steel size 1 track Notes: 1. All dimensions are in mm and (inches). 2. The overall length tolerance is ±1.6mm / ±1/16 inch. 3. For non-standard track lengths or other non-standard options, contact TEA for quotation. 4. Maximum single piece track lengths: hardened = 6.096 mtr, unhardened = 6.7056 mtr. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
318
VIRTUAL APEX
Bushings • Rigidly affixes guide wheels to a mounting surface in a precise, orthogonal fashion • Material: 303 stainless steel • Concentric and eccentric configurations allow for fit up adjustment • Design calls for a fastener to pass through the bushing and the guide wheel, locking the elements into place against the mounting surface
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Concentric (MB)
DualVee Size
Metric Bushings
1
2
3
4
4XL * a
Inch Bushings
1
2
3
4
4XL *
Eccentric (MBX)
Length Length Outside Inside Head Body Overall Diameter Diameter Diameter ID8 LB HD LO OD3
Part Number
Recommended Fastener Size
Hex Size HS
Offset EC
Head Height HH7
MB1
M4
-
-
6.22
7.6
13.8
4.76
3.96
11.2
MBX1
M4
12
0.25
6.22
7.6
13.8
4.76
3.96
-
MB2
M6
-
-
6.65
10.8
17.4
9.52
6.00
14.2
MBX2
M6
14
0.61
6.65
10.8
17.4
9.52
6.00
-
MB3
M8
-
-
9.47
15.6
25.1
11.99
8.00
19.1
MBX3
M8
19
1.07
9.47
15.6
25.1
11.99
8.00
-
MB4
M10
-
-
11.10
18.8
29.9
15.00
10.00
22.4
MBX4
M10
22
1.52
11.10
18.8
29.9
15.00
10.00
-
MB4XL
M14
-
-
14.35
25.1
39.5
21.97
14.00
31.8
MBX4XL
M14
30
1.52
14.35
25.1
39.5
21.97
14.00
-
B1
#6
-
-
0.250
0.300
0.550
0.1873
0.140
0.44
BX1
#6
7/16
0.012
0.250
0.300
0.550
0.1873
0.138
-
B2
1/4
-
-
0.281
0.425
0.706
0.3748
0.250
0.56
BX2
1/4
9/16
0.024
0.281
0.425
0.706
0.3748
0.250
-
B3
5/16
-
-
0.375
0.615
0.990
0.4722
0.312
0.75
BX3
5/16
3/4
0.042
0.375
0.615
0.990
0.4722
0.312
-
B4
3/8
-
-
0.437
0.740
1.177
0.5904
0.375
0.88
BX4
3/8
7/8
0.060
0.437
0.740
1.177
0.5904
0.375
-
B4XL
9/16
-
-
0.565
0.990
1.555
0.8650
0.563
1.25
BX4XL
9/16
1 1/4
0.060
0.565
0.990
1.555
0.8650
0.563
-
Most sizes from stock (* Available on request) Notes: 1. All dimensions are in mm for metric bushings, and inch dimensions for imperial bushings. 2. Standard material 303 stainless steel. 3. The bushing's outside diameter is designed to fit the corresponding size DualVee® guide wheel. Outside diameter (OD) tolerance is +0.00mm, -0.01inch (.25mm) 4. Part # X_ indicates eccentric (adjustable) bushing; rotation of eccentric allows fit up adjustment between track and guide wheels. 5. All mounting information within this catalogue assumes a central position of the eccentric bushing, thus allowing wheel position adjustment from "+EC" to "-EC". 6. Part # MB or B_ indicates concentric (stationary) bushing; Since concentrically mounted wheels have a fixed position, these bushings set the alignment of the carriage assembly to the rail. Concentrically mounted wheels should be configured to carry the majority of the load whenever possible. 7. Head height (HH) tolerance is ±0.001 inch and ±0.03mm. 8. Inside diameter (ID) tolerance is +0.002, -0.000 inch and +0.05mm -0.00mm.
All specfications are subject to change without notice.
319
Mounting Dimensions / Formulas for DualVee®-basic wheel plate and track plate assemblies When fabricating a DualVee ® linear guide from componentry, the following (formulae) are applicable for mating carriage plate and track plate designs:
A
F or sizes 1 through 4 DualVee ® single edge track with equivalent sized guide wheels: • Inboard Mounting (See Figure 1): A = B + X • Outboard Mounting (See Figure 2): A = C - X • Exterior Mounting (See Figure 3): A = D - Y A = hole centres for wheel plate
B Figure 1 Inboard Mounting
A
Y
X
DualVee Size
inch
mm
inch
mm
1
0.874
22.2
0.934
23.7
2
1.374
34.9
1.436
36.5
3
2.000
50.8
2.124
53.9
4
2.624
66.6
2.750
69.9
4XL
3.124
79.3
3.500
88.9
C Figure 2 Outboard Mounting
A Notes: 1. Information above uses the same size DualVee® track and wheel except for size 4XL which uses W4XXL guide wheel with size T4 track. 2. Side views shown only, length of wheel plates can be any length required. 3. It is recommended that wheel plates be constructed with concentric bushings on one side of the plate and eccentric bushings on the opposing side. 4. "D" dimension is to the theoretical sharp of the 90°angle.
D Figure 3 Exterior Mounting
Applications Clean Room Products
High Temperature Products
TEA's clean room compatible guide wheels are manufactured from 440C stainless steel bearing elements, and contain stainless steel retainers and shields. They are internally lubricated with synthetic, corrosion resistant, clean room compatible grease.
All T.E.A. high temperature guide wheel products are manufactured from specially processed, thermally stabilised, 440C stainless steel. Lubricated with a specially formulated synthetic grease, these guide wheels are capable of operating in temperatures up to 500°F. Special consideration should be given to guide wheel based designs when operating above temperatures of 300°F. Designers must make sure that a suitable lubricant is used on the wheel track interface, and if lubrication is prohibitive, the appropriate derating of the bearing should be factored in.
For clean room operation, it is often desirable to plate the track with thin dense chrome (armoloy), black oxide, or electroless nickel. Stainless steel track can also be specially cleaned prior to heat treat and then passivated. Contact T.E.A. applications engineering for assistance with your clean room linear guidance questions. Higher level assemblies, custom engineered to accommodate specific clean room requirements, can be furnished by T.E.A. Contact T.E.A. for particle emissions data.
320
The Load/Life Relationship All standard considerations involved in statics calculations must be accounted for, including inertial forces, gravitational forces, external forces such as tool pressure, bearing element spacing, magnitude and direction of the payload. Any external forces that generate a reaction through the wheel/track interface need to be considered. If assistance is required in resolving specific loads into the resultant reaction forces at the guide wheel interface, contact our applications engineering staff for support.
Several factors influence the service life of a DualVee® linear guide. Through research and development spanning over thirty years, BWC has devised a simple method to estimate the load/life relationship for a specific DualVee® guide mechanism under defined loading conditions. The methodology accounts for the size of the DualVee® bearing elements, relative spacing, and the orientation, location, and magnitude of the load. The curve is based upon clean and well lubricated track conditions; so for applications where lubrication is prohibitive, a derating factor must be applied.
Step 2: Calculate the load factor for the most heavily loaded bearing.
It is important to note that secondary considerations such as maximum velocity, acceleration rates, duty cycle, stroke length, environmental conditions, the presence of shock, vibration and extreme temperature ranges can all impact service life to varying degrees. As such, the sizing method outlined below should be used conservatively, and considered only as a guideline for the sizing of DualVee® components and assemblies. When time and budget permits, the prototyping of a DualVee® arrangement is recommended to confirm service life expectations.
L F = L A / L Amax + L R / L Rmax Where L F = Load Factor L A = Resultant axial load on the guide wheel L Amax = The maximum axial working load capacity of the guide wheel L R = Resultant radial load on the guide wheel L Rmax = The maximum radial working load capacity of the guide wheel
• Bearings should be sized such that L F<1 • The most heavily loaded bearing will have the highest load factor
The Load/Life Equation Sizing and Selection
Due to varying application load, speed parameters and environmental conditions, the appropriate adjustment factor must be applied to the maximum axial and radial working load capacities (LAmax and LRmax) as follows:
The load/life estimation requires a basic understanding of the principles of statics, the ability to work with free-body diagrams, and the capacity to resolve externally applied forces on a carriage assembly into the radial and axial reaction forces at each guide wheel in the design. The life of a DualVee® guide will be limited to the life of the most heavily loaded bearing in the design.
Adjustment Factor
Application Conditions
1.0-0.7
Clean, low speed, low shock, low duty
0.7-0.4
Moderate contaminants, medium duty, medium shock, low to medium vibration, moderate speed
0.4-0.1
Heavy contamination, high acceleration, high speed, medium to high shock, high vibration, high duty cycle
Oscillating motion resulting in less than one full revolution of the wheel under load can cause accelerated wear on the internal bearing elements. Testing of such systems is recommended to verify compatibility of the design with load/life requirements.
Step 1: Calculate the resultant radial and axial loads reflected to each bearing element in the linear guide design.
321
DualVee Guide Wheel Load Capacities Load Capacity (N)
Load Capacity (lbf ) Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax
Part Number
(lbf )1, 2
Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax (lbf )1, 2
Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax
Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax
(N)2,3
(N)2,3
W0
146
28
650
123
W1
274
57
1220
252
W2
596
141
2650
625
W3
1326
382
5900
1701
W4
2181
900
9700
4001
W0X
146
28
650
123
W1X
274
57
1220
252
W2X
596
141
2650
625
W3X
1326
382
5900
1701
W4X
2181
900
9700
4001
W4XXL
3215
1473
14300
6552
W1SSX
274
57
1220
252
W2SSX
596
141
2650
625
W3SSX
1326
382
5900
1701
W4SSX
2181
900
9700
4001
W4SSXXL
3215
1473
14300
6552
W0SSCR
121
23
540
102
W1SS227
228
47
1013
209
W2SS227
494
117
2200
519
W3SS227
1101
317
4897
1412
Step 3: Apply the load factor to the load/life equation below:
Life Constant DualVee Size inches of travel life kilometres of travel life
3
Life = L C / (L F) Where L F = Load Factor L C = Life Constant Life constants are provided in both inch and metric as tabulated.
0
1.65 x 106
41
1
2.19 x 106
55
2
3.47 x 106
87
3
5.19 x 106
130
4
6.84 x 106
171
4XL
8.58 x 106
215
Notes: 1. Basic Dynamic Load Rating, According to AFBMA STD 9-1990. Based on industry standard bearing calculations and are for comparison purposes only. Maximum working load figures should be used for component sizing and selection. 2. Basic Static Load Rating, According to AFBMA STD 9-1990. Based on industry standard bearing calculations and are for comparison purposes only. Maximum working load figures should be used for component sizing and selection. 3. Working load capacities reflect clean, well lubricated wheel/track interface. 4. For Operating Considerations - Lubrication; Track Splicing; Accuracy; Track Hardening; Contamination/Wear Resistance, Fit-up Adjustment and Wash-down Environments please go to our web site www.tea.net.au to download data pages. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
322
UtiliTrak® Linear Guide The UtiliTrak linear guide provides a narrow, compact profile solution that is well suited for a variety of environments where smooth, high speed motion is required. a It is the ideal choice for running two systems in parallel, where one slide used DualVee guide wheels and the other uses MadeWell™ crowned rollers. Because precise parallelism is difficult to achieve, it is not uncommon the mounting surfaces to be slightly out of parallel. UtiliTrak’s design compensates for mounting errors, and does not require absolute parallelism for accurate operation. The DualVee guide wheel carriage assembly and vee channel serves as the motion side, while the MadeWell crowned roller and open channel side allows for parallel misalignment. a Bridge connections further simplify assembly, and completes the system by joining the two slides and providing a stable mounting surface. a UtiliTrak is offered in two basic series; SW series steel guide wheels running on a hardened bearing steel channel for larger loads and smooth operation, and PW series polymer guide wheels running on an anodized aluminium channel, which provides a more economical choice for lighter duty applications where highly smooth operation is not as critical. A third option, Stainless Steel Composite UtiliTrak is ideal for higher loads where corrosion resistance is required.
SW Series - Ideal for medium to heavy duty transport applications, and offers high speeds, excellent load capacity, smooth antifriction operation and debris tolerance. • Channel is one-piece ground 52100 carbon steel • Running surface smooth to Ra 0.8 micrometers • Loads to 14040N • Speeds to 5.5m/s • Acceleration to 5 g’s • 3, 4, or 5 wheel carriage assemblies available • Available in sizes 1, 2 and 3 a
PW Series - Is a lightweight solution for light to medium duty transport applications, and offers corrosion resistance, low noise and wear resistance. • Channel is one-piece ground 6063-T6 aluminium alloy • Wheels feature chemically resistant high temperature polymer over-moulded on a stainless steel bearing • Built-in wiper caps at each end of the carriage clear debris from the track • Loads to 311N • Speeds to 1.5m/s • Acceleration to 3 g’s • 3 wheel carriage assemblies • Available in sizes 0, 1 and 2 a
Stainless Steel Composite Series - is a great option for high load requirements where carbon steel cannot be used due to corrosion. • Channel features induction heat treated 420 stainless steel DualVee track mounted to an extruded aluminium base • Stainless steel DualVee wheels feature sealed bearings • Loads to 5739N • Speeds to 5.5m/s • Acceleration to 5 g’s • 3 wheel carriage assemblies • Available in sizes 1, 2 and 3
Wheel size/model
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
Wheel Diam.
15 to 46mm (.58 to 1.8 in)
15 to 46mm, (.58 to 1.8 in)
Wheel Technology
DualVee 90o
Crown Roller
Steel (size 1, 2, 3)
Steel (size 1, 2, 3)
Polymer (size 0, 1, 2)
Polymer (size 0, 1, 2)
Wheel Material
Carriage Working load (smallest to largest size - based on 4 wheels) Axial Dynamic Load (LA)
88 to 7140N (20 to 1605 lbs)
Axial Load not recommended
Radial Dynamic Load (LR)
55 to 14040 N (12 to 3156 lbs)
55 to 14040 N (12 to 3156 lbs)
Vee Channel
Open Channel
Aluminium, Steel, Stainless Steel
Aluminium, Steel
Unlimited
Unlimited
3.6 mtr (11.9 ft) single piece
3.6 mtr (11.9 ft) single piece
Track Material Lengths
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
323
MinVee速 MinVee are compact linear slides designed to run on double edged track. (please contact T.E.A. Transmissions for data sheets for this track. Size 0 non-actuated MinVee linear slides are available with your choice of wheel carriage with steel or polymer DualVee Wheels. MinVee linear slides include stainless steel lubricators to provide lubricant to the track and wheel interface. Other options include stainless steel stand-offs for mounting track. MinVee linear slides feature a patented self-aligning mounting shoulder, reducing installation time and cost. Low profile MinVee linear slides are ideal for semiconductior, laboratory, medical and packaging applications.
Wheel size/model Wheel Diam.
0 15mm (.58 in)
Wheel Technology Wheel Material Carriage Working load - based on 4 wheels Axial Dynamic Load (LA) Radial Dynamic Load (LR) Track Material Lengths
DualVee 90o Double Row Bearings Steel or Polymer 67 to 540N (15 to 121 lbs) 65 to 490 N (14 to 110 lbs) Dual Edge Steel Unlimited
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
324
LoPro Belt Driven Systems • Complete belt actuated system, ready for installation • Long stroke, high speed and acceleration capability • AT style reinforced polyurethane belting • Linear accuracy of .008 in/ft (0.2mm/300mm) • Repeatable within .004 in (0.1mm) • Small and large drive options available on size 2 • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or un-mounted (without beams)
• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Standard and corrosion resistant versions available • Aluminum alloy drive end pulleys with aluminum or plated steel ?anges
Carriage Assembly Load Capacities
System Size
Axial Load Capacity L A N
1 2S/2L 3 4
Radial Load Capacity L R
lbs
N
lbs
MP
Pitch Moment Capacity M p
Yaw Moment Capacity M Y
N·m
N·m
988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220
ft·lbf
18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5
ft·lbf
Roll Moment Capacity M R N·m
62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174
LA
MR
ft·lbf
19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6
LR
MY
LoPro System Belt Load Capacities System Size
Belt Size
1
10AT5
Working Tensile Load N
lbs
630
142
Drive End Pulleys Pitch Diameter
28.7mm (1.128in)
Belt Teeth Shear Strength Formula (N)* (Approx.)
F=315-1.17V3+15.3V2-75.3V 3
2
Belt Teeth Shear Strength at V=0 m/s (N)*
Belt Teeth Shear Strength at V=5.5 m/s (N)*
315
169
2S
16AT5
1008
227
38.2mm (1.504in)
F=672-1.06V +18.4V -120V
672
392
2L
16AT10
2085
469
79.6mm (3.133in)
F=1407-2.59V3+34.2V2-208V
1407
867
3
20AT10
2606
586
95.5mm (3.759in)
F=1761-2.98V3+37.3V2-230V
1761
1128
95.5mm (3.759in)
3
2818
1805
4
32AT10
4170
937
2
F=2818-4.80V +60.0V -369V
If the customer plate will be subjected to shock loads, divide the permissible linear force by a safety factor of 1.4 (light shock) to 2 (high shock). V = Linear Speed. *The belt teeth shear strength is the permissable linear force which the drive pulley can apply to the carriage. The sum of the linear force applied to the carriage and the belt pretension load must not exceed the working tensile load.
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
325
LoPro Chain Driven Systems • Complete chain actuated system, ready for installation
• Ideal for vertical hoisting and large load actuation over long lengths
• Standard or corrosion resistant ANSI roller chain • Accurate to 0.4mm/300mm (.015 in/ft) • Repeatable within 0.2mm (.008 in) • Small and large drive options available on size 2 • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or unmounted (without beams)
• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Steel or stainless steel drive end sprockets MP
Carriage Assembly Load Capacities
System Size
Axial Load Capacity L A N
1 2S/2L 3 4
lbs
Radial Load Capacity L R N
lbs
LA
Pitch Moment Capacity M p
Yaw Moment Capacity M Y
Roll Moment Capacity M R
N·m
N·m
N·m
988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220
ft·lbf
18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5
ft·lbf
ft·lbf
62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174
LR
19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6
LoPro System Chain Load Capacities Static/Slow Speed Working Load System Size
Chain Size Single Strand N
lbs
N
MY
Drive End Sprockets Working Load at 0.5 m/s
Stainless Steel
Steel
MR
Stainless Steel
Steel
lbs
N
lbs
N
Pitch Diameter
No. of Teeth
lbs
1
25
431
97
347
78
267
60
214
48
24.5mm (.966in)
12
2S
35
1036
233
841
189
618
139
494
111
36.8mm (1.449in)
12
2L
35
1036
233
841
189
645
145
516
116
79.0mm (3.111in)
26
3
40
1975
444
1481
333
1152
259
863
194
93.3mm (3.672in)
23
4
50
3261
733
2322
522
1788
402
1272
286
91.4mm (3.599in)
18
Working load varies with speed, Please contact T.E.A Transmissions for specific application information. For further information and specification data downloads, please visit our web site www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
326
LoPro Lead Screw Driven Systems • Complete lead screw actuated system, ready for installation
• Standard (BY) or anti-backlash (NTBY & VHDY) nuts • Lead accuracies to .0006mm/mm (in/in) • Repeatable within 0.01mm (.0005 in) • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or unmounted (without beams)
• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Standard and corrosion resistant versions available
MP
rew
Carriage Assembly Load Capacities
System Size
Axial Load Capacity L A N
1 2 3 4
lbs
Radial Load Capacity L R N
lbs
Pitch Moment Capacity M p
Yaw Moment Capacity M Y
Roll Moment Capacity M R
N·m
N·m
N·m
988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220
ft·lbf
18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5
ft·lbf
62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174
Screw Diameter
Nut Type
in
19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6
1
1/4
2
3/8
3 4
1/2 5/8 3/4
Dynamic Load Capacity N
lbs
BY
222
50.0
NTBY
44
9.9
BY
334
75.0
NTBY
89
20.0
NTBY
444
100.0
BY
1000
225.0
BY
1556
350.0
VHDY
1556
350.0
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
327
MR
ft·lbf
Lead Screw Thrust Capacities
System Size
LA
LR
MY
LoPro Ball Screw Driven Systems • Complete ball screw actuated system, ready for installation
• Accurate to 100µm/300mm (.004 in/ft) • Repeatable within 0.07mm (.003 in) or better, depending on size of lead
• Aluminum support beams, steel beams or un-mounted (without beams)
• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts
MP
Carriage Assembly Load Capacities
System Size
Axial Load Capacity L A N
2 3 4
lbs
Radial Load Capacity L R N
lbs
Pitch Moment Capacity M p
Yaw Moment Capacity M Y
Roll Moment Capacity M R
N·m
N·m
N·m
2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220
ft·lbf
70.3 254.9 899.5
ft·lbf
202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174
Screw Diameter
Maximum Length
Lead
mm
mm
mm
N
lbs
2
10
3000
2
1250
281.0
3
2800
629.4
3
12
1500
73.8 274.1 865.6
16
1500
20
1800
4
Dynamic Load Capacity
5
2300
517.0
10
1500
337.2
5
5600
1258.9
10
5800
1303.8
5
8600
1933.3
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
328
MR
ft·lbf
Ball Screw Thrust Capacities
System Size
LA
LR
MY
®
LoPro Un-driven Systems • Complete non-actuated linear system, ready for immediate installation
• Standard aluminum and steel support beam options available
• Two standard available wheel plate options • Available in standard and corrosion resistant versions • High speed and acceleration capacity • Long stroke length capability (virtually unlimited)
MP
Carriage Assembly Load Capacities
System Size
Axial Load Capacity L A N
1 2S/2L 3 4
lbs
Radial Load Capacity L R N
lbs
Pitch Moment Capacity M p
Yaw Moment Capacity M Y
N·m
N·m
988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220
ft·lbf
18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5
ft·lbf
LA
Roll Moment Capacity M R N·m
62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174
MR
ft·lbf
19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6
LR
Basic Wheel Plate
Aluminum Support Beam Integral Wheel Lubricator
Lubricant Saturated Felt
For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.
329
MY
Hepco GV3 Linear Guidance and Transmission System The GV3 linear guidance and transmission system has been designed to provide the customer with an unrivalled choice of sizes and options to cater for virtually every linear motion requirement. In devising GV3, Hepco have retained the best features of their highly successful Generation 2 and CM Slide Systems in a greatly expanded range. Many new components have been added including Single Edge Slides, Flat Tracks and drive options. Customer may now choose Slides from three grades of precision and combine them with either Twin Bearings, Double Row Bearings or low cost Slimline Bearings. This enables the ideal system to be specified for optimum performance within the budget available. The reliability of Hepco's all steel slideway and V bearing concept has been proved conclusively over nearly fifty years. Improvements are continually being made to this fundamentally sound design resulting in a truly evolutionary system for the 21st century. By choosing GV3, customers can be assured of a quality and performance which surpasses all expectations.
CAD CD available
GV3 Benefits SMOOTH: FAST: ACCURATE: QUIET: DURABLE:
SIMPLE: VERSATILE:
ECONOMIC:
• High Accuracy and fine finish of components allows constant driving force without vibration. • Friction free motion allows smaller, lower cost motors to be selected. • Optimised Bearing and Slide interface design enables very high speeds with low wear. • Low stick friction and low inertia of Bearing rotation allows fast acceleration for shortest stroke. • High degree of Slide parallelism and minimum Bearing clearance results in virtually zero play. • Important dimensions accurately controlled for reliable system height and positional accuracy. • Specially designed Bearing and Slide geometry results in one of the quietest slide systems available. • All steel Slideway three times stiffer than composite aluminium slide systems. • All rugged construction suits high duty applications and harsh environments. • Lubrication devices available maximises life with no relubrication necessary in most instances. • Unique wiping action expels debris in environments where other systems fail. • Compliant bearing design for tolerance of misalignment. • Reliable performance confirmed by testing specify Hepco with confidence. • Easily understood proven technology little to go wrong and simple to maintain. • Hugh range of sizes, types and ancillary components available provides solution to most design problems. • Long lengths available up to 4mtrs. in most sizes saves on assembly time. • Works in any plane and orientation unrestricted use in machine construction. • Operates without lubrication ideal for food machinery and clean applications. • Driven systems available complete solutions from a single source saves design and administration time. • Choice of Slide precision and bearing design to match cost/performance requirements. • Designed for minimum installation time significantly reduces cost.
The following 30 pages describe Hepco's Linear Motion System with Standard Bearing Program. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au to view: Hepco's Linear Motion System with Slimline Bearing Program and Hepco's Linear Motion System incorporating Flat Tracks and Rollers.
330
Application Examples (E)
Eccentric (E)
Fixing Slides to Tubular Framework Ease of Alignment using all Eccentric Bearings
(E)
Hepco Single Edge Flat Slides have been designed to attach to the edges of many sizes of square or rectangular tube with sufficient protrusion of the Slide V running face to provide clearance for Hepco Bearings and Lubrication devices. The fixing hole positions have been regulated to clear the external corner radius of the tube and to allow attachment by means of standard sizes of hexagon bar. Alternatively, Slides can be attached by "Flowdrilling" or by welding.
Example shows the possibility to adjust the Hepco GV3 slide system in one plane, thus avoiding the necessity for precision drilling and fitting
(E)
Light Applications Where very light loads are anticipated, three Bearings may be used instead of the usual configuration of four. This saves on component cost and assembly time.
(C)
(E)
Low Height System A very compact slide system can be achieved by using Hepco Flat Slides in conjunction with Slimline Bearings and by choosing thin section material for the carriage and slide support.
Concentric (C)
Tamper Proof Carriage Hepco Carriages can be supplied "Tamper-proof" by pinning the Bearing studs once they have been factory adjusted to the Slide. After pinning, the counterbores are filled with resin.
Cap Seal (E)
(E)
Heavy Load Requirements For increased load capacity, additional Eccentric Bearings may be installed in between the outermost one. Multiple bearing installations benefit from the use of Controlled Height Bearings which ensure better load distribution. Cap Seals will also maximise load capacity (see load/life section). Please see pages 363-367 Hepco's Heavy Duty Slide System where very high loads are anticipated.
Eccentric (E)
(E)
(E) (E)
Concentric (C)
Wide Platform
(E) (E) Eccentric (E)
Rigidity is achieved at the extremities of a wide platform by mounting slides in parallel; this provides maximum support for a wide but short platform. Single Edge Slides (see pages 332-333) should be considered for a wide but (C) long platform. Alternatively, Hepco Flat Track with Track Rollers in conjunction with an opposing Double Edge Slide, will obviate the need to set slides parallel. Please see our web site: www.tea.net.au for more data.
331
Removable Carriage This example shows how a Carriage incorporating Double Eccentric type Bearings can be taken off a Slide in any position without running the Carriages off the end. This facility saves having to dismantle part of the machine in cases where the ends of the Slide are 'Blocked".
System Composition Pages 332-333 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion system. Below is shown the basic range of Slides and components available with Hepco's Standard Twin and Double Row Bearings. A similar range is available with Hepco's Slimline Bearings. Components are available factory assembled where possible or as individual parts if preferred. Many sizes and types of Hepco component can be interchanged to achieve an unrivalled combination of space and performance possibilities.
ALL SLIDES (COMMON FEATURES) pages 344-349
LUBRICATOR Lubricates contact surfaces increasing load capacity and life. Can be attached from either side of a carriage. Lightly sprung felt wiper ensures low friction. Flanged and Compact versions available. Long lubrication interval.
One piece construction for assured parallelism and rigidity. Manufactured from high quality bearing steel. Deep hardened ‘V’ faces for maximum wear resistance. Soft centre section allows customising. Wide range of sizes to choose from. 3 grades of precision to suit cost/performance requirements. Any length supplied up to 4 metres, unground grade to 6 metres. Unlimited length achieved by butting. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground faces. Common 70° ‘V’ allows many bearing/slide combinations.
* Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet
gSINGLE EDGE FLAT SLIDE / DOUBLE EDGE FLAT SLIDE pages 348-349 g Lower weight for less inertia where Slide is the moving component. g Lower cost in cases where spacer is part of customer's construction. g Plain hole, or counterbored fixing option for flush top surface. g A number of widths for each basic section gives 11 sections to choose from. g Can be spaced apart for high moment load capacity.
CAP SEALS g Lubricates contact surfaces increasing load
capacity and life. “Lubricated for life” in most applications. Seals against ingress of debris. Improves operational safety. Enhances appearance of system. Incorporates both through hole and tapped hole fixing facility. * Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet
g g g g g
PINIONS Bored type and integral shaft type available. Hardened teeth for long life. 2Keyway provided in bored type pinion. Shaft type pinion compatible with Hepco Rack Driven Carriage. Shaft type pinion compatible with Hepco Motor Gearboxes. * Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet
g g g g g
DOUBLE EDGE SPACER SLIDE pages 350-351 g Mounts directly to a flat surface. No spacer required. g Keyway and datum edges provide means of location
SINGLE EDGE SPACER SLIDE pages 346-347 g g g g g g g g
Mounts directly to a flat surface. No spacer required. Can be spaced apart for high moment load capacity. Keyway and datum edges provide means of location and alignment. Counterbored hole fixing, tapped hole fixing or undrilled options available. Plastic hole plugs provided to avoid debris traps. Rack cut option provides means of driving. Back face provides mounting register, or running surface for Track Roller. 5 sections to choose from.
332
and alignment. g Counterbored hole fixing, tapped hole fixing or
undrilled options available. g Plastic hole plugs provided to avoid debris traps. g A number of widths for each basic section gives 11
sections to choose from.
System Composition The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem. ALL BEARINGS (COMMON FEATURES & OPTIONS) Pages 350-351 g Special raceway conformity and low radial clearance, for Slide applications. g Twin bearing for tolerance of misalignment and smooth running. g Double row bearing for tolerance of debris and higher load capacity. g Range of 5 useful sizes to choose from. g Metal shields for exclusion of particulates and low friction running. g Nitrile sealed version prevents ingress of liquids.
CONCENTRIC BEARING Pages 350-351 Provides datum reference for the system. Short fixing stud for thin carriage plate. Long fixing stud for thick carriage plate. Controlled height option improves system height accuracy.
g g g g
DOWEL PINS Pages 345 & 347 g Easy method of location and alignment.
ECCENTRIC BEARING Pages 350-351 g Provides simple means of adjustment via centre hexagon or socket each end. g Short fixing stud for thin carriage plate. g Long fixing stud for thick carriage plate. g Controlled height option improves system height accuracy.
CARRIAGE / CARRIAGE PLATE Pages 338-343 g Factory adjusted to chosen Slide, or supplied as a kit of parts. g Available with Bearings only, or with the addition of Cap Seals or Lubricators. g Useful size platform with flush surface for mounting purposes. g Tapped holes in convenient positions for attachment purposes. g Groove along sides to provide register for switch brackets etc. g Carriages available for all 11 Slide sections in all grades. g 3 lengths available in each size and most types. g Tamper proof option. g Removable option for direct disengagement from Slide. g Controlled height option for special accuracy requirements.
DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BEARINGS Pages 350-351 g Eccentric throw sufficient for direct removal of Carriage from Slide. g All attributes of the standard Eccentric version apply.
}
Pages g BLIND HOLE CONCENTRIC BEARING 350-351 • BLIND HOLE ECCENTRIC BEARING g• For mounting into thick plates or where access to opposite side restricted. • Adjustable from operating side for ease of access.
gTWIN BEARING/DOUBLE ROW BEARING
Pages 350-351 g Twin bearing for tolerance of misalignment and
smooth running. • Double row bearing for tolerance of debris and high load capacity. g• Special raceway conformity and low radial clearance, for Slide applications. g• General quality to ISO Class 4. Aspects to Class 2. g• Made in Hepco factory which has the following accreditation: - ISO 9001 Aerospace Sector Certification TS 157
333
Linear Motion Sy stem Incorporating Flat Tracks & Rollers Pages 334/5 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion programme. Below is shown the extensive range of Flat Tracks and Track Rollers compatible with Hepco' s linear motion systems. See page 336 for the varied ways in which they can be used. The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem. FLAT TRACK page 352 Choose from ground all over, ground on 2 opposing faces, or unground. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground faces. Deep hardened faces for maximum wear resistance. Manufactured from high quality carbon steel. Offset fixing holes for versatility of mounting. 4 useful sizes compatible with Hepco V Slides. Any length supplied up to 4 metres in most sizes. Unlimited length achieved by butting.
NARROW TRACK ROLLER (CONCENTRIC) page 353 W IDE ROLLER (CONCENTRIC)
Download at www.tea.net.au
TRACK ROLLERS (COMMON FEATURES) page 353 Size and load capacity equivalent to Hepco V Bearing. Special raceway conformity with low radial clearance. Range of 4 useful sizes to choose from. Crowned running face for tolerance of misalignment. Metal shields for exclusion of particulates and low friction running. Nitrile sealed version prevents ingress of liquids. Designed to run on Track or back face of Single Edge Spacer Slides. General quality to ISO Class 4. Aspects to Class 2. Made in Hepco factory which has the following accreditation: ISO 9001 - Aerospace Sector Certification TS 157.
Provides datum reference for the system. SLIMLINE ROLLER (ECCENTRIC) W IDE ROLLER (ECCENTRIC)
Download at www.tea.net.au Provides simple means of adjustment.
BLIND HOLE, W IDE, CONCENTRIC ROLLER BLIND HOLE, W IDE, ECCENTRIC ROLLER
Download at www.tea.net.au For mounting into thick plates or where access to opposite side restricted. Adjustable from operating side for ease of access. Provides datum reference for the system.
334
Linear Motion Sy stem w ith Drive Facility / Support Structure Pages 334-5 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion programme. Below is shown the range of GV3 products available with enhanced features to provide a complete engineering package. The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem.
BELT DRIVEN CARRIAGE Pages 340-341 Use with Flat Slides, Spacer Slides or Slide Beams in all grades of precision. Choice of 5 sizes each available in two useful lengths. Integral belt tensioners for ease of adjustment. Removable mounting platform for ease of customising. Tapped holes for convenience of attaching components. Available with most Hepco Standard Bearing variants and Lubrication devices.
TIMING PULLEY S Low backlash profile for high positional accuracy. W idth to suit Belt Driven Carriages. Diameter enables belt return through Slide Beam.
TIMING BELT High strength, steel reinforced AT profile open length belt. Cut to length, up to 50 m. W idths to suit Hepco Belt Driven Carriages & Pulleys.
RACK DRIVEN CARRIAGE UNIT Pgs 342-343 Carriage includes drive pinion & AC geared motor or gearbox. Carriages available to suit 7 rack-slide sizes. Size, shape, and drive position bespoke to your requirements. Carriages available with all Standard Bearing types and Lubrication devices. Fine adjustment facility for pinion assures low backlash. Gearbox, Flange, Pinions & Motor are available separately for use in your own design, or with rack cut single edge slides or separate racks.
SLIDE BEA MS Can be used as machine construction member. Strong section, spans wide gaps. Available up to 8 metres in one piece. Choice of 2 beam sections and 5 Slide widths. Slides available in 3 grades of precision. Lightweight version available. Counterbored Slide version for belt support. Hollow centre for belt, cable or chain return. T slots for attaching components. Plastic T slot covers, T nuts and fixing clamps available.
SEPARATE RACK As used in Rack-Slide assembly. 4 sizes available. Lengths up to 1.83 m, longer lengths achievable by butting.
PINIONS Please see previous page for features.
335
RACK-SLIDE ASSEMBLY Dowelled Rack-Slide assembly is ready to fix to your mounting surface. Available in 10 useful sizes and 3 grades of precision for Slide. Slides with compound racks available up to 4 metres, unground slide grade to 6 metres. Unlimited Rack-Slide length achieved by butting. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground Slide faces and on Rack.
Application Examples
1
2
Air Flow Tests for Racing Car Nose Cone Design
1
Cantilevered Linear Guide Short stroke sliding movements may be supported from one only, using long series Hepco Flange Clamps 1 . Flange Clamps may be bolted to either side of the supporting framework and are available with either through holes or tapped holes.
Hepco Slide systems are capable of continuous operation at extremely high speed. The factor which limits speed is the build up of heat in the bearings. Intermittent use as in the application allows the heat to disperse thus making even higher speeds possible. The application shows a very long system using Hepco Double Edge Flat Sides 1 with a model racing car nose cone mounted onto a Belt Driven Carriage. Lubricators 2 . are used to apply a film of oil to the 'V' faces of the Slide without imposing significant friction. The aerodynamic forces are measured by a load cell mounted on the Carriage.
Dipping System for Plating Vat 1
1
2
Simple Two Axis Connection Hepco short series Flange Clamps 1 are an ideal method of connecting opposing Carriages and creating a second axis which can be easily installed or removed. Care should be taken to ensure parallelism between slides. Using Hepco Flat Track and Track rollers in place of one of the slides will overcome the necessity to set parallel (please go to www.tea.net.au for more data).
A basket of parts is lowered into vat by means of Rack Driven Carriage 1 and Rack Mounted Slide 2 , available for Hepco has complete unit. System includes AC Motor gearbox and pinion with micro adjustment for correct tooth engagement. The system is able to withstand high transmission forces and provides a low cost reliable solution capable of working in a hostile environment.
1 2
1
3
Rolled Slide for Curved Applications
Multi-lane Row Divider Hepco Flange Clamps 1 can be used to support a Double Edge Spacer Slide 2 in a number of positions by utilising the base mounting facility. No oil is permitted in this examples, so bearings 3 are used without Cap Seals or Lubricators. The GV3 system is well suited to run "dry" especially in lighter duty applications.
336
Hepco Flat Slides 1 can be rolled to any diameter above 500 mm depending on section and whether hardened or not (unhardened slides available to special order). Also, Slides in unrolled condition may be bolted to a gently curved surface. Bearing mounting faces on the carriage should be machined so that each pair of Bearing is perpendicular to the slide. Please contact T.E.A. for further information.
System Selector The customer has a wide choice of Hepco GV3 components in order to satisfy most linear requirements. To facilitate the selection process, the most commonly used components for basic slide system have been tabulated to show comparative benefits when used within a complete system. The benefits in the table are the important ones which can be shown in comparative form and are by no means exhaustive. Please see the system composition section pages 332-333 and pages relating to the individual components for other features, benefits and variants.
Bearing Type
Load Speed
Tolerance of Smoothness Misalignment
Rigidity
System Height
Tolerance of Debris
Price
Standard Pattern Twin Type
Standard Pattern Double Row Type
Slimline Pattern
Slide Precision Grade
= ground surface
General Accuracy
Smoothness/ Quietness
Friction
Price
P1 P2 P3 Lubrication Method
None
Load
Lubrication Interval
Debris Exclusion
Friction
Safety & Appearance
* *
Lubricators
Cap Seals or Cap Wipers
*The Hepco 'V' bearing principle has a natural wiping action which tends to expel debris. The above information is a general guide intended for preliminary selection purposes only.
337
Price
Standard Carriages Hepco Standard Carriages are available to suit all sizes and types of Double Edge Slide in all grades of precision. Each Carriage comes complete with 4 Standard Bearings and is available in 3 useful lengths to cater for customers' component size and offset load requirements. The Carriage Plates are fully machined from aluminium alloy and are supplied anodised. Tapped holes are provided in convenient positions to enable components to be attached. Carriages may be specified as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the Slide. Alternatively, the carriage may be specified as a Kit of Components (K type) for customers wishing to carry out their own assembly. The following types or options of Bearing and lubrication device may be specified (refer also to availability table below right). The Twin Bearing type which is the default choice, comprises two individual bearings on a common stud. This construction offers some compliance, with smoother running, easy adjustment and greater tolerance of misalignment. The Double Row Bearing type (DR) incorporates a one piece bearing with two ball tracks. This offers higher load capacity, especially in the radial direction and is less susceptible to entrapment of debris. See examples on page 326.
Example: Short Carriage with Lubricators on a Flat Slide
Part Number AU 12P1/P2 13... AU 12P3 13... 20 18... AU 28 18... AU 25 25... AU 35 25... AU 50 25... AU 44 34... AU 60 34... AU 76 34... AU 76 54... AU 120 54... AU
For Use With Slides MS 12 MS 12 V 20 V 28 S 25 S 35 S 50 M 44 M 60 M 76 L 76 L 120
& & & & & & & & & & & &
NMS 12 NMS 12 NV 20 NV 28 NS 25 NS 35 NS 50 NM 44 NM 60 NM 76 NL 76 NL 120
Bearing Ø
A ~
B
13 13 18 18 25 25 25 34 34 34 54 54
12 12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120
40 40 64 72 80 95 112 116 135 150 185 240
D*6
C 7.34 7.34 10 11 11.5 12.5 14 14.5 17 18 20 24
35 35 43 52 51 70 80 88 110 130 140 180
60 60 55 80 74 90 100 103 125 165 198 258
E 85 85 95 130 120 140 160 153 205 265 298 378
30 17 30 17 50 20 58 25 65 24 80 40 95 50 96 50 115 60 130 80 160 90 210 120
6
F*6 25 25 44 55 60 65 70 80 90 110 135 165
G* No of Holes x Thread 50 50 62 80 82 90 100 103 130 160 185 225
4 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M6 4 x M6 4 x M6 4 x M8 4 x M8 4 x M8 4 x M10 4 x M10
4 x M4 4 x M4 6 x M5 6 x M5 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M10 6 x M10
4 x M4 4 x M4 6 x M5 6 x M5 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M10 6 x M10
2
H – – 57 65 78.5 88.5 103.5 116 132 148 182 226
J* P1
P2 & P3
19 19 24.75 25.75 30.5 31.5 33 38.5 41 42 58.5 62.5
19.2 19.2 24.95 25.95 30.7 31.7 33.2 38.7 41.2 42.2 58.7 62.7
*Notes: 1. Maximum loads quoted assume lubrication at the interface of Bearings and Slide. This can best be achieved by using Cap Seals or Lubricators. It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using the methods shown in the Calculations section. The bearing static and dynamic load capacities (C and Co) often quoted by manufacturers are not the best basis for practical life calculations. C and Co figures are included on the Bearing pages for comparison. 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to which grade of slide is selected. All Carriages are compatible with all grades of Slide with the exception of the smallest (size 12-13). Two sizes of 12-13 Carriages are therefore required, AU 12P1/P2 13 which is suitable for slide grades P1 and P2, and AU 12P3 13 which is suitable for slide grade P3. 3. Carriage size AU 28 18 incorporates a recess in the underside for fixing screw clearance when used with size V28 Flat Slide. The V dimension in the table includes for this recess. 4. The datum mark identifies the reference edge used in manufacture. The concentric Bearings are always mounted on this side. 5. CH (Controlled Height) Bearings are selected to be within 0.005 mm in respect of 'B1' dimension on pages 336-337 compared to Standard Bearings which are within 0.025mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of Carriages should state this on their order. 6. Carriages are available in 3 standard lengths, therefore bearing centres 'D' and the number and position of component mounting holes 'G' will vary accordingly. Hepco will make carriages to your special length requirement on request. 7. The carriage plate bearing centres are optimised for use with any precision grade of slide. Customers making their own carriage should calculate their bearing and Lubricator/Cap Seal mounting centres for the particular slide grade selected. Please see Assembled Systems or individual component pages for details of calculations.
338
Standard Carriages The Nitrile Sealed Bearing option (NS) provides a higher degree of sealing against ingress of water or debris than does the default metal shielded type. A small increase in friction may result. The Controlled Height Bearing option (CH) minimizes variation between Bearings in respect of the important 'Q' dimension. This may be desirable in some high precision applications *5 The Tamper Proof option (T) which prevents any adjustment or removal of the Bearing assemblies, may be desirable if equipment is to be maintained by untrained personnel. The Cap Seal option (CS) ensures best possible lubrication of the V contact surfaces and protects against ingress of debris. Operational safety and system appearance are also improved. Lubrication vastly increases load capacity and life. Depending on stroke, duty and environmental factors, no further lubrication is required. Access to Cap Seal fixing screws is from the top of the Carriage for ease of adjustment. The Lubricator option (LB) applies oil to the V contact surfaces by means of lightly sprung felt pads which are charged with oil to give long intervals between re-lubrication. The Lubricator option is useful where the advantages of increased load and life are required but with lower friction compared to the cap seals.
Example: Medium Length Carriage with Cap Seals on a Spacer Slide
L*
K
6
N*2
M
P1 & P2
– – 14 14 18 18 18 22.5 22.5 22.5 36.5 36.5
50 50 65 75 80 100 110 125 150 170 200 240
75 75 100 125 135 150 160 180 200 240 300 360
100 100 140 175 180 200 220 225 280 340 400 480
8.5 4 x 1.8 8.5 4 x 1.8 12 5x2 6 x 2.5 20 6 x 2.5 15 25 8x3 10 x 3.5 40 26 8x3 10 x 3.5 42 58 12 x 4 50 15 x 5 45 x 9.5 94
P P3
8.9 8.9 12.4 20.4 15.4 25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4 50.4 94.4
R*2
Q P1
10.1 10.1 12.4 12.4 16.6 16.6 16.6 21.3 21.3 21.3 34.7 34.7
5.46 1.49 5.46 1.49 6.75 2.1 6.75 2.1 2.36 9 2.36 9 2.34 9 3.08 11.5 3.05 11.5 3.05 11.5 4.56 19 4.56 19
S
T
– – 42 42 55 55 55 70 70 70 98 98
7 7 11 11 13 13 13 15 15 15 27 27
V*2,3
W Ø x depth
3.8 – 3.8 – 2.5 4.5 2.5 5.5 6.5 3 6.5 3 6.5 3 8.3 4 8.3 4 8.3 4 14.3 6 14.3 6
12.5 x 4.8 12.5 x 4.8 16 x 7 16 x 8 22 x 8.4 22 x 9.4 22 x 10.9 25 x 8.7 25 x 11 25 x 12.5 32 x 13.5 32 x 17.5
U
P2 & P3
1.6 1.6 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 4.7 4.7
~Weight (kg) 0.07 0.07 0.21 0.25 0.41 0.53 0.67 1.1 1.5 1.8 3.8 5.5
0.09 0.09 0.27 0.36 0.54 0.7 0.89 1.4 1.8 2.3 4.8 7.4
0.11 0.11 0.34 0.47 0.66 0.86 1.2 1.6 2.3 3.1 5.8 9.3
Max DR L1 – – 760 760 1600 1600 1600 3600 3600 3600 10000 10000
Load Capacity (N)*1 L2 L1 DR L2 240 240 – 240 240 – 400 500 1200 400 500 1200 3000 1280 1200 3000 1280 1200 3000 1280 1200 6000 3200 2800 6000 3200 2800 6000 3200 2800 10000 7200 6400 10000 7200 6400
Ordering Details
Assembled Carriages will be adjusted to the Slide to make a system. Simply state the number of systems with the number of carriages per slide: Example: 2 x (3 x AU6034 L200 CS DR + NM60 L3056 P1) (2 systems each with 3 carriages per slide)
Availability of Carriage Options
*Not available on short carriages.
339
T Tamper Proof
*
Controlled Height
NS CS LB CH
Lubricators
–
Cap seals
Part Number AU 12... 13... AU 20 18... AU 28 18... Larger sizes
DR
Nitrile Seals
–
Metal Shields
T = Tamper Proof option Leave blank if not required 5 CH = Controlled Height Bearings* Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Bearings Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Bearings Leave blank if not required
Double Row
Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage K... = Kit of parts CP... = Carriage plate only Carriage Length ‘L’ = 180mm Lubrication Options CS for Cap Seals* or LB for Lubricators Leave blank if not required
Twin Bearings
AU4434 L180 (CS) (DR) (NS) (CH) (T) + Slide Part Number
Belt Driven Carriages Hepco Belt Driven Carriages are available to suit 10 sizes of Double Edge benefits of the Standard along with many additional features:
in all grades of precision. They have all of the
Carriages may be specified with the Removable Option which is the key feature of the Removable . This allows at any position along its length, without the need for complete disassembly. the carriage to be disengaged from the Each Belt Driven Carriage incorporates a base plate and a Removable Top Plate which can simply be unscrewed and reworked as required. Tapped holes are provided in convenient positions to enable components to be attached. Belt Driven Carriages are normally supplied as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the , lubrication devices and load capacities is given on the page for Standard Information regarding the options for
. * 1.
The Belt Driven Carriage incorporates an integral Belt Gripper & Tensioner at each end. The Gripper securely holds the toothed belt and the fixing screws allow controlled pretensioning and adjustment.
Ex ample: Short Carriage w ith Cap Seals on a Spacer Slide LP* 4
Optional Toothed Belt Belt Pitches are AT5 & AT10 F B
A
F
E U
Belt W idths are 20 (for AT5) 25 (for AT10) Max length = 50m V
G Tapped Holes for Customer Use* 4
L* 4 C C
J K M
Spacer Slide
Part Number AU BD 35 AU BD 50 AU BD 44 AU BD 60 AU BD 76
25... 25... 34... 34... 34...
S
N
Cap Seal
H
Bearing For Use Ø W ith Slides 25 S 35 & NS 35 25 S 50 & NS 50 34 M 44 & NM 44 34 M 60 & NM 60 34 M 76 & NM 76
Carriage Part Number AU BD 35 25... AU BD 50 25... AU BD 44 34... AU BD 60 34... AU BD 76 34...
Part Number TP20...& IP20... TP20...& IP20... TP25...& IP25... TP25...& IP25... TP25...& IP25...
W 49.5 49.5 67 67 67
A
B
D *4
C
F *4
E
G *4
35 50 44 60 76
90 112 116 135 150
W1 47 47 67 67 67
13 14 15 17 18
70 82 95 119 139
Pull ey s X 25 25 30 30 30
X1 27 27 32 32 32
150 162 168 199 239
48 60 65 75 100
Y 12 12 15 15 15
50 50 60 75 80
Z 39.4 39.4 56.8 56.8 56.8
100 90 90 115 130
4 4 6 6 6
x x x x x
M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
No of Teeth
27 27 20 20 20
6 6 6 6 6
J *2
H
No of Holes x Thread
x x x x x
M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
Belt Part No. DB 20 AT5... DB 20 AT5... DB 25 AT10... DB 25 AT10... DB 25 AT10...
88 103 114 130 146
P1
P2 & P3
45 47 54 58 60
45.2 47.2 54.2 58.2 60.2
Belt Tension * 5 W orking
Max
560 560 1225 1225 1225
5390 5390 12450 12450 12450
* Notes: page. It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using the methods shown in the section. 1. For load capacities see Standard 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to the grade of slide selected. All Carriages are compatible with all grades of . are selected to be within ±0.005 mm in respect of ' B1' dimension on pages 50-51 compared to Standard Bearings which are 3. CH (Controlled Height) within ±0.025 mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of Carriages should state this on their order. 4. Carriages are available in 2 standard lengths, therefore centres ‘D’ and the number and position of component mounting holes ‘G’ will vary accordingly. Hepco will make carriages to your special length requirements on request. 5. The Max belt tension stated relates to the breaking load, and is provided for comparison purposes only. The working belt tension should not be exceeded when used with Hepco pulleys and grippers. or controlled height . 6. The removable option is not available in conjunction with 7. The IP 25 P15 idler pulley is fitted with 2 off 6302 2RS deep groove ball bearings (C = 11400N, Co = 5400N per bearing). The IP 20 P12 idler pulley is fitted with 2 off 6001 2RS deep groove ball bearings (C = 5070N, Co = 2360N).
340
Belt Driven Carriages In addition to the Carriage, Hepco will supply the necessary belt and pulleys to complete the system. Belts are steel reinforced polyurethane, and have the high strength AT tooth profile. Bored drive pulleys with zero backlash AT profile teeth are available in one size to provide a useful driving ratio for most applications. Idler pulleys are plain without teeth and are supplied complete with fitted deep groove ball bearings, ready to fit onto a shaft. Customers wishing to run the Carriage on a Flat would otherwise foul the heads of the screws.
must specify the counterbored slide fixing hole option as the belt
Customers requiring a beam mounted Belt Driven Carriage with pulleys should consider the Hepco DLS Linear Transmission which is a complete ready to mount positioning system including drive motor if required. Please send for the DLS catalogue. See Application Ex amples on page 133
Ex ample: Short Carriage w ith Lubricators on a Flat Slide
Y
Optional Toothed Drive Pulley
Z
W
X
Y
Optional Plain Idler Pulley
Z
W1
Belt Gripper & Tensioner
Belt Tensioning Screws
End Cover
Belt Clamp Screw
X1 Deep groove ball d)*7 bearings (
T - Top Plate Fixing Screws
Clamp Plate
Removable Top Plate
Belt Gripper
Tension Set Screw
C Belt
C Q
P R Eccentric Bearing
K 18 18 22.5 22.5 22.5
L *4 150 160 200 224 244
230 240 280 304 344
LP *4 138 148 184 208 228
M
218 8x3 228 10 x 3.5 264 8 x 3 288 10 x 3.5 328 12 x 4
Ordering Details
Lubricator
Flat Slide
Concentric Bearing
N *2
P
P1 & P2
P3
25 40 26 42 58
25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4
Q
16.6 9 16.6 9 21.3 11.5 21.3 11.5 21.3 11.5
D
R *2 P1
P2 & P3
2.4 2.4 3.1 3.1 3.1
2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2
T *4
S 55 55 70 70 70
4 5 5 5 5
x x x x x
M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
5 5 5 5 5
U x x x x x
M6 70 M6 88 M8 90 M8 109 M8 124
AUBD4434 L200 (R) (CS) (DR) (NS) (CH) (T) +
Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage Carriage Length ‘L’ = 200 mm R = Removable Carriage Option Leave blank if not required* 6 Lubrication Options or LB for CS = Leave blank if not required
V *4 97 112 130 156 188
180 192 215 236 288
Carriage ~Weight ( kg) *4 1.2 1.7 1.6 2.3 2.0 2.8 3.4 4.3 4.1 5.6
Part Number
T= option Leave blank if not required CH = Controlled Height *3 Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Leave blank if not required
Ordering Details for Pulley s & Belts TP 20 AT5 T27 P12 0 TP 25 AT10 T20 P15 0 IP 20 P12 IP 25 P15 DB 20 AT5 L2345 DB 25 AT10 L3456
Toothed Drive Pulley for 20 mm wide AT5 belt with 27 teeth & 12 mm plain bore. Toothed Drive Pulley for 25 mm wide AT10 belt with 20 teeth & 15 mm plain bore. Idler Pulley for 20 mm wide belt with fitted bearings to run on 12 mm Ø shaft. Idler Pulley for 25 mm wide belt with fitted bearings to run on 15 mm Ø shaft. Drive Belt 20 mm wide with AT5 tooth profile. L2345 is the required length in mm. Drive Belt 25 mm wide with AT10 tooth profile. L3456 is the required length in mm.
341
Rack Driven Carriages Hepco Rack Driven Carriages are available to suit 5 sizes of Double Edge Spacer (with fitted racks) in all grades of precision. They have all of the benefits of the Standard type along with many additional features including microwith the rack. adjustment facility for achieving the correct engagement of the Rack Driven Carriages include the Hepco Worm , Drive and Shaft of suitable ratio. The Gearbox may be supplied coupled with an intergral Hepco AC Motor which is the most economical means of producing point-to-point linear motion, and which may be controlled for speed and acceleration via the , which is available from Hepco. The Gearbox can also be supplied with an adaptor flange and input shaft coupling tailored to suit other makes or types of motors including steppers and servos which benefit from the low backlash of the Hepco Gearbox. Bespoke carriages are available on short delivery for customers wishing to use their own motor, gearbox and pinion. Part Number AU RD 44 34... AU RD 60 34... AU RD 76 34... AU RD 76 54... AU RD 120 54...
Use with Slides NM 44...R NM 60...R NM76...R NL76...R NL120...R
A ~ 44 60 76 76 120
F1*4
F
B
G
G1
G2
H
28.8 20.3 12.3 27.2 24.5
22 22 22 33 33
97.8 105.3 113.3 141.2 182.5
56 56 56 80 80
J
K
N
P
P1
18 18 18 20 20
22.5 22.5 22.5 36.5 36.5
70 70 70 98 98
Standard Removable
38.2 72.3 74.8 29.7 88.3 90.8 21.7 104.3 106.8 41.2 119.1 123 38.5 163.1 167
133 144 154 193 240
43 74.1 43 74.1 74.1 43 100.6 57 119.8 111.3
Please see other table for dimensions C, D, E & L L M - Tapped holes for customer use (optional)* 5
E D
C
=
= Double Edge Spacer Slide Rack Assembly
For dimensions & specifications of the AC Motor, Worm Gearbox & Drive Flange see pages 354-355
B
G1
F1
~A
G2
V - rack & pinion tooth size (module)
G1 F
G
y Datum point for customer holesM
x
J K
Cap Seal (optional)
Lubricator (optional) V1 Pinion PCD
Concentric Bearings on this side
Shaft Pinion BlankingPlugs for Cap Seal & Lubricator holes supplied as necessary
Pinion adjuster for correct mesh
Worm Gearbox with hollow shaft BlankingPlugs x 4 (supplied)
W1
Drive Flange
W2
W
W3
W4
N S
Q
P T U
R
P1
Q1
Z
* Notes: 1. The maximum load capacities quoted on the Standard and Removable pages, assume lubrication at the interface of and . This can best be achieved by using or . It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using methods shown in the section. 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to the grade of selected. All are compatible with all grades of Slide. 3. CH (Controlled Height) are selected to be within Âą0.005 mm in respect of ' B1' dimension on pages 350-351compared to Standard Bearings which are within Âą0.025 mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of should state this on their order. 4. The Carriage and fixing centres F1 are optimised for use with any precision grade of . Customers making their own carriage plate should calculate their drilling centres for the particular grade of Slide selected. Please see Assembled Systems or individual component page for details of calculations. 5. Any number and size of tapped mounting holes ' M' can be provided in any available position. These may be specified in the ordering details after the designation M by stating the co-ordinates X & Y relative to the datum point, followed by the tapped hole size. Ex ample: M - X10Y25M6 - x=10 mm, y=25 mm, hole size = M6. Care should be taken to avoid any hole position that bridges the contact area between and carriage plate as this will allow grease to escape. 6. The removable option is not available in conjunction with or Controlled Height . 7. The quoted rack drive force is determined by the rack and size, bearings and gears, and the duty. Please go to our web site: www.tea.net to download drive calculations.
342
Rack Driven Carriages Carriages may be specified as the Removable type which incorporates Double Eccentric and allows the disengagement of the from the at any position along its length without the need for complete disassembly. . More Rack Driven Carriages are normally supplied as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the specific information regarding the options for , lubrication devices and load capacities is given on the pages for both Standard and Removable * 1. For details of linear drive performance, please see the section. For best performance, the teeth should be lubricated with No. 2 consistency lithium soap-based grease.
See Application E xample on page 336 Q 21.3 21.3 21.3 34.7 34.7
Q1
R
34 34 34 54 54
T
S
17 17 17 25 25
P1
P2 & P3
42 42 42 58.5 58.5
42.25 42.25 42.25 58.75 58.75
8 10 12 15 45
U
V
V1
P1 & P2
P3
MOD
PCD
26 42 58 50 94
26.5 42.5 58.5 50.5 94.5
1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2
42 42 42 54 54
W
W1
W2
W3
W4
Z
35 35 35 34.5 34.5
71 71 71 72.5 72.5
5.4 5.4 5.4 6.5 6.5
7.5 7.5 7.5 9.5 9.5
25 25 25 32 32
118 118 118 147 147
Rack Drive Force/N* 7 400 400 400 700 700
Specify ing the Format and Size of the Carriage 3 styles of Carriage are available with motor mounting positions as shown in the diagram below. The style and size are specified by selecting the required values for dimensions C, D, E, & L in the table below the diagram. Any values for these dimensions may be chosen subject to the recommended limitations in the table. If Lubricators are specified with style 2 Carriage, these will be offset to one another as indicated in the diagram. The motor and gearbox can be mounted in any one of 8 orientations. Please see pages 354-355 for details. L C
L
L E
E C
D
Style 1
Style 2
E D
C
D
Style 3
D1
Minimum Recommended Values
Carriage Style
Part Number
Style 1
AU RD...34... AU RD...54... AU RD...34... AU RD...54... AU RD...34... AU RD...54...
Style 2 Style 3
C 36 51 36 51 E+92* E+119*
With Cap S eals E D C+D+92* F1 F1 C+D+119* 182* C+92* 237* C+119* F1 59 F1 73.5
C L 18 E+60 28 E+75 18 C+D+36 28 C+D+51 C+D+36 E+73* C+D+51 E+91*
W ith Lubricators D1 D E – F1 C+D+73* – F1 C+D+91* 124 177* C+89* 154 235* C+118* – F1 59 – F1 73.5
L E+60 E+75 C+D+18 C+D+28 C+D+18 C+D+28
Figures marked * are the minimums which can be achieved without the flange covering the stud counterbore or the or fixings. Smaller values of these dimensions can be achieved if overlap is acceptable to the customer. W hen specifying such reduced dimensions, the customer should ensure that the does not interfere with either Bearings, Cap Seals or Lubricators.
Ordering Details AURD4434 L288 C36 D100 E228 (M) (R ) (DR) (NS) (CH) (CS) (T) Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage Carriage Length ‘L’ = 288mm Dimension ‘C’ = 36 mm Dimension ‘D’ = 100 mm Dimension ‘E’ = 228 mm M - Customer mounting holes* 5 Leave blank if not required R for Removable Carriage Option Leave blank if not required* 6
T = Tamper Proof option Leave blank if not required Lubrication Options: CS for or LB for Leave blank if not required CH = Controlled Height *3 Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Leave blank if not required
AC Motor/ W orm Gearbox page 50-51 - Please state part number as the second line of your order. Double Edge Spacer Slide Rack Assembly pages 344-345 Please state part number as the third line of your order.
343
Double Edge Spacer Slides Hepco Double Edge Spacer Slides are available in 11 sizes and three precision grades to meet exactly the requirements of almost any linear motion application. They are zone hardened on the 'V' edges to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grades P1 & P2 are precision ground on the V running faces to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism, with P1 being ground on the mounting surface as well. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications. Please see System Selector for comparative data. In addition to the fixing hole options shown below, Slides are also available without holes if preferred. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes. All Hepco Slides are left 'soft' in the centre portion to allow for subsequent machining if required. The one piece construction of the Spacer Slide bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing the required running clearance for Bearings and Lubrication Devices. A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or customer's own key. In cases where Cap Seals or Lubricators are not being used, the precision datum edges on the spacer portion of the Slide may be used for location against a machined register *5.
Slides with Counterbored Holes
Part Number NMS NV NV NS NS NS NM NM NM NL NL
12... 20... 28... 25... 35... 50... 44... 60... 76... 76... 120...
Use With Standard ...J13... ...J18... ...J18... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J54... ...J54...
Bearings* Slimline – ...J195... ...J195... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J580... ...J580...
4
A ~Slide Width
12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120
B P1 & P2
Slide with Tapped Holes
C & D* P3
12.37 13.25 20.37 21.01 28.37 29.01 25.74 26.58 35.74 36.38 50.74 51.38 44.74 45.58 60.74 61.38 76.74 77.38 76.74 77.58 120.74 121.38
1,2
Slide only with rack
20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 88
– 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 30 30
E
Slide with Fitted Rack
F
H
G
±0.2
P1
P2 & P3
P1
P2 & P3
45 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 180 180
3.0 4.21 4.21 4.71 4.71 4.71 6.21 6.21 6.21 9.21 9.21
3.2 4.42 4.42 4.93 4.93 4.93 6.42 6.42 6.42 9.43 9.43
6.2 8 8 10 10 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 19.5 19.5
6.4 8.2 8.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 12.7 12.7 12.7 19.7 19.7
4 5 6 6 8 10 8 10 12 15 45
1.8 2 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 4 5 9.5
1,3
P1 & P2
P3
K Ø
P1 & P2
P3
8.5 12 20 15 25 40 26 42 58 50 94
8.9 12.4 20.4 15.4 25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4 50.4 94.4
1.7 1.75 1.75 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.8 4.8
1976 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020
1976 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
H1
J
L Max*
*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. The position of the teeth on the rack mounted versions relative to the mounting holes or slide ends, will vary. Rack mounted Slides with a regulated tooth position can be supplied on request. 2. The C and D dimensions for rack mounted slides are less than that for plain versions to provide support of the rack close to its end. Slide lengths which require C and D dimensions which differ from this may require an extra hole at a non-standard pitch. 3. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. 4. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 5. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register or by utilizing the central keyway. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end central between the Slide end first hole and one located central between each pair of fixing holes, or as deemed necessary for the application. 6. The NL120 section recess has a wider tolerance than the keyways in the other sections. One side only should be used as a register face if precise straightness is important. 7. Low head cap screws DIN 6912 are not universally stocked, so Hepco offers them as a convenience to customers in a single length for each thread size (see table). The NL120 Rack Slide Assembly (and all plain Double Edged Spacer Slides) is secured with cap screws to DIN 912 which are widely stocked.
344
Double Edge Spacer Slides The rigidity of the Spacer Slide enables it to be used as a self-supporting element or construction member of the machine, when used in conjunction with Hepco Flange Clamps. Slide deflection is covered in the Calculations section. All Double Edge Spacer Slides with the exception of the smallest are available with a rack attached by dowels to the top surface. This becomes a fully serviceable element when bolted down to the mounting surface, providing a convenient means to power the linear movement. Rack teeth are machined to a high degree of precision and conform to ISO 1328 grade 8. Racks may comprise a number of lengths, precision mounted to a single Slide. Pinions which mate with these Racks are included in the GV3 range as are Rack Driven Carriages which mount directly to the Slide and may be specified with optional AC Motor, to provide a complete drive solution. Note that Double Edge Spacer Slides with the fitted rack option are not compatible with Carriages using the Slimline Bearings, as there is no clearance for the Rack. See Application Examples on pages 323 and 326.
Available Grades of Slide
M
M1
3.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 7 9 9 14 11
6.2 x 3.1 8 x 4.1 10 x 5.1 10 x 5.1 11 x 6.1 11 x 6.1 11 x 6.1 15 x 8.1 15 x 8.1 20 x 12 18 x 10
N – 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 14 11
N1 – 7.6 x 2.9 7.6 x 2.9 9.6 x 4 9.6 x 4 9.6 x 4 11 x 4.5 11 x 4.5 11 x 4.5 20 x 8 18 x 10
P M3 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M12 M10
P1*7 Screw Part No. – M4 x 20 M4 x 20 M5 x 25 M5 x 25 M5 x 25 M6 x 30 M6 x 30 M6 x 30 M12 x 50 –
Q
– FS420 FS420 FS525 FS525 FS525 FS630 FS630 FS630 FS1250 –
– 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8
R – 6.35 6.35 7.8 7.8 7.8 8.3 8.3 8.3 13.2 13.2
S
T
– – 6.35 6.2 6.35 6.2 7.85 8.5 7.85 8.5 7.85 8.5 11.7 10.8 11.7 10.8 11.7 10.8 18.6 18 18 18.6
U – 4 4 6 6 6 7.5 7.5 7.5 13.3 13.3
V – 5.65 5.65 6.85 6.85 6.85 10.2 10.2 10.2 16.6 16.6
W Mod
Dowel
X K6
Y m6
Z
Pin
– 0.7 0.7 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2
SDP4 SDP5 SDP6 SDP6 SDP8 SDP10 SDP8 SDP10 SDP12 SDP15 –
4 4 4 4 6 8 6 8 10 10 –
4 5 6 6 8 10 8 10 12 15 –
6.75 6 6 6 8 12 8 12 15 15 –
Z1
Weight - kg/m Slide Only Slide+Rack
– 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.75 3.25 2.75 3.25 3.75 4.75 –
0.5 1.0 1.6 1.5 2.3 3.2 3.5 5.5 7 10 15
– 1.4 2.0 2.3 3.0 4.0 4.7 5.7 8.2 13 18
Part Number NMS 12... NV 20... NV 28... NS 25... NS 35... NS 50... NM 44... NM 60... NM 76... NL 76... NL 120...
Ordering Details NS35 L1290 P1 R (T) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 1290mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide (not available on NMS12) Leave blank if not required
Example: 1 x NM60 L480 P2 R 7 x SDP 10 6 x FS630
Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions Leave blank if standard *1, 2 Fixing hole style: T - tapped fixing holes; N- no holes Leave blank for counterbored holes (Options T & N are only available with Rack option to special order)
Double Edge Spacer Slide x 480 mm long in precision grade 2, fitted with Rack. 10mm Ø Dowel Pins (optional). Low head socket cap screws M6 thread x 30 mm long (optional).
345
Single Edge Spacer Slides Hepco Single Edge Spacer Slides are available in 5 sizes and three precision grades. They are zone hardened on the 'V' edge to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grades P1 & P2 are precision ground on the V faces and datum edges to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism, with P1 being ground on the top and bottom faces as well. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications (please see System Selector for comparative data). In addition to the fixing hole options shown below, Slides are available without holes if preferred. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes *5. All Hepco Slides are left 'soft' in the centre portion to allow subsequent machining if required. The one piece construction of the Spacer Slide bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing the required running clearance for Bearings and Lubrication devices. A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or customer's own key. In cases where Cap Seals or Lubricators are not being used, the Precision datum edge on the spacer portion of the Slide may be used for location against a machined register *4.
Slide with counterbored Holes
Part Number NMS NV NS NM NL
E... E... E... E... E...
Use with Bearings*3 Slimline Standard ...J13... ...J18... ...J25... ...J34... ...J54...
â&#x20AC;&#x201C; ...J195... ...J265... ...J360... ...J580...
Slide with Tapped Holes
A
B
~Slide Width P1 & P2
11 16 21 29 43
11.19 16.19 21.37 29.37 43.37
P3 11.71 16.72 21.89 29.89 43.89
B1 P3 P1 & P2 5 6.5 8.5 10.5 16
5.3 6.7 8.7 10.7 16.2
Rack Cut Slide
C*1 20.5 43 43 43 88
D*1 20.5 43 43 43 88
E Âą0.2
P1
45 90 90 90 180
3 4.21 4.71 6.21 9.21
F P2 & P3 3.2 4.42 4.93 6.42 9.43
G P2 & P3
H
P1 6.2 8 10 12.5 19.5
6.4 8.2 10.2 12.7 19.7
4 4 6 8 12
*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. The position of the teeth on the rack cut versions relative to the mounting holes or Slide ends, will vary. Rack cut Slides with a regulated tooth position can be supplied on request. 2. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. Some sizes of rack cut slides are not always stocked in maximum lengths. In such cases the customer will be offered matched lengths for butting. 3. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end centrally between the Slide end first hole and one located centrally between each pair of fixing holes, or as deemed necessary for the application. 5. For Slide size NVE, the counterbore diameter 'N' for the rack cut grade has been regulated to suit socket head cap screws DIN 912 with a plain head which has a slightly smaller diameter than those with a knurled finish. This is to maximize the strength between the counterbore and the root of the rack teeth. Suitable screws are available from Hepco if required: Part No PFS415 (M4 x 15 long). Customers are advised not to pre-drill fixing holes for these unless they have the means to control their hole positions very accurately. 6. The Max Rack Force quoted is that continuous drive force which can be sustained by a well lubricated rack used in conjunction with the appropriate Hepco Pinion.
346
Single Edge Spacer Slides The Single Edge format allows two Slide V's to be mounted wide apart, thus providing a considerable increase in moment load capacity, stiffness and stability. The space between the two Slides can be made sufficient to allow central positioning of the drive, whether by means of ball screw, air cylinder or other type of actuator. Single Edge Spacer Slides are available with a rack cut into the back face, providing a convenient means of driving. Rack teeth are machined to a high degree of precision and conforms to ISO 1328 grade 8. The large face width of the racks makes these the best choice for applications which require high driving forces (see drive Calculations). Pinions which suit the Racks are also available. Shaft type pinions can be coupled directly to the Hepco Geared Motor or Gearbox, which can be mounted using the Drive Flange to the customer's own carriage plate. Although not hardened, the rear face of the Slide is sufficiently durable to act as track for Hepco Track Rollers.
Available Grades of Slide
H1 1.8 1.5 2.5 3 4
J P1 & P2
P3
9.25 12 16 20 30
9.65 12.4 16.4 20.4 30.4
K 1.7 1.75 2.6 2.3 4.8
L Max*1,2 P1 & P2 P3 1976 4020 4020 4020 4020
M
N*5
P
4020 3.5 6.2 x 3.1 M3 4020 4.5 8 x 4.1 M4 4020 5.5 10 x 5.1 M5 6000 7 11 x 6.1 M6 6000 11 18 x 10 M10
R
S
3.80 4.5 4.82 5.8 6.15 7.4 7.69 9.25 11.6 14.1
W Dowel Mod Pin 0.5 0.7 1 1.25 2
X K6
SDP4 4 SDP4 4 SDP6 4 SDP8 6 SDP12 10
Y m6
Z
Z1
4 4 6 8 12
6.75 6.75 6 8 15
– – 2.25 2.75 3.75
Weight Max Rack kg/m Force (N)*6 0.55 1.0 1.6 2.6 6.0
180 300 500 1000 1600
Part Number NMS E... NV E... NS E... NM E... NL E...
Ordering Details NME L1930 P1 R (T) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 1930 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide, leave blank if not required
Example: 1 x N S E L2066 P3 N 24 x SDP6
Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions Leave blank if standard *1 Fixing hole style: T - tapped fixing holes N - no holes, leave blank for counterbored holes
Single Edge Spacer Slide in precision grade 3, 2066 mm long with no holes. 6mm Ø head dowel pins (optional).
347
Double Edge Flat Slides Hepco Double Edge Flat Slides are available in a range of 11 sizes corresponding to those of the Double Edge Spacer Slides. Single Edge Flat Slides are also available in 5 complementary sections. All Flat Slides come in 3 grades of precision and are zone hardened on the 'V' edges to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grade P1 and P2 are precision ground on the V and opposing faces to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism with P1 being ground on the mounting surfaces as well *4. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications (please see System Selector for comparative data). Flat Slides are supplied with plain fixing holes as standard and with counterbored holes to suit low head cap screws as an option. Unground grade P3 slides are available without holes if preferred. The counterbored option is necessary if the Double Edge Flat Slides are used in conjunction with Belt Driven Carriages in order to provide an uninterrupted path for the belt. Also, where there is insufficient room between slide and carriage plate for a conventional screw head (possible in 'Mix and Matchâ&#x20AC;? situations or where customer's own flat carriage plates are used in conjunction with Slimline Bearings). The Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes.
Slide with Standard Holes
Slide with Counterbored Holes
Available Grades of Slide
Part Number Double Edge
Single Edge
MS 12... MS E... V V
20... 28...
S S S
25... 35... 50...
V E...
S E... M 44... M 60... M 76... M E... L 76... L 120... L E...
Use With Bearings*3
A
B
C
Standard
Slimline
~Slide Width
P1 & P2
P3
...J13... ...J13... ...J18... ...J18... ...J18... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J54... ...J54... ...J54...
...J195... ...J195... ...J195... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J580... ...J580... ...J580...
12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120 -
12.55 20.37 28.37 25.81 35.81 50.82 44.81 60.81 76.81 76.81 120.81 -
13.13 21.01 29.01 26.58 36.58 51.58 45.58 61.58 77.58 77.58 121.58 -
13 20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 43
D 13 20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 43
E
F
Âą0.2
P1
P2 & P3
30 45 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 180 90
3.05 3.05 4.27 4.27 4.27 4.78 4.78 4.78 4.78 6.28 6.28 6.12 6.28 9.12 9.12 9.12
3.2 3.2 4.42 4.42 4.42 4.93 4.93 4.93 4.93 6.42 6.42 6.42 6.42 9.43 9.43 9.43
*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. 2. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. 3. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register. 5. Counterbored holes for Flat Slides are designed to suit socket cap head screws DIN 6912. These screws are not universally stocked, so Hepco offers them as a convenience to customers in a single length for each thread size (see table).
348
Single Edge Flat Slides All Hepco Flat Slides are left 'soft' outside the area of the V's to allow subsequent machining if required. Flat Slides are useful where weight saving or minimum inertia is required in cases where the slide is the moving component. Also, where it is practical to design a support profile as an integral part of the machine to provide running clearance for the Bearing and Lubrication devices. The Single Edged format allows two slide V's to be mounted wide apart, thus providing a considerable increase in moment load capacity, stiffness and stability. The space between the two slides can be made sufficient to allow central positioning of the drive whether by means of ball screw, air cylinder or other types of actuator. Single Edge Flat Slides can be attached to commonly available square and rectangular hollow section material by means of tapped hexagonal bar to achieve a low cost, high strength structure complete with linear guide (see page 323). See Application Examples on pages 323-326.
Slide with Standard Holes
Slide with Counterbored Holes
Available Grades of Slide
G
H
~Slide Width P1 & P2
11 16 19 25 32
11.37 16.37 19.46 25.46 32.46
J
K
P3
P1 & P2
P3
11.8 16.8 20.0 26.0 33.0
4.5 6 6.5 8 10
4.7 6.2 6.7 8.2 10.2
Ø
3.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 7 7 7 5.5 7 9 9 7 11.5 11.5 9
L Max
Screw SIze P1 & P2
M3 M3 M4 M5 M4 M6 M6 M6 M5 M6 M8 M8 M6 M10 M10 M8
1000 1000 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020
M1*5
M P3
1976 1976 4020 4020 5500 6000 6000 6000 5500 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
Screw SIze Part No.
M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 11.5 M10 x 20 FS1020 11.5 M10 x 20 FS1020 M8 x 20 FS820 9
N
Weight kg/m
Ø x Depth Double Edge Single Edge
8 x 2.8 8 x 2.8 8 x 2.8 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 11 x 4 11 x 4 11 x 4 11 x 4 18 x 6 18 x 6 15 x 6
0.23 0.6 0.9 0.8 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.7 3.4 5 8.5 -
0.22 0.5 0.7 1.2 2.2
Ordering Details M60 L930 P1 (R) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 930 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide, leave blank if not required
Example: 1 x LE 2156 P3 C 24 x FS820
Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions in mm Leave blank if standard *1 Fixing hole options are: C - counterbored holes (not available on MS12 & MSE) N - no holes (P3 grade only), leave blank for plain holes
Single Edge Flat Slide x 2156 mm long in unground grade 3 with counterbored holes. Low head socket cap screws M8 thread x 20 mm long (optional).
349
Standard Bearings All Hepco Standard Bearings are compatible with all grades of Slide and although designed to be used with particular sizes of slide, may be “mixed and matched” in many instances. The following Bearing formats and fixing methods may be chosen to cater for most design requirements. The Twin Bearing type which is the default choice, comprises two individual deep groove ball bearings on a single stud. This construction offers some compliance allowing smoother running, easy adjustment and greater tolerance of misalignment. The Double Row Bearing type (DR) incorporates a one-piece bearing with two ball tracks. This offers higher load capacity, especially in the radial direction and is less susceptible to entrapment of debris. Both types of bearing have been designed specially for Slide system applications and their performance confirmed by rigorous testing. External dimensions are identical. The Nitrile Sealed option (NS) available for both bearing formats, provides a higher degree of sealing against ingress of water and debris than does the default metal shielded type. A small increase in friction may result. The Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of carriage or mounting plate, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco Carriage plates.
Through Fixing Type (SJ/LJ)
Short Stud (SJ)
Part Number
... J 13 ... ... J 18 ... ... J 25 ... ... J 34 ... ... J 54 ...
Eccentric (E&DE)
Socket Tool (for part no. & tightening torques please contact T.E.A.)
Long Stud (LJ)
Concentric (C)
Adjusting Wrench (for part no. & tightening torques please contact T.E.A.)
C
C1
C2
Use With 9 Slide Section*
A
B
B1
Short Stud
Long Stud
Short Stud
Long Stud
Short Stud
Long Stud
D
D1
MS & NMS V & NV S & NS M & NM L & NL
12.7 18 25 34 54
10.1 12.4 16.6 21.3 34.7
5.47 6.75 9 11.5 19
5.8 7.4 9.8 13.8 17.8
9.5 14 19 22 30
3 3.4 3.8 6.6 8.2
6.7 10 13 14.8 20.4
2.2 2.4 3.4 5.2 5.7
2.4 2.5 4.9 5.9 7.9
9.51 14.0 20.27 27.13 41.76
4.76 7.0 10.13 13.56 20.88
±0.025
±0.025
S1
T
T1
T2
U
U1
V
W
X
Y
Z
SJ...
Weight ~g LJ... BHJ...C
6.6 10.5 9 8.5 16.4
8.5 10 12 17.5 23.5
3.75 4 5 6.5 10.5
6.75 8 10 12.5 18.5
30 38 50 60 89.5
47.5 54 72 90.5 133
8 11 14 17 25
20 24.5 32 42 62
M3 M4 M5 M6 M8
5.5 7 8.5 10 13
8 7 10 14 20
8 19 48 115 415
8 20 51 120 425
±0.1
7 18 43 105 390
BHJ...E 27 45 105 235 800
*Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit Bearing mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit. 2. All eccentric Through Fixing type Bearing studs are supplied with sockets for adjustment as shown, with the exception of size 13. 3. Nuts for the Through Fixing type Bearings are chemically blacked on the concentric version and bright zinc plated on the eccentrics for identification purposes. 4. 'R' dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and the total adjustment available at the bearing centre line for 360° rotating of the adjusting nut. 5. Double Eccentric Bearings require different mounting hole centres (Please contact T.E.A. for a faxed data sheet on Removable Carriages to see dimension H1). 6. The Blind Hole eccentric Bearings cannot be fitted with Cap Seals, however Lubricators may be specified instead. 7. Controlled Height Bearings are selected within ±0.005 mm in respect of B1 dimension compared to the normal tolerance of ± 0.025 mm. They are supplied in sets of up to eight Bearings within the same tolerance band. Larger quantities of bearings within the same tolerance band are available on request. 8. The quoted static and dynamic load capacities are based on industry standard calculations. These do not accurately reflect system performance, and are only provided for comparison with other systems. Please use the Max Working Load figures and the load/life calculations of pages 338 - 339 to determine system performance. 9. The preferred Slide choices for each Bearing are listed. Other Slides may be used as shown in the Mix & Match tables, please visit www.tea.net.au
350
Standard Bearings Both versions are available in Concentric type (C) which are fixed, Eccentric type (E), adjustable and Double Eccentric type (DE)*5 which have sufficient adjustment to enable a carriage to be disengaged from the Slide (see application drawing on page 235). All Through Hole Fixing types are available in a Controlled Height version (CH)*7 which minimises variation between Bearings in respect of the important 'B1' dimension. This may be desirable in some high precision applications. The Blind Hole Fixing type (BH) allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mounting holes are not possible, or where the thickness of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. They are available in Concentric type (C) which are fixed, or Eccentric type (E)*6 which are adjustable. All Bearings are greased for life internally. Customers are strongly recommended to provide lubrication to the interface between Bearings and Slide by specifying Hepco Cap Seals which fit over the bearings, or by using Hepco Lubricators. Lubricators greatly increases load capacity and life. See Application Examples on page 323.
Blind Hole Fixing Type (BHJ) Concentric (C)
Eccentric (E)
To calculate drilling centres with all types of Slide, refer to theoretical 'V' apex dimension B or H on the relevant Slide page.*5 'X' - 2 cap screws DIN 912 (supplied)
F E
Metric Fine
G
H
I
J
K
L*
M
M1
N 5 ...E... ...DE...*
5 7 10 12 25
M4 x 0.5 M6 x 0.75 M8 x 1 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5
8 10 14 18 28
0.5 0.6 0.5 0.7 1.6
5.8 7.4 9.8 13.8 17.8
0.8 0.8 1 1.25 1.6
2.2 3.2 5 6 8
2.5 3 4 6
7 10 13 17 22
9 13 17 21 28
0.5 0.7 0.75 1 1.5
Max Working Load Capacities (N) Double Row Bearings
Twin Bearings
Radial
Axial
Radial
Axial
600 1500 3000 5000
190 400 900 2500
120 200 600 1400 3200
60 125 320 800 1800
2
1.9 2.6 2.75 3.6 5.5
+0 -0.03
O*1
P
Q
R*4
S
4 6 8 10 14
7 11 13 15 27
1.5 2 3 4 8
1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 3.0
6.25 8 7 9.5 14.5
-
NS
-
DR
CH
Metal Shields
Nitrile Seals
Twin Bearings
Double Row Bearings
Controlled Height
Bearing Static (Co) and Dynamic (C) Load Capacities (N)*8 For Double Row Bearings Radial Loads Co C
Axial Loads Co C
For each of two Twin Bearings Radial Loads Co C
Options Available
Axial Loads Co C
Part Number
-
-
-
-
265
695
74
194
... J 13 ...
1168
2301
435
857
593
1438
173
419
... J 18 ...
2646
5214
821
1618
1333
3237
326
791
... J 25 ...
5018
9293
1362
2523
2600
5291
557
1270
... J 34 ...
12899 21373
2777
4601
6657
13595
1136
2320
... J54 ...
Ordering Details LJ 25 C (DR) (NS) (CH) Controlled Height*7 Leave blank if not required Nitrile Sealed Bearing Leave blank if metal shields are required Double Row Bearing Leave blank if Twin Bearing is required
Fixing type: Choose from: SJ = Short Stud, LJ = Long Stud & BHJ = Blind Hole Fixing Part Number (~ Bearing Diameter in mm) C = Concentric (fixed), E = Eccentric (adjustable) Or DE = Double Eccentric (for disengagement purposes)
351
Flat Tracks Hepco GV3Flat Tracks are made from high quality carbon steel and are hardened on all four faces to provide an extremely durable running surface. They have been designed to be used with the Hepco range of Track Rollers. Flat Tracks are often used in conjunction with Hepco V Slides in large systems where the design can eliminate the requirement to set slides accurately parallel. Flat Tracks are available in 4 sizes and in a number of quality grades. The P3 grade has a commercial high accuracy on various faces according to the requirements of the application.
straight, however, they may be set to the required degree of straightness during installation. It is recommended that holes in
See Application Examples on our website www.tea.net.au
X
A
E
C* 1
E
D* 1
B
X L * 1,2
F
±0.2for Grades P1 & P2B -0 +0.4 for Grades P3 & P2A
A ±0.025
G
B ±0.025
Socket head cap screw to DIN 912 (not supplied)
P1
P2A
P2B
P3
Chamfer K x 45 ° (min)
Indicates surfaces which are precision ground
Section X-X
Part Number FT 24 12 FT 32 16 FT 40 20 FT 66 33
Use With Track Roller ...R 18... ...R 25... ...R 34... ...R 54...
A
C*1
B
D*1
E
F
P1& P2A P2B & P3 P1 & P2B P2A & P3
12 16 20 33
12.4 16.4 20.4 33.4
24 32 40 66
24.4 32.4 40.4 66.4
20.5 43 43 88
20.5 43 43 88
45 90 90 180
7.5 8.75 12 17
G Ø 6 7 9 14
Screw Size M5 M6 M8 M12
H Ø 10 11 15 20
J ~ 5 6 8 12
K
L*1,2
(min)
(max)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
2000 4020 4020 4020
Weight kg/m 2.3 4 6.3 17
Ordering Details FT4020 L1830 P2A C15 D15 Part Number Track Length ‘L’ =1830 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2A , P2B & P3
Bespoke values of ‘C’& ‘D’ dimensions Leave blank if standard (see table)
Notes: 2. Where tracks longer than maximum length are required, two or more lengths in grades P1, P2A& P2B can be matched suitable for butting, on request. In these cases the mating ends will be ground square.
352
Narrow Track Rollers
please visit www.tea.net.au
please visit www.tea.net.au
(www.tea.net.au)
289
353
Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges Linear motion systems incorporating a Hepco and will need a means to drive the pinion. The Hepco Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges provide this function for . The same Gearboxes, Geared Motors & or Rack Cut Single Edge to provide a simple, and easily Drive Flanges can also be used with Separate adjustable linear drive. The Drive Flange which connects the gearbox to the carriage incorporates a unique micro-adjustment facility for achieving correct engagement of the with the rack. Customers using the Drive Flange in conjunction with a carriage of their own for principle). construction will need to provide a keyway to accommodate the sliding key portion P1 (see To obtain the best performance from the rack and pinion drive, it is important that the meshing teeth are lubricated. A No. 2 lithium soap-based grease is recommended for this purpose. In dirty environments, it is advisable to guard against ingress of debris. The Worm Gearboxes are available in ratios from 5:1 to 80:1. Each uses a hardened and ground worm shaft running with a centrifugally cast bronze wheel, with oil bath lubrication. The wheel shaft is supported on high capacity rolling bearings in a high strength aluminium casting. This makes the gearbox strong, accurate, quiet and long lasting. It is also much lighter in weight and more compact than comparable units, making it particularly well suited for dynamic applications. Their low U (Brake M otor) k* 1 g* 1
T (Std Motor)
a* 2 m* 1 hole details
h* 1 j* 1
c*
H
2
S 4 holes tapped with thread P on ØN PCD
b* 2
H
X
90° L
1 e* 1 f*
V (Std Motor)
d* 1
M
K
F
G
W (Brake M otor)
J Hollow Shaft Worm Gearbox with Input Flange Motor* 3 Detail
Gearbox/A C Geared Motor Part Number WG3 WG4 Motor Frame Size* 4 56 63 71
Use with Gearbox WG3 WG3 & WG4 WG3 & WG4
Drive Flange Part Number WGF3 WGF4
F
G
AC Geared Moto r*3
A 72 76
B 75 80
C 77 82
D 38 48
E 33 40
F 39 49
G 41 51
H 57 71
S 60 65 65
T 90 100 100
U 130 140 140
V 167 187 212
W 210 247 272
X 111 123 138
Y 100 100 110
Z 109 113 125
J 15 20
K 25 35
L 5 6
M 17.3 22.8
P Ø Depth M5 10 M6 12
N 62.5 85
Q 67 85
Gearbox Rated Output Torque 17Nm (typical) 32Nm (typical)
R 69 76
Power
Use with Gearbox WG3... WG4...
A1 118 147
B1 35 34.5
C1 75 100
D1 63 88.8
E1 75 88.8
F1 9 9
G1 2 5
2 Pole ‘S’ 90 W 180 W 370 W
H1 49 62.8
J1 14 17
K1 M5 M6
2 Pole ‘L’ 120 W 250 W 550 W
L1 5 6
M1 6 6
4 Pole ‘S’ 60 W 120 W 250 W
N1 48 70
P1 20 25
Q1 2 3
R1 4 5
4 Pole ‘L’ 90 W 180 W 370 W
S1 57 76
T1 43 57
Weight 0.34 kg 0.5 kg
The AC Geared Motor and Worm Gearbox may be mounted onto a in any one of the 8 configurations shown below. The terminal box may take one of 4 positions A...D and the cable exits also have 4 possible positions 1...4. Please use the diagram below as a guide to selection. 1 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
B
2
A
C 1 2
D
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
1 1
Terminal box position A1 is the default, which is usually available on express delivery.
* Notes: 1. The customer’s motor dimensions marked * 1 on the drawing should be advised to Hepco when the input motor flange option is required. 2. The gearbox input flange dimensions marked * 2 on the drawing will be advised to to the customer by Hepco once motor details (see above) have been given. 3. The motor of the standard AC Geared Motor package is integral with the gearbox, saving space, weight & cost, and cannot be removed by the user. Customers who require that the motor should be separable from the gearbox should specify the 2 worm gearbox, and request that a separate motor be fitted. Hepco can supply a range of suitable motors for such requirements. 4. Other motor sizes beyond those listed are available from Hepco, but may not be compatible with the Drive Flange. Please consult T.E.A. Transmisisons.
354
Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges backlash and high strength make them suitable for use with servo and stepper motors as well as AC motors. W hen sold separately, Worm Gearboxes have an input flange and shaft coupling which will be tailored to suit the shaft and face details of the customer’s motor. Gearboxes and Geared Motors may be specified with an adjustable torque limiting clutch if required. For the AC motors, Hepco supplies 3 phase squirrel cage type to VDE 0530 supported by DIN 42677. Motors in 3 IEC frame sizes from 56 to 71 can be supplied, each with the choice of short or long field windings and 2 or 4 pole designs (running at approximately 2800 and 1400 rpm respectively). Power ratings from 60W to 0.55kW are available. Motors are rated at 400/ 230V, are protected to IP54, and are finished in blue epoxy paint as standard. Motors with fitted disk brakes, alternative single and three phase windings, special finishes and enhanced IP protection rating are available on request. The AC Geared Motor provides a very cost effective linear drive for simple point-to-point applications, and can easily be to provide a complete drive control system. teamed up with the Hepco Please see the
section for details of linear drive performance. Data sheets available from www.tea.net.au
See Application E xamples on page 331
Z
Drive Flange L1
A1 E1
B1 F1
Y
J1
ØN
K1
H1 E Q
A
A
D1
D
T1 G1 Gearbox body Register Hollow Shaft
Available Ratios 5, 7, 10, 12, 15, 18, 24, 30, 38, 50, 75:1 6.75, 8, 10, 12, 15, 2 0, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80:1
R
M1
WG3 ‘L’ Motor
WG4 ‘S’ Motor
WG3 ‘L’ Motor
4.5 kg 4.8 kg 6.8 kg
4.7 kg 5.3 kg 7.8 kg
– 5.6 kg 7.6 kg
– 6.1 kg 8.6 kg
P1 N1
Section A- A Motor
with Gearb ox size
WG3 ‘S’ Motor
Gearbox
Pinion Adjuster for correct mesh
Shaft Type Pinion
Section of Assembled Gearbox, Flange & Pinion
Drive Flange
for AC Geared Motor & W orm Gearbox W G3 R30 (T) (4) M
56 (L) (2 ) (B) (A) (1)
Part Number Gearbox Reduction Ratio (R30 = 30:1) T = Optional Torque Limiter Leave blank if not required Gearbox mounting position Choose 1-8 or leave blank for unassembled* 2 Input Options: F = Flange* 1,2; M = fitted AC Motor Drive Flange* Shaft Pinion*
4 cap screws to DIN9 12 ge) (supplied w
Hollow Shaft
retaining washer & screw (included with pinion)
Ordering Details
R1 Q1
Weight of Gear box with Input Flange for Motor 1.6 kg 2.5 kg
Weight of AC Geared Motor
C1 S1
Torque Limiter Option
Cable Exit Position: choose 1-4 Terminal Box Position: choose A-D B = Brake Motor Leave blank if not required Motor Poles: 2 =~2800RPM or 4 = 1400RPM Motor field winding: S = short or L = long Motor frame size: 56, 63 or 71* 4
These items only apply if AC motor is required.
A B C
Please state part number as second line of the order (see table above left). Please state part number as third line of the order - (data www.tea.net.au)
* Customers requiring Geared Motor or Worm Gearbox for use with included as standard.
should not specify Drive Flange or Shaft
355
as they are
GV3 Load / Life Calculations V Slide and Bearing Systems The load capacity and life of Hepco V Slide Systems will be determined by several factors. The key issues are the size and type of Bearing and Slide, the presence or absence of lubrication and the magnitude and direction of loads. Other factors including operational speed, length of stroke and environmental conditions may also have an effect*2. When calculating the system load and life, one of two approaches should be taken: If the system uses a conventional 4 bearing carriage (such as any of the Hepco Carriages), then this may be treated as a single item, and the load and life be determined as in the 4 Bearing Carriage Calculations below; alternatively, each V bearing can be treated separately according to the method shown in the Individual Bearing Calculations section.
4 Bearing Carriage Calculations When calculating the loading and life of a V Slide System using a 4 bearing carriage, the loading on the system should be resolved into the direct load components, L1 and L2, and the moment loading components M, Mv and Ms (see diagram on right). The maximum direct and moment load capacities for standard carriages are given in the tables below. Capacities are included for both 'dry' and 'lubricated'*4 conditions this refers to the 'V' contact, since all bearings are greased internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.
Dry System, Twin and DR Type Carriage L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) Part Numbers N N Nm Nm 90 90 0.5 45 x D AU... 12 13... 180 180 1.6 90 x D AU... 20 18... 180 180 2.3 90 x D AU... 28 18... 400 400 4.5 200 x D AU... 25 25... 400 400 6.5 200 x D AU... 35 25... 400 400 9.5 200 x D AU... 50 25... 800 800 16 400 x D AU... 44 34... 800 800 22 400 x D AU... 60 34... 800 800 29 400 x D AU... 76 34... 64 900 x D AU... 76 54... 1800 1800 100 900 x D AU... 120 54... 1800 1800
Carriage Part Numbers AU 20 195... AU 28 195... AU 25 265... AU 35 265... AU 50 265... AU 44 360... AU 60 360... AU 76 360... AU 76 580... AU 120 580...
Bearing M ( max) Nm 45 x D 90 x D 90 x D 200 x D 200 x D 200 x D 400 x D 400 x D 400 x D 900 x D 900 x D
Lubricated System, Twin Type Bearing Lubricated System, DR Type Bearing L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) M ( max) L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) M ( max) N N Nm Nm Nm Nm N Nm*6 N Nm 240 240 1.3 120 x D 120 x D Not Available 500 400 4.5 200 x D 250 x D 7 760 600 x D 380 x D 1200 500 400 6.5 200 x D 250 x D 10 760 1200 600 x D 380 x D 1280 1200 14 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 18 1500 x D 800 x D 1280 1200 21 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 26 1500 x D 800 x D 1280 1200 30 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 38 1500 x D 800 x D 3200 2800 65 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 73 3000 x D 1800 x D 3200 2800 90 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 100 3000 x D 1800 x D 3200 2800 115 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 130 3000 x D 1800 x D 7200 6400 250 3200 x D 3600 x D 10000 10000 360 5000 x D 5000 x D 7200 6400 410 3200 x D 3600 x D 10000 10000 580 5000 x D 5000 x D
Dry System, Slimline Type Bearing M ( max) M S (max) M V (max) L 1(max) L 2(max) Nm Nm Nm N N 90 x D 90 x D 1.6 180 180 90 x D 90 x D 2.3 180 180 200 x D 200 x D 4.5 400 400 200 x D 200 x D 6.5 400 400 200 x D 200 x D 9.5 400 400 400 x D 400 x D 16 800 800 400 x D 400 x D 22 800 800 400 x D 400 x D 29 800 800 900 x D 900 x D 64 1800 1800 900 x D 900 x D 100 1800 1800
Lubricated System, Slimline Type L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) Nm Nm N N 240 x D 3.5 480 400 240 x D 5 480 400 575 x D 10.5 1150 940 575 x D 15 1150 940 575 x D 22 1150 940 1200 x D 40 2000 2400 1200 x D 55 2000 2400 1200 x D 70 2000 2400 2600 x D 150 4240 5200 2600 x D 240 4240 5200
Bearing M ( max) Nm 200 x D 200 x D 470 x D 470 x D 470 x D 1000 x D 1000 x D 1000 x D 2120 x D 2120 x D
Calculating the System Load Factor To calculate the system life, the load factor LF should first be calculated using the equation below. Where Mv & M loads are concerned, the Mv(max) and M(max) for the relevant carriage will need to be determined. This is established by multiplying the figure shown in the table by the spacing of the bearings, D, in metres. LF =
L1 L2 MS MV M + + + + L1(max) L2(max) MS(max) MV(max) M(max)
LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF has been determined for the application, the life is calculated as shown at the bottom of page 339.
356
Load / Life Calculations Individual 'V' Bearing Calculations Many systems do not use a standard 4 bearing carriage. In such cases it is necessary to use conventional statics calculations to determine the loading on each bearing in the system, by resolving loads into axial (LA*1) and radial (LR*1) components. The maximum LA and LR load capacities for all types of Hepco 'V” Bearing are given in the tables below. Capacities are included for both “dry” and “lubricated” conditions this refers to the 'V' contact, since all bearings are greased internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.
Load Capacities for Twin Standard Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N N N Numbers 22.5 45 60 120 ...J 13... 45 90 125 200 ...J 18... 100 200 320 600 ...J 25... ...J 34... 200 400 800 1400 900 1800 3200 ...J 54... 450
Load Capacities for Double Row Standard Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N*6 N N Numbers 90 45 190 600 ...J 18 DR... 200 100 400 1500 ...J 25 DR... 400 200 900 3000 ...J 34 DR... 900 ...J 54 DR... 450 2500 5000
LA*3
LR
Axial Load
Radial Load
Load Capacities for Slimline Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N N N Numbers 100 90 240 45 ...J 195... 235 200 575 100 ...J 265... 500 400 1200 200 ...J 360... 1060 900 2600 ...J 580... 450
The above figures assume that Bearings are used with Slides equal to or larger than the preferred Slide selection for that Bearing size. For details of the preferred sizes, see table on pages 336-337. For loading of Bearings with smaller Slides, please contact T.E.A.
Calculating the System Load Factor To calculate the system life, the load factor LF should first be calculated using the equation below. LF =
LA LR + LA (max) LR (max)
LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF has been determined for each bearing, the life can be calculated as follows: Calculating System Life With LF determined for either a 4 bearing carriage or for an individual bearing, the life in km can be calculated using one of the two equations below. In these equations, the Basic Life is taken from the table (right) in respect of the bearing and the lubrication condition applicable. Dry System Life (km) =
Lubricated System Basic Life
(0.03 + 0.97LF)
2
Life (km) =
Basic Life
Bearings ...J 13... ...J 18... ...J 18 DR... ...J 25... ...J 25 DR... ...J 34... ...J 34 DR... ...J 54... ...J 54 DR... ...J 195... ...J 265... ...J 360... ...J 580...
Basic Life Dry 40 50 50 70 70 100 100 150 150 50 70 100 150
Basic Life Lubricated 50 100 100 50 70 100 250 250 500 100 50 250 200
(0.03 + 0.97LF)3
Example calculations using the methods above are included on page 340. *Notes 1. The maximum values of L1, L2, MS, M, LA and LR, and the magnitudes of the system Basic Life for each bearing type relate to the performance of complete systems. Tests have shown these figures to be more reliable than working from the theoretical static and dynamic load capacities (C and Co) of the bearings. Values of C and Co have been included in tabulated data on the relevant Bearing pages as a means of comparison with other systems. 2. The calculations within this section assume that the linear stroke involves a number of complete bearing revolutions. If the stroke of any application is less than five times the bearing outside diameter, then please calculate the distance travelled as if it moves five bearing diameters per stroke. Systems operating at speeds in excess of 8 m/s may require additional calculation. Please contact T.E.A. for assistance. 3. For the purposes of the Load/Life calculations on this page, the axial load LA is that load in the axial direction which the bearing can accept from a 'V' slide engaged in its outer ring. Since the line of force is some distance removed from the axis of the bearing, this value is much less than the theoretical axial load capacity which is quoted on the relevant bearing page. 4. In the above calculations, the term lubricated refers to the contact between the slide and bearing 'V's. This lubrication may best be achieved using Hepco Lubricators, Cap Seals or Cap Wipers, however other methods which ensure the presence of a suitable grease or oil in the critical area are acceptable. 5. When a system consists of more than 4 bearings per carriage (E.G. see application examples on page 326) it cannot always be guaranteed that the load will share equally between all bearings. In such cases it is recommended that Controlled Height Bearings are specified (where available) and that the system is de-rated to allow for the life of the most heavily laden bearing. 6. For some sizes of DR bearing, the actual life for applications with mainly L2/radial loads may be higher than the calculations indicate. This is because the calculations are simplified for easy use. Please contact T.E.A. for details in instances where a higher system life is required.
357
Load / Life Calculations Example Calculation 1 A machine incorporates a heavy cast component mounted into a Hepco AU 76 34 L240 CS DR carriage (Standard Carriage with fitted Cap Seals and Double Row Bearings - see pg 328 mounted onto an NM76 P1 Double Edge Spacer Slide (see pg 330-331). The weight of the cast component and carriage is 50 kg. and the centre of mass is central along the length of the carriage, and 0.07 m from the slide 'V' as shown in the diagram. The Load Factors LF is calculated using the method detailed on page 338. L1 = M = MV = 0 L2 = 50kg x 9.81 (gravity) = 491 N MS = 491 x 0.07 = 34.4 Nm LF =
L1 L2 MS MV M + + + + L1 (max) L2(max) MS(max) MV(max) M(max)
The values for L1(max), L2(max), MS(max), MV(max) & M(max ) are taken from the table on page 338 LF =
0 491 N 34.4 Nm 0 0 + + + + = 0.347 3600 6000N 130Nm 3000 x D 1800 x D
The basic life for this system (using SJ34DR bearings in the lubricated condition) is taken from the table on page 339 - this is 250. The system life is calculated as shown on page 339. Life =
Basic Life = (0.03 + 0.97LF)3
250 = 5070 km (0.03 + 0.97 x 0.347)3
Example Calculation 2 An overhead transfer system uses a combination of an NLE P3 Single Edge Spacer Slide (see pages 332-333) and an FT 66 33 P3 flat track on either side of a machine bay. 2 off LJ54CDR bearings with CS54 Cap Seals run on the 'V' Slide. 2 off LR54C Track Rollers run on the flat track. A single LRN54E Narrow track roller is on the non-loaded side of both the 'V' slide and Flat Track to retain the moving structure on the slides. A weight of 400 kg is located centrally on the structure, such that the load is equally distributed between the LJ54's and LR54's each therefore experiencing a radial load of 9.81 x 100 = 981 N. The Load Factor LF for the 'V' Bearing is calculated using the method detailed on page 339. LA = 0
LR = 981 N
The values for LA(max) and LR(max) are taken from the table on page 339 LF =
LA LR 0 981 N + = + = 0.196 LA(max) LR(max) 2500 5000N
The basic life for these LJ54 bearings used in the lubricated condition is taken from the table on pg 339 - this is 500. The bearing life calculated as shown on page 339. Basic Life 500 Life = + = 46,880 km 3 (0.03 + 0.97LF) (0.03 + 0.97 x 0.196)3 The Load Factor LF for the Track Rollers is calculated using the method detailed*. As before, LR = 981 N: the value for LR(max) is taken from the table*. The LR54, LR(max) is 8000 N. The Load Factor LF is calculated from the equation* as follows: LF =
LR = LR(max)
981 N = 0.123 8000 N
The Track Roller Life is then calculated using the second equation* Life =
1000 LF3
=
(*Please contact T.E.A. to request Load Life Calculations page 60)
1000 = 537,000 km 0.1233
From this it can be seen that the 'V' bearings are the life determining factor for the system as a whole. Calculation Examples 3 & 4: for Slimline Carriages without cap wipers or lubricators, running dry; and Single Edge Spacer Slide using Blind Hole Bearings and lubricators can be found on our web site www.tea.net.au
358
Deflection of Self Supporting Slides When GV3 Slide Beams and Spacer Slides are used as self supporting beams, see examples on page 326, the Slides will deflect under load and their own weight. Care should be taken when designing an installation to take account of this deflection, by choosing a Slide or Slide Beam which will give both adequate life and satisfactory stiffness for the duty. The deflection of a Slide or Slide Beam across a span (as shown opposite), will be a maximum at the centre of the span when the load passes over this point. This maximum deflection is given by equation (1): +
5L4Qg 384EI
{
FL3 48EI
{
(1)*2,3 d =
Deflection due to the applied load
Deflection due to the Slide or Slide Beam's weight
The deflection of a Slide or Slide Beam acting as a cantilever will be a maximum at the free end when the load is at the outermost extremity of its stroke. This maximum deflection is given by equation (2) *1:
d =
FL2 (3L-k) 6EI
+
L4Qg 8EI
{
1, 2, & 3
{
(2) *
Deflection due to the applied load
Deflection due to the Slide's weight
In the equation (1) and (2) above, L, k and d are the dimensions shown in the relevant diagrams (in mm) and F is the load applied in Newtons. The term EI is the product of the Slide or Slide Beam material's Young's modulus and the section moment in inertia, which is a constant relating to the stiffness of the Slide section in the orientation of the application. The term Q is the mass of the Slide in kg/mm and g is the acceleration due to gravity (=9.81m/s2). The values of EI and Q for the various sections are given in the table below:
Slide Part Number NS 25... NS 35... NS 50... NM 44... NM 60... NM 76... NL 76... NL 120...
El (Section Stiffness â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Nmm5) Q = Section Mass 3 kg/mm Horizontal*3 Vertical* 0.0015 4.2 x 108 1.2 x 109 9 0.0023 7.5 x 108 4.6 x 10 0.0032 1.1 x 109 1.55 x 1010 9 0.0035 9.8 x 109 1.7 x 10 0.0055 2.6 x 109 3 x 1010 0.007 3.4 x 109 6.8 x 1010 0.010 1.1 x 1010 8.6 x 1010 0.015 1.8 x 1010 4.3 x 1011
Horizontal Bending Slide Beam El (Section Stiffness â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Nmm2) 3 Part Number Horizontal*3 Vertical* 10 10 SB S 35... 5.8 x 10 9.5 x 10 SB S 35 ...L... (lightweight) 3.2 x 1010 5.6 x 1010 10 SB S 50... 5.8 x 10 1 x 1011 SB S 50 ...L... (lightweight) 3.2 x 1010 6.2 x 1010 11 SB M 44... 1.5 x 1011 2.1 x 10 11 SB M 60... 2.3 x 1011 1.5 x 10 SB M 76... 1.5 x 1011 2.5 x 1011
Q = Section Mass kg/mm 0.0068 0.0043 0.0072 0.0047 0.0104 0.0112 0.0129
Vertical Bending
*Notes 1. The calculations for the defleciton of a cantilevered slide assumes that the slide is held absolutely rigidly at one end. This is often difficult to achieve in practice, and it is usual to allow for additional deflection due to the compliance of the support. T.E.A. will supply such data on flange clamps on request. 2. The deflection calculated are for static loads. In some situations dynamic loading may increase the amount of bend. 3. For maximum stiffness, the slide or slide beam section should be arranged such that the bending made with the higher value for EI resists bending. Care should be taken in such applications to ensure that offset loads do not cause excessive bending in the weaker perpendicular plane.
359
Technical Specifications V' Slides Material and Finish:
Flat Tracks Material and Finish:
High carbon bearing steel AISI 52100, hardened on 'V' faces to 58-62 Rockwell 'C' scale. Those areas which are ground have N5 surface finish. Other areas have a chemical black finish.
Carbon steel, hardened on all faces to 58-62 Rockwell 'C' scale. Those areas which are ground have N5 surface finish. Other areas have a chemical black finish.
Bearings & Track Rollers Bearing Raceways and Balls: Shields: Seals: Cage: Studs: BH...'E' Base Plate: Temperature Range:
Carbon-chromium bearing steel AISI 52100, hardened and tempered. Steel with bright zinc plated finish. Nitrile rubber. Plastic. High Tensile Steel with tensile strength = 695 N/mm2. Chemical black finish. Cast Steel with chemical black finish. -20° C to + 120° C
Carriage Plates & Flange Clamps Material: Finish:
High Strength Aluminium Alloy Clear Anodised to 15 m thickness.
Carriage Plates & Slide Counterbore Plugs Material: Plastic Cap Seals Material:
Temperature Range:
Body: Thermoplastic elastomer Inserts: Impact resistant plastic Wipers: Felt -20° C to +60° C
Cap Wipers & Lubricators Material: Temperature Range:
Impact resistant plastic with felt wiper -20° C to +60° C
Frictional Resistance for 'V' Slide Systems Coefficient of friction (without Cap Seals, Cap Wipers or Lubricators) = 0.02 Cap Seals and Lubricators add friction as follows: 4 Cap Seals or Wipers per Carriage CS18 or CW195 = 4 N CS34 or CW360 = 15 N 2 Lubricators per Carriage LB12 = 1 N LB25 & LB265 = 2.5 N LB54 & LB580 = 4 N
CS25 or CW265 = 7 N CS54 or CW580 = 28 N LB20 & LB195 = 1.5 N LB44 & LB360 = 3 N
Extenal Lubrication Cap Seals and Cap Wipers should be lubricated with grease NLGI consistency No. 2 Lubricators should be oiled using 68 cSt viscosity or similar oil. Food compatible lubricants can also be used. Maximum Linear Speeds for 'V' Slides and Bearings and Flat Tracks & Rollers Unlubricated 'V' Slides = 2m/s Higher speeds are possible. Speed depends upon Lubricated 'V' Slides & all Flat Track applications = 8m/s stroke, duty and environmental conditions.
}
Material specifications may change for reasons of technical advantage or availability.
360
Hepco - PRT2 Ring Slide & Track System Hepco has been solving customer's circular motion problems for years. Building up an indispensable knowledge of applications and clever technical solutions. This knowledge coupled with many months of research and development has resulted in the introduction of a comprehensive range of ring slides and track systems to suit virtually every need. The ring slide and track system products complement Hepco's extensive range of linear motion products enabling customers to choose a single source for all their motion guidance requirements.
Benefits (Common) • Friction free motion • Fully adjustable • Zero play • Tolerant of misalignment • Simple and effective means of lubrication
• Stainless steel options • Tolerant of debris • Works in any plane • Easy to install • 2D and 3D CAD files available
Benefits (Ring slides and segments) • Circular motion control at the periphery where it is needed • Large hollow centre to accommodate other components (ring slides) • Will track the curvature of cylindrical shapes • Easy means of driving available • Gearcut options for ease of driving • Double edge and single edge versions • Carriage brake available Benefits (Track system) • Limitless variety of circuits available • Precision positioning possible • High load support option at work stations • Simple alignment facility provided • Various carriage plate options • Components available for driving • Support frame available
361
System Composition RING SYSTEMS: A useful range of nine different ring diameter comprising four different sections is available togther with corresponding bearing assemblies. 90째 and 180째 stock segments are available in each ring size. BLIND HOLE BEARING ASSEMBLY (ECCENTRIC) g Two screw fixing direct into mounting surface where access to opposite side is restricted.
RINGS g Precision ground all over for optimum accuracy and concentricity. g Hardened 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance. g Soft centre section allows customising. g Datum location faces provided both internally and externally. g Gearcut option for ease of driving. g Through hole fixing or tapped hole fixing.
BEARING ASSEMBLY (CONCENTRIC) Two piece ground bearing with precision clearance. Zero play when system adjusted. High rigidity. Two stud lengths available in each size. Provides datum reference for the system.
BEARING ASSEMBLY (ECCENTRIC) g Provides simple means of adjustment via centre hexagon or socket each end. g Eccentric throw is sufficient to enable removal of ring without disassembly.
g g g g g
FIXED CENTRE CARRIAGE g Low cost mounting platform for your components. g May be used with ring, segment, or unidirectional track system of common bend radius. g Incorporates lubricators for increased load/life. g Accurate overall height. g Keyway location facility. g Useful fixing holes provided.
ADJUSTMENT KEY AND JACKING FACILITY (For use with track system curved segments only) g Easy alignment to adjacent straight side. g Overcomes minor inaccuracy in positioning.
362
System Composition TRACK SYSTEMS: Ring segments combine with straight slides to build into an almost limitless variation of either open or closed circuits. Unidirectional or bidirectional bends can be negotiated depending upon the carriage used. Segments in all standard ring sizes are available in addition to straight slides up to 4 metres in length.
BOGIE CARRIAGE g Negotiates 'S' bends and differing bend radii. g Large platform for mounting purposes. g Adjustable axial/radial swivel bearings lubricated for life. g Accurate overall height. g Useful fixing holes provided. g Factory adjusted to suit track system.
LUBRICATOR g Provides lubrication to the contact surfaces thereby increasing the load capacity and life. g Alternative screw fixing options. g Flanged and compact versions available.
BLIND HOLE BEARING ASSEMBLY (CONCENTRIC) g Screws direction into mounting surface where access to
opposite side is restricted.
STRAIGHT SLIDES g Precision ground on all important faces. g Hardened 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance. g Soft centre section allows customising. g Central keyway provided for ease of location and alignment. g Ground datum faces provided both sides as an alternative means of location and alignment. g Available up to 4 metres long in most sizes. g Unlimited lengths can be achieved by butting.
SEGMENTS g 90째 and 180째 segments available. g Any length segment easily cut from standard size rings. g May be used independently or as part of a track system.
DOWEL PINS g Locates in central keyway of straight slide providing easy method of location and alignment.
363
Application Examples SPRAY SYSTEM Spray head mounted on HepcoMotion double edge ring segment, with external gear drive, tracks curvature of product.
MOBILE SAW FOR LONG TUBES Motor and saw assembly mounted on carriage, is hand operated around 360º HepcoMotion double edge ring slide in order to cut tube.
ROTARY ASSEMBLY FIXTURE HepcoMotion ring provides a large mounting area for attaching components. The precision ground surface ensures accuracy and the unhardened area inboard of the V’s enables tooling holes to be drilled as required.
SIMPLE PICK AND PLACE UNIT HepcoMotion double edge ring slide with external gear drive and bearings mounted externally, gives excellent stability for 360° rotation and provides an uninterrupted space in the centre for routing the services.
LASER ENGRAVER FOR ROTARY PRINT SCREENS Special HepcoMotion ring slide slips over screen tube ensuring integrity of shape. Hinged bearing assembly bracket enables fast load and unload.
364
Application Examples BODY SCANNER Imaging head mounted on HepcoMotion ring slides rotates around the patient. Smooth, silent operation and zero play ensures high quality definition. HepcoMotion floating bearings cater for any slight differences in parallelism of the rings due to mounting and ensure that accuracy is determined by the master ring alone.
REMOVING FLASH FROM MOULDING Carriage on track system accurately follows the profile of the product. Rigidity of the carriage assembly ensures good quality finish of the trimmed edge.
LAMINATING MACHINE Carriages on upper track cooperate with carriages on the lower track to pressure laminate chemical sensitive paper. HepcoMotion track systems permit continuous motion at high speed and ensure precise alignment with zero play. HepcoMotion bogie carriages on the bottom track allow track system segments of different radii to be negotiated.
MULTI-STATION ASSEMBLY MACHINE Carriages linked by connecting rods are indexed around a track system by means of a walking beam system operated by HepcoMotion GV3 straight sides. Zero play and precise positioning enables highly accurate work to take place at each station. Bogie carriages provide a large platform for mounting the components.
THREE AXIS ASSEMBLY ROBOT HepcoMotion ring disc with gear drive provides an ideal platform on which to mount the robot. The large diameter disc with HepcoMotion bearings gives support at the periphery, ensuring excellent stability and friction free mounting.
365
Assembled Ring System The HepcoMotion Ring system may be used in either complete ring form or as segments. The carriage may be used to run on the ring track (see below) or constructed in order to embrace the complete ring (see page 367) where the bearing assemblies may be placed internally and/or externally. In all cases either the ring or the carriage may be the moving component. Specially developed Hepco 'R' series bearing assemblies have sufficient adjustment to enable complete removal of the ring slide from the carriage (see our website www.tea.net.au PRT2 Technical Pages).
(see page 370)
(see page 370)
(see page 373)
(see page 372)
(see pages 368-369)
K Slide Ring Ref No.
~ A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
MAX
MIN
R12-93
93
12
11.67
34.7
19
9.1
8.6
1.5
5.8
9.5
6.7
2.2
R12-127
127
12
11.67
34.7
19
9.1
8.6
1.5
5.8
9.5
6.7
2.2
R25-159
159
25
19
71.2
30.5
20.9
15.4
2.4
9.8
19
13
2.2
R25-255
255
25
19
71.2
30.5
20.9
15.4
2.4
9.8
19
13
2.2
R25-351
351
25
19
71.2
30.5
20.9
15.4
2.4
9.8
19
13
2.2
R44-468
468
44
24
106
38.5
37.8
26
2.7
13.8
22
14.8
5.2
R44-612
612
44
24
106
38.5
37.8
26
2.7
13.8
22
14.8
5.2
R76-799
799
76
38.5
172.8
58.5
64.4
50.5
3.8
17.8
30
20.4
5.7
R76-1033
1033
76
38.5
172.8
58.5
64.4
50.5
3.8
17.8
30
20.4
5.7
NOTES: 1. Two lengths of stud are available for each size bearing assembly (see page 370). Choose according to your required carriage thickness. 2. Offset holes in carriage for eccentric bearing assemblies, necessitate adjustment rotation in direction of arrow shown. 3. Standard pinions are available from most manufacturers to suit gear drive option slide rings (see page 368). 4. Exact theoretical values have been given for 'Q', 'R' and 'S'. Positional accuracy of dimension 'S' will determine the axis of the ring. Positional accuracy for dimensions 'Q' and 'R' are not normally critical. Holes for bearing assemblies should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit.
366
Assembled Ring System When using HepcoMotion Double Edge Ring Slides encircled by bearings as shown below it is recommended that two concentric bearings should be placed 120° apart in order to provide a datum reference. The other bearings used should be the eccentric type. All eccentrics may be used where positional adjustment of the ring is required. One or more lubricators may be fitted at convenient positions to take advantage of the increased load/life afforded by lubrication (see technical section pages 378-380). ).
(see page 370)
(see page 372) (see page 371)
(see page 370)
(see page 370)
Drilling Position (see note *3) L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
±0.2
±0.2
±0.2
±0.2
T
U
V
W
Slide Ring X
Ref No.
7.7
6.2
55
22
40
1.3
12.3
10.9
30
11.5
6.5
12
20.5
R12-93
7.7
6.2
55
21
40
1.3
12.3
10.9
30
11.5
6.5
12
20.5
R12-127
12.25
10
95
43
80
1.9
24.9
23.0
50
22.5
16
18
40.2
R25-159
12.25
10
100
42
80
1.9
24.9
23.0
50
22.5
16
18
40.2
R25-255
12.25
10
105
42
80
1.9
24.9
23.0
50
22.5
16
18
40.2
R25-351
15.5
12.5
145
61
116
2.5
38.5
35.9
60
34.5
22
25
59.1
R44-468
15.5
12.5
150
61
116
2.5
38.5
35.9
60
34.5
22
25
59.1
R44-612
24
19.5
190
96
185
3.9
63.1
59.2
89.5
57
33
38
95.6
R76-799
24
19.5
210
96
185
3.9
63.1
59.2
89.5
57
33
38
95.6
R76-1033
Ordering Details: Simply list the components required and if relevant, bracket those you wish to be factory assembled.
Example: ASSEMBLED
R25-159-R180 {11 Xx FCP-25-159
180° Ring Segment (see pages 350-351) Fixed Centre Carriage (see page 355)
367
Slide Rings & Segments Hepco 'R' series slide rings are manufactured from high quality steel, zone hardened on the v edges and precision ground all over with datum register faces provided both internally and externally for ease of location. Gear drive options are available with teeth machined into either the internal or external register face. The number of teeth on the standard external option is divisible by 12 in order to provide maximum choice of pinion size for exact ratio requirements. Customers may also choose the tapped hole option 'N' which enables the slide ring to be bolted from below. Stainless steel ring slides and segments are available for customers requiring corrosion resistance.
Slide Ring Section X-X
Gear Drive Option 'P' (External)
'O' Chamfer x 45° (Internal & External)
Gear Drive Option 'Q' (Internal)
Tapped Hole Option 'N'
NOTES: 1. Standard ring segments will be slightly less than 90° and 180° because of the cutting allowance. Full 90° and 180° segments can be supplied to customer’s special order. 2. Socket head cap screws DIN912 will protrude 1mm above the surface of the R12 section slide rings. Customers requiring screws to be flush should use low head type DIN7984, available from Hepco upon request.
368
Slide Rings & Segments HepcoMotion series ring segments are cut from complete 360° slide rings, and are available in nominal 90° and 180° segments. Any length segment can be cut to customer's special order and additional holes drilled as required. Although suitable for most applications, slight out of roundness and flatness may be experienced with slide rings and segments in their free unmounted condition. This may be overcome by installing against a register and bolting to a flat surface. True shape ring segments are available on request.
Part
±0.2
D
D1
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Socket cap head screw ISO 4762 (see note 2)
105.37
80.63
12
12.37
8.6
7.7
6.2
3
3.5
6x3
3.7
M3*
8.6
7.7
6.2
3
3.5
6x3
3.7
M3*
M4x0.7
15.4
12.25
10
4.5
5.75
9x6
5.5
M5
M8x1.25
15.4
12.25
10
4.5
5.75
9x6
5.5
M5
M8x1.25
25.74
15.4
12.25
10
4.5
5.75
9x6
5.5
M5
M8x1.25
44.74
26
15.5
12.5
6
7
11x 7
6.8
M6
M8x1.25 M8x1.25
~
JS6
C
±0.025
Number
A
B
R12-93
93
84.4
±0.011
101.6
±0.037 REF
R12-127
127
118.4
±0.011
135.6
±0.037 REF
139.37
114.63
12
12.37
R25-159
159
143.6
±0.013
174.4
±0.039 REF
184.74
133.26
25
25.74
R25-255
255
239.6
±0.015
270.4
±0.041 REF
280.74
229.26
25
25.74
376.74
325.26
25
512.74
423.26
44
N M4x0.7
R25-351
351
335.6
±0.018
366.4
±0.044 REF
R44-468
468
442
±0.02
494
±0.046 REF
R44-612
612
586
±0.022
638
±0.048 REF
656.74
567.26
44
44.74
26
15.5
12.5
6
7
11x 7
6.8
M6
R76-799
799
748.5
±0.051
849.5
±0.051 REF
875.74
722.26
76
76.74
50.5
24
19.5
9
12
20x13
14
M12
M16x2
R76-1033 1033 982.5
±0.028
1083.5
±0.054 REF
1109.74 956.26
76
76.74
50.5
24
19.5
9
12
20x13
14
M12
M16x2
U
V
External Gear O
P
MOD
Internal Gear
No. of Teeth (R=360°)
Q
MOD
Holes within ±0.2 of True Position
Stock Segments (see note 1)
No. of Teeth (R=360°)
No. of Holes (R=360°)
R°
S°
T°
Part Mass-kg (R=360°)
Number
0.2
100.8
0.4
252
85.2
0.4
213
90
180
360
8
45
22.5
16.8
1
0.16
R12-93
0.2
134.4
0.4
336
119.2
0.4
298
90
180
360
8
45
22.5
23.3
1
0.22
R12-127
0.5
172.8
0.8
216
145.6
0.8
182
90
180
360
8
45
22.5
29.4
1
0.77
R25-159
0.5
268.8
0.8
336
241.6
0.8
302
90
180
360
8
45
22.5
47.8
1
1.2
R25-255
0.5
364.8
0.8
456
337.6
0.8
422
90
180
360
12
30
15
44.4
1
1.65
R25-351
0.5
492
1.0
492
444
1.0
444
90
180
360
12
30
15
58.6
2
5.1
R44-468
0.5
636
1.0
636
588
1.0
588
90
180
360
16
22.5
11.25
57.7
2
6.7
R44-612
1.0
846
1.5
564
751.5
1.5
501
90
180
360
16
22.5
11.25
75.9
2
25
R76-799
1.0
1080
1.5
720
985.5
1.5
657
90
180
360
20
18
9
78.8
2
32
R76-1033
Notes: 1. Standard ring segments will be slightly less and 90° and 180° because of the cutting allowance. Full 90° and 180° segments can be supplied to customer's special order. 2. Socket head cap screws ISO 4762 will protrude 1mm above the surface of the R12 section slide rings. Customers requiring screws to be flush should use low head type DIN7984, available from Hepco upon request. Ordering Details: Example:
(SS) - R25-351- (R360) - (R180) - (R90) - (P) - (Q) - (N) Tapped hole option 'N' Internal gear drive option 'Q' External gear drive option 'P' 90° segment 180° segment Full 360° ring slide Part number SS = Stainless steel option (Leave blank if not required)
369
Bearing Assemblies Two basic bearing assembly options are available, the standard economy through fixing type which requires access to the retaining nut on the opposite side of the mounting plate, and the blind hole fixing type for use where access to the opposite side is denied. The through fixing type is available in two stud lengths to cater for most applications, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco carriage plates. All bearing assemblies incorporate Hepco high precision ball races for durability, rigidity and friction free running. The bearings are greased for life and are supplied dust shielded as standard or neoprene sealed upon request. Bearing assemblies are available in concentric form to provide a datum reference and in eccentric form for ease of system adjustment.
Through Fixing Type (RSJ/RLJ)
ECCENTRIC (E) (see note 4)
CONCENTRIC (C) (see note 4)
SOCKET TOOL ADJUSTING WRENCH SHORT STUD LONG STUD (RSJ) (RLJ)
Part Number
For use with Ring/Slide Section (see note 6)
A
B
B1
RSJ/RLJ-13-C/E / BHJ-13-C/E
R–12/TNMS–12
12.7
10.1
5.47
±0.025
RSJ
RLJ
RSJ
RLJ
C
C
C1
C1
5.8
9.5
3
6.7
RSJ/RLJ-25-C/E / BHJ-25-C/E
R–25/TNS–25
25
16.6
9
9.8
19
3.8
13
RSJ/RLJ-34-C/E / BHJ-34-C/E
R–44/TNM–44
34
21.3
11.5
13.8
22
6.6
14.8
RSJ/RLJ-54-C/E / BHJ-54-C/E
R–76/TNL–76
54
34.7
19
17.8
30
8.2
20.4
U
U1
V
±0.2
Q
R
S
S1
T
T1
T2
W
X
Y
1.5
1.0
6.25
6.6
8.5
3.75
6.75
30
47.5
8
20
M3 x 0.5
5.5
3
1.5
7
9
12
5
10
50
72
14
32
M5 x 0.8
8.5
4
2.0
9.5
8.5
17.5
6.5
12.5
60
90.5
17
42
M6 x 1
10
8
3.0
14.5
16.4
23.5
10.5
18.5
89.5
133
25
62
M8 x 1.25
13
Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit bearing assembly mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit. 2. Nuts and washers are supplied with both concentric and eccentric RSJ/RLJ type bearing assemblies. 3. ‘N’ is the eccentric offset due to the double eccentric design (2 x N = total stroke). R dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and total stroke at the bearing centreline. 4. For adjusting toll part numbers see table. For adjustment procedure and fixing nut tightening torques contact T.E.A. 5. Fasteners for the through fixing type bearings are black on the centric version and bright zinc plated on the eccentric version for identification purposes, except stainless steel type. 6. Each size of bearing assembly has been designed for use with a specific size of ring/slide (see table above). However, any bearing assembly may be used in conjunction with any ring/slide section larger than that for which it was designed if required by the application. Additionally, size 34 bearing assemblies may be used with size 25 ring/slide section and size 54 bearing assemblies may be used with size 44 ring/slide section. 7. Stainless steel bearings are only available nitrile sealed.
370
Bearing Assemblies Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of mounting plate, the short version being used in HepcoMotion carriages. Both are available in Concentric (C) which provides a datum for the system, and Eccentric (DE) to provide enough adjustment to permit disengagement of a carriage or ring encircled by bearings. All bearings are available in a Controlled Height version (CHK) which minimises variation in the B1 dimension. This is desirable in high precision applications and is recommended whenever Double Row Bearings are used. Blind Hole Fixing type (RBHJ) allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mouting holes are not possible, or where the thicknes of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. They are available in Concentric (C) which are fixed, or Eccentric (E) which are adjustable. All bearings are greased for life internally. Customers are strongly advised to provide lubrication to the interface between bearings and ring slide by specifying HepcoMotion lubricators or Bleed Lubrication system. Lubrication greatly increases load capacity and life.
Blind Hole Fixing Type (BHJ) ECCENTRIC (E)
CONCENTRIC (C)
X (2 x socket head cap screws ISO 4762 supplied) +0.00 -0.03
±0.025
C2
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
M1
N
O
P
2.5
9.51
5
M4 x 0.5
8
0.5
5.8
0.8
2.2
–
7
9
1.9
4
7
2.5
20.27
10
M8 x 1
14
0.5
9.8
1
5
3
13
17
2.75
8
13
5.5
27.13
12
M10 x 1.25
18
0.7
13.8
1.25
6
4
17
21
3.6
10
15
6
41.76
25
M14 x 1.5
28
1.6
17.8
1.6
8
6
22
28
5.5
14
27
MASS ~g
Z
Adjusting Wrench
Socket Tool
RSJ C/E
RLJ–C/E
BHJ–C
BHJ–E
Part Number
8
AT13
–
8
8
7
27
RSJ/RLJ-13-C/E / BHJ-13-C/E
10
AT25
RT8
48
51
43
105
RSJ/RLJ-25-C/E / BHJ-25-C/E
14
AT34
RT10
115
120
105
235
RSJ/RLJ-34-C/E / BHJ-34-C/E
20
AT54
RT14
415
425
390
800
RSJ/RLJ-54-C/E / BHJ-54-C/E
Ordering Details: Example:
(SS) - 2 x (RSJ) - (RLJ) - (BHJ) - 25 - (C) - (E) - (NS)
Stainless Steel Option Leave blank for steel version
Quantity Through fixing type with short stud Through fixing type with long stud Blind hole fixing type
Neoprene sealed bearings required Adjustable (eccentric) type Concentric type Size reference (~'A' dimension)
371
Lubricator HepcoMotion Lubricators are made from impact resistant plastic and house a sprung oil impregnated felt wiper designed to apply a constant film of oil to the working surfaces of the ring slide without imposing undue friction. The application of oil significantly increases the load/life of the system. The compact type can be used with Hepco fixed centre carriage plates. Customers may also consider using the HepcoMotion bleed lubrication facility suitable for track systems.
COMPACT TYPE (C)
FLANGED TYPE (F) OIL IMPREGNATED FELT WIPER
'J' SCREW SIZE (see note 1)
OIL LUBRICATION POINT (see note 2) 'J1' (see note 1)
Part Number
Use With Ring Segment Type
Type F
Type C
A
A1
B
C
D
E
LB-12
R/TR–12
17
7
10
13
5.2
2
LB-25
R/TR–25
25
12
16.5
28
9.9
2
LB-44
R/TR–44
34
17
20
38
15
2.4
LB-76
R/TR–76
50
25
33.5
57
22.7
4.5
J1
J F
G
G1
H
I
Ø x LENGTH
3
6.5
12
3.1
3
2.5 x 5
Part
Screw
Hole Ø
K
L
M
N
O
Number
M2.5 x 6
2.7
2.5
3
5.46
9
2.2
LB-12
6
16
18
5.5
7
3 x 10
M3 x 8
3.2
4.5
5
9
15.25
5.5
LB-25
8
22
25
7
11
3 x 16
M4 x 10
4.2
5.5
6.25
11.5
18.25
8
LB-44
12
33
38
10
18
3.5 x 22
M5 x 12
5.2
9
10
19
31.5
11.5
LB-76
Notes: 1. 2 machine screws with cross-recessed pan heads to DIN9785A are supplied for fixing the flanged lubricator (see J1 in table. Additionally, 2 self tapping screws fo plastic with PT thread form and cross re-cessed pan heads are supplied for the compact type lubricator (see J in table. 2. Lubrication interval depends on length of stroke, duty and environmental factors. Replenish lubrication as necessary using a 68 viscosity EP mineral oil. 3. Sizes 25, 44 & 76 lubricators are available with increased “H1” to accommodate the “V float”’ of the floating bearings. Ordering Details: Example:
3 x LB-44 (F) (C) Compact Type 'C' Flanged Type 'F' Part Number Quantity
372
Fixed Centre Carriage The HepcoMotion Fixed Centre Carriage is designed for use with track systems with unidirectional bends of a common radii and for use with double edge ring slides and segments. The unique geometry enables carriages on a track system travel from straight to curve with negligible play in the transition zone. Such play as may develop is not detrimental to the performance of the system *1. Carriages are available with twin or double row (DR) bearings, and with floating bearings. Carriages with twin bearings have the smoothest running quality and have some compliance to accommodate misalignment. Carriages with DR bearings have better load capacity and stiffness. Due to the rigidity of DR bearings, carriages with this option are supplied as Controlled Height (CHK)*5 as standard. The corrosion resistant version has stainless steel bearings and fasteners, and a high performance USDA approved surface treatment to the aluminium carriage plate in place of the standard anodised finish.
Part Number
USE WITH RING / SEGMENT TYPE
A
B
±0.1
±0.1
±0.1
+0.13 -0.5
B1
C
C1
D
±0.1
E
F
G
H
±0.1
I
J
FCC-12-93
R/TR–12–93
55
40
25
48
20
19
12.8
21.9
25.52
11.11 14.41 6.5
FCC-12-127
R/TR–12–127
55
40
25
48
20
19
12.8
21.9
23.84
10.27 13.56 6.5
FCC-25-159
R–25–159
95
80
50
85
37
30.5
20.5
46
50.15
22.7
27.46
16
FCC-25-255
R/TR–25–255
100
80
50
80
36.5
29
19
46.1
43.88
20.53 23.35
16
FCC-25-351
R/TR–25–351
105
80
50
85
40
29
19
46.1
45.67
21.42 24.25
16
FCC-44-468
R/TR–44–468
145
115
75
120
65
38
25.5
71.9
75.96
36.21 39.75
22
71.9
78.80
FCC-44-612
R/TR–44–612
150
115
75
125
70
38
25.5
37.63 41.17
22
FCC-76-799
R/TR–76–799
190
185
100
160
90
56.5
37
118.7 104.60 49.12 55.48
33
FCC-76-1033 R/TR–76–1033
210
185
100
180
110
56.5
37
118.7 123.51 58.57 64.94
33
NØ
+0.1
+0.1
O
P
+0.1 -0
Q
RØ
+0.025 -0
S
T
1
3
Mass
K
L
M
9.3
7.8
4.5 x 4.5
2.7 11.89 10.94 12.5 x 4.8
4
+0.018 +0.018
8.8
7.8
4.5 x 4.5
2.7 11.89 10.94 12.5 x 4.8
4
+0.008 +0.018
1
3
7.34
4
10.1
70
FCC-12-127
17.1
14
5.3 x 4.5
3.2 24.38 23.01
22 x 8.4
8
+0.010 +0.022
2
5
11.5
6
16.6
400
FCC-25-159
15.9
14
5.3 x 4.5
3.2 24.38 23.01
22 x 8.4
8
+0.010 +0.022
2
5
11.5
6
16.6
410
FCC-25-255
15.6
14
5.3 x 4.5
3.2 24.38 23.01
22 x 8.4
8
+0.010 +0.022
2
5
11.5
6
16.6
420
FCC-25-351
25.8
23
5.3 x 4.5
3.2 38.25 35.94
25 x 8.7
10
+0.010 +0.022
2
6
14.5
8
21.3 1080 FCC-44-468
25.5
23
5.3 x 4.5
3.2 38.25 35.94
25 x 8.7
10
+0.010 +0.022
2
6
14.5
8
21.3 1100 FCC-44-612
43
40
8.0 x 6.0
3.8 63.76 59.25 32.1 x 13.5 14
+0.015 +0.027
4
8
20
10
34.7 3460 FCC-76-799
43
40
8.0 x 6.0
3.8 63.76 59.25 32.1 x 13.5 14
+0.015 +0.027
4
8
20
10
34.7 3660 FCC-76-1033
Notes: 1. For complete specifications please contact T.E.A. Transmissions. Ordering Details: Example:
Simply specify the quantity and part number required. 6 x (CR) FCC-44-612 (LB) (DR) (NS) (CHK)
373
U
Part
7.34
V1Ø
W
~g
Number
4
10.1
70
FCC-12-93
Track Systems HepcoMotion track systems provide a unique method of achieving an almost limitless variety of open or closed circuits by combining straight lines with curved slides. They can be used in any orientation, from horizontal to vertical. Any number of carriages can be accommodated, either the fixed centre economy type or the bogie type which enables 'S' bends of varying radii to be negotiated and provides a larger platform for mounting purposes. A unique jacking screw facility incorporated within the track system enables perfect alignment of straight slides to curved slides. Various drive possibilities exist. Lubrication of the system is achieved either by means of the bleed lubrication facility which injects lubricant direct to the V faces of the track. The relevant dimensions of individual track system slides are held on record to enable spares and replacements to be supplied. Track systems are also available in stainless steel for applications requiring greater corrosion resistance.
SEE ORDERING DETAILS MAXIMUM CARRIAGE PLAY AT JOIN (see note 1)
FIXED CENTRE CARRIAGE (see page 373)
SEE ORDERING DETAILS
ALL JOINS BOGIE CARRIAGE (see page 377) ADJUSTMENT KEY
TRACK SYSTEM CURVED SEGMENT REF NOTE 2 (see page 358) JACKING SCREW FOR ALIGNMENT
TRACK SYSTEM STRAIGHT SLIDE (see page 375)
Installation Procedure: Installation requires manual drilling and setting. Track systems are also available in suitable grade to correspond with customers pre=drilling mounting holes. Please visit www.HepcoMotion.com/PTR2datauk and select datasheet No. 2 Installation details. Notes: 1. With the fixed centre carriage, some slight play develops as each pair of opposing bearings traverse the join between straight and curve. This is rarely an issue in use. The maximum play acting in the direction of the arrows is shown on www.tea.net.au PRT2 Ring Slide & Track System Fixed Centre Carriage Play at Straight/Curve Transition Zones 2. Standard curved segments will be slightly less than 90° and 180° due to the cutting allowance. This is not detrimental to the smoothness of travel across the joins. Full 90° and 180° segments and segments to any number of degrees can be supplied on request.
Ordering Details: Simply list the curved segment and straight slide part numbers in sequential order in clockwise direction (see arrows in illustrations), starting at any point according to preference. Viewing plan elevation as per illustrations and traveling clockwise round the circuit. Curved segments should be designated suffix 'C' for clockwise bend and suffix 'A' for anticlockwise bend. The final item should indicate the quantity and part number of the carriages required. For grade of track suitable for pre-drilled holes, specify track system type ‘P’. Bleed lubrication may also be specified. Example:
1x
(1)TNM-44-B1020- 2 x AK (2) TR-44-468-R180/C (3) TNM-44-B1020- 2 x AK (4) TR-44-468-R180/C 6 x FCP-44
Track system straight slide Clockwise curved segment Track system straight slide Clockwise curved segment Fixed centre carriage
374
Track System Straight Slides HepcoMotion track system straight slides are modified straight slides from Hepco's highly acclaimed GV3 system. The slides are manufactured from quality high carbon steel, zone hardened on the 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance and precision ground for high accuracy and conformity. The centre portion of the slide is left soft to allow for customising. Standard lengths are available up to 4020mm (1976mm in the TNMS-12 section) and unlimited lengths can be achieved by butting slides together. Slides are available in stainless steel for applications requiring corrosion resistance. Sets of short slides in incremental lengths can be supplied for customers wishing to extend a system in order to take up chain or belt stretch. Please visit www.HepcoMotion.com/PRT2datauk and select datasheet No. 10 Slip Block adjustment. A bleed lubrication facility is available to channel lubricant direct to the running surfaces. All straight slides within a track system are matched in essential respects both with each other and with their corresponding curved segments. They are ground square on the ends for precision butting and are marked with a reference number and sequence number for identification during installation and for replacement purposes. Opposing slides within a track system are ground to identical lengths. Adjustment keys are available to facilitate alignment with adjacent curved segments. B (see note 1)
Part
~
SEE NOTE 5
Number
A
A1
+0 -0.2
B MAX
C
D
E
F
+0.05 - 0.00
SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW ISO 4762
G
±0.025
H
H1
I
J
TNMS-12
12
12.37
1976
15
45
6x3
3.5
M3
3
4
1.8
8.5
1.7
TNS-25
25
25.74
4020
30
90
10 x 5
5.5
M5
4.71
6
2.5
15
2.6
TNM-44
44
44.74
4020
30
90
11 x 6
7
M6
6.21
8
3
26
2.3
TNL-76
76
76.74
4020
30
180
20 x 12
14
M12
9.21
15
5
50
4.8
ADJUSTMENT KEY (AK) (see note 2)
DOWEL PIN (SDP) (see note 3)
OØ (hole size)
L x 45° (4 positions) SEE NOTE 5
m6
K
L
MØ
6.2
0.2
4
10
0.3
+0.0 -0.3
OØ
+0.012 +0.004
–
4
+0.002 -0.006
6.75
2
16
4
3
6
+0.012 +0.004
2.25
4
+0.002 -0.006
6
6
32
7
6
2.75
6
+0.002 -0.006
8
8
33
8
7
4.75
10
+0.002 -0.007
15
15
32
10
11
12.5
0.3
8
+0.015 +0.006
19.5
0.3
15
+0.018 +0.007
Mass
Part
~kg/m
Number
1.5
0.5
TNMS-12
2.2
1.5
TNS-25
2.7
3.5
TNM-44
4.5
1000
TNL-76
K6
N
P
Q
R
S
T
U
Notes: 1. Standard slide lengths are available in multiples of hole pitch 'D' + (2 x 'C') up to a maximum length per 'B' dimension in the table above. Special length slides can be cut to order. 2. Adjustment keys are required at every join between straight slide and curved slide. Please order accordingly (see ordering details). Please note that 'Q' dimension for the TNMS-12 slide is stepped one end to fit keyway 'H'. 3. Please note that dowel pins for the TNMS-12 slide are not stepped. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily straight. They should be set to the required straightness when bolting down to the mounting surface at assembly. 5. Dimensions 'A1' and 'K' will be matched with corresponding dimension 'F' and 'I' page 368 for track system requirements. Ordering Details: Example:
(SS) - TNM-44 - B1500 - (2xAK) - (1xAK) - (16xSDP)
Stainless steel option
16 x Dowel pins required 1 x adjustment key required 2 x adjustment keys required Length of slide 'B' - 1500mm Part Number
Leave blank for steel version
375
Track System Curved Segments HepcoMotion track system curved segments are cut from stock rings or segments (see pages 368-369 for dimensions and details). They are matched in essential respects with their corresponding track system straight slides and ground square on the ends to a specified dimension relative to their true shape. A clearance keyway and tapped hole facility is incorporated each end to provide a method of alignment when assembled together with the mating key of the track system straight slide (see page 375). An additional fixing hole is provided adjacent to the keyway each end to give extra support at the join position for all segments except the TR12-93 and TR12-127. All track system curved segments are marked with a reference number and sequence number (see page 374) and are available in stainless steel for applications requiring corrosion resistance. Segments to any number of degrees can be supplied to cater for all track system configurations. ADDITIONAL FIXING HOLE (STANDARD SIZE)
J (socket head set screws ISO 4026 supplied)
CENTRE LINE OF CUT
For all other details and dimensions see pages 368-369. Part
~
±0.2
Number
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
TR12-93
93
12.37
4.25
–
1.5
2.5
2
3.25
1.75
M2.5 x 3
R° 90
180
TR12-127
127
12.37
4.25
–
1.5
2.5
2
3.25
1.75
M2.5 x 3
90
180
TR25-159
159
25.74
7
18
1.5
7
5
6.5
3
M4 x 4
90
180
TR25-255
255
25.74
7
20
1.5
7
5
6.5
3
M4 x 4
90
180
TR25-351
351
25.74
7
20
1.5
7
5
6.5
3
M4 x 4
90
180
TR44-468
468
44.74
8
25
2.5
10
6
7.5
4
M5 x 6
90
180
TR44-612
612
44.74
8
25
2.5
10
6
7.5
4
M5 x 6
90
180
TR76-799
799
76.74
10
30
2.5
18
7
11.5
6
M8 x 16
90
180
TR76-1033
1033
76.74
10
30
2.5
18
7
11.5
6
M8 x 16
90
180
Notes:
1. Some distortion may be present in segments in their free unmounted state. This may be overcome by bolting to the mounting surface and setting to adjacent slides using the keyway alignment facility Ordering Details:
(SS) - TR44-612 - (R90) - (R180) - (N)
Example:
Stainless Steel Option
Tapped hole option 'N' (see page 368) 180° segment 90° segment Part Number
Leave blank for steel version
376
Bogie Carriage The HepcoMotion bogie carriage is designed for use with track systems where 'S' bends or bends of varying radii are to be negotiated. Each bogie swivels on an special play free axial / radial ball bearing which is lubricated for life. This enables the bogie carriage to follow exactly the path of the track at all times. Carriage plates and bogie swivel plates are made from high strength aluminium alloy and finished anodised. Bogie carriages are supplied assembled and adjusted to suit the accompanying track system. Customers are advised to specify the HepcoMotion bleed lubrication facility within the track as lubricators cannot be fitted to bogie carriages. Special size carriage plates are available upon request. BOGIE FIXING SCREW
BOGIE
RSJ TYPE CONCENTRIC BEARING ASSEMBLY (see page 370)
SEE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (b)
CARRIAGE PLATE
PRELOAD ADJUSTING SCREWS
I (6 x FIXING HOLES)
RSJ TYPE CONCENTRIC BEARING ASSEMBLY (see page 370) Part Number
USE WITH TRACK SYSTEM (SEGMENT TYPE)
±0.1
±0.1
A
B
C
D
E
80 42.1 44.5 46.1
±0.1
F
G
H
75
45
60
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
M6 x 1.0 38 75 15 25.5 34.5 46
P
ADJUSTMENT BRACE
Mass ~kg
BCP-25
TR–25
130
29
AB–25
0.8
BCP-44
TR–44
175 115 53.8 56.5 71.9 100 62.5 85 M8 x 1.25 53 105 18 32.5 44
34
AB–44
2.1
BCP-76
TR–76
240 185 77.2 81 118.7 130 87.5 125 M10 x 1.5 72 170 24 42.5 61.5 100 70
AB–76
6.3
59
Adjustment Procedure: Notes: 1. In rare cases where adjustment of the eccentric bearings is required, the bogies must be removed from the carriage plate and bolted instead to the adjustment brace. This will mimic the carriage and provide access to the fixing nuts allowign adjustment of the eccentric bearings to take place. 2. Please note that the floating bearings cannot be supplied with bogie carriages. Ordering Details: Example:
BCP76 - (DR) - (NS) - (CHK)
CHK = Controlled height option
Part Number DR = Double row bearings
Standard with DR bearings Leave blank if not required for twin bearing version
Leave blank for twin bearings
NS = Nitrile sealed option
377
Load Capacity and Life Expectancy The load capacity and life expectancy of Hepco ring, segment and track systems will be determined by several factors. These are the size of the ring and the size and number of bearing assemblies used, the presence of lubrication, the magnitude and direction of loads, the speed of operation (see note 2 page 379 ) and the length of the path traversed (see note 3 page 379). It is usual to run systems with less than the maximum load to prolong the life, which can be calculated using the data and formulae in this section. For calculation purposes, Hepco ring slide and track systems fall into two categories, those in which a carriage runs on a ring segment or track, and those in which a ring rotates captivated by a number of bearing assemblies (or similar arrangement where the ring is stationary and the bearing assemblies and load rotate). Wherever possible, Hepco ring and track systems should be lubricated using the Hepco lubricators (see page 372). Such lubrication will greatly increase the load capacity and extend the life of the system (see table below and page 361 and nomograms on pages 379 and 380).
Systems With Carriages On Rings, Segments & Tracks When calculating the life, the loading on the system should be resolved into the direct load components L1 and L2 and the moment load components M, MV and MS (see adjacent diagram and refer also to note 2).
Maximum Lubricated Load Capacity Direct Loads (N)
Maximum Unlubricated Load Capacity
Moment Loads (Nm)
Direct Loads (N)
Moment Loads (Nm)
Carriage
L1
L2
M
Mv
Ms
L1
L2
M
Mv
Ms
FCP-12-93
120
120
1.25
1.25
0.6
80
80
0.8
0.8
0.4
FCP-12-127
120
120
1.2
1.2
0.6
80
80
0.8
0.8
0.4
BCP-12
120
120
1.7*
1.7*
0.6
80
80
1.2*
1.2*
0.4
FCP-25-159
800
800
16
16
9
300
300
6
6
3.5
FCP-25-255
800
800
15
15
9
300
300
6
6
3.5
FCP-25-351
800
800
17
17
9
300
300
7
7
3.5
BPC-25
800
800
27*
27*
9
300
300
10*
10*
3.5
FCP-44-468
1600
1600
57
57
35
600
600
22
22
14
FCP-44-612
1600
1600
65
65
35
600
600
24
24
14
BCP-44
1600
1600
75*
75*
35
600
600
28*
28*
14
FCP-76-799
3800
3800
165
165
140
1400
1400
62
62
55
FCP-76-1033
3800
3800
210
210
140
1400
1400
81
81
55
BCP-76
3800
3800
220*
220*
140
1400
1400
86*
86*
55
* See note 1 To calculate the life of a system using a standard carriage, first obtain the load factor LF by entering the values for L1, L2, M, MV and Ms in respect of the proposed duty into equation (1) below, together with the maximum load capacities from the table above. (1)
LF =
M MV MS L1 L2 + + + + M(max) MV max) MS(max) L1(max) L2(max) (
The life for the system can be read from the nomogram on page 379 (for lubricated systems) or on page 380 (for systems running dry) by taking the life figure on the lower scale opposite the calculated value for LF on the upper scale (see examples on page 380).
Notes: 1. If using a bogie type carriage which differs from the standard length, the M and MV moment load capacities will increase pro rata with the increase in the distance between the bogie swivel centres (see dimension 'F' on page 377). 2. When calculating L2 and MS, the centrifugal force must be included, which acts radially outwards from the centre of mass (COM) of the moving objects. Its magnitude is F=DV2/R where V is the velocity of the COM in m/s, R is the distance of the COM from the ring axis in m and D is the mass in kg. F is in N (newtons).
378
Systems with Rings Slides in Bearings It is usual to space bearings equally around the ring *1. When calculating the life, the load should be resolved into the direct load components LA and LR and the moment load component M, as shown in the diagram opposite. Capacities are shown for both ‘dry’ and ‘lubricated’ conditions - this refers to the bearing and slide ‘V’ contact, since all the bearings are lubricated internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.
Bearing Assembly Size RSJ/BHJ-13
RSJ/BHJ-25
RSJ/BHJ-34
RSJ/BHJ-54
Used with Ring Part Number R12–93 R12–127
Maximum Lubricated Load Capacity
Maximum Unlubricated Load Capacity
Number of Bearing Assemblies Equally Spaced
LA (N)
LR (N)
M (Nm)
LA (N)
LR (N)
M (Nm)
3
90
52
18 x øC*
60
34
13 x øC*
4
113
60
22.5 x øC*
75
40
16 x øC*
EACH ADDITIONAL 1
23
15
4.5 x øC*
5
3
1.2 x øC*
R25–159
3
600
350
150 x øC*
230
125
55 x øC*
R25–255
4
750
400
187 x øC*
285
150
69 x øC*
R25–351
EACH ADDITIONAL 1
150
100
37 x øC*
18
12
5 x øC*
3
1200
700
300 x øC*
460
255
110 x øC*
R44–468 R44–612 R76–799 R76–1033
4
1500
800
375 x øC*
575
300
138 x øC*
EACH ADDITIONAL 1
300
100
75 x øC*
38
24
27 x øC*
3
2850
1650
750 x øC*
1050
600
260 x øC*
4
3600
1900
875 x øC*
1300
700
325 x øC*
EACH ADDITIONAL 1
700
470
175 x øC*
75
50
*see note 4
18 x øC* *see note 4
To calculate the life of this type of system, first obtain a value for the load factor LF by entering the values for LA, LR and M in respect of the proposed duty, into equation 2 below, together with the maximum load capacities from the table above. (2)
LF =
M M(max)
+
LA LR + LA max) LR(max)
See note 2 on page 378
(
The life for the system can be read from the nomogram below (for lubricated systems) or on page 380 (for systems running dry) by making the life figure on the lower scale opposite the appropriate value for LF on the upper scale. (See example page 380).
Load/life Nomogram For Lubricated Systems Load Factor LF
Life (km) Notes: 1. In certain applications in which the bearing assemblies rotate with the load, and this has large LR or M components, it may be beneficial to space the bearing assemblies unequally around the ring. Contact T.E.A. for details. 2. SPEED OF OPERATION. Hepco ring, segment and track systems are rated for speeds of 1m/s without lubrication or 1.5m/s when lubricated. Greater speeds may be tolerated at reduced loads. Contact T.E.A. for details. 3. SHORT STROKE OPERATION. The life of the Hepco ring, segment and track systems will be reduced when the length of the path traversed in each cycle is very short. For path lengths below 0.2m, the life will reduce pro-rata with the path length. e.g. a system with a 0.08m stroke will have its life reduced by a factor of 0.08 ÷ 0.2 = 0.4 compared to that calculated from the appropriate nomogram. 4. Øc is the contact diameter, i.e. the diameter of the circle which passes through the points of contact between bearing assemblies and the ring. This will be usual to the P.C.D. of the ring ±9, 20, 37 & 64mm for the 12, 25, 44 & 76 sections respectively (depending on whether the bearing assemblies are running on the outside or inside of the ring).
379
Load/life Nomogram For Unlubricated Systems Load Factor LF
Life (km)
Load/life Calculation Examples Example 1 A track system consist of: 1 x TR44 - 468-R180/C; 1 x TNM-44B870-2xAK; 1 x TR44-468-R180/C; 1 x TNM-44-B870 - 2xAK; 1 x FCP-44-468. The carriage carries a dead weight such that the mass of the load and the carriage together is a total of 40kg whose centre of mass is over the middle of the carriage. The centre of mass is 80mm above the slide V's. The speed of operation is 0.7m/s and the system is lubricated with the Hepco lubricators which are supplied as part of the fixed centre carriage.
PLAN VIEW
L1 = 40kg x 9.81m/s2 (g) = 392.4N L2 (centrifugal force see note on page 272 = DV2/R) L2 = 40kg x (0.7m/s)2 รท 0.234m = 83.7N MS = L2 x 0.08m = 83.7N x 0.08 = 6.7Nm MV = M = 0
LF =
M MV MS + + + M(max) MV(max) MS(max)
L1 + L1(max)
L2 = L2(max)
0 57
+
0 57
+
6.7 35
+
392.4 83.7 + = 0.49 1600 1600
The value of 0.49 for the life factor LF can then be entered into the nomogram for lubricated systems to obtain the linear life. Reading from the nomogram on page 361 we see that the life corresponding to an LF value of 0.49 is 2,900km.
Example 2
An antenna is mounted on a Hepco R25-351-360 ring which rotates in 6 x RLJ-25 bearing assemblies. The system is lubricated with 5 x LB-25 lubricators. The antenna rotates once per second and the mass of the rotating assembly (which includes the ring, platform and the antenna) is 8kg. The centre of mass of the assembly is 100mm from the axis of the ring, and 150mm above the ring V's. The system is required to work on average 36 hours per week. LA = 8kg x 9.81m/s2 (g) = 78.5N Speed of the centre of mass: 1 rev/s = 2 x x 0.10m x 1 = 0.63m/s LR = DV2/R = 8kg x (0.63m/s)2 รท 0.10m = 31.8N M = LR x h = 31.8N x 0.15m = 4.77Nm From the table on page 273 we find that M(max) = (187 + 2 x 37) x ร c = 261 x (0.351 + 0.020) = 96.8Nm. LA(max) = 750 + 2 x 150 = 1050N; LR(max) = 400 + 2 x 100 = 600N.
LF =
M M(max)
+
LA LR 4.77 78.5 31.8 + = + + = 0.177 LA(max) LR(max) 96.8 1050 600
Reading from the nomogram on page 379 we see that the life corresponding to an LF value of 0.177 is 39000km. 1 revolution = .351 x = 1.1m Each week the system runs for 3600revs/hour x 36 hours = 143km. System life = 39000 รท 143 = 273 weeks = 5.25 years
380
HDLS Hepco Heavy Duty Slide System Introduction HepcoMotion has updated the highly successful Heavy Duty Slide System, retaining the best features from the previous system, and incorporating them in a greatly expanded range under the name of HDS2. Many new components have been added including larger bearings, with increased load capacity, two sizes of construction beam, single edge V slides and flat track, as well as a range of drive options. All this, with an option for stainless steel or corrosion resistant components as standard, enables the HDS2 range to offer a solution to most customer’s applications. Customers can choose from low cost commercial slides for general use or high precision ground slides to suit applications where accuracy and smoothness are key requirements. Customers can save design and manufacturing time by specifying ready mounted systems complete with rack driven carriages, safe in the knowledge that everything has been designed and tested by one of the worlds leading specialists in linear technology.
• Can operate without lubrication, ideal for food machinery and clean operations.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS • Low cost commercial, precision ground and stainless steel systems available.
• Slides and tracks available in one piece up to 4 metres long, saves on assembly time.
• Spur or helical rack and pinion options for ease of driving.
• Long lengths comprising replaceable segments, reduces downtime in the event of damage.
• Unique wiping action expels dirt and debris, in harsh environments.
• Flat tracks overcome necessity for parallel installation.
• Available as assembled units or in component form, providing maximum flexibility of design.
• Simple alignment facility to achieve parallelism of V slides. • Works in any plane and orientation for unrestricted use in machine construction.
• Versatile construction beams for multiple design options. • System capacities up to 68kN.
381
System Composition The new Heavy Duty slide system comprises of a versatile family of slides, flat tracks and other components which may be used with either double row ball bearing assemblies for high load applications or with blocks containing four needle roller bearings for super high load applications. Slides and flat track are available up to 4 metres in length in both high precision ground and low cost, commercial versions and a rack cut option is available with pinions to provide a simple and effective means of driving.
n BORED
TYPE PINIONS
n SHAFT
TYPE PINIONS n Hardened teeth for long life. n Shaft diameter and tolerance to suit standard bearings. n Two useful lengths available. n Centred both ends for easy reworking. Bore diameter and tolerance to suit compatible shaft size. Keyway provided.
n V BEARINGS
TRACK ROLLERS deep ground V form. n Rigid mounting register. n Compact design. n Blind hole version bolted and adjusted from front face. n High load capacity. n Eccentric version easily adjusted. n Deep groove double row precision bearing. n Can be mounted in virtually any thickness plate. n Dust shielded or neoprene sealed versions available. Track rollers permit out of parallel installation. Crowned contact face to overcome misalignment. Narrow version for restricted space applications. n Precision
REINFORCING RODS n Provide 40% increase in stiffness of beam. n Allow predetermined bend to be induced in beam.
BACK construction in light weight aluminium. n Profiles to suit all rails with either bearings or blocks. n Adjustable alignment option to obtain parallelism of system. n Strong
CAP WIPER n Lubricates contact faces reducing wear. n Long interval before relubrication is necessary. n Excludes debris from bearing contact faces. n Incorporates both through hole and tapped hole fixing facility. n Removable cover allows adjustment of system without disassembly.
BACK PLATE ALIGNMENT DOWEL n Adjustable alignment in conjunction with jacking screw.
382
System Composition The slides and tracks may be attached direct to a suitable section, or they may be used in conjunction with Hepco back plates to give a ready made support profile. The considerable problems to set systems in parallel have been overcome with the unique jacking screw alignment option. A rigid aluminium beam section is available to which all Hepco Heavy Duty systems may be attached in 22 different positions and in dozens of different combinations providing a versatile all in one guide, drive and construction element.
BEARING BLOCK n Four high precision roller bearings per block. n Super high load capacity. n True rolling motion for low wear and sustained accuracy. n Rugged housing for extreme rigidity and stability. n Adjustable end and side seals prevent ingress of debris. n Lubrication system direct to bearings and contact faces. n Concentric or eccentric (adjustable) mounting journals. n Tapped hole version for alternative method of installation. n Cast iron and aluminium versions available.
WIDE FLAT TRACK/ DOUBLE EDGE V SLIDE n NARROW
FLAT TRACK/
SINGLE EDGE V SLIDE One piece rail with built-in parallelism. Lightened centre with attractive debris cover. n Available up to 4 metres in length. n Soft centre section for customising. n Back edge may be used as a datum face. n Keyway provided for ease of location and alignment. n Stepped dowel pins available for location in keyway. n Deep hardened edges for maximum wear resistance. n Precision ground and low cost, unground versions available. n Rack cut option provides means of driving. n Narrow rail with register face for convenience of spacing apart.
T NUTS n Simple means of attaching components. n Retaining spring prevents loss of position. n Location type fits back plate keyway. n Adjustment type for ease of alignment.
PLATES n Easily incorporated into customers design. n Will attach to all T slot positions of construction beam. n Key locations for attachment of rail and for mounting. n Pillar types available for intermittent support. TAPPED HOLE OPTION n Allows easy attachment of adjoining components.
BACK PLATE LOCATION DOWEL n Simple means of location and alignment.
CONSTRUCTION BEAM n Attractive construction member in reduced weight aluminium. n Stiff section for long unsupported spans. n Eight corner mounting positions to suit narrow slide and track profiles. n Fourteen T slot mounting positions to locate with any backplate.
383
Load Capacity The load capacity and life expectancy of Hepco Heavy Duty Systems will be determined by several factors. These include the number and arrangement of bearing blocks, bearing assemblies and track rollers, the type of slides used, the length of travel, speed of motion and the state of lubrication. It is usual to run systems with less than the maximum load to prolong the life, which can be calculated using the data and formulae found on our web site: www.tea.net.au In all systems the loading can be resolved into a combination of axial loads LA (direction parallel to the axis of the mounting stud) and radial load LR. These loading directions are illustrated in the figures below.
The maximum load capacities of the various bearing blocks, V bearing assemblies and track rollers are detailed in the table below.
BEARING ELEMENT TYPE
MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITIES* AXIAL LOAD LA RADIAL LOAD LR
V Bearing Assemblies HJ64-C/E & B-HJ64-C/E
2.5kN
8kN
0
10kN
0
5kN
10kN
20kN
Track Roller Assemblies HR58-C/E & B-HR58-C/E Narrow Track Roller Assemblies HRN58-C/E & B-HRN58-C/E Bearing Blocks HC25-S-C/E
*When used with precision ground slides and tracks and properly lubricated For all data, dimensions and technical information including how to calculate the expected life of a system for Hepco's Heavy Duty Slide System please visit our web site: www.tea.net.au or contact T.E.A. for faxed sheets.
384
Application Examples GANTRY ROBOT: The Hepco heavy duty system with its rigid construction beam, and drive facility is the ideal choice for XY gantry robot design. The example shows single edge V slides mounted direct to the corner faces of the beam with high load carrying capacity bearing blocks supporting the greater mass of the X axis and V bearing assemblies with cap wipers (not shown) supporting the Y axis. The continuous 4 metre long slide rack cut on the back face together with pinions provides smooth transmission of the drive and overcomes the problems of multiple butt joining. Many gantry robot applications do not require the precision of ground slides. By choosing the commercial unground system customers are provided with an economic solution with adequate accuracy for their requirements.
DRIVEN CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY: This example shows the ease with which a single edge V slide and narrow flat track can be spaced apart using a requisite number of cross members of equal length. In this way the slide and track form integral members of the frame therefore saving both weight and cost. By using a V slide on one side and flat track on the other, the necessity for precise parallelism of the two elements is overcome. The rack cut version of the slide provides an easy means of driving and the carriage assembly is prevented from lifting off by the drive pinion one side and single track roller the other.
MACHINE BED APPLICATION: This example shows a vertically inclined precision ground single edge V slide one side and ground narrow flat track the other. The high load capacity bearing blocks have maximum capacity in the vertical plane due to 4 roller bearings per block sharing the load. The back face tapped hole mounting option is used for maximum rigidity in this application. Eccentric type track rollers are used in conjunction with the flat track for individual adjustment to ensure that the load is shared equally by all rollers.
SLIDING TABLE: This example shows the ease with which a high load capacity sliding table can be constructed using single edge V slides mounted on back plates to provide access in the centre for the ball screw drive. The jacking screw alignment facility has been incorporated one side to enable that element to be set exactly parallel to the other. In this case bearing blocks have been used although bearing assemblies and cap wipers could just as easily have been incorporated depending on the load requirements.
385
Introducing the Hepco SL2 Stainless Steel Based Slide System Based on the proven Generation II range, Hepco's SL2 System offers the user basic interchangeability with Gen II and GV3 components in an extensive linear range consisting of stainless steel Bearing Assemblies, Flat Slides and Spacer Slides. A complementary range of lightweight aluminium Carriage Plates and Flange Clamps is also available, with special surface treatment providing corrosion resistance better than most stainless steels. This process is approved by the U.S. Department of Agriculture for use in food processing machinery.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS • Hardened and ground Slides for durability, resistance to corrosion and smooth running. • Long lengths available up to 4m in most sections, saves on assembly time. • Extensive range of Spacer or Flat Slides gives many design options.
• Three lengths of Carriage Plate available for each Slide section gives many design options. • Double Row Bearing Assembly option for high radial loads and long life, ideal for dirty applications. • Twin Bearing Assembly option gives low friction and is tolerant of misalignment.
• Proven Hepco 'V' concept for low friction and good rigidity.
• Low friction characteristics allow system to operate 'dry' with no lubrication.
• Cap Seals prevent ingress of dirt and offer positive lubrication, long life and improved safety.
• Available as assembled unit or in component form for maximum flexibility.
• Lubricators offer positive lubrication with improved life and low friction.
• Extensive use of plastic plugs eliminates dirt traps.
• Suitable for many clean room applications.
• Maintenance-free, therefore can perform in arduous conditions.
386
Application Examples Industrial Applications
SL2 System is used for vertical and horizontal guidance on a bottle filling machine in the cosmetic industry. Spacer Slides are shown fixed to the machine structure on the horizontal axis. Short undrilled Spacer Slides are used on the vertical axis supported one end only by long type Flange Clamps. Hepco Carriage Plates are shown used throughout. Alternatively, Bearing Assemblies and Cap Seals can be mounted direct to the moving components of the machine. Care should be taken to ensure parallelism of opposing Slides during installation. Twin type Bearing Assemblies can be used throughout in cases where there may be slight misalignment of opposing Slides.
SL2 System is used as the vertical guidance in a food industry application to move a diverting conveyor between two further conveyors alternately. High speed and high duty operation driven by a crank arm. The SL2 Flat Slide has been chosen as the moving element in order to reduce mass. Blind Hole type Bearing Assemblies have been used due to the thickness of the mounting plate being too great to accommodate the stud and nut of the Through Fixing type. The system is lubricated by means of Hepco Lubricators, since Cap Seals cannot be used with the Blind Hole eccentric type Bearing Assemblies. Lubricated systems allow much greater life for any given load.
Scientific/Test Applications
SL2 System is used for telescopic horizontal guidance in a Nuclear Industry drum handling application. Vertical movement is provided by a scissor lift. The environment experiences a low level of radiation, therefore the Bearing Assemblies are supplied with special grease lubrication internally. The system is required to be all stainless steel, therefore the standard coated aluminium Carriage Plates have been replaced by specials, manufactured by Hepco to the customer's drawings. External lubrication of the Slides is not possible in this application, however, the low friction characteristics of Hepco systems means that 'dry' running is not a problem.
SL2 System is used as the means of guidance for all axes of a non-destructive ultrasonic testing machine. An ultrasonic probe is lowered into a spray tank during research in a university engineering department. For vertical guidance a special curved section stainless steel backplate manufactured by Hepco to the customer's drawings is incorporated, allowing an SL2 Flat Slide to be mounted to the circular section probe. The SL2 System is ideally suited to this humid environment. The use of Twin type Bearing Assemblies offers extra compliance to compensate for slight deviations of the opposing Slides on the horizontal axis. Lubricators give increased system life whilst retaining low friction. The zero play which is characteristic of the Hepco system ensures rigidity of the probe end, despite the large overhang in this application.
387
SL2 System Composition SL2 offers excellent performance through a quality manufacturing process and careful selection of materials, and has been designed to provide the ideal combination of corrosion resistance and long service life even in the most arduous application. The SL2 range of Slides is very extensive, comprising seven Flat Slide sections and four Spacer Slide sections. This very wide range ensure that the most suitable Slide can always be specified for any application. All except the smallest are available in 4 metre lengths, ground on all main surfaces with hardened 'V' running faces. SL2 Carriages are available in three standard lengths as fully assembled units, factory adjusted to the Slide of your choice. The system makes extensive use of plastic sealing plugs to close off counterbores, thus avoiding the possibility of dirt traps. SL2 is therefore ideally suited for food processing and clean room applications.
BLIND HOLE FIXING BEARING ASSEMBLY CONCENTRIC & ECCENTRIC For use where access to opposite side of the mounting plate is restricted. Easy fixing from one side only. Twin type or Double Row Bearing Assemblies available (see opposite). Low ratio adjustment for controlled setting. Defines the datum position for the system.
STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE SPACER TYPE & FLAT TYPE Hardened 'V' faces for long life. Centre section unhardened for drilling or machining. Length cut to your requirements, up to 4m in one piece. Mounts directly to machine. No special construction or additional components required. Keyway and datum faces for easy alignment. Available without holes for use with Flange Clamps or for customising. Plastic caps for fixing screws to seal off counterbores. Useful where weight saving and minimum inertia are important. Extra Slide width options.
THROUGH HOLE FIXING BEARING ASSEMBLY CONCENTRIC & ECCENTRIC For use in mounting plates of limited thickness where there is unrestricted access to the opposite side. Two stud lengths available to suit most mounting plate thicknesses. Twin or Double Row types available (see opposite). Defines the datum position for the system. Easily adjusted via hexagon flange or socket in stud.
FLANGE CLAMPS Enables Slide to become a self-supporting beam. Two mounting possibilities - face fixing or base fixing. Available in long or short type, to support a Slide at one end or both ends. High strength aluminium, with corrosion resistant coating approved by U.S. Dept. of Agriculture.
388
SL2 System Composition Carriages can be supplied fitted with: BEARING ASSEMBLIES ONLY - for dry or minimum friction applications. CAP SEALS - to shroud the Bearing Assemblies - for excellent lubrication and sealing quality. LUBRICATORS - for the application of lubricant with lower friction. All components are available individually for customers who wish to construct their own Carriage Plates, or where the Carriage may be part of the machine structure. All Bearing Assemblies are of stainless steel construction, in either Twin Bearing or Double Row format, and are supplied lubricated for life. They are hardened and precision ground to special tolerances and raceway conformity to suit Slide System applications.
LUBRICATOR (OPTIONAL) Use with short Carriage Plate/Miniature System or as an option to Cap Seals on longer Carriage Plates. Provides lower friction running with long system life. Applies very small quantities of oil, for long system life. Supplied charged with mineral oil as standard, or dry on request (for other oil types).
STAINLESS STEEL TWIN OR DOUBLE ROW BEARING OPTION ACROSS RANGE* Twin type Bearing Assemblies provide slight compliance offering accurate, play-free motion and tolerance of misalignment. Frictional resistance can be varied, useful where very low friction is required. Economical, and easy to adjust. Double type Bearing Assemblies have higher radial load capacity. They are more suited to harsh environments and high speed conditions where extra long life is required. One piece construction avoids dirt traps. *All except smallest size.
CAP SEAL (OPTIONAL) Lubricates contact surfaces from a grease reservoir, giving extended re-lubrication interval and long system life. Totally encloses the Bearing Assembly. Increases load capacity. Extends system life. Excludes debris. Improves operational safety. Can be used on medium and long Carriage lengths (on all but miniature systems).
CARRIAGE PLATE High strength, lightweight aluminium alloy with corrosion resistant coating approved by the U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Large mounting area with flush surface. Three standard lengths in each size. Pre-drilled and tapped component mounting holes. Counterbores sealed with plastic plugs to eliminate dirt traps. Recess both sides to facilitate location of switch cams and other components. Stainless steel Carriage Plates available on request (to customer's drawings).
389
Stainless Steel Spacer and Flat Slide Hepco SL2 stainless steel Slides are zone hardened on the ‘V’ edges and precision ground on all main surfaces to a high degree of parallelism. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing Customers to pre-drill their mounting holes. All Hepco Slides are left ‘soft’ in the centre portion for subsequent machining if required. However, since SL2 Slides are specially finished to promote resistance to corrosion, Customers should be aware that machining may reduce localised resistance. To maximise corrosion resistance following machining, polishing is recommended. Two varieties of Slide are available, Spacer type and Flat type.
Spacer Slide A one piece construction that bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing adequate running clearance for Bearing Assemblies, Cap Seals and Lubricators.
B ±2mm (see note 1) C
E
D
Dowel Pin (optional) (See note 5)
F
Socket Head Cap Screw ISO 4762 (not supplied)
H1 Q P H
A1 A
I
ØN
ØO (hole size)
J K
Part Number
L (Ø x depth)
Use With
A
A1
B
Spacer
Flat
Bearing Ø
~
Theoretical
Max
Slide
Slide
see note 3
Apex
see note 1
12
12.37
1976
SS NMS 12
13 SS MS 12
SS NS 25
C
D
Plastic Cap (Supplied)
E
F
G
G
±0.1
20.5
45
H1
+0.05
Non Acc.
20.5
H
‘M’ x 45° (4 positions)
I
J
±0.025
- 0.00
3
6.2
4
13
12
12.55
1016
13
13
30
3
-
-
25
25
25.74
4020
43
43
90
4.5
10
6
1.8
8.5
1.7
-
-
2.5
15
2.5
SS S 25
25
25
25.81
4020
43
43
90
4.7
-
-
-
-
-
SS S 35
25
35
35.81
4020
43
43
90
4.7
-
-
-
-
-
SS S 50 SS NM 44
25
50
50.83
4020
43
43
90
4.7
-
-
-
-
-
34
44
44.74
4020
43
43
90
6
12.5
8
3
26
2.5
SS M 44
34
44
44.81
4020
43
43
90
6.1
-
-
-
-
-
SS M 60
34
60
60.81
4020
43
43
90
6.1
-
-
-
-
-
SS M 76 SS NL 76 SS L 76
34
76
76.81
4020
43
43
90
6.1
-
-
-
-
-
54
76
76.74
4020
88
88
180
9
19.5
15
5
50
5
54
76
76.81
4020
43
43
90
9.1
-
-
-
-
-
Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within B Max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the Customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. Customers are requested to ensure that the proximity of the fixing holes to the ends of the Slide will accommodate the Fixing Screws and to note that Slide lengths which bisect the fixing holes will require dimensions C and D to be specified unequal. 2. Where longer Slides are required, standard lengths can be matched suitable for butting, on request. In these cases the mating ends will be ground square and additional holes may be inserted to give support near the joins. A light stoning of the ‘V’s will be necessary after installation to ensure smooth travel across the joins. 3. In the table, the standard size of Bearing diameter to use with each Slide is quoted. However, other combinations are possible. 4. Fixing screws for Flat Slides must have head length sufficient to clear the Carriage. Low head socket cap screws DIN 7984 provide sufficient clearance and are available from Hepco (see table). 5. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily straight. If straightness is important, the Slide may be set straight by bolting down against a register or by utilising the central keyway. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end midway between the Slide end and first hole. Also, midway between all fixing hole centres, or as deemed necessary for the application.
390
Stainless Steel Spacer and Flat Slide A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or Customer’s own key. In cases where Cap Seals or lubricators are not being used, the precision datum edges on the spacer portion of the Slide may be utilised for location against a machined register. The rigidity of the Spacer Slide enables it to be used as a self-supporting element or construction member of the machine, when used in conjunction with Hepco Flange Clamps. Plastic caps are provided with all Spacer Slides to close off debris traps at the hole positions. These caps engage in the sockets of the fixing screws.
Flat Slide Designed for Customers who prefer to bolt the Slide to a spacer which is part of their own machine construction. Where the Slide is required to be the moving component an aluminium spacer plate can be construction in order to reduce inertia.
Optional Low Head Fixing Screw (See table and note 4)
B ±2mm (see note 1) C
E
D
F
A1 A
70°
K
K
L
Dowel Pin Option (see note 5)
M
Part No. 3.5
6x3
-
3.5
-
-
5.5
10 x 5
1.0
7
-
-
N
O
m6
K6
+0.002 SS SDP 4 4 +0.012 +0.004 4 - 0.006
SS SDP 6 6 -
+0.012 +0.004
4
-
+0.002 - 0.006
-
P
Flat Slide Fixing Screw
Mass~g
(see note 4)
/100mm
Q Part No.
Thread Length
6.75
-
-
-
-
44
-
-
SS FS 3-8
M3
8
23
6
2.25
-
-
-
140
-
-
SS FS 6-16
M6
16
82
Part Number Spacer
Flat
Slide
Slide
SS NMS 12 SS MS 12 SS NS 25 SS S 25
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SS FS 6-16
M6
16
130
SS S 35
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SS FS 6-16
M6
16
170
SS S 50
7
11 x 6
1.0
8
2.75
-
-
-
330
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SS FS 6-20
M6
20
190
SS M 44
9
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SS FS 8-20
M8
20
265
SS M 60
-
-
-
9 14 11.5
+0.015
SS SDP 8 8 +0.006 6
+0.018
+0.002 - 0.006
+0.002
20 x 12 1.0 SS SDP 15 15+0.007 10 - 0.007 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
SS FS 8-20
M8
20
340
15
4.75
-
-
-
1000
-
-
SS FS 10-25
M10
25
500
Ordering Details:
SS NM 44 626 (P) Part Number (’N’ denotes the Spacer Slide option)
Slide required without holes (Spacer Slide only)
Required length (mm) Multiple of hole Spacing (E) plus dimensions C and D
Example:
1 x SS NS 25 536 6 x SS SDP6
Stainless steel Spacer Slide x 536mm long 6mm Ø head, stainless steel Dowel Pins
391
SS NM 44
SS M 76 SS NL 76 SS L 76
Stainless Steel Bearing Assemblies A number of Bearing Assembly options are available from Hepco in order to cater for most design requirements. The Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of carriage or mounting plate, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco Carriage Plates. The Blind Hole Fixing type allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mounting holes are not possible, or where the thickness of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred, or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. The Blind Hole Fixing eccentric type Bearing Assemblies will not accommodate Cap Seals, however, Hepco Lubricators may
Through Hole Fixing Type (SS SJ/SS LJ)
Eccentric (E) L (see note 3)
C1 C2
Concentric (C) O (see note 1)
L
F M M1
O
A
N
J K
B1
P
C
B
Socket Tool Short Stud (SS SJ)
Adjusting Wrench
Long Stud (SS LJ)
For use with Part Number
Slide Reference
SS SJ
SS LJ
SS SJ
SS LJ
C
C
C1
C1
±0.025
(see note 6)
A
B
B1
SS SJ/SS LJ 13 C/E / SS BHJ 13 C/E
MS/NMS
12.7
10.1
5.46
5.8
9.5
3
6
SS SJ/SS LJ 25 C/E / SS BHJ 25 C/E
S/NS
25
16.6
9
9.8
19
4
13
SS SJ/SS LJ 34 C/E / SS BHJ 34 C/E
M/NM
34
21.3
11.5
13.8
22
6
14
SS SJ/SS LJ 54 C/E / SS BHJ 54 C/E
L/NL
54
34.7
19
17.8
30
8
20
±0.2
Q
R
S
S1
T
T1
T2
U
U1
V
W
X
Y
1.5
1.0
6.25
8
8
3.75
6.75
30
47.5
8
20
M3 x 0.5
5.5
3
1.5
7
8.5
12
5
10
50
72
14
32
M5 x 0.8
8.5
4
2.0
9.5
8.5
17.5
6.5
12.5
60
90.5
17
42
M6 x 1
10
8
3.0
14.5
14
23.5
10.5
18.5
89.5
133
25
62
M8 x 1.25
13
Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit Bearing Assembly mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance as per dimension R (not shown here). Please contact T.E.A. for additional faxed data sheet. 2. Thread form is metric fine. See dimension 'F' in table above. 3. All Through Fixing type eccentric Bearing Assembly studs are supplied with sockets for adjustment as shown, with the exception of size 13. 4. Nuts and washers are supplied with all Through Fixing type Bearing Assemblies. 5. 'R' dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and the total adjustment available at the bearing centre line for 360° rotation of the adjusting nut. 6. Each size of Bearing Assembly has been designed for use with a specific thickness of Slide. This is designated within the Slide part number by reference as shown in the table above. However, any Bearing Assembly may be used in conjunction with any Slide according to practicality of design. Please contact T.E.A. for additional faxed data sheet. 7. Double Row Bearing Assemblies are not available for size 13 Bearing Assemblies.
392
Stainless Steel Bearing Assemblies be specified, as a means of applying lubrication to the system. Both varieties of Bearing Assembly are available with two types of bearing configuration. The Twin bearing type comprises two individual deep groove ball bearings on a single stud. This construction offers some compliance, which allows smoother running and is more tolerant of misalignment or uneven mounting surface. The Double Row type (see note 7) is a one piece construction bearing with two ball tracks. This removes potential dirt traps and offers higher load capacity (particularly radially), plus longer life. Both types of bearing have been designed specially for slide system applications and the performance confirmed by rigorous testing. Their external dimensions are identical.
Blind Hole Fixing Type (SS BHJ) Concentric (C) B1 G I
H
Eccentric (E)
B1
R Z
D
E
F
W
A V
70° Q
B Y
B
T
T2
T1 S
X' (2 cap screws ISO 4762 - supplied)
S1 U U1 +0.00
Âą0.025
C2
D
-0.03
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
M1
N
O
P
2.5
9.51
5
M4 x 0.5
8
0.5
6
0.8
2
-
7
9
0.5
4
7
2.5
20.27
10
M8 x 1
14
0.5
10
1
5
3
13
17
0.75
8
13
5.5
27.13
12
M10 x 1.25
18
0.7
14
1.25
6
4
17
21
1.0
10
15.2
6
41.76
25
M14 x 1.5
28
1.6
18
1.6
8
6
22
28
1.5
14
27
Mass ~g Z
SS SJ C/E
SS LJ C/E
SS BHJ C
Part Number
SS BHJ E
8
8
8
7
27
SS SJ/LJ 13 C/E / SS BHJ 13 C/E
10
48
51
43
105
SS SJ/LJ 25 C/E / SS BHJ 25 C/E
14
115
120
105
235
SS SJ/LJ 34 C/E / SS BHJ 34 C/E
20
415
425
390
800
SS SJ/LJ 54 C/E / SS BHJ 54 C/E
Ordering Details:
(SS SJ) (SS LJ) (SS BHJ) 25 (C) (E) (DR) NS Through Hole Fixing type with short stud Through Hole Fixing type with long stud
Nitrile Seals (standard) Double Row Bearings (no designation for Twin Bearings) Eccentric (adjustable) type required Concentric type required
Blind Hole Fixing type Size reference (~'A' dimension)
Example:
2 x SS SJ 34 C NS Stainless steel short stud size 34 concentric Bearing Assemblies with Twin bearings and standard Nitrile Seals. 2 x SS SJ 34 E NS Stainless steel short stud size 34 eccentric Bearing Assemblies with Twin bearings and standard Nitrile Seals.
393
SL2 Technical Data Load/life Calculations Maximum moments and direct load capacities for the SL2 System are given in the table below. Capacities are given for 'dry' and 'lubricated' conditions - this refers to the 'V' contact, since all Bearing Assemblies are greased for life internally. Values are based on shock-free duty. Dry System, Twin & DR Type Bearing Carriage L1(max) L2(max) MS(max) Mv(max)
M(max)
Lubricated System, Twin Type Bearing L1(max) L2(max) Ms(max) Mv(max)
M(max)
Type
N
N
Nm
Nm
Nm
N
N
Nm
Nm
Nm
SSCPMS12
80
80
0.4
40 x Y
40 x Y
240
240
1.3
120 x Y
120 x Y
Lubricated System, DR Type Bearing L1(max) L2(max) Ms(max) Mv(max) N
N
Nm
M(max)
Nm
Nm
Not Applicable
SSCPS25
320
320
3.6
160 x Y 160 x Y
960
960
11
480 x Y
480 x Y
1600 3000
17
1500 x Y
800 x Y
SSCPS35
320
320
5
160 x Y 160 x Y
960
960
15
480 x Y
480 x Y
1600 3000
25
1500 x Y
800 x Y
960
480 x Y
SSCPS50
320
320
7.3
160 x Y 160 x Y
960
22
480 x Y
1600 3000
37
1500 x Y
800 x Y
SSCPM44
640
640
13
320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000
60
1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000
72
3000 x Y
1800 x Y
SSCPM60
640
640
18
320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000
84
1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000
100 3000 x Y
1800 x Y
SSCPM76
640
640
23
320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000
108
1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000
129 3000 x Y
1800 x Y
SSCPL76
1440 1440
50
720 x Y 720 x Y 6000 6000
210
3000 x Y 3000 x Y 8000 10000 280 5000 x Y
4000 x Y
Calculating System Life for SL2 To calculate system life, the load factor LF should be calculated using the equation below. Where M and MV moment loads are concerned, the M(max) and MV(max) for the relevant Carriage Plate will need to be determined. This is established by multiplying the figure shown in the table by the spacing of the Bearing Assemblies, Y, in metres.
LF =
L1 L1(max)
+
L2 L2 max) (
+
MS MV M + + MS(max) MV(max) M(max)
Bearing
Basic Life
Basic Life
Assemblies
Lubricated
Dry
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 13
40
40
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 25
40
70
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 25 DR
70
70
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 34
100
100
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 34 DR
150
100
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 54
200
150
SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 54 DR
400
150
Y
LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF is calculated, the life in km can be calculated using one of the two equations below, with Basic Life being taken from the table for the Bearing Assembly and lubrication condition applicable.
Dry System: Life (km) =
Basic Life (LF)2
Lubricated System: Life (km) =
Basic Life (LF)3
SL2 Technical Specifications: Slideways Material and Finish: Hardness of 'V' Surfaces: Straightness: Parallelism: Hole Pitch Tolerance: Bearing Assemblies Bearing Raceways & Balls: Hardness: Seals: Cage: Studs: BHJ 'E' Baseplate: Temperature Range: Grease:
Special martensitic Stainless Steel conforming generally to AISI 420 series, ground on all main surfaces to N5. Generally to 52 HRC. Generally 0.2mm/m unmounted - the slides can be set straight during the assembly process. 'V" and datum faces 0.013mm/m non-accumulative. ±0.1mm non-accumulative. Stainless Steel AISI 440C 58-62 HRC Nitrile rubber Plastic Stainless Steel AISI 303 Stainless Steel AISI 316 -20 C° to +120 C° Lithium soap grease NLGI 2
Please visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for specifications on SL2 Carriage Plates, Cap Seals, Lubricators and Flange Clamps, plus further technical data.
394
HepcoMotion速 PDU2 - Aluminium Profile Driven Unit
Please go to www.tea.net.au for PDU2 catalogue download 395
HepcoMotion速 DLS Linear Transmissions
Please go to www.tea.net.au for DLS catalogue download 396
HepcoMotion速 HPS Powerslide-2
Please go to www.tea.net.au for HPS Powerslide-2 catalogue download 397
HepcoMotion® PSD80 - Screw Driven Linear Unit The HepcoMotion® PSD80 is a new screw driven linear unit which is a companion to the popular and cost effective PDU2 range of belt driven units, and to the larger PSD120 unit. It shares the PDU2’s use of Hepco Herculane ® wheels running inside a profile and is actuated by a stainless steel leadscrew with a bearing quality polymer nut. Ballscrew versions are available on request. The closed unit is fully covered with a stainless steel sealing band. Screw leads of 4, 15, 25 & 70mm are available, meaning that carriage speeds from zero up to ~1m/s are possible without the need for additional gearing. PSD80 carriages have a substantial 500N load capacity, and are also capable of thrust loads of 300N. The PSD80 beam profile is compatible with the Hepco MCS aluminium frame construction system, and can be assembled into multi-axis systems with Hepco PDU2 and PDU2M units.
PSD80 - Screw Driven Linear Unit Internal Buffers • End of stroke protection at both ends Carriage • High load capacity - up to 500N and 7.5Nm • High speed - up to 1m/s • Long life with no re-lubrication • Multiple carriges on a single unit available • Top plate easily removed & machined
Stainless Steel Cover • Effectively seals the unit from debris
Aluminium Beam • Rigid & lightweight • T-slots in bottom & side faces • Lengths to 3m +
Polymer Drive Nut • Smooth & durable • Most pitches will back drive • Thrust loads to 300N Hepco Herculane ® Wheels • Ultra-high performance wheels mounted in adjustable carriage body for zero play Stainless Steel Leadscrew • Smooth, strong & precise • Available in leads of 4, 15, 25 & 70mm with right and left handed threads • Ballscrew version also available Limit Switch & Bracket • Mechanical & inductive versions available • IP67 rating
PSD80 pdf download www.tea.net.au
398
HepcoMotion® PSD120 - Profile Screw Driven Unit ®
The HepcoMotion PSD120 linear drive unit can be used for single or multi-axis applications and combines Hepco’s Herculane® wheel technology with a ball screw drive to give excellent all-round performance in a highly cost effective package. The integrated linear guide and ball screw drive are housed in a high strength aluminium beam fitted with a continuous sealing strip protecting the internal mechanism. The Hepco Herculane® wheel technology enables a smooth, low friction movement of the externally mounted carriage plate. The PSD120 has a full range of options and accessories to optimise each unit for the application.
PSD120 - Profile Screw Driven Unit Stainless Steel Sealing Strip • Continuous metal sealing strip protects internal guide and drive mechanisms from ingress of debris • Effective in any orientation • Enhances safety and appearance
Removable Carriage Plate • Easily detachable for customising • Can be rotated 180º to change the switch cam to the other side
Mounting Platform • Tapped holes for ease of component attachment • Direct fixing of multi-axis mounting brackets Limit Switch & Bracket • Mechanical and inductive versions • IP67 rating • Easily adjustable
Shaft • Supplied with fitted key • Motor connection kits available
PSD120 pdf download www.tea.net.au
399
HepcoMotion® SBD Sealed Belt Drive The HepcoMotion® is an exceptionally rugged, quiet and precise linear unit. It uses super-smooth Hepco LBG caged linear ball guides having such a high load capacity that system life is rarely an issue. Drive is provided by a new high strength tooth belt. The unit is housed in an anodised aluminium beam and is completely enclosed with a stainless steel cover to provide excellent protection from dirt and debris. A corrosion resistant version with all external components made in stainless steel or anodised aluminium is an option. A version for use in high specification cleanrooms is also available.
Stainless Steel Cover
• Help protect internal mechanism from ingress of debris • Effective in any orientation • Enhances safety and appearance Removable Carriage Plate
• Easily detachable for customising • Can be rotated 180° to change handling of switch cam
Mounting Platform
• Tapped holes for ease of component attachment • Direct fixing of multi-axis mounting brackets
Limit Switch & Bracket
• Mechanical & inductive versions • IP67 rating • Easily adjustable
Aluminium Beam
• Available up to 6 metres in one piece • Stiff self supporting beam may form part of the machine construction
• 6 T-slots compatible with Hepco MCS and other profiles
• T-nuts, T-slot covers, mounting brackets & multi axis connection brackets available
Drive Shaft
• Supplied with fitted key • Right, left, double & hollow shaft options (right hand shown) • Motor connection kits available
SBD pdf download www.tea.net.au
400
Linear Slide System - Type AD - with Steel or Aluminium Carriage Plate
fig. 1 Dimensions (in mm) Type AD106 AD208 AD208R AD210 AD312 AD316 AD416 AD416R AD420
A 120 140 140 150 180 180 200 200 200
A1 18.5 25.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 27.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
A2 83 90 90 98 126 126 140 140 140
B 80 120 120 120 150 150 180 180 180
B1 19.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
B2 41 70 70 70 90 90 100 100 100
C 10 15 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
D 54 54 54 54 70 70 70 70 70
F 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30
L (max.) 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
d1 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20
N 30.5 37.0 42.0 44.0 51.0 61.5 61.5 61.5 61.5
P 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20
Part Numbers
Component Parts & System Load Type AD106 AD208 AD208R AD210 AD312 AD316 AD416 AD416R AD420
Guide + length D10_ _ D10_ _ D10_ _ D10_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _
* A = aluminium
R 58 58 58 58 75 75 75 75 75
S 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300
T 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
Load N Wheels
Carriage* M106_ M208_ M208R_ M210_ M312_ M316_ M416_ M416R_ M420_
O 11 11 11 11 17 17 17 17 17
C106+ E106 C208 + E208 C208R + E208R C210 + E210 C312 + E312 C316 + E316 C416 + E416 C416R + E416R C416 + E416
Axial
Radial
800 1600 2400 2400 3200 6400 6400 17200 20000
400 2000 2600 2600 3200 7000 7000 8600 31400
S = steel
Two steel bars with a circular section, hardened, ground with a tolerance of h6, and chromium-plated, are stiffened and held parallel by an aluminium profile, available to a max. length of up to 6mtrs. Running along the middle for the entire length is a slim ruler indicating where holes must be made for fastening the bars to the frame. This is the simplest and safest system to use both when wanting to keep the guide stationary while the carriage with wheels runs up and down, and when the carriage is instead stationary and the guide slides. Guides are supplied cut to the requested size up to 6000mm in length. The screws locking the bars in place are positioned with the axis 30mm from the heads with centre to centre distance S. Where lengths are not an exact multiple of S (+60), head centre to centre distance S are varied as we deem most appropriate, or according to any customer specifications. The system comes complete with carriage for fitting relevant concentric and eccentric wheels. Assembly is left to the purchaser so that he can perform any necessary additional machining. In some applications where the load hangs over the side, a screwing torque may be generated on the bars causing them to slowly slide in their housings. To prevent this sliding, all D10-D20-G20 guides are fitted with a mechanical stop at each bar head. Value "T" in fig. 1 indicates the difference in length between the bar and profile required when applying the slide-inhibiting stops. The steel bars, unless otherwise specified by the customer, are always supplied shorter than the aluminium profile by a value of two times "T" so that the "bar stops" can be fitted. How to order the AD System: When using the whole system, i.e. guide plus carriage complete with wheels, order by quoting the type of system followed by the length in mm. ex. AD312; L-3500 Components may be ordered separately as follows: Guideways: Wheels: Carriages:
See www.tea.net.au for dimensions. To order state slide type followed by length in mm ex. D20; L-3500 See pages 402 to 403 for dimensions. To order state part number ex. C312 See www.tea.net.au for dimensions. To order state part number and abbreviate which material: A = Aluminium S = Steel ex. M312S All dimensions are subject to change without notice.
401
Roller Bearing Guide Wheels - suitable for 120째 Guideways V-Grooved wheels with an idler pin and round shafts. Each wheel size is produced with a concentric and eccentric bolt. Concentric wheels enable you to achieve parallelism between the carriage and guide, while eccentric wheels eliminate play. The system can be pre-loaded to achieve smoother or more rigid sliding depending on application demands. The 120째 groove on the outer race insures that the load is distributed over two points of the guide at all times meaning each carriage slides smoothly along its guide. The bolt features a recessed hexagonal nut at both ends so that the preload can be adjusted from whichever side is most convenient. These 120째 guide wheels are ideal for use with our precision round shaft - page 280-281
120째 V-Grooved Roller Bearing Guide Wheels Dimensions in mm
Part No. Wheel
Guide
D
d
d1
L1
L2
L3
C106* E106* C208 E208 C208R* E208R* C210* E210* C312 E312 C316 E316 C416* E416* C416R* E416R* C420 E420
S10/D10
22
M6
10
11
14.5
9.5
S10/D10
30
M8
10
14
18.0
S10/D10
30
M10
10
14
S10/D10
39
M10
10
S10/D10 G20 S10/D10 G20 S20/D20 G20 S20/D20 G20 S20/D20 G20
40
M12
40
L
1
Load Weight Dynamic Static g. A(N) R(N)
B1
B2
B3
B4
E
ES
I
S
S
24.0
6.5
8
2.5
7
1.0
2.5
14.5
2.5
1.0
300
300
31.2
14.0
32.0
9.0
9.0
4.5
9.5
1.0
3.0
18.0
2.0
2.0
400
1000
65.3
18.0
19.0
37.0
9.0
9.0
4.0
15.0
1.0
5.0
18.0
2.0
2.0
600
1300
73.8
18
22.5
19.0
41.5
11.0
11.5
4.0
15.0
1.0
5.0
22.0
2.5
2.0
600
1300
151
20
18
24.0
19.0
43.0
11.0
13.0
4.0
15.0
1.5
5.0
28.0
4.0
2.0
800
1600
165
M16
20
18
30.0
24.0
54.0
11.0
19.0
10.0
14.0
1.5
8.0
28.0
10.0
2.0
1600
3500
210
57
M16
20
22
33.5
24.0
57.5
14.5
19.0
10.0
14.0
1.5
8.0
35.0
8.0
3.5
1600
3500
414
58
M16
20
25
31.5
24.0
55.5
12.5
19.0
10.0
14.0
1.5
8.0
35.0
6.5
-
4300
4300
431
57
M20
20
22
33.5
24.0
57.5
14.5
19.0
10.0
14.0
1.5
8.0
35.0
8.0
3.5
5000
7850
491
1g = 0.0352736 oz.
C type - concentric E type - eccentric
Roller Bearing Load Runners
Dimensions in mm
Part No.
Load Dynamic Static Weight g. A(N) R(N)
S
S1
22.0
3.0
2.0
-
1300
151
5.0
28.0
3.0
0.5
-
1600
190
8.0
35.0
6.5
2.5
-
3500
480
Wheel
Guide
D
d
d1
L1
L2
L3
L
B1
B2
B3
B4
E
ES
I
CC210* EC210* CC312 EC312 CC416*
S10/D10
34
M10
10
17
22.0
19.0
41.0
10.5
11.5
4.0
15.0
1.0
5.0
S10/D10 G20 S10/D10
36
M12
20
20
23.5
19.0
42.5
10.5
13.0
4.0
15.0
1.0
50
M16
20
25
34.0
24.0
58.0
15.0
19.0
10.0
14.0
1.5
1g = 0.0352736 oz. Options: Nickel plated and made watertight - Add RS to Wheel Part No. ex. C106RS. Stainless Steel only available for wheels marked * - Add SS to Wheel Part No. ex. C106SS. The nut and Belleville Washer are supplied as standard issue. The latter, apart from acting as a washer, also prevents unscrewing. For improved unscrewing protection, the regular nut can be replaced with a locknut.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
402
Technical Data For Using 120째 Roller Bearing Guide Wheels On Hexagonal Bar (fig. 1)
fig. 1
Dimensions in mm Wheel Part No. C106 E106 C208 E208 C208R E208R C210 E210 C312 E312 C316 E316 C416 E416 C416R E416R C420 E420
Load Radial (N)
CHmax.
Axial (N)
-
15
300
300
31.2
19
-
-
400
1000
65.3
23.0
19
-
-
600
1300
73.8
39
30.5
24
-
-
600
1300
151
40
30.5
24
-
-
800
1600
165
40
33.0
30
24
36
1600
3500
210
57
41.0
30
-
36
1600
3500
414
58
41.0
30
27
36
4300
4300
431
57
41.0
30
-
36
5000
7850
491
D
I2
CH
22
17.0
14
30
23.0
30
CHmin
Weight g
1g = 0.0352736 oz.
120째 Roller Bearing Guide Wheels Without Bolt (fig. 2)
Dimensions in mm Wheel Part No.
D
d
C106SP C208SP C210SP C312SP C416SP
22 30 39 40 57
7 10 15 15 20
Load
L
Axial (N)
Radial (N)
Weight g
11 14 18 18 22
3400 6400 11500 11500 18000
1200 2700 7500 7500 10000
19.9 45.4 96.4 99.3 255.2
1g = 0.0352736 oz.
fig. 2
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
403
Mechanical Linear Guides - Type AK
Compact, high quality, versatile and easy to install and maintain.
Advantages: Very small overall dimensions Double drive head for perfect guide symmetry and securing points on four sides for the reduction gear. Patented locking and tensioning system that makes it possible to adjust and maintain the belt, working on two sides of the carriage and leaving the support surface free. Side grooves for brackets and for proximity or other switches. Possibility of using standard or longer carriages.
Three versions available: AK208R - this version has a roller guide and hardened, chrome-plated, not lubricated tracks ideal for: dirty environments dust, swarf, abrasives, filaments, etc.), environments in which track lubrication may contaminate the product (paper and fabric machining, packaging, etc.) also when easy sliding is required. AK208R Stainless Steel This is the version for the food industry and for corrosive environments (water, marine salt, steam, acids, etc.). AKR20 This version has ball bearing guides for applications that call for even greater rigidity and a very narrow carriage.
Construction: Section and connection. The basic structure of the AK range of guides consists of an extruded anodised aluminium section, measuring 30x60mm with maximum 6 mtr lengths. The two â&#x20AC;&#x153;Tâ&#x20AC;? slots formed in the sides can be used to anchor the entire linear guide using special fixing brackets. The slots can also be used for plates with M5, M6 and M8 holes.
Ball Bearing Guide One of the great advantages of the AKR20 range of linear guides is the possibility of fitting different models of track guides. In fact all size 20 guides can be easily fitted above the trolley. In addition to its basic support function, the plate also has a mechanism for tensioning the belt.
Roller Guide The AK208R range is fitted with a D10 type sliding track. The guide is composed by an aluminium profile and two hardened, ground steel bars secured on the sides. The carriage, which measures 130x130x20 has two concentric C208R wheels and two E208R eccentric wheels that can be adjusted to cause the trolley to slide by eliminating any play on the guide.
The Belt Clamp In order to provide driving force on both heads, a system has been devised for tensioning the carriage belt. A double wedge system grips the belt and does not allow it to slip by means of the teeth on the lower element. The unit is made up of two aluminium elements and one end of the belt is inserted into a specific slot in the carriage, where it is secured by means of two screws that are used for correct tensioning.
404
Mechanical Linear Guides - Type AK
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
405
Roller Bearings: Cam, Load Runners & Combined - overview Page
Low Cost Stud Style HEC Cam Followers
407
M6-M30
Low Cost Yoke Type HEC Cam Followers
408
Outside Diameter 16mm - 90mm
Lubrication Free Inch Stud Style Cam Followers
409
Plain concentric stud style. Composite Tread, stainless steel shaft. Suitable wet areas Outside Diameter ½” to 1 5/8th”
Inch/Metric Stud Style Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Concentric & Eccentric versions Outside Diameter 1” to 10”
Inch/Metric Flanged Stud Style Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8”
V-Grooved Inch/Metric Stud Style Load Runner Concentric & Eccentric versions. Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8”
Plain Yoke Style Inch/Metric Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Higher capacity than stud style Outside Diameter 1” to 8”
V-Grooved Yoke Style Inch/Metric Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8” Higher capacity than stud style
Inch -410-411 Metric 418-419
Inch 412-413 Metric 420-421
Inch 414-415 Metric 422-423
Inch 416 Metric 424
Inch 417 Metric 425
Installation Notes for Load Runners
426
Load Rails & other Load Runner versions
*
Please visit our web site * www.tea.net.au for data sheets
Winkel Combined Bearings Bearings to take high radial & axial loads Many other types of Combined Bearings are available. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au to see full range, and download additional data.
406
427-436
HEC Cam Followers Sealed type with crowned outer ring Exceptionally well priced Many sizes in stock Ideal for large quantity orders Material - Bearing: Steel
R500
B2 g2
D
g1 G
d G1 C
C1
B1
B
Part No.
Nut Load Max Tightening Speed Weight Torque Dynamic Static (greased) approx. C1 Nm kN kN rpm kg
D
d
C
B
B1
B2
G
G1
g1
g2
KR16PP KR19PP KR22PP KR26PP
16 19 22 26
6 8 10 10
11 11 12 12
28 32 36 36
16.0 20.0 23.0 23.0
-
M6 x 1 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1 M10 x 1
8 10 12 12
4 4 4 4
-
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
2.5 6.8 12.5 12.5
3.7 4.3 5.5 5.5
4.0 6.3 6.7 6.7
12000 9000 7000 7000
0.018 0.028 0.042 0.058
KR30PP KR32PP KR35PP KR40PP
30 32 35 40
12 12 16 18
14 14 18 20
40 40 52 58
25.0 25.0 32.5 36.5
6 6 8 8
M12 x 1.5 M12 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5
13 13 17 19
6 6 6 6
3 3 3 3
0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8
18.2 18.2 45.8 68.7
8.1 8.1 12.3 15.0
9.0 9.0 15.6 25.0
5500 2100 3600 2900
0.087 0.105 0.169 0.250
KR47PP KR52PP KR62PP KR72PP
47 52 62 72
20 20 24 24
24 24 29 29
66 66 80 80
40.5 40.5 49.5 49.5
9 9 11 11
M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M24 x 1.5 M24 x 1.5
21 21 25 25
8 8 8 8
4 4 4 4
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
101 101 205 205
21.10 21.10 31.10 31.10
31.40 31.40 38.40 38.40
1200 2400 1900 1900
0.390 0.461 0.815 1.140
KR80PP KR85PP KR90PP
80 85 90
30 30 30
35 35 35
100 100 100
63 63 63
15 15 15
M30 x 1.5 M30 x 1.5 M30 x 1.5
32 32 32
8 8 8
4 4 4
1.0 1.0 1.0
351 351 351
46.30 46.30 46.30
63.00 63.00 63.00
1300 1300 1300
1.870 2.030 2.220
Sizes from 16 to 40 are standard stock items.
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
407
HEC Yoke Type Cam Followers With crowned outer ring Exceptionally well priced Ideal for large quantity orders
Load Stud Ø mm 16 19
24 30
32 35
40 47
52 62
72 80
85 90
d1
Dynamic N
Static N
Max. Speed (greased) rpm
11 11 11 11
12 12 14 14
3050 4500 3600 5700
3000 6300 3650 8700
22000 8500 20000 7000
0.014 0.015 0.020 0.021
15 15 15 15
14 14 14 14
19 19 23 23
4500 8600 6100 10900
5400 12000 7800 17000
5000 5500 11000 4500
0.041 0.042 0.064 0.065
32 32 35 35
15 15 19 19
14 14 18 18
25 25 27 27
6600 11800 10500 16000
9800 19000 17500 32500
9000 3900 7000 3400
0.071 0.072 0.103 0.105
17 17 20 20
40 40 47 47
21 21 25 25
20 20 24 24
32 32 37 37
11800 19600 17500 25800
19400 37000 29800 57000
6000 2900 4900 2600
0.144 0.152 0.246 0.254
NATR25PP ANTV25PP NATR30PP NATV30PP
25 25 30 30
52 52 62 62
25 25 29 29
24 24 28 28
42 42 51 51
19500 29000 31000 45500
36500 69600 57500 104000
3600 2100 2600 1700
0.275 0.285 0.470 0.481
NATR35 NATV35 NATR40 NATV40
NATR35PP NATV35PP NATR40PP NATV40PP
35 35 40 40
72 72 80 80
29 29 32 32
28 28 30 30
58 58 66 66
34500 50800 47000 64000
67500 109500 91500 139000
2000 1400 1700 1300
0.635 0.647 0.805 0.890
NATR45 NATV50 NATR50
NATR45PP ANTV50PP NATR50PP
45 50 50
85 90 90
32 32 32
30 30 30
72 76 76
49100 50500 69500
98000 10600 187000
1500 1700 1000
0.910 0.960 0.990
Part No Crowned Outer Ring
P/N with seal
d
D
B
C
NATR5 NATV5 NATR6 NATV6
NATR5PP ANTV5PP NATR6PP NATV6PP
5 5 6 6
16 16 19 19
12 12 12 12
NATR8 NATV8 NATR10 NATV10
NATR8PP ANTV8PP NATR10PP NATV10PP
8 8 10 10
24 24 30 30
NATR12 NATV12 NATR15 NATV15
NATR12PP ANTV12PP NATR15PP NATV15PP
12 12 15 15
NATR17 NATV17 NATR20 NATV20
NATR17PP ANTV17PP NATR20PP NATV20PP
NATR25 NATV25 NATR30 NATV30
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
408
Weight approx. kg.
Cam Runner, Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
PCR-1/2
Item No.
96959
A B K L N Roller Dia Roller Width Stud Dia. Stud Length Fine Thread Length 0.500
0.406
0.188
0.625
10-32
M Thread 0.250
S Static Shoulder Capacity Length 0.031
110
PCR-9/16
96960
0.563
0.406
0.188
0.625
10-32
0.250
0.031
110
PCR-5/8
96961
0.625
0.469
0.250
0.750
1/4-28
0.313
0.031
230
PCR-11/16
96962
0.688
0.469
0.250
0.750
1/4-28
0.313
0.031
230
PCR-3/4
96963
0.750
0.563
0.375
0.875
3/8-24
0.375
0.063
700
PCR-7/8
96964
0.875
0.563
0.375
0.875
3/8-24
0.375
0.063
700
PCR-1
96965
1.000
0.688
0.438
1.000
7/16-20
0.500
0.063
870
PCR-1 1/8
96966
1.125
0.688
0.438
1.000
7/16-20
0.500
0.063
870
PCR-1 1/4
96967
1.250
0.813
0.500
1.250
1/2-20
0.625
0.063
1100
PCR-1 3/8
96968
1.375
0.813
0.500
1.250
1/2-20
0.625
0.063
1100
PCR-1 1/2
96969
1.500
0.938
0.625
1.500
5/8-18
0.750
0.063
1800
PCR-1 5/8
96970
1.625
0.938
0.625
1.500
5/8-18
0.750
0.063
1800
Dimensions are in inches
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
General Characteristics Cam Runners are significantly different from conventional needle bearing style cam followers. Cam Runners are manufactured with a composite synthetic tread and stainless steel stud. The composite tread consists of two different synthetic materials chosen to provide optimal characteristics for the outer wear surface and the inner bearing surface. The two synthetic parts are molded together to form a single mechanically bonded assembly that is mounted on the stud, eliminating the need for conventional seals and lubricants. The outer tread material offers high mechanical strength while the inner bearing material provides high lubricity. The stud provides optimum life and corrosion resistance. Tread bearing wear is critically dependent on the hardness of the mating surface. When this assembly is used as a direct replacement for a conventional cam follower, the life will be optimized if the cam or other mating surface is within the range of 55 - 60 Rc. Softer or harder materials may result in decreased life, particularly under high loads. The mating surface must be free of grease, oil and abrasive contaminants. This assembly is dimensionally interchangeable with conventional steel cam followers. Because of its unique construction, comparable load ratings are not applicable. In order to guide you in choosing applications, extensive testing has been utilized to develop life expectancies based upon continuous duty testing at various speeds and loads. In continuous duty operation under identical loads and speeds, the Cam Runner has been found to outlast conventional steel cam followers by an average of 10 times! Bearing to stud clearance is greater than for needle bearing designs and will increase during early use and will stabilize after ”wearing in“. Advantages • No lubrication required – ever! • Non sparking and low electrical conductivity • Thrust load tolerant • Extended life, ideal for difficult-to service- operations
• No lubricant leakage to contaminate your process • Quiet operation resulting from no internal moving parts • Wide range of operating temperatures • ISO 9001 compliant
Not recommended for ambient temperatures above 121°C, highly abrasive applications or repeated heavy shock loads.
409
Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Item No.
A B K L M Roller Roller Stud Stud Thread Dia. Width Dia. Length Length +0.000 +0.000 -0.001 -0.001
N Fine Thread
R S Rec.Mtg. Shldr. Shldr. Hole Size Dia. Length +0.001 -0.000
Mounting Approx. Member Weight Thickness (kg) Max. Min.
PLR 1
97318
1.000
0.781
0.437
1.000
0.500
7/16-20 0.500
0.031
0.438
0.625 0.500
0.090
PLR 1-1/8
97319
1.125
0.781
0.437
1.000
0.500
7/16-20 0.500
0.031
0.438
0.6250.500
0.136 0.136
PLR 1-1/4
97320
1.250
0.844
0.500
1.250
0.625
1/2-20 0.625
0.031
0.501
0.750 0.625
PLR 1-3/8
97321
1.375
0.844
0.500
1.250
0.625
1/2-20 0.625
0.031
0.501
0.750 0.625
0.181
PLR 1-1/2
95086
1.500
1.187
0.625
1.500
0.750
5/8-18 0.750
0.062
0.626
1.000 0.750
0.226
PLR 1-3/4
95112
1.750
1.187
0.750
1.750
0.875
3/4-16 1.000
0.062
0.751
1.125 0.875
0.362
PLR 2
95125
2.000
1.687
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14 1.000
0.062
0.876
1.250 0.875
0.589
PLR 2-3
95126
2.000
1.375
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14 1.000
0.062
0.876
1.250 0.875
0.544
PLR 2-1/4
95152
2.250
1.687
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14 1.000
0.062
0.876
1.250 0.875
0.816
PLR 2-1/2
95160
2.500
1.687
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14 1.250
0.062
1.001
1.250 0.750
1.043
PLR 2-1/2-10 95164
2.500
1.812
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14 1.250
0.187
1.001
1.250 0.750
1.043
PLR 2-1/2-16 95165
2.500
1.812
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14 1.250
0.062
1.001
1.250 0.750
1.043
PLR 2-3/4
2.750
1.687
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14 1.250
0.062
1.001
1.250 0.750
1.270
95190
PLR 3
95200
3.000
2.000
1.250
2.500
1.750
1-1/4-12 1.750
0.062
1.251
1.250 1.000
1.814
PLR 3-1/4
95245
3.250
2.000
1.250
2.500
1.750
1-1/4-12 1.750
0.062
1.251
1.250 1.000
2.177
PLR 3-1/2
95248
3.500
2.000
1.250
2.750
1.750
1-1/4-12 1.750
0.062
1.251
1.500 1.250
2.494
PLR 4
95268
4.000
2.000
1.250
2.750
1.750
1-1/4-12 1.750
0.062
1.251
1.500 1.250
3.220
PLR 4-1/2
95304
4.500
2.000
1.250
2.750
1.750
1-1/4-12 1.750
0.062
1.251
1.500 1.250
4.082
PLR 5
95323
5.000
3.000
2.000
4.500
2.500
2-12 3.250
0.062
2.001
2.750 2.000
8.618 12.700
PLR 6
95353
6.000
3.000
2.500
5.500
3.250
2-1/2-12 3.250
0.062
2.501
3.250 2.000
PLR 7
95374
7.000
3.000
2.500
5.500
3.250
2-1/2-12 3.250
0.062
2.501
3.250 2.000
16.329
PLR 8
95386
8.000
3.000
2.500
5.500
3.250
2-1/2-12 3.250
0.062
2.501
3.250 2.000
22.226
PLR 10
95398
10.000 3.000
2.500
5.500
3.250
2-1/2-12 3.250
0.062
2.501
3.250 2.000
32.658
PLR 10-1
95399
10.000 5.000
4.250
9.000
4.000
3-1/2-4NC 5.000
0.125
4.252
5.750 5.125
58.967
Dimensions are in inches
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
410
Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings
Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs)
3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM
Static Limit (Radial)
Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (lbs)
Stud Capacity (lbs) Bending = 0.75 Sy
Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy
Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B
Load at Mtg. Rail
Ret. Ring Allow. Load (lbs)
PLR 1
BB
240
630
230
140
480
210
1970
380
PLR 1-1/8
BB
240
630
230
140
480
210
1970
380
PLR 1-1/4
BB
520
1350
600
370
880
390
3250
470
PLR 1-3/8
BB
520
1350
600
370
880
390
3250
470
PLR 1-1/2
BB
1050
2760
1100
680
1390
650
5780
470
PLR 1-3/4
BB
1050
2760
1100
680
1390
650
5780
470
PLR 2
BB
1460
3830
1620
1000
4010
1500
11610
910
PLR 2-3
BB
1460
3830
1620
1000
3090
1520
11610
910
PLR 2-1/4
BB
1460
3830
1620
1000
4010
1500
11610
910
PLR 2-1/2
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
3730
1770
14580
1340
PLR 2-1/2-10
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
3730
1770
14580
1340
PLR 2-1/2-16
TRB
4570
10880
7630
4570
6920
3700
25920
N/A
PLR 2-3/4
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
3730
1770
14580
1340
PLR 3
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12270
6330
40500
N/A
PLR 3-1/4
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12270
6330
40500
N/A
PLR 3-1/2
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12270
6330
40500
N/A
PLR 4
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12270
6330
40500
N/A
PLR 4-1/2
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12270
6330
40500
N/A
PLR 5
TRB
13990
33290
51900
32500
34120
17350
103670
N/A
PLR 6
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
66710
33910
161990
N/A
PLR 7
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
66710
33910
161990
N/A
PLR 8
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
66710
33910
161990
N/A
PLR 10
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
66710
33910
161990
N/A
PLR 10-1
TRB
34410
81890
159800
116000
194120
99480
468150
N/A
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
411
Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B C D K L M Roller Flange Flange Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Dia. Thickness Length Length
N Fine Thread
R Shldr. Dia.
S Shldr. Length
Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.000 -0.001
+0.000 -0.001 FLR-1
97326
1.000
0.781
1.375
0.219
0.437
1.000
0.500
7/16-20
0.500
0.031
0.438
FLR-1 1/8
97327
1.125
0.781
1.500
0.219
0.437
1.000
0.500
7/16-20
0.500
0.031
0.438
FLR-1 1/4
97328
1.250
0.844
1.563
0.219
0.500
1.250
0.625
1/2-20
0.625
0.031
0.501
FLR-1 3/8
97329
1.375
0.844
1.688
0.219
0.500
1.250
0.625
1/2-20
0.625
0.031
0.501
FLR-1 1/2
95445
1.500
1.188
2.188
0.343
0.625
1.500
0.750
5/8-18
0.750
0.062
0.626
FLR-1 1/2-2
95446
1.500
1.063
2.000
0.343
0.500
1.375
0.750
1/2-20
0.625
0.125
0.501
FLR-1 3/4
95472
1.750
1.188
2.438
0.343
0.750
1.750
0.875
3/4-16
1.000
0.062
0.751
FLR-2
95482
2.000
1.688
2.688
0.593
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14
1.000
0.062
0.876
FLR-2 1/4
95498
2.250
1.688
2.938
0.593
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14
1.000
0.062
0.876
FLR-2 1/2
95502
2.500
1.688
3.188
0.593
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14
1.250
0.062
1.001
FLR-2 1/2-1
95503
2.500
1.812
3.188
0.593
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14
1.250
0.062
1.001
FLR-2 3/4
95515
2.750
1.688
3.438
0.593
1.000
2.250
1.500
1-14
1.250
0.062
1.001
FLR-3
95520
3.000
2.000
3.938
0.593
1.250
2.500
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-3 1/4
95555
3.250
2.000
4.188
0.593
1.250
2.500
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-3 1/2
95558
3.500
2.000
4.438
0.593
1.250
2.750
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-4
95562
4.000
2.000
4.938
0.593
1.250
2.750
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-4M
95567
4.000
2.000
4.938
1.000
1.250
2.750
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-4 1/2
95591
4.500
2.000
5.438
0.593
1.250
2.750
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
FLR-5
95601
5.000
3.000
5.938
0.718
2.000
4.500
2.500
2-12
3.250
0.062
2.001
FLR-6
95625
6.000
3.000
6.938
0.718
2.500
5.500
3.250
2 1/2-12
3.250
0.062
2.501
FLR-7
95640
7.000
3.000
7.938
0.718
2.500
5.500
3.250
2 1/2-12
3.250
0.062
2.501
FLR-8
95641
8.000
3.000
8.938
0.718
2.500
5.500
3.250
2 1/2-12
3.250
0.062
2.501
Dimensions are in inches
All specfications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
412
Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Ret. Ring Roller Mounting Approx. Stud Capacity (lbs) Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs) Bearing Allow. Member Thickness Weight Capacity, Tapered Shear = Limiting Bending = 0.75 Sy 0.75 x 0.5 Load Roller (kg) Max. Min. (lbs) Static Static Bearings 3000 hrs 500 hrs x Sy (inch) (inch) Thrust Limit L10 life @ L10 life @ Concent. Concent. Load at (lbs) Load at B/2 Load at B Mtg. Rail 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial)
FLR-1
BB
240
630
230
140
370
210
1970
380
0.625
0.500
0.136
FLR-1 1/8
BB
240
630
230
140
370
210
1970
380
0.625
0.500
0.136
FLR-1 1/4
BB
520
1350
600
370
710
390
3250
470
0.750
0.625
0.181
FLR-1 3/8
BB
520
1350
600
370
710
390
3250
470
0.750
0.625
0.181
FLR-1 1/2
BB
1050
2760
1100
680
1100
650
5780
470
1.000
0.750
0.272
FLR-1 1/2-2
BB
930
2430
970
600
700
420
4020
335
1.000
0.750
0.226
FLR-1 3/4
BB
1050
2760
1100
680
1100
650
5780
470
1.125
0.875
0.453
FLR-2
BB
1460
3830
1620
1000
2640
1500
11610
910
1.250
0.875
0.816
FLR-2 1/4
BB
1460
3830
1620
1000
2640
1500
11610
910
1.250
0.875
0.952
FLR-2 1/2
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
2780
1770
14580
1340
1.250
0.750
1.270
FLR-2 1/2-1
TRB
4570
10890
7630
4570
5460
3580
25920
N/A
1.250
0.750
1.270
FLR-2 3/4
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
2780
1770
14580
1340
1.250
0.750
1.451
FLR-3
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
9880
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
2.131
FLR-3 1/4
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
9880
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
2.404
FLR-3 1/2
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
9880
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
2.812
FLR-4
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
9880
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
3.583
FLR-4M
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
8530
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
3.674
FLR-4 1/2
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
9880
6330
40500
N/A
1.250
1.000
4.490
FLR-5
TRB
13990
33290
51900
32500
28300
17350
103670
N/A
2.750
2.000
8.391
FLR-6
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
55320
33910
161990
N/A
3.250
2.000
13.380
FLR-7
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
55320
33910
161990
N/A
3.250
2.000
17.236
FLR-8
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
55320
33910
161990
N/A
3.250
2.000
20.865
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
413
Load Runners V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B Roller Width
F Point Dia.
See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail
G K L M Groove Stud Dia. Stud Thread Location Length Length
N Thread Dia.
R Shldr. Dia.
S Shldr. Length
Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.000 -0.001
+0.000 -0.001 VLR-1 1/2
97334
1.500
0.781
1.125
0.391
0.437
1.000
0.500
7/16-20
0.500
0.031
0.438
VLR-2
97335
2.000
0.844
1.375
0.422
0.500
1.250
0.625
1/2-20
0.625
0.031
0.500
VLR-2 1/2
95660
2.500
1.312
1.500
0.687
0.750
1.750
0.875
3/4-16
1.000
0.062
0.751
VLR-3 1/2
95678
3.500
1.687
2.250
0.875
0.875
2.000
1.125
7/8-14
1.000
0.062
0.876
VLR-3 1/2-16 95685
3.500
2.000
2.250
0.875
0.750
2.000
1.125
3/4-16
1.250
0.062
0.751
VLR-4 1/2
95729
4.500
2.000
3.000
1.000
1.250
2.500
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
VLR-5 1/2
95760
5.500
2.000
4.000
1.000
1.250
2.750
1.750
1 1/4-12
1.750
0.062
1.251
VLR-6 1/2
95770
6.500
3.000
5.000
1.500
2.000
4.500
2.500
2-12
3.250
0.062
2.001
VLR-7 1/2
95777
7.500
3.000
6.000
1.500
2.500
5.500
3.250
2 1/2-12
3.250
0.062
2.501
VLR-8 1/2
95782
8.500
3.000
7.000
1.500
2.500
5.500
3.250
2 1/2-12
3.250
0.062
2.501
Dimensions are in inches
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (â&#x20AC;&#x153;Fâ&#x20AC;? dimensions on roller and rail pages.)
414
V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
VLR-1 1/2
Roller Mounting Approx. Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs) Bearing Capacity, Member Thickness Weight Tapered Limiting Roller (kg) Max. Min. Static Static Bearings 3000 hrs 500 hrs (inch) (inch) Thrust Limit L10 life @ L10 life @ (lbs) 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) 0.625
0.500
0.226
BB
240
630
230
140
Ret. Ring Bending = Shear = 0.75 Allow. Load 0.75 Sy x 0.5 x Sy (lbs) Concent. Load at Load at V Mtg. Rail Stud Capacity (lbs)
370
1970
380
VLR-2
0.750
0.625
0.272
BB
520
1350
600
370
920
3250
470
VLR-2 1/2
1.250
1.000
0.589
BB 1
050
2760
1100
680
1230
5780
470
VLR-3 1/2
1.250
1.000
1.542
BB
1980
5190
2270
1400
3730
14580
1340
VLR-3 1/2-16
1.250
1.000
1.542
TRB
3780
8990
7200
3150
3120
14580
N/A
VLR-4 1/2
1.250
1.000
3.175
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12660
40500
N/A
VLR-5 1/2
1.500
1.250
4.762
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
12660
40500
N/A
VLR-6 1/2
3.000
2.000
11.566
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
34880
103670
N/A
VLR-7 1/2
3.250
2.250
16.782
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
68130
161990
N/A
VLR-8 1/2
3.250
2.250
20.865
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
68130
161990
N/A
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
415
Plain - Yoke Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B Roller Width
E Tread Width
P Bore Nom.
+0.000 +0.005 -0.001 -0.010
R Shldr. Dia. Tol.
S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (lbs) Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Length Roller 3000 hrs (kg) Static 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (lbs)
PLRY-1 1/2
90254
1.500
0.937
0.875
0.437
0.875
0.031
BB
710
1850
780
480
0.136
PLRY-1 3/4
90255
1.750
1.063
1.000
0.500
1.000
0.031
BB
710
1850
780
480
0.317 0.408
PLRY-2
90256
2.000
1.313
1.250
0.625
1.125
0.031
BB
1300
3400
1810
1120
PLRY-2 1/4
90257
2.250
1.313
1.250
0.625
1.125
0.031
BB
1300
3400
1810
1120
0.635
PLRY-2 1/2
96117
2.500
1.562
1.500
0.750
1.250
0.031
TRB
4570
10880
7630
4570
0.907
PLRY-2 1/2-7 90107
2.500
1.562
1.500
BB
2130
5590
2530
1560
0.907
2.750
1.562
1.500
0.750 +0.0005 1.250 0.750 -0.0000 1.250
0.031
PLRY-2 3/4-7 90108
0.031
BB
2130
5590
2530
1560
1.043
PLRY-3
3.000
1.812
1.750
1.000
0.031
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
1.179
96118
1.750
PLRY-3 1/4
96133
3.250
1.812
1.750
1.000
1.750
0.031
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
1.542
PLRY-3 1/2
96138
3.500
2.062
2.000
1.125
2.000
0.031
TRB
7390
17590
27200
13100
1.905 2.993
PLRY-4
96144
4.000
2.312
2.250
1.250
2.250
0.031
TRB
7390
17590
27200
13100
PLRY-5
96154
5.000
2.875
2.750
1.750
3.250
0.062
TRB
13990
33290
51900
32500
5.125
PLRY-6
96165
6.000
3.375
3.250
2.250
3.500
0.062
TRB
15060
35840
56400
33100
8.799
PLRY-7
96177
7.000
3.875
3.750
2.750
PLRY-8
96184
8.000
4.500
4.250
3.255
PLRY-9
96194
9.000
5.000
4.750
3.755
PLRY-10
96197 10.000
5.500
5.250
4.255
+0.001 -0.000
4.250
0.062
TRB
17830
42430
79800
48400
13.290
4.750
0.125
TRB
35250
83890
159800
110000
19.912
5.500
0.125
TRB
56400
134230
250000
147000
23.405
6.500
0.125
TRB
58080
138240
276000
196000
36.287
Dimensions are in inches
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au
416
V-Grooved - Yoke Style Inch Sizes
Part No.
Item No.
See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail.
A B E F G P Roller Roller Tread Point Groove Bore Dia. Width Width Dia. Location Nom. Tol. +0.005 -0.010
Bearing R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Capacity, Approx. (lbs) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller 3000 hrs 500 hrs (Kg) Static Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust (lbs) 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial)
VLRY-2 1/2
90262
2.500
0.937 0.875 1.500
0.468
0.437
0.875 0.031
BB
710
1850
780
480
0.45
VLRY-3
90263
3.000
1.312 1.250 2.000
0.656
0.625
1.125 0.031
BB
1300
3400
1810
1120
0.95
VLRY-3 1/2-7 90109
3.500
1.562 1.500 2.250
0.781
0.750
1.250 0.031
BB
2130
5590
2530
1560
1.27
VLRY-3 3/4
96655
3.750
1.562 1.500 2.500
0.781
4570
10880
7630
4570
1.40
96266
4.500
1.812 1.750 3.000
0.906
0.750 +0.0005 1.250 0.031 1.000 -0.0000 1.750 0.031
TRB
VLRY-4 1/2
TRB
6000
14270
20000
12000
2.26
VLRY-5
96279
5.000
2.062 2.000 3.500
1.030
1.125
TRB
7390
17590
27200
13100
3.44
2.000 0.031
VLRY-5 1/2
96283
5.500
2.312 2.250 4.000
1.156
1.250
2.250 0.031
TRB
7390
17590
27200
13100
5.08
VLRY-6 1/2
96287
6.500
2.875 2.750 5.000
1.437
1.750
3.500 0.062
TRB
15060
35840
44600
23010
8.52
VLRY-7 1/2
96291
7.500
3.375 3.250 6.000
1.687
2.250
3.500 0.062
TRB
15060
35840
52600
26930
13.83
VLRY-8 1/2
96292
8.500
3.875 3.750 7.000
1.937
2.750
4.250 0.062
TRB
17830
42430
60300
30850
20.27
VLRY-9 1/2
96297
9.500
4.500 4.250 8.000
2.250
TRB
5250
*
69540
34770
29.12
VLRY-10 1/2 96300 10.500
5.000 4.750 9.000
2.500
3.255 +0.001 4.750 0.125 -0.000 3.755 5.500 0.125
TRB
56400
*
77380
38690
35.15
Dimensions are in inches
All specifications are subject to change without notice. * Exceeds static capacity Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au
Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)
417
Plain - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B K L M Roller Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Thickness Length
+0.000 -0.001
N Thread
R Shldr. Dia.
S Shldr. Length
Rec. Mtg. Approx. Hole Size Weight (kg) +0.00 -0.02
+0.00 -0.02
HPC-26
97374
26
20
10
23
13
M10×1
13.1
0.8
10.02
0.09
HPC-30
97375
30
20
12
25
14
M12×1.5
15.9
0.8
12.02
0.11
HPC-32
97376
32
22
12
25
14
M12×1.5
15.9
0.8
12.02
0.14
HPC-35
97377
35
22
16
32.5
18
M16×1.5
19.1
0.8
16.02
0.17
HPC-40
95064
40
30
14
40
26
M14×2
18
1.6
14.02
0.27
HPC-40-1
95063
40
27.6
18
36.5
19
M18×1.5
22
1.6
18.02
0.24
HPC-47
95065
47
27.6
20
40.5
21
M20×1.5
25.5
1.6
20.02
0.42
HPC-50
95068
50
40
16
50
35
M16×2
23
1.6
16.02
0.54
HPC-52
95066
52
33.6
20
40.5
21
M20×1.5
5.5
1.6
20.02
0.54
HPC-62
95070
62
44
24
58
35
M24×3
32
1.6
24.02
1.04
HPC-62-1
95069
62
44
24
49.5
25
M24×1.5
32
1.6
24.02
1.04
HPC-72
95072
72
44
24
49.5
25
M24×1.5
32
1.6
24.02
1.4
HPC-76
95074
76
52
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
1.91
HPC-80
95075
80
52
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
2.07
HPC-85
95076
85
52
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
2.37
HPC-90
95077
90
52
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
2.65
HPC-100
95079
100
52
30
80
50
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
3.33
HPC-100-1
95078
100
52
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
3.15
HPC-125
95080
125
76
48
105
60
M48×5
82.5
1.6
48.02
8.48
HPC-150
95081
150
76
64
140
82
M64×6
82.5
1.6
64.02
12.5
HPC-200
95082
200
76
64
140
82
M64×6
82.5
1.6
64.02
21.87
Dimensions are in mm
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.
418
Plain - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings
Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)
3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM
Static Limit (Radial)
Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N)
Stud Capacity (N) Bending = 0.75 Sy
Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy
Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B
Load at Mtg. Rail
Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)
HPC-26
BB
1070
2790
1000
620
2120
910
8780
1700
HPC-30
BB
1070
2790
1000
620
2120
910
8780
1700
HPC-32
BB
2300
6010
2690
1660
3820
1690
14450
2090
HPC-35
BB
2300
6010
2690
1660
3820
1690
14450
2090
HPC-40
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
6170
2890
25690
2090
HPC-40-1
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
6330
3060
25690
2090
HPC-47
BB
4680
12260
4900
030
6330
3060
25690
2090
HPC-50
BB
6490
17020
7210
4450
8810
4570
45760
4050
HPC-52
BB
6490
17020
7210
4450
14430
7030
51600
4050
HPC-62
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
16090
7650
64850
5960
HPC-62-1
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
16070
7650
64850
5960
HPC-72
TRB
20330
48390
33940
20330
26410
13840
102960
N/A
HPC-76
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-80
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-85
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-90
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-100
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-100-1
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
45000
23170
160800
N/A
HPC-125
TRB
62210
148070
230860
144570
128100
65120
411830
N/A
HPC-150
TRB
66990
159430
250880
147240
301500
153930
731550
N/A
HPC-200
TRB
66990
159430
250880
147240
301500
153930
731550
N/A
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
419
Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B C D K L M Roller Flange Flange Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Dia. Thickness Length Length
N Thread
R Shldr. Dia.
S Shldr. Length
+0.02 -0.00
+0.00 -0.02 HPJ-26
97382
26
20
35
5
10
Rec. Mtg. Hole Size
23
13
M10×1
13.1
0.8
10.02
HPJ-30
97383
30
20
40
5
12
25
14
M12×1.5
15.9
0.8
12.02
HPJ-32
97384
32
22
42
5
12
25
14
M12×1.5
15.9
0.8
12.02
HPJ-35
97385
35
22
46
5
16
32.5
18
M16×1.5
19.1
0.8
16.02
HPJ-40
95410
40
30
54
8.8
14
40
26
M14×2
18
1.6
14.02
HPJ-40-1
95409
40
27.6
54
7.8
18
36.5
19
M18×1.5
22
1.6
18.02
HPJ-47
95411
47
27.6
61
7.8
20
40.5
21
M20×1.5
25.5
1.6
20.02
HPJ-50
95415
50
40
68
14
16
50
35
M16×2
23
1.6
16.02
HPJ-52
95413
52
33.6
66
10.8
20
40.5
21
M20×1.5
25.5
1.6
20.02
HPJ-62
95420
62
44
78
14
24
58
35
M24×3
32
1.6
24.02
HPJ-62-2
95418
62
44
78
14
24
49.5
25
M24×1.5
32
1.6
24.02
HPJ-72
95422
72
44
90
14
24
49.5
25
M24×1.5
32
1.6
24.02
HPJ-76
95427
76
52
98
14
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-80
95429
80
52
102
14
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-85
95430
85
52
107
14
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-90
95431
90
52
112
14
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-100
95435
100
52
125
14
30
80
50
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-100-1
95434
100
52
125
14
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPJ-125
95440
125
76
148
18
48
105
60
M48×5
82.5
1.6
48.02
HPJ-150
95441
150
76
173
18.3
64
140
82
M64×6
82.5
1.6
64.02
HPJ-200
95443
200
76
223
18.3
64
140
82
M64×6
82.5
1.6
64.02
Dimensions are in mm
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.
420
Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
HPJ-26
Approx Weight (Kg)
0.11
Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings
BB
Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)
3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM 1070
2790
Static Limit (Radial) 1000
Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N) 620
Stud Capacity (N) Bending = 0.75 Sy
Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy
Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B
Load at Mtg. Rail
1610
890
8780
Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)
1700
HPJ-30
0.14
BB
1070
2790
1000
620
1610
890
8780
1700
HPJ-32
0.17
BB
2300
6010
2690
1660
3070
1690
14450
2090
HPJ-35
0.2
BB
2300
6010
2690
1660
3070
1690
14450
2090
HPJ-40
0.33
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
4890
2890
25690
2090
HPJ-40-1
0.24
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
5040
3060
25690
2090
HPJ-47
0.47
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
5040
3060
25690
2090
HPJ-50
0.7
BB
6490
17020
7210
4450
6860
4570
45760
4050
HPJ-52
0.83
BB
6490
17020
7210
4450
11080
7030
51600
4050
HPJ-62
1.21
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
12340
7650
64850
5960
HPJ-62-2
1.21
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
12340
7650
64850
5960
HPJ-72
1.28
TRB
20330
48390
33940
20330
21390
14030
102960
N/A
HPJ-76
2.17
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-80
2.41
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-85
2.75
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-90
2.98
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-100
3.7
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-100-1
3.52
TRB
2670
63480
88960
53380
36890
23150
160800
N/A
HPJ-125
8.86
TRB
62210
148070
230860
144570
106160
64910
411830
N/A
HPJ-150
13.07
TRB
66990
159430
250880
147240
254530
153930
731550
N/A
HPJ-200
20.37
TRB
66990
159430
250880
147240
254530
153930
731550
N/A
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
421
Load Runners V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail
B Roller Width
F Point Dia.
G K L M Groove Stud Dia. Stud Thread Location Length Length
N Tread
R Shldr. Dia.
S Shldr. Length
Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.02 -0.00
+0.00 -0.02 HPV-26
97390
40
20
26
10
10
23
13
M10×1
13.1
0.5
10.02
HPV-32
97391
50
22
32
11
12
25
14
M12×1.5
15.9
0.8
12.02
HPV-40
95648
60
33
40
17
14
40
26
M14×2
18
1.6
14.02
HPV-62
95652
90
44.5
62
23
24
57.9
34.9
M24×3
32
1.6
24.02
HPV-62-1
95651
90
44.5
62
23
24
49.5
25
M24×1.5
32
1.6
24.02
HPV-76
95654
120
50.5
76
26
30
70
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPV-100
95656
140
50.5
100
26
30
80
50
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPV-100-1
95655
140
50.5
100
26
30
69.5
40
M30×3.5
44.5
1.6
30.02
HPV-125
95657
165
76
125
37.8
48
60
M48×5
82.5
1.6
48.02
Dimensions are in mm
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.
Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)
422
105
V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
HPV-26
Approx. Ball or Weight Tapered (kgs) Roller Bearings
0.23
BB
Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)
3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM 1070
Static Limit (Radial)
2790
1000
Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N) 620
Stud Capacity (N) Bending = Shear = 0.75 0.75 Sy x 0.5 x Sy Concent. Load at V 2210
Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)
Load at Mtg. Rail 8780
1700
HPV-32
0.26
BB
2300
6010
2690
1660
3960
14450
2090
HPV-40
0.53
BB
4680
12260
4900
3030
5480
25690
2090
HPV-62
1.79
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
15960
64850
5960
HPV-62-1
1.9
BB
8810
23080
10090
6230
15880
64850
5960
HPV-76
3.27
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
46270
160800
N/A
HPV-100
4.77
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
46270
160800
N/A
HPV-100-1
4.77
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
46270
160800
N/A
11.56
TRB
62210
148070
216290
108140
130770
411830
N/A
HPV-125
** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
423
Plain - Yoke Style Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Item No.
A Roller Dia.
B Roller Width
E Tread Width
+0.00 -0.02
R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (lbs) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller (Kg) Static 3000 hrs 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit +0.00 Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (lbs) -0.02 P Bore
HPCA-40
90271
40
23
22
10
22
0.5
BB
3140
8220
3460
2140
0.14
HPCA-50
90272
50
33
32
15
28
0.5
BB
5780
15140
8070
4980
0.32
HPCA-62
97297
62
40
38
20
32
1
TRB
20330
48390
33940
20300
0.91
HPCA-62-2
90273
62
40
38
20
32
1
BB
9490
24880
11240
6940
0.91
HPCA-76
96105
76
46
44
25
44.5
1
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
1.24 1.41
HPCA-80
96107
80
46
44
25
44.5
1
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
HPCA-85
96108
85
46
44
25
44.5
1
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
1.6
HPCA-90
96109
90
56
54
30
57.2
1
TRB
32870
78240
120990
58270
1.92
HPCA-100
96110
100
56
54
30
57.2
1
TRB
32870
78240
120990
58270
2.93
HPCA-125
96111
125
71
68
45
82.6
1.5
TRB
62210
148070
230860
144570
5.01
HPCA-150
96112
150
73
70
55
1.5
TRB
66990
159430
250880
147240
8.65
HPCA-200
96114
200
79
76
70
108
88.9
1.5
TRB
79300
188740
354970
215290
19.58
HPCA-250
96116
250
79
76
70
108
1.5
TRB
79300
188740
354970
215290
35.74
Dimensions are in mm
All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au
424
V-Grooved - Yoke Style
See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail.
Metric Sizes (mm)
Part No.
Item No.
A B E F G Roller Roller Tread Point Groove Dia. Width Width Dia. Location
P Bore +0.00 -0.02
HPVA-40
90277
60
23
22
40
11.5
10
R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (N) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller 3000 hrs (kg) Static 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (N) 22
0.5
BB
3140
8220
3460
2140
0.46
HPVA-50
90278
75
33
32
50
16.5
15
28
0.5
BB
5780
15140
8070
4980
0.96
HPVA-62
97299
90
40
38
62
20
20
32
1
TRB
20330
48390
33940
20330
1.27
HPVA-62-2
90279
90
40
38
62
20
20
32
1
BB
6930
18170
8070
6540
1.27
HPVA-76
96255
110
46
44
76
23
25
44.5
1
TRB
26670
63480
88960
53380
2.21
HPVA-100
96256
140
56
54
100
28
30
57.2
1
TRB
32870
78240
120990
58270
5.08
HPVA-125
96257
165
71
68
125
35.5
45
82.6
1.5
TRB
62210
148070
216290 108140
8.52
HPVA-150
96259
190
73
70
150
36.5
55
88.9
1.5
TRB
66990
159430
250880 126380
13.79
HPVA-200
96261
240
79
76
200
39.5
70
108
1.5
TRB
79300
188740
325740 162870
29.6
HPVA-250
96263
290
79
76
250
39.5
70
108
1.5
TRB
79300
188740
354970 199360
56.52
Dimensions are in mm
All dimensions are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au
Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)
425
Load Runners Installation Notes
Flange Alignment
Yoke Style
The shoulder on the flange end of a flanged yoke-style idler-roller serves as the dimensional reference point for accurate positioning of the roller flange with respect to the supported structure.
General Considerations Load Runners yoke-style idler-rollers offer considerable mounting flexibility. They can be installed on a bolt or thrushaft between yoke brackets (“ears”) which are fabricated as an integral part of the equipment, or in individual yoke brackets which can be bolted into position wherever needed.
Orient each roller so that the flange is closest to the fixed (small diameter) end of the bolt or thru-shaft. (See Drawing.) When the bolt or thru-shaft is clamped, the reference shoulder will be pulled up tightly against the structure reference surface.
It is important that the members which support the mounting bolt or thru-shaft are rigid enough to resist bending (which could cause uneven loading on the rollers) and strong enough to withstand the operational radial and thrust loads.
By mounting a string of flanged yoke-style rollers in this manner, all flanges will be properly aligned.
Osborn offers an exclusive line of heavy-duty thru-shafts designed specifically for use with yoke-style Load Runners idler-rollers. See www.tea.net.au Axial clamping of yoke-style rollers (through the bore) is required to prevent the bearing components from separating, causing loss of bearing adjustment and premature failure. The outboard end of the mounting bolt or thru-shaft should be allowed to float in the yoke ear to avoid “pinching” and restricting the idler-roller tread when the roller is clamped. (See drawings below).
V-Groove Alignment The sharp-radius corner of a V-grooved, yoke-style idlerroller indicates which shoulder should be used as a dimensional reference point for accurate alignment of a Vgrooved roller with respect to the supported structure.
Shaft Style A See www.tea.net.au for actual shaft dimensions
Orient each roller so that the sharp-radius corner is closest to the fixed (small diameter) end of the bolt or thru-shaft. (See Drawing.) When the bolt or thru-shaft is clamped, the reference shoulder will be pulled up tightly against the structure reference surface. By mounting a string of V-grooved yoke-style rollers in this manner, all V-grooves will be properly aligned.
V-Grooves In-Line
Shaft Style B See www.tea.net.au for actual shaft dimensions
Stud Style Hex Socket Size
426
Inch
Metric
Stud Diameter Hex Socket Size < 1/2” 3/16” 5/8” – 7/8” 5/16” 1” – 1 1/4” 1/2” < 2” 5/8”
Stud Diameter Hex Socket Size 4 mm < 12 mm 6 mm 14 mm 8 mm 16 - 30 mm 12 mm < 30 mm
WINKEL Combined Bearings For economical designs in machines, lifting and handling systems.
Advantage of the Combined Bearing system:
General Advice Standard Combined Bearings are resistant from -20o to +80oC
Reduces your designing and production costs. Can take up high radial and axial loads.
For temperatures up to 250oC see Series HT
Strong profiles for high stat. and dynamic loads. Best dispersion of forces in the profiles. Longer lifetime for bearings and profiles. Economical assembling by welding bolt. Bearing components are easily exchangeable.
Technical Characteristics Outer rings are made from case-hardened steel UNI 16 CrNi 4 hardened at 62+2HRC. Inner rings are made from bearing steel En 31-SAE 52100 hardened at 62-2 HRC. Cylindrical rollers have flat ground heads, made from En 31-SAE 52100 steel hardened at 59 á 64 HRC. Welding bolts are made from UNI FE 510.C. Bolt tolerance â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 0.05 mm.
For the dimension of bearing and profile, the maximum allowable load F [N] max. stat. should be confirmed. see page 410-411 For welding operations on Combined Bearings with a diameter less than 100mm all bearing components must be disassembled. After assembling the bearings, or after the adjusting operation, the front side screws should be secured with Loctite. To avoid cracks in the welded joints please use welding electrodes and coreweld for unalloyed steel. For example E 7018-1 AWS/ASME SFA-5.1 For example E 71T-1 AWS/ASME SFA-5.20 Jumbo Combined Bearings should be welded on both sides of the bolt. The guideways in the profiles should be lightly greased and not painted.
Bearings from 4.055 to 4.063 are re-lubricateable. Bearings are lubricated with grease grade 3 (e.g. Shell Alvania 3, Esso Beacon 3).
427
Calculation of the bearing forces Q = Load capacity (N) L = Load distance to suspension point (mm) P = Suspension point A = Bearing distance (mm) recommended 500-1000 mm
F L
F
P
Formula Fmax [N] = stat. radial
QxL 2xA
Q A
F
To avoid wear out in the profile, which is not hardened, the pressure between bearing and profile should be max. Pzul = 860 N/mm2 for Nb-profiles (St.0-St.6 + PR0-PR6) Pzul = 750 N/mm2 for all profiles except Nb-series. Here indicated are Fmax stat radial+axial for each bearing.
F
Profile
Combined Bearing
FA max. stat. axial
FR max. stat. radial
Example Type
D mm.
T mm.
d -0.05 mm.
H mm.
h mm.
B mm.
A mm.
4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063
62.5 70.1 77.7 77.7 88.4 101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0
42 48 54 53 59 67 71 71 80 103
30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60
37.5 44.0 48.0 40.0 57.0 46.0 54.0 69.0 72.3 78.5
30.5 36.0 36.5 29.0 44.0 33.0 39.0 55.0 56.0 58.5
20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 43
2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.5
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
428
S mm. 20 22 26 26 26 30 34 34 40 50
r mm. 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 3
Selection of bearings over the hertzian pressure
Radial Bearing
Combined Bearing
Combined Bearing
Combined Bearing
Combined Bearing with adjustable Axial Bearing Axial Bearing Axial Bearing bearing fix adjustable adjustable
Combined Bearing with combined bolt
FR KN
FA KN
max. stat. radial
max. stat. axial
Profiles
-
4.052 P
-
-
-
-
0.80
0.40
A
-
-
-
4.053
-
-
-
-
5.23
1.68
S
-
-
3.10
0NbV
PR 0NbV -
3.73
(2.86) 1NbV
3.87
2NbV
PR 2NbV -
-
-
(PR) 2.054 (PR) 4.054
(PR) 4.454
(PR) 4.072
JC 4.054
KB (PR) 4.072
9.40
(PR) 2.055 (PR) 4.055
(PR) 4.455
(PR) 4.073
JC 4.055
KB (PR) 4.073
11.30
(PR) 2.056 (PR) 4.056
(PR) 4.456
(PR) 4.074
JC 4.056
KB (PR) 4.074
11.72
4.057
4.457
4.075
(PR) 2.058 (PR) 4.058
(PR) 4.458
(PR) 4.076
-
-
(8.59)
-
JC 4.058
(2.97)
(8.92)
20.47 (15.57)
KB (PR) 4.076
6.76
(5.19) 3NbV
PR 1NbV (3018)
(3019)
PR 3NbV (3020)
-
4.059
4.459
4.077
-
-
(15.47)
(5.15)
-
-
(2912)
-
4.060
4.460
4.078
-
-
(16.49)
(5.49) -
-
(3100)
(PR) 2.061 (PR) 4.061
(PR) 4.461
(PR) 4.0784 JC 4.061
KB (PR) 4.0784
21.68
(PR) 2.062 (PR) 4.062
(PR) 4.462
(PR) 4.079
KB (PR) 4.079
30.92 (23.52)
10.20
(PR) 2.063 (PR) 4.063
(PR) 4.463
54.02
JC 4.063
(PR) 4.080
-
KB (PR) 4.080
PR 4NbV -
5NbV
PR 6NbV
17.80
6NbV
PR 6NbV -
37.81
17.80
6NbV
PR 6NbV
(7.84)
(3353)
-
-
-
-
4.089
-
-
-
41.71
13.91
10
-
-
-
-
4.090
-
-
-
58.00
19.40
16
-
-
-
-
4.091
-
-
-
84.00
28.00
18
-
-
-
-
4.092
-
-
-
101.50
33.90
28
-
-
-
-
4.093
-
-
-
139.40
46.50
36
42
-
C = CA = FR = FA =
-
-
JC 4.062
4NbV
7.16
Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1),= CO Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1),= COAStatic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile
FR KN
9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47
21.68 30.92 54.02
(8.59) (8.92) (15.57) (15.47) (16.49)
FA KN 3.10 3.73 3.87 6.76
7.16 (23.52) 10.20 17.80
(2.86) (2.97) (5.19) (5.15) (5.49) (7.84)
C KN
CO KN
CA KN
COA KN
rpm max.
31.0 45.5 48.0 48.0 68.0 73.0 81.0 81.0 110.0 151.0
35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0
11 13 18 18 23 25 31 31 43 68
11 14 18 18 23 27 36 36 50 71
900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
429
Weight kg 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.,87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.89 6.52
Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6
Standard Profiles
AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q
0 NbV 1 NbV 2 NbV
AP3
3 NbV
AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q
4 NbV 5 NbV 6 NbV
(3018) (3019) (3020) (2912) (3100) (3353)
Axial Bearings - Fixed Relubrication only for types 4.055 - 4.063
Part No.
D mm.
T mm.
d -0.05 mm.
H mm.
h mm.
B mm.
A mm.
S mm.
r mm.
4.053 4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063
52.5 62.5 70.1 77.7 77.7 88.4 101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0
40 42 48 54 53 59 67 71 71 80 103
30 30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60
33.0 37.5 44.0 48.0 40.0 57.0 46.0 54.0 69.0 72.3 78.5
27.0 30,5 36.0 36.5 29.0 44.0 33.0 39.0 55.0 56.0 58.5
17 20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 43
5.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.5
15 20 22 26 26 26 30 34 34 40 50
2 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 3
Part No. 4.053 4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063 C= CA = FR = FA =
FR KN 5.23 9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47
21.68 30.92 54.02
FA KN
1.68 3.10 (8.59) 3.73 3.87 (8.92) (15.57) 6.76 (15.47) (16.49) 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 17.80
C KN
24.0 31.0 (2.86) 45.5 48.0 (2.97) 48.0 (5.19) 68.0 (5.15) 73.0 (5.49) 81.0 81.0 (7.84) 110.0 151.0
C O KN CA KN COA KN rpm max. 32.0 35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0
7 11 13 18 18 23 25 31 31 43 68
7 11 14 18 18 23 27 36 36 50 71
800 900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450
Weight kg 0.46 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.89 6.52
see pg 415 for Flange Plates APS AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6
Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), C OA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
430
see pg 416-418 for
Standard Profiles
AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q
S 0 Nb 1 Nb 2 Nb
AP3
3 Nb
AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q
4 Nb 5 Nb 6 Nb
(3018) (3019) (3020) (2912) (3100) (3353)
Axial Bearings - Eccentric Adjustable Bearings lubricated for life
1 4
Adjusting the Axial Bearing 1 2 3
3
4
2
5
loosen screws turn eccentric axle (Axial Bearing will be turned) check measure A (if necessary repeat Pos.2) secure screws with loctite lock screws
Part No.
D mm.
T mm.
d -0.05 mm.
H mm.
h mm.
B mm.
4.454 4.455 4.456 4.457 4.458 4.459 4.460 4.461 4.462 4.463
62.5 70.1 78.0 78.3 88.4 101.6 108.5 107.7 123.0 149.4
42 48 54 54 59 69 69 69 80 108
30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60
37.5 - 39.0 44.0 - 45.5 48.0 - 49.5 40.0 - 41.5 57.0 - 58.5 46.0 - 48.0 54.0 - 56.0 69.0 - 71.0 72.3 - 76.3 78.5 - 82.5
30.5 - 32.0 36.0 - 37.5 37.0 - 38.5 29.0 - 30.5 44.0 - 45.5 33.0 - 35.0 40.0 - 42.0 55.0 - 57.0 56.0 - 60.0 58.5 - 62.5
20 23 23 23 30 26 31 31 37 45
Part No. 4.454 4.455 4.456 4.457 4.458 4.459 4.460 4.461 4.462 4.463 C= CA = FR = FA =
FR KN 9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47
21.68 30.92 54.02
FA KN
C KN
3.10 31.0 (8.59) 3.73 (2.86) 45.5 3.87 48.0 (8.92) 48.0 (2.97) (15.57) 6.76 (5.19) 68.0 (15.47) (5.15) 73.0 (16.49) 81.0 (5.49) 81.0 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 (7.84) 110.0 151.0 17.80
COKN 35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0
CA KN C OAKN rpm max. 11 11 18 18 23 25 25 25 31 31
11 11 18 18 23 27 27 27 36 36
900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450
A mm. 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Weight kg 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.60 6.30
431
r mm.
20 20 26 26 26 30 30 30 34 34
3 4 4 4 4 3 5 5 5 3
- 5.5 - 5.5 - 5.0 - 5.0 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 6.0 - 6.0 - 9.0 - 10.0
see pg 415 for Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6
Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), COA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile.
All specfications are subject to change without notice.
S mm.
AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q AP3
AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q
see pg 416-418 for Standard Profiles
0 NbV 1 NbV (3.18) 2 NbV (3019) 3 NbV (3020) (2912) (3100) 4 NbV 5 NbV (3353) 6 NbV
Axial Bearings - Adjustable by Shims
Adjusting the Axial Bearing The adjustment of dimension (A) is obtained by means of an insert positioned between the main body of the bearing and the housing of the side guide roller. Washers with 0.5 + 1.0mm thickness are available if required.
Part No.
D mm.
T mm.
d -0.05 mm.
H* mm.
h* mm.
B mm.
A mm.
S mm.
4.072 4.073 4.074 4.075 4.076 4.077 4.078 4.0784 4.079 4.080
62.5 70.1 78.1 77.7
42 48 54 54 59 67 71 71 80 103
30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60
43.0 48.0 50.5 45.0 61.0 50.5 58.5 69.0 75.5 89.0
33.0 40.0 39.5 34.0 48.0 37.5 44.5 55.0 59.5 69.0
20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 45
5.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 15.0
16 16 21 21 21 21 33 33 33 50
Part No.
88.4
101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0
FR KN
4.072 9.40 4.073 11.30 4.074 11.72 4.075 4.076 20.47 4.077 4.078 4.0784 21.68 4.079 30.92 4.080 37.81
FA KN
C KN
31.0 3.10 (8.59) 3.73 (2.86) 45.5 48.0 3.87 (8.92) (2.97) 48.0 (15.57) 6.76 (5.19) 68.0 (15.47) (5.15) 73.0 (16.49) (5.49) 81.0 81.0 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 (7.84) 110.0 151.0 17.80
COKN 35,5 51,0 56,8 56,8 72,0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0
CA KN C OAKN rpm max. 8 14 14 14 15 18 31 31 35 68
8 14 14 14 15 19 36 36 38 71
900 800 700 700 600 600 500 500 500 400
Weight kg 0.56 0.85 1.02 0.92 1.69 1.85 2.38 2.80 4.08 6.70
See pg 415 for Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6
C = Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), CA = Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), C OA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), FR = Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, FA = Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile. * Dimension H and h without washers, max. + 2mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.
432
AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q AP3
AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q
r mm. 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 5
see pg 416-418 for Standard Profiles 0 NbV 1 NbV (3018) 2 NbV (3019) 3 NbV (3020) (2912) (3100) 4 NbV 5 NbV (3353) 6 NbV
Fitting Flange Plates
Axial Bearing Fixed see pg 430
Axial Bearing Eccentric Adjustable See pg 431
Axial Bearing adjustable by shines See pg 432
“h” dimension please see Standard Profile specifications pages 434-436
Type AP AP AP AP AP AP AP
S 0 1 2 3.1 4 6
A
B
C
D
E
ØF
G
ØH
t
90 100 120 120 160 180 200
50 60 80 80 100 120 150
30 40 50 50 60 80 100
40 40 50 50 60 80 100
70 80 90 90 120 140 160
8.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 17.0 17.0 17.0
M8 M10 M12 M12 M16 M16 M16
30 30 35 40 45 60 60
10 10 15 15 20 20 20
Flange Plates Square Series AP-Q on request
0.5mm Washer
1.0mm Washer
DS-S-1.0 DS-S-0.5 DS-0-1.0 DS-0-0.5 DS-1-1.0 DS-1-0.5 DS-2-1.0 DS-2-0.5 DS-3.1-0.5 DS-3.1-1.0 DS-4-1.0 DS-4-0.5 DS-6-1.0 DS-6-0.5
Profiles see pg 434-436
All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
433
Standard Profile
Weight kg
S 0 1 2 3 4 6
0.25 0.35 0.9 0.85 2.35 2.65 4.0
Standard Profiles Standard NbV-profiles All profiles from Standard 0 on are made from highquality steel UNI FE 510.C Nb, in sandblasted version. L max = 12 m. With our Combined Bearing system, we deliver most sizes of profiles in fixed lengths, immediately from stock. All profiles are available in fine straightened style on request. Higher load capacity with new NbV-series. Profiles Standard A and Standard S are manufactured in steel in UNI FE 360B
Standard A Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
2.62 kg 4.38 cm3 1.07 cm3 0.31 cm 0.78 cm 10.6 cm4 1.73 cm4 0.05 cm
L max = 6 m
Standard S Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
5.3 kg 11.9 cm3 2.5 cm3 2.4 cm 0.94 cm 38.8 cm4 5.2 cm4 0.8 cm
L max = 8 m
Notice: The straightness for fine straightened profiles is Âą 0.3 mm per meter. Standard Âą1.0 per meter All specifications are subject to change without notice.
434
Standard Profiles Standard 0 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
10.5 kg 32 6 3.2 1.3 137 15 1.0
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m
Standard 1 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
14.8 kg 53 11 3.8 1.5 273 27 1.2
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m
Standard 2 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
20.9 kg 81 15 4.3 1.5 493 38 1.2
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m
Standard 3 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
28.6 kg 128 27 4.8 2.0 865 89 1.5
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm
L max = 12 m All specifications are subject to change without notice.
435
Standard Profiles Standard 4 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
36.0 kg
190 39 5.7 2.2 1494 150 1.8
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm
L max = 12 m
Standard 5 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
42.8 kg
250 48 6.3 1.9 2185 205 1.9
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm
L max = 12 m
Standard 6 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:
52.3 kg
340 57 7.1 2.0 3423 270 2.0
cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm
L max = 12 m All specifications are subject to change without notice.
436
Halogen Work Lamps The HS Series The entire unit is extruded from aluminium - anode treated for scratch resistance, and weighs 50% less than other equivalent models. The elbow and base are made of engineering plastic which is durable, resistant to electric shocks and high temperatures, and are absolutely insulated, giving maximum safety without electric leakage interfering with machine control circuits, or elastic fatigue resulting in head deflection. The 12 position base swivel is constructed of steel ball and spring, permitting positive and convenient adjustment to any lighting direction.
Features • Water and oil resistant • Efficient heat dispersal • Designed with user in mind • Separately mounted switches • Easy bulb replacement
HSN
HS22
HS23
HS35 Part Number Volt
HSN
HS22
HS23
HS35
12
12
12
12
Watt
55
55
50
55
IP
65
65
65
65
Combined length of arm Transformer
85mm
495mm
600mm
792mm
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Transformer TS12/50C 437
Halogen Work Lamps The SL Series The SL Series of halogen work lamps feature a concentrated light source providing high intensity and high efficiency lighting. The base and shade are made of black engineering plastic, being durable and well resistant to electric leakage and high temperatures. The units are compact in design for space saving. The SL40 has a flexible gooseneck arm which is easily set to any lighting area, making it especially ideal for lighting on medium duty machinery, office, studio or house lighting applications. Optional Magnetic Bases allow quick and easy relocation of the whole lamp.
SLN
SL40
Mounting Bracket SL-MB
Magnetic Base SL-MAG
Part Number
SLN
SL40
Volt
12
12
Watt
20
50
IP
54
54
Length of arm
126mm
465mm
Transformer
Optional
Optional
Magnetic Base
Optional
Optional
Mounting Bracket
Optional
Optional
Transformer TS12/50C 438
Terms and Conditions 1.
INTERPRETATION: In these terms and conditions unless the context otherwise requires: (a) 'T.E.A.' means T.E.A. Transmissions Pty. Ltd.; (b) 'The Customer' means the person (including his successors and assigns) acquiring goods from T.E.A.: (c) 'goods' means all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer; (d) 'supply' when used as a verb includes supply (including resupply) by way of sale; (e) 'person' includes corporation, firm and unincorporated association; (f) â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;corporation' includes person, firm and unincorporated association; (g) any gender imports the other genders; (h) the singular includes the plural and vice versa. Clause headings used herein are for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing these terms and conditions.
2. OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE: 2.1 These terms and conditions shall apply to the supply of goods by T.E.A. to the Customer where: (a) the Customer places an order for the goods which either contains no terms and conditions of supply or contains terms and conditions identical to those contained herein; and (b) T.E.A. accepts such order. 2.2 No contract for the supply of goods shall exist between T.E.A. and the Customer except upon these terms and conditions. Any order placed by the Customer for goods embodying terms inconsistent with these terms and conditions of supply shall be incapable of acceptance by T.E.A. Where the Customer places an order for goods which contain terms and conditions at variance with these, any subsequent delivery of the ordered goods to the Customer shall be construed as a counter offer to supply them on the terms and conditions contained herein. Such counter offer shall be deemed to be accepted by the Customer be acceptance of the goods when delivered. 2.3 T.E.A. reserves the right to accept in whole or in part any order by the Customer or to decline any such order. Any order or part order not accepted is deemed cancelled. 2.4 The giving of a quotation by T.E.A. shall be construed as an invitation to the Customer to make an offer based on such quotation. Such an order shall not create a contract between the Customer and T.E.A. 2.5 All telephone orders should be confirmed in writing by the customer. 2.6 Unless otherwise stated in a quotation, if the Customer does not place an order based on the quotation within thirty (30) days after the date of the quotation, the quotation shall be deemed to have been withdrawn by T.E.A. 2.7 Every order, or alteration to an order, requires the written confirmation of T.E.A. to be effective in law. 3. PRICES: 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. in writing, the price for goods shall be that ruling at the date of delivery thereof, notwithstanding that delivery may be delayed by agreement or otherwise. 3.2 Subject to clause 3.1 prices shall be subject to alteration by T.E.A. without notice to the Customer. 3.3 Except as otherwise stated in writing by T.E.A. prices shall be exclusive of sales tax and delivery charges. 3.4 Where a price is stated in writing by T.E.A. to be inclusive of sales tax, any increase in sales tax between the date the price is stated and the date of delivery of goods which are the subject of the sales tax, shall be for the account of the Customer. 4. PAYMENT: 4.1 When the Customer opens an account with T.E.A. the Customer may be required to nominate referees or guarantors prior to credit trading being approved. 4.2 A minimum invoice charge may apply to the supply of goods on credit. 4.3 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. payment for goods shall be made directly to T.E.A. only, and not to any representatives, agents, carriers or sub-contractors. 4.4 If the customer fails to comply with T.E.A.'s terms of payment, T.E.A. may forthwith discontinue supply of further goods to the Customer, and T.E.A. may without notice charge interest at the prime rate prevailing at the date of delivery of the goods. 4.5 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 4.4, T.E.A. may, at the time of any particular delivery of goods, require payment therefore in advance of delivery. 5. DELIVERY AND RETURN OF GOODS: 5.1 The customer shall bear all delivery charges for delivery of goods to the Customer's premises and all risks shall pass to the Customer at the time of dispatch. If the goods are ready for dispatch but the taking of delivery is delayed for reasons for which T.E.A. is not responsible, the risk passes to the Customer at the time that the Customer receives notification that the goods are ready for dispatch. 5.2 Where, in order to deliver or collect goods, T.E.A. or its carrier enters upon the Customer's premises, the Customer shall provide full and safe access to T.E.A. or its carrier and shall be liable for, and indemnify T.E.A. against the cost of all loss, damage to property and injury to persons, occurring directly as a result of the failure by the Customer to ensure the said full and safe access. 5.3 The customer shall be responsible for providing adequate labour and/or materials-handling equipment for the loading and unloading of goods at its premises. 5.4 There shall be no return of defective goods to T.E.A. unless the Customer notifies T.E.A. within seven(7) days of the Customer's receipt of such goods. Any claims after this period for return or compensation in respect of such defective goods are expressly excluded. 5.5 Where T.E.A. agrees to collect goods from the Customers premises, the Customer shall ensure that such goods are all available for collection at an easily accessible central point and that they are ready for loading at the time T.E.A. arrives to collect them. 5.6 Where the Customer returns goods to T.E.A. other than by T.E.A.'s vehicles, T.E.A. shall be informed in advance of the details of such returns, including details of goods and the date and method of return thereof. The Customer shall label goods with the name and address of the Customer. 5.7 Whenever goods are returned to T.E.A., the Customer shall ensure that they are returned in a safe condition, both from the point of view of risk to persons handling them and in their vicinity and from the point of view of the risk of damage to the goods themselves. 5.8 Where goods are transported by T.E.A. to the Customer's premises, delivery shall be deemed to take place at the moment that the goods pass over the side of the vehicle on or in which they were transported to the Customer's premises. 5.9 In the event that goods are returned to T.E.A. there shall be no refund of the costs of the packing material and labour used to pack such goods when delivered to the Customer and T.E.A. shall not be liable for any packing costs incurred in the return of the goods to T.E.A 5.10 Delivery dates proposed by T.E.A. shall not be binding on T.E.A.. T.E.A. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions in delivery of goods by any carrier or sub-contractor. In such event the Customer has no right of withdrawal from the contract. 6. PASSING OF TITLE AND RISK: 6.1 All property and title of goods sold by T.E.A. to the Customer, together with all risks in respect
of such goods, shall pass to the Customer upon delivery of the goods, subject to T.E.A.'s right to reclaim ownership of any goods supplied until any outstanding monies whatsoever owed by the Customer to T.E.A. have been paid in full. 6.2 In the event of attachment, seizure or restraint, by any party, of goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer, the Customer agrees to inform T.E.A. immediately upon the occurrence of such event. Any such attachment, seizure or restraint shall not affect T.E.A.'s title to goods nor rights herein. Any goods delivered to the Customer shall not be used as security nor encumbered in any manner. 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: 7.1 All technical information (including drawings, specifications, catalogues, illustrations and particulars of dimensions and weight) supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer is approximate only and shall not be binding by T.E.A. 7.2 All technical information supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer shall be treated by the Customer as confidential and the Customer shall not communicate such information to third persons without the written consent of T.E.A. No such information or materials shall be reproduced nor given to third parties. T.E.A. reserves the right to make alterations to the design, dimensions and weights of its goods. 7.3 Catalogues, photographs, samples and price lists remain the property of T.E.A. and shall be returned on demand. 8.
FORCE MAJEURE: If the performance or observance by T.E.A. of its obligations (or any of them) is prevented, restricted or interfered with by reason of any cause or causes beyond the reasonable control of T.E.A., T.E.A. shall, upon prompt notice of such cause or causes being given to the Customer, be excused from such performance or observation to the extent of such prevention, restriction or interference, provided that T.E.A. shall use its best efforts to avoid or remove the cause or causes of non-performance and observance.
9. LIABILITY: 9.1 The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth) as amended and similar States and Territories legislation relating to the supply of goods protects consumers' interest by ensuring that consumers are entitled in certain situations to the benefits of various conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies (including warranties as to merchantability and fitness for purpose) associated with the supply of goods. 9.2 A consumer should seek legal advice as to the nature and extent of these protected interests. In some circumstances the supplier of goods may legally stipulate that the said conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies are limited or entirely excluded. 9.3 The warranties set out in Clause 9.2 shall be additional to any non-excludable warranties to which the Customer may be entitled pursuant to any statute. 9.4 Subject to Clause 9.3, T.E.A. gives the following warranties to the Customer: (A) Insofar as they are manufactured or imported by T.E.A. goods will upon delivery be of merchantable quality and reasonably fit for the purpose or purposes for which they are supplied by T.E.A; (B) T.E.A. will repair or, at its option, replace those goods which upon examination are found by T.E.A. to be defective in workmanship and/or materials. 9.5 In its application to goods, the warranty in Clause 9.2: (A) is conditional upon the Customer notifying T.E.A. in writing of its claim within seven (7) days of becoming aware of the basis thereof, and at its own expense returning the goods which are the subject of the claim to T.E.A., and (B) does not apply to: (I) components not of T.E.A. manufacturer, which are contained in the goods, and (II) obsolete goods sold at auction, second-hand goods and prototype goods. 9.6 T.E.A. hereby declares that to the extent permitted by law, it hereby limits its liability in respect of the supply of goods which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption to anyone or more of the following (the choice of which shall be at the option of T.E.A.): (A) the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods; (B) the repair of the goods; (C) the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods; or (D) the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired. 9.7 Except as provided in Clause 9.2 to 9.4 above, to the extent permitted by statute, T.E.A. hereby excludes all liability for any loss, damage, death or injury of any kind whatsoever occasioned to the Customer and/or any third parties in respect of the supply of goods including direct, indirect, consequential or incidental loss, damage or injury of any kind. The Customer indemnifies and keeps indemnified T.E.A. against any loss, damage, claim, cost or demand sustained or made against T.E.A. by any person arising out of the supply of goods herein. 9.8 T.E.A. accepts no liability for loss of or damage to drawings, models, samples, etc. sent to us by the Customer. 10. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION: These terms and conditions and the contract evidenced thereby shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws from time to time of the State or Territory in which delivery of the goods takes place and T.E.A. and the Customer hereby submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of the said State or Territory. 11. LIENS: In addition to any lien to which T.E.A. may be entitled by statute or the common law, T.E.A. shall in the event of the Customer's Insolvency, bankruptcy or winding up, be thereupon entitled to a general lien on all property whatsoever owned by the Customer and in the possession of T.E.A. at the time, such lien to cover the unpaid price of any goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer. 12. WAIVERS: Failure by T.E.A. to insist on strict performance by the Customer of any terms and conditions contained herein shall not be taken to be a waiver of any rights of T.E.A. in relation thereto and in any event shall not be taken to be a waiver of the same terms and conditions on any subsequent occasion. 13. LICENSES AND PERMITS: It shall be the responsibility of the Customer to obtain, in relation to all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer, all licenses and permits needed under any relevant statute, ordinance or related rule or regulation. 14 NOTICES: Notices to T.E.A. shall be hand-delivered or transmitted by pre-paid registered post to the address of T.E.A. No notice to T.E.A. shall be taken to have been given until it is actually received by T.E.A.
Terms and Conditions 1.
INTERPRETATION: In these terms and conditions unless the context otherwise requires: (a) 'T.E.A.' means T.E.A. Transmissions Pty. Ltd.; (b) 'The Customer' means the person (including his successors and assigns) acquiring goods from T.E.A.: (c) 'goods' means all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer; (d) 'supply' when used as a verb includes supply (including resupply) by way of sale; (e) 'person' includes corporation, firm and unincorporated association; (f) â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;corporation' includes person, firm and unincorporated association; (g) any gender imports the other genders; (h) the singular includes the plural and vice versa. Clause headings used herein are for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing these terms and conditions.
2. OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE: 2.1 These terms and conditions shall apply to the supply of goods by T.E.A. to the Customer where: (a) the Customer places an order for the goods which either contains no terms and conditions of supply or contains terms and conditions identical to those contained herein; and (b) T.E.A. accepts such order. 2.2 No contract for the supply of goods shall exist between T.E.A. and the Customer except upon these terms and conditions. Any order placed by the Customer for goods embodying terms inconsistent with these terms and conditions of supply shall be incapable of acceptance by T.E.A. Where the Customer places an order for goods which contain terms and conditions at variance with these, any subsequent delivery of the ordered goods to the Customer shall be construed as a counter offer to supply them on the terms and conditions contained herein. Such counter offer shall be deemed to be accepted by the Customer be acceptance of the goods when delivered. 2.3 T.E.A. reserves the right to accept in whole or in part any order by the Customer or to decline any such order. Any order or part order not accepted is deemed cancelled. 2.4 The giving of a quotation by T.E.A. shall be construed as an invitation to the Customer to make an offer based on such quotation. Such an order shall not create a contract between the Customer and T.E.A. 2.5 All telephone orders should be confirmed in writing by the customer. 2.6 Unless otherwise stated in a quotation, if the Customer does not place an order based on the quotation within thirty (30) days after the date of the quotation, the quotation shall be deemed to have been withdrawn by T.E.A. 2.7 Every order, or alteration to an order, requires the written confirmation of T.E.A. to be effective in law. 3. PRICES: 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. in writing, the price for goods shall be that ruling at the date of delivery thereof, notwithstanding that delivery may be delayed by agreement or otherwise. 3.2 Subject to clause 3.1 prices shall be subject to alteration by T.E.A. without notice to the Customer. 3.3 Except as otherwise stated in writing by T.E.A. prices shall be exclusive of sales tax and delivery charges. 3.4 Where a price is stated in writing by T.E.A. to be inclusive of sales tax, any increase in sales tax between the date the price is stated and the date of delivery of goods which are the subject of the sales tax, shall be for the account of the Customer. 4. PAYMENT: 4.1 When the Customer opens an account with T.E.A. the Customer may be required to nominate referees or guarantors prior to credit trading being approved. 4.2 A minimum invoice charge may apply to the supply of goods on credit. 4.3 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. payment for goods shall be made directly to T.E.A. only, and not to any representatives, agents, carriers or sub-contractors. 4.4 If the customer fails to comply with T.E.A.'s terms of payment, T.E.A. may forthwith discontinue supply of further goods to the Customer, and T.E.A. may without notice charge interest at the prime rate prevailing at the date of delivery of the goods. 4.5 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 4.4, T.E.A. may, at the time of any particular delivery of goods, require payment therefore in advance of delivery. 5. DELIVERY AND RETURN OF GOODS: 5.1 The customer shall bear all delivery charges for delivery of goods to the Customer's premises and all risks shall pass to the Customer at the time of dispatch. If the goods are ready for dispatch but the taking of delivery is delayed for reasons for which T.E.A. is not responsible, the risk passes to the Customer at the time that the Customer receives notification that the goods are ready for dispatch. 5.2 Where, in order to deliver or collect goods, T.E.A. or its carrier enters upon the Customer's premises, the Customer shall provide full and safe access to T.E.A. or its carrier and shall be liable for, and indemnify T.E.A. against the cost of all loss, damage to property and injury to persons, occurring directly as a result of the failure by the Customer to ensure the said full and safe access. 5.3 The customer shall be responsible for providing adequate labour and/or materials-handling equipment for the loading and unloading of goods at its premises. 5.4 There shall be no return of defective goods to T.E.A. unless the Customer notifies T.E.A. within seven(7) days of the Customer's receipt of such goods. Any claims after this period for return or compensation in respect of such defective goods are expressly excluded. 5.5 Where T.E.A. agrees to collect goods from the Customers premises, the Customer shall ensure that such goods are all available for collection at an easily accessible central point and that they are ready for loading at the time T.E.A. arrives to collect them. 5.6 Where the Customer returns goods to T.E.A. other than by T.E.A.'s vehicles, T.E.A. shall be informed in advance of the details of such returns, including details of goods and the date and method of return thereof. The Customer shall label goods with the name and address of the Customer. 5.7 Whenever goods are returned to T.E.A., the Customer shall ensure that they are returned in a safe condition, both from the point of view of risk to persons handling them and in their vicinity and from the point of view of the risk of damage to the goods themselves. 5.8 Where goods are transported by T.E.A. to the Customer's premises, delivery shall be deemed to take place at the moment that the goods pass over the side of the vehicle on or in which they were transported to the Customer's premises. 5.9 In the event that goods are returned to T.E.A. there shall be no refund of the costs of the packing material and labour used to pack such goods when delivered to the Customer and T.E.A. shall not be liable for any packing costs incurred in the return of the goods to T.E.A 5.10 Delivery dates proposed by T.E.A. shall not be binding on T.E.A.. T.E.A. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions in delivery of goods by any carrier or sub-contractor. In such event the Customer has no right of withdrawal from the contract. 6. PASSING OF TITLE AND RISK: 6.1 All property and title of goods sold by T.E.A. to the Customer, together with all risks in respect
of such goods, shall pass to the Customer upon delivery of the goods, subject to T.E.A.'s right to reclaim ownership of any goods supplied until any outstanding monies whatsoever owed by the Customer to T.E.A. have been paid in full. 6.2 In the event of attachment, seizure or restraint, by any party, of goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer, the Customer agrees to inform T.E.A. immediately upon the occurrence of such event. Any such attachment, seizure or restraint shall not affect T.E.A.'s title to goods nor rights herein. Any goods delivered to the Customer shall not be used as security nor encumbered in any manner. 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: 7.1 All technical information (including drawings, specifications, catalogues, illustrations and particulars of dimensions and weight) supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer is approximate only and shall not be binding by T.E.A. 7.2 All technical information supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer shall be treated by the Customer as confidential and the Customer shall not communicate such information to third persons without the written consent of T.E.A. No such information or materials shall be reproduced nor given to third parties. T.E.A. reserves the right to make alterations to the design, dimensions and weights of its goods. 7.3 Catalogues, photographs, samples and price lists remain the property of T.E.A. and shall be returned on demand. 8.
FORCE MAJEURE: If the performance or observance by T.E.A. of its obligations (or any of them) is prevented, restricted or interfered with by reason of any cause or causes beyond the reasonable control of T.E.A., T.E.A. shall, upon prompt notice of such cause or causes being given to the Customer, be excused from such performance or observation to the extent of such prevention, restriction or interference, provided that T.E.A. shall use its best efforts to avoid or remove the cause or causes of non-performance and observance.
9. LIABILITY: 9.1 The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth) as amended and similar States and Territories legislation relating to the supply of goods protects consumers' interest by ensuring that consumers are entitled in certain situations to the benefits of various conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies (including warranties as to merchantability and fitness for purpose) associated with the supply of goods. 9.2 A consumer should seek legal advice as to the nature and extent of these protected interests. In some circumstances the supplier of goods may legally stipulate that the said conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies are limited or entirely excluded. 9.3 The warranties set out in Clause 9.2 shall be additional to any non-excludable warranties to which the Customer may be entitled pursuant to any statute. 9.4 Subject to Clause 9.3, T.E.A. gives the following warranties to the Customer: (A) Insofar as they are manufactured or imported by T.E.A. goods will upon delivery be of merchantable quality and reasonably fit for the purpose or purposes for which they are supplied by T.E.A; (B) T.E.A. will repair or, at its option, replace those goods which upon examination are found by T.E.A. to be defective in workmanship and/or materials. 9.5 In its application to goods, the warranty in Clause 9.2: (A) is conditional upon the Customer notifying T.E.A. in writing of its claim within seven (7) days of becoming aware of the basis thereof, and at its own expense returning the goods which are the subject of the claim to T.E.A., and (B) does not apply to: (I) components not of T.E.A. manufacturer, which are contained in the goods, and (II) obsolete goods sold at auction, second-hand goods and prototype goods. 9.6 T.E.A. hereby declares that to the extent permitted by law, it hereby limits its liability in respect of the supply of goods which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption to anyone or more of the following (the choice of which shall be at the option of T.E.A.): (A) the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods; (B) the repair of the goods; (C) the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods; or (D) the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired. 9.7 Except as provided in Clause 9.2 to 9.4 above, to the extent permitted by statute, T.E.A. hereby excludes all liability for any loss, damage, death or injury of any kind whatsoever occasioned to the Customer and/or any third parties in respect of the supply of goods including direct, indirect, consequential or incidental loss, damage or injury of any kind. The Customer indemnifies and keeps indemnified T.E.A. against any loss, damage, claim, cost or demand sustained or made against T.E.A. by any person arising out of the supply of goods herein. 9.8 T.E.A. accepts no liability for loss of or damage to drawings, models, samples, etc. sent to us by the Customer. 10. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION: These terms and conditions and the contract evidenced thereby shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws from time to time of the State or Territory in which delivery of the goods takes place and T.E.A. and the Customer hereby submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of the said State or Territory. 11. LIENS: In addition to any lien to which T.E.A. may be entitled by statute or the common law, T.E.A. shall in the event of the Customer's Insolvency, bankruptcy or winding up, be thereupon entitled to a general lien on all property whatsoever owned by the Customer and in the possession of T.E.A. at the time, such lien to cover the unpaid price of any goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer. 12. WAIVERS: Failure by T.E.A. to insist on strict performance by the Customer of any terms and conditions contained herein shall not be taken to be a waiver of any rights of T.E.A. in relation thereto and in any event shall not be taken to be a waiver of the same terms and conditions on any subsequent occasion. 13. LICENSES AND PERMITS: It shall be the responsibility of the Customer to obtain, in relation to all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer, all licenses and permits needed under any relevant statute, ordinance or related rule or regulation. 14 NOTICES: Notices to T.E.A. shall be hand-delivered or transmitted by pre-paid registered post to the address of T.E.A. No notice to T.E.A. shall be taken to have been given until it is actually received by T.E.A.